Volume 3 - Div 9 - 21 PDF

BAR
RWA FIN
NANCIA
AL DISTR
RICT
CON
NSTRUC
CTION DOCUME
ENTS
MAIN CONTRACT
T WORK
KS
BID PA
ACK 5 (ISSU
UED FOR CONSTRU
UCTION)
Docum
ment III Techniccal Speciification
Volume
e 3 Div 09 21
JUNE
J
2011
1
BP5 SPECIFICATION - SCHEDULE OF CHANGES

DATE
SECTION
Volume 2.2
07 8700
08 7100
DECRIPTION
REVISION
SUBMISSION
Smoke Curtains
Door Hardware
New Section Added (C0)

Section has been amended & is reissued as Revision (C1)
Volume 3
17-10-2010 13 1200
WATER FEATURES
RFI 860
23-03-2010 14 2100
Electric Traction Elevators
RFI 348
16-12-2010 14 3100
Escalators
RFI 341
Volume 4.2
23 1113
FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
23 2123
HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 3300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 3413
AXIAL HVAC FANS
23 3600
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 5700
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
23 7313
AIR HANDLING UNITS
23 8126
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
23 8219
FAN COIL UNITS

Jan-2011
10/9/2009
QCD Changes
BP5 IFC
05-05-2011 23 6416
Centrifugal Water Chillers
Volume 5.1
03-10-2010 26 0900
Lighting Control System
RFI 843
31-01-2010 26 1300
High Voltage Switchgear (11KV)
BP5 IFC
12-10-2010 26 2413
Switch Boards
BP5 Value Engg.
30-12-2010 26 5600
Lighting Cut Sheets
QCD Changes
Appendix F Smoke Control System Narrative Section has been amended & is reReport
issued as Revision (C2)
QCD Changes
QP Changes
Volume 11
13-03-2011
Barwa Financial District

BP5 Specification
Schedule of Changes
INDEX
DOCUMENT III - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 1
DIVISON 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (under separate cover)
VOLUME 2.1
DIVISION 2
SECTION
EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 3000
DIVISION 3
SECTION
CONCRETE
03 1000
03 3000
03 3713
03 3800
03 4100
03 4800
03 4900
03 5200
03 5300
03 5416
03 5419
03 6000
03 9000
DIVISION 4
SECTION
FORMWORK
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
SHOTCRETE
POST TENSIONED CONCRETE
PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC)
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
CONCRETE TOPPING
SELF LEVELING SCREED
SAND CEMENT SCREED
GROUTING
TESTING OF WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES
MASONRY
04 2170
04 2200
04 2219
04 4200
DIVISION 5
SECTION
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
TERRACOTTA WALL PANELS

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
LIGHT WEIGHT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING
METALS
05 1200
05 3100
05 5000
05 5100
05 5213
05 7113
05 7313
05 7500
DIVISION 6
KEO/9404
March 2011
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

STEEL DECKING
METAL FABRICATIONS
METAL STAIRS
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
FABRICATED METAL SPIRAL STAIRS
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
WOOD AND PLASTICS
INDEX/1
SECTION
06 1000
06 4000
06 6116
06 6810
ROUGH CARPENTRY
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS
WOOD COMPOSITE PANELS
VOLUME 2.2
DIVISION 7
SECTION
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 1113
07 1352
07 1354
07 1416
07 1613
07 1800
07 1900
07 2100
07 2500
07 3216
07 4243
07 5200
07 5563
07 6200
07 7233
07 8400
*07 8700
07 9200
07 9500
DIVISION 8
SECTION
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing
THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
COLD FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING
TRAFFIC COATINGS
WATER REPELLENTS
BUILDING INSULATION
WEATHER BARRIER
ROOF PAVERS
COMPOSITE METAL PANELS
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
VEGETATED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
ROOF HATCHES
FIRESTOPPING
SMOKE CURTAINS
JOINT SEALANTS
EXPANSION JOINTS
DOORS AND WINDOWS
08 1113
08 1400
08 3113
08 3323.16
08 3326
08 4000
08 4229.23
08 4233
08 4413
08 4414.13
08 4423
08 4433
08 6300
*08 7100
08 8000
08 8113
KEO/9404
March 2011
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

WOOD DOORS
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
ALUMINUM WORKS
SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES
GLAZED ALULMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
GLAZED STEEL CURTAIN WALLS
POINT SUPPORT STRUCTURAL GLASS WALL SYSTEM
BONDED GLASS FIN STRUCTURAL GLASS WALL SYSTEM
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
DOOR HARDWARE
GLAZING
DECORATIVE GLASS
INDEX/2
08 8414
08 9000
POLYMER PANEL CLADDING

LOUVERS
VOLUME 3
DIVISION 9
SECTION
FINISHES
09 2116
09 2400
09 2519
09 2713
09 3013
09 5126
09 5133
09 5134
09 5200
09 5443
09 6340
09 6513
09 6536
09 6723.13
09 6816
09 6900
09 7500
09 7733
09 9100
09 9200
09 9646
DIVISION 10
SECTION
SPECIALTIES
10 1453
10 1805
10 2113
10 2600
10 2813
10 4413
10 4416
10 7316
10 7317
10 7318
DIVISION 11
SECTION
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
POLISHED PLASTER
GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED GYPSUM (GRG) FABRICATIONS
CERAMIC TILING
GYPSUM PANEL CEILINGS
ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS
METAL CEILINGS
GYPSUM BOARD SUSPENDED CEILING
PVC STRETCHED CELING
STONE FLOORING
RESILIENT BASE
STATIC CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
EPOXY FLOORING
SHEET CARPETING
ACCESS FLOORING
STONE FACING
METAL PANELING
PAINTING
EXPOSED STEEL PAINTING
INTUMESCENT PAINTING
TRAFFIC SIGNS AND MARKINGS

INTERNET BOOTH
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
WALL GUARDS
TOILET ACCESSORIES
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
CANOPIES
GLASS ARBOR
TRELLIS
EQUIPMENTS
11 1200
11 1220
11 1300
11 1400
KEO/9404
March 2011
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

VEHICLE BARRIERS
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
PEDESTRIAN CONTROL EQUIPMENT
INDEX/3
11 2410
11 2600
11 9401
11 9402
11 9403
DIVISION 12
SECTION
FURNISHINGS
12 4813
DIVISION 13
SECTION
*13 1200
13 1200.12
WATER FEATURES
FOUNTAINS
CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
*14 2100
*14 3100
14 9182
14 9200
DIVISION 21
SECTION
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS

SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 14
SECTION
FAADE CLEANING SYSTEMS

UNIT KITCHENS
CRANES
SCISSOR LIFT
HOIST
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

ESCALATORS
GARBAGE CHUTES
AUTOMATED SOLID WASTE COLLECTION SYSTEM
FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0500
21 0513
21 0548
21 0700
21 1000
21 2200
21 3000
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

COMMON MOTOR RQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
EQUIPMENT
VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS INSULATION
WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHER SYSTEM
FIRE PUMPS
VOLUME 4.1
DIVISION 22
SECTION
PLUMBING
22 0500
22 0513
22 0516
22 0519
22 0523
22 0529
22 0548
22 0553
KEO/9404
March 2011
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
EXPANSION FITTNG AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUPMENT
INDEX/4
22 0600
22 0700
22 1116
22 1119
22 1200
22 1300
22 1319
22 4000
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PLUMBING INSULATION
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
FACILITY GROUND MOUNTED POTABLE WATER STORAGE
TANKS
SANITARY WATER AND VENT PIPING & STORM WATER PIPING
SANITARY, STORM AND WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PLUMBING FIXTURES
VOLUME 4.2
DIVISION 23
SECTION
HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 0100
23 0500
23 0513
23 0516
23 0519
23 0523
23 0529
23 0548
23 0553
23 0593
23 0700
23 0800
23 0900
23 0993
*23 1113
23 2113
*23 2123
23 2300
23 2500
23 3113
23 3116
*23 3300
*23 3413
23 3416
*23 3600
23 3713
23 4100
*23 5700
*23 6416
23 6417
23 6500
*23 7313
KEO/9404
March 2011
HVAC SYSTEM GENERAL DESCRIPTION

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENT FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT.
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING.
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING.
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
VIBRATION & SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.
HVAC INSULATION.
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS.
FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING.
HYDRONIC PIPING PING AND VALVE (BS).
HYDRONIC PUMPS
REFRIGERANT PIPING.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT.
METAL DUCTS.
NON-METAL DUCTS
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES.
AXIAL HVAC FANS.
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES.
PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION.
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC.
CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS.
CHILLER SYSTEM MANANGEMENT
COOLING TOWERS.
AIR HANDLING UNITS.
INDEX/5
23 7413
*23 8126
23 8216
*23 8219
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING

UNITS.
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS.
AIR COILS.
FAN COIL UNITS.
VOLUME 5.1
DIVISION 25
SECTION
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
25 0900
25 0900
25 0900
25 0900
25 5000
DIVISION 26
SECTION
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

BAS POINT SCHEDULES ELECTRICAL
BAS POINT SCHEDULES PLUMBING
BAS POINT SCHEDULES - HVAC
INTELLIGENT BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IBMS)
ELECTRICAL
26 0500
26 0513
26 0519
26 0526
26 0529
26 0533
26 0536
26 0553
*26 0900
26 1216
26 1217
*26 1300
26 1301
*26 2413
26 2416
26 2419
26 2500
26 2713
26 2726
26 2923
26 3213
26 3323
26 3353
26 3533
26 3600
26 4113
26 5100
KEO/9404
March 2011
COMMON REQUIREMENT FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLES
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
DRY-TYPE HIGH VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS (11 to
0.433 kV)
DRY-TYPE HIGH-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS (11 to
3.3 kV)
HIGH-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR (11 kV)
HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR (3.3 Kv)
SWITCHBOARDS
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
BUS BAR TRUNKING SYSTEM
METERING SYSTEM
WIRING DEVICES
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
ENGINE GENERATORS
CENTRAL BATTERY BASED EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM
STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
TRANSFER SWITCHES
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
INTERIOR LIGHTING
INDEX/6
26 5336
*26 5600
OBSTRUCTION LIGHTING
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
LIGHTING CUTSHEETS - IFC
VOLUME 5.2
DIVISION 27
SECTION
COMMUNICATIONS
27 0500
27 1100
27 1300
27 1500
27 2000
27 3000
27 5116
27 5117
DIVISION 28
SECTION
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 1300
28 2300
28 3100
DIVISION 31
SECTION
SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (SMS) SECURITY AND

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (SMS) - VIDEO
SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM
FIRE DETECTION & ALARM SYSTEM
EARTHWORK
31 2000
31 2300.1
31 2313
31 2319
31 3116
31 5000
31 6300
DIVISION 32
SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

COOMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTING
COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
VOICE COMMUNICATIONS
BACKGROUND MUSIC DIGITAL INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEM
SOUND SYSTEM
EARTHWORKS
EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR ROADWORKS
SUBGRADE PREPARATION
DEWATERING
TERMITE CONTROL
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION (Info Only)
BORED PILES (Info Only)
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 1116.16
32 1313
32 1440
32 1613.26
32 1613.27
32 1723.10
32 3140
32 3600
32 8400
32 9300
32 9433
32 9448
KEO/9404
March 2011
AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE

CONCRETE PAVING
STONE PAVERS
PRECAST CONCRETE CURBS FOR ROADS
PRECAST CONCRETE CURBS
TRAFFIC SIGNS, MARKINGS AND STUDS FOR ROADS
SITE FURNISHINGS
RISING ROAD BARRIERS
PLANTING IRRIGATION
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
SELF WATERING PLANTERS
GREEN WALL
INDEX/7
DIVISION 33
SECTION
UTILITIES
33 0500
33 1000
33 3000
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITES

WATER UTILITIES
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
VOLUME 6
APPENDIX A GEO TECHNICAL REPORT
VOLUME 7
APPENDIX B ACOUSTIC REPORT
VOLUME 8
APPENDIX C WIND TUNNEL TEST REPORT
VOLUME 9
APPENDIX D LIST OF MANUFACTURERS
VOLUME 10
APPENDIX E PERIMETER SECURITY SYSTEM
VOLUME 11
*APPENDIX F SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEM NARRATIVE REPORT
END OF INDEX
KEO/9404
March 2011
INDEX/8
SECTION 09 2116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment and perform all services and
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of gypsum board
assemblies but not limited to:
1.
Metal stud wall framing and wall furring support.
2.
Gypsum board (to types specified).
3.
Tile backing panels.
4.
Related accessories.
5.
Insulation including acoustical sealants and gaskets.
6.
Skim coat plaster.
B. Refer Appendix B: Acoustic Report for Acoustic requirements of the Project.
1.02
SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data for each type of product specified.

B. Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and
expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, locations of access panels,
details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.
C. Samples:
1.
Board: All kinds, samples 1000 x 1000 mm.
2.
Trim Accessories: Full size samples in 300mm long lengths.
3.
Channels and Studs: Full size samples in 300 mm lengths.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with minimum

five years experience.
B. Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies: For fire resistance rated assemblies, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2116/1
Gypsum Board Assemblies
C. STC Rated Assemblies: For STC rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E
90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
D. Mock-ups: Install mock-ups of a minimum of 15 sq.m. in surface area in an
approved location for each type of application to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and qualities of material and execution.
E. Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
F. Wall Construction shall comply with STC rating indicated in drawings and
Acoustic Reports.
1.04
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical lining system with other

construction that penetrates walls or ceilings or is supported by them, including
light fixtures, HVAC equipment and fire-suppression system.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand

name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against
damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion,
construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to
prevent sagging.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2116/2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. British Gypsum Co.

UK.
B. National Gypsum Co.
Saudi Arabia
C. USG
Dubai, UAE
D. Knauf
Dubai, UAE.
E. Or approved equal.
2.02
GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as

applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
B. Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
C. Gypsum:
1.
Regular Type:
a.
Thickness: 12.7 mm unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
b.
Edges: Tapered and bevelled.
2.
Type X:
a.
Thickness: 16 mm unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
b.
Long edge- tapered and bevelled.
3.
Special Type X: Having improved fire resistance over standard Type X,
and complying with requirements of fire-resistance rated assemblies
indicated in drawings.
a.
Thickness: As required by fire resistance rated assembly indicated
in drawings.
b.
Long Edges: Tapered.
4.
Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM
C 1396/C 1396M
a.
Thickness: 16 mm unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
b.
Long edge- tapered.
2.03
A.
TILE BACKING PANELS

Cement Board (Cementitious Backer Units): ANSI A118.9.
1.
Products:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2116/3
a.
b.
c.
2.
2.04
Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.

USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
Or approved equal.
Thickness: 12.7 mm unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
METAL STUD SYSTEM
A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754.

B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C-645 requirements for metal and
with hot-dip galvanized zinc coating . ASTM A653M - Z180
C. Non-Load bearing steel studs with top and bottom tracks 0.9mm (20 gauge) steel
studs shall be roll formed, and rigid furring channels, conforming to ASTM C-645.
D. Furring Channels: ASTM C-645, flanges not less than 38mm edge to be bent
back 90 degrees and doubled to form a 5mm minimum return, faces knurled and
webs provided with suitable knock-out, pass-through holes. Floor and ceiling
runner channels to be fabricated from same material as studs.
E. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,
holding power and other properties required to fasten steel members to
substrates.
2.05
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that
effectively reduces airbone sound transmission through perimeter joints as
demonstrated by representative assemblies according to ASTM E90.
2.06
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Trim: Comply with ASTM C 1047.

1.
Material: Galvanized steel sheet.
a.
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
b.
LC Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
c.
Expansion (Control) Joint: Provide as indicated.
B. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide
manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated
including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying
with the following requirements:
1.
Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer
and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the
strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with
ASTM B 221/B 221M for alloy and temper 6063-T5, powder coated finish.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2116/4
2.07
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation

standards.
B. Steel Screws
1.
Screws for use with furring channels to ASTM C-1002 to be self-tapping,
type, case hardened, with socketed counter-sunk heads No. 6 (U.S.
gauge) x 25 mm for single layer application.
2.
Screw type types S (for 26 gauge) and G (for gypsum board to gypsum
board framing).
C. Joint treatment materials: Comply with ASTM C 475.
D. Other Materials
1.
Metal corner beads, casing beads and stops shall be for drywall
application, and shall be manufactured from .55 mm (No. 25 U.S. gauge)
galvanized sheet metal with perforated flanges, one piece length per
location where practical.
2.
Tape to be 50 mm wide, perforated type, and approved by manufacturer
of gypsum wallboard products.
3.
Jointing compounds to be either case in vinyl or latex, slow setting,
bedding and finishing compounds of type approved by manufacturer of
gypsum wallboard products. Fast setting joint fillers shall not be used.
4.
Sound seal gaskets for use between top track and suspended ceilings (or
other surfaces) to be a closed cell vinyl foam self-adhering sealant tape
6mm x 25mm wide.
5.
Other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
operable installation of the work in this Section, shall be first quality and to
approval.
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1.
Cementitious Backer Units:
As recommended by backer unit
manufacturer.
F. Sound Attenuation Batt Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100.
G. Expansion (Control) Joints: Provide as indicated or as required.
H. Skim Coat Plaster
1.
PVC accessories including corner beads, edge trims and angle beads, as
required to ASTM D 3678 (Rigid PVC Interior/Exterior extrusions).
2.
Self adhesive alkali resistant fibre glass joint tape as recommended by the
manufacturers.
3.
Acrylic polymer modified plaster, approved by the Engineer and as
recommended by the manufacturers of Gypsum Board in thickness 2/3
mm.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2116/5
2.08
REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American Society for testing and Materials:

1.
ASTM C 36
Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.
2.
ASTM C 475
Specification for Joint Compound and Joint
Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
3.
ASTM C645
Specification for Non-load Bearing Steel
Studs, Runners, and Rigid Furring Channels
for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
4.
ASTM C754
Specifications for Installation of Steel Framing
Members to receive Screw Attached Gypsum
Wallboard.
5.
ASTM C840
Specifications for Application and Finishing of
Gypsum Board.
6.
ASTM C1002
Steel Drill Screws for the Application of
Gypsum board.
7.
ASTM C 1396
Specification for Gypsum Board.
8.
ANSI/ASTM E90
Method for Laboratory Measurement of
Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions.
9.
ANSI/ASTM E119
Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials.
10.
GA-201
(Gypsum Association U.S.A.)- Gypsum Board
for walls and Ceilings.
11.
GA-216
(Gypsum
Association
U.S.A.)
Recommended Specifications for the
Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2116/6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencement ensure that work of other trades is complete to the point
where installation of work under this Section may properly commence.
B. Verify that gypsum board may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes
and regulations, manufacturers' approved recommendations, and the original
design.
C. Discrepancies:
Do not commence installation of system board until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
METAL STUD INSTALLATION
A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to
framing installation.
B. Install runner channels at floor (or top of wall) and ceiling accurately align
according to partition layout.
C. Install steel studs vertically at 400mm to centers indicated on drawings and fix
studs to runners by screwing or crimping.
D. Splice studs where necessary by nesting and lap a minimum of 200mm, fix with
minimum of one (1) screw per stud flange.
E. Where openings occur in metal stud walls, reinforce and frame openings to
adequately carry loads. Studs on each side of openings shall be extended from
the floor to ceiling. Erect track at head (also sills, if required) to accommodate
intermediate studs. At end of each horizontal trim track, cut out flanges, turn up
web and screw to studs. Provide and install double steel studs at door openings,
double steel studs shall be replaced by steel U channel as indicated on drawing
for doors 2600m and higher.
F. Deflection spaces between drywall partitions and the structural framing
components are essential to allow for deflection of the framing components.
Such spaces shall be provided in drywall partitions at top at underside of
structural members, by use of movement joints.
G. Blocking: Nail, wood blocking to studs. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs.
H. Co-ordinate installation of anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work
placed in or behind partition framing.
I. Stiffen stud walls over 2100 mm in height at a maximum 1200mm (or equal
spacing otherwise) with one (1) horizontal 19mm bracing channel wire tied
inside to each metal stud or secured as recommended by stud manufacturer.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2116/7
J. Partition Heights: As indicated on drawings.

3.03
WALL FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete block and concrete walls.
B. Erect furring channels horizontally and/or vertically as indicated on drawings.
C. Space furring channels maximum 600 mm on center, not more than 100 mm
from floor and ceiling lines, and abutting walls.
3.04
ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Place batt insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind
and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight
to items passing through partitions.
B. Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Seal joints between sound insulated wallboard partitions and floor, and joints
where partitions abut walls or vertical surfaces of other materials, with acoustical
sealant to prevent noise transmission.
D. Extrude a full 12mm diameter bead into each joint to effectively block airborne
sound transmission.
E. Use sound seal gasket between partition and ceilings.
F. At electrical boxes in all wallboard sound rated partitions, provide and install
incombustible glass fiber insulation around each box and fill joint between box
with insulation. Similarly fill joints around pipes, ducts and other penetrations
through wallboard sound rated partitions with insulation to prevent airborne
sound transmission.
G. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at:
1.
Base Layer.
2.
Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, ductwork, and roughin boxes.
3.05
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless
blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact
at edges and ends with not more than 1.5 mm of open space between panels.
Do not force into place.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2116/8
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports. Do not place tapered edges against
cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
G. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining
gypsum panels.
H. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed
spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
2.
Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and
other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs
and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and
other structural members; allow 6.5- to 9.5-mm wide joints to install
sealant.
I. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board
application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
J. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 200 mm c/c.
3.06
PANEL APPLICATION METHODS
A. Single-Layer Application:
1.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically otherwise indicated,
and minimize end joints. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one
framing member in alternate courses of board.
B. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for
base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base
layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least
one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or
required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of
partitions.
C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel
drill screws.
D. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face
layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners.
E. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly
adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of
gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written
recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening
adhesive has set.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2116/9
3.07
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with
same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install corner bead at external corners.
C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed.
Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except
where other types are indicated.
D. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific
locations approved for visual effect.
3.08
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to
prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint
compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using settingtype joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories
having flanges not requiring tape.
D. Fill openings around cutouts with compound or acoustical sealant as
recommended by manufacturer.
E. Reinforce all joints at tapered edges and interior corners with joint reinforcing
tape set in joint compound.
F. Fill all joints, fastener heads, trim recesses, cracks and other depressions with
joint compound. Finish smooth and flush so that joints, screws and other items
will not be visible after painting.
G. Cementitious Backer Units:
instructions.
3.09
Finish according to manufacturer's written
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 3 mm in 3M in any direction. (Non

accumulative)
3.10
CLEAN-UP
A. Promptly, as the Work proceeds and upon completion, clean up and remove
away from job site any surplus materials and rubbish resulting from the Work of
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2116/10
this trade. In particular, scrape off and remove all cement and joint filler from
adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to
Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2116/11
SECTION 09 2400
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment and perform all operations and
services necessary for supply and installation of Portland Cement Plaster and
related accessories.
1.
Scratch Coat.
2.
Brown Coat.
3.
Finish Coat.
4.
Related Accessories.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints
including plans, elevations sections, details of components, and attachments to
other work.
C. Samples of all products.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicators Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has

completed similar works to that indicated for this Project. Employ a supervisor
during all phases of the work.
B. Allowable Tolerances Generally: Generally: Maximum permissible gap between
a 3 m straight edge and any point on the surface shall be 3 mm.
C. Mockups: Prior to installing plaster work, construct panels 3mx3m minimum of
finish and application required to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as
qualities of materials and execution. The mock-up should include all stages of
work and accessories.
D. All accessories must be supplied and fixed in accordance with the requirements
of ASTM C 926, for all aspects of the work and differing backgrounds.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2400/1
Portland Cement Plastering
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS GENERALLY
A. Portland cement.
B. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S.
C. Sand: To ASTM C897 Grading:
1.
Sieve size No
2.
4 (4.75mm)
3.
8 (2.36mm)
4.
16 (1.18mm)
5.
30 (600 um)
6.
50 (300 um)
7.
100 (150 um)
8.
200 (75 um)
% Retaining by weight
0
0
40
65
90
100
100
D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932 subject to approval.

E. Water: Quality to be from a potable water supply only.
2.02
MIXES
A. General: All mix proportions are suggestive only; variations to meet local
conditions and achieve the desired finish are permitted within the limits specified
in ASTM C926.
B. Interior Plastering (20 mm thick)
1.
Scratch Coat:
a.
On metal lath: Portland cement, sand 1:1 plus 0.45kg fibre binder
to each 42kg of Portland cement.
b.
On masonry or concrete: Portland cement, sand and coarse
aggregate (9 mm) 1:1:1/4
2.
Brown Coat:
a.
Portland cement, hydrated lime, sand, 1:1/4: 3.
3.
Finish Coat (Skim Coat)
a.
Type N hydrated lime in putty as ASTM C 206.
4.
Sand:
a.
Proportions of mixes given are for damp, loose sand.
C. Exterior Plastering (25 mm thick)
1.
Provide galvanized metal lath of heavy duty type weighing 1.61 kg/m2 for
all plastering area.
2.
First coat (scratch coat) consisting of sand and cement, in the ratio of 1:1.
3.
Second coat (brown coat) consisting of 350 kgs of Portland cement mixed
to 1m3 of sand with adding lime slurry (1:0.25:3 cement, lime, sand).
4.
Third coat (final coat) consisting of 300 kgs of Portland cement mixed to
1m3 of sand with adding lime slurry (1:0.25:3.25 cement, lime, sand).
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2400/2
5.
Each coat of plaster to be kept wet with water spray, 3 times a day for 4
days for curing. Final coat to be left to dry for 30 days after curing period
before proceeding with paint application.
a.
D. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for base- and finish-coat mixes as applicable
to plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated.
E. Gauge Boxes: Measure constituents by volume, using clean gauge boxes made
to size to suit volume required. Overfill gauge boxes and strike off excess
material with a straight edge.
F. Mix: Before adding water, thoroughly mix materials until uniform in appearance.
Add water and mix to a consistency suitable for the work.
G. Mechanical Mixers:
1.
Do not allow batches to remain in mixer longer than 3 minutes.
2.
Wash out mixer four times daily if in continuous use, and after each batch
if mixer used intermittently or if a different constituent is used.
H. Initial Set:
1.
Do not use plaster after initial set has taken place.
2.
Do not re-temper or reconstitute mixes.
2.03
LATH
A. Expanded Metal Lath (diamond self furring) ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653
Z180 galvanized steel sheets, mesh weight not less than 1.61 kg/m2.
B. Corner Lath: Diamond mesh lath bent to form two 75mm wide wings.
C. Strip Lath: Diamond mesh minimum 150mm wide.
D. Tie Wire: 1.21mm (18 U.S. Std) galvanized mild steel wire.
E. Wire Clips: 4.12mm (8.U.S.Std) galvanized copper bearing steel hairpin clips.
2.04
ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements
indicated below; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of
plaster coats required.
B. Materials in General:
1.
Internal use: galvanized steel.
C. Corner Beads: 0.45mm (26 U.S Std.) with maximum 4.8mm bead and minimum
63mm wide expanded metal wings.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2400/3
D. Edge Beads (Casing/Stop Beads): 0.61mm (24 U.S Std), depth to suit plaster
thickness, with square edge having a minimum 4.8mm return and a minimum
75mm wide expanded metal wing.
E. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large-mesh, diamond-metal lath
fabricated from zinc-alloy or welded-wire mesh fabricated from 1.2-mmdiameter, zinc-coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external
corners of Portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full
plaster encasement.
F. Control Joints One-Piece Type: Folded pair of non perforated screeds in Mshaped configuration, with expanded flanges.
G. Control Joints Two-Piece Type: Pair of casing beads with back flanges formed to
provide slip-joint action, adjustable for joint widths from 3 to 16 mm.
H. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for
installations indicated.
I. Tie Wire: 1.21 mm (18 U.S Std) galvanized mild steel wire.
J. Reveal strips: Fabricate reveal units using zinc alloy C-channel of profile
indicated or as required, painted finish with continuously welded joints and
smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where
possible.
K. Expanded galvanized steel sheets diamond mesh weight not less than 1.61
kg/m2 at intersections of different backing materials including chases for pipes
and conduits.
2.05
A. ASTM C 206
Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime.
B. ASTM C 897
Standard Specification for Aggregate for job-mixed Portland

Cement Based Plaster.
C. ASTM C 926
Standard Specification for Portland Cement Based Plaster.
D. ASTM C 932
Standard Specification for Surface applied Bonding

Compounds for Exterior Plastering.
E. ASTM C 1063
Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring

to receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement Based
Plaster.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2400/4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and the conditions under which the work is to be installed,
and do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work has been corrected.
B. Acceptance of Background:
1.
Before applying plaster ensure that backgrounds are:
a.
Adequately true and level to achieve specified tolerances.
b.
Adequately fixed.
c.
Free from contamination and loose areas.
d.
Adequately prepared to give a good bond.
C. Beads, Lath and Accessories:
1.
Ensure that they are properly fixed and accurately located before applying
plaster.
2.
Ensure any which are rusted, improperly set or otherwise defective are
replaced.
3.02
METAL LATH INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturers Recommendations: To be strictly followed for all products and

materials, and selection of type of lathing suitable for function indicated.
B. Tension: Fix lathing from the centre outwards so that it is taut.
C. Direction: Fix lath with long dimension and ribs at right angles to support.
D. Same Plane Junctions: Extend lathing not less than 150mm onto adjacent
concrete or masonry surfaces which are to be plastered.
E. Laps:
1.
Do not lap lathing within 100mm of angles or curves.
2.
Diamond mesh/self-furring lathing: lap side edges 13mm and secure with
wire ties at not more than 150mm centers.
3.
Ribbed lathing: lap side edges by nesting ribs or selvedge and secure
with wire ties at not more than 150mm centers.
4.
End laps: make supports wherever possible. Lap ends 50mm and secure
with wire ties at not more than 150mm centres for diamond mesh lathing,
and Each rib for ribbed lathing.
F. Angles:
1.
Diamond mesh/self-furring lathing: form by bending into internal angle and
lapping at least 150mm onto adjoining lath, or butt jointing lathing at
internal angle and covering with corner lath.
2.
Ribbed lathing: butt joint at internal angle and cover with corner lath.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2400/5
G. Wire Ties:
1.
Twist ends tightly together, cut off surplus and bend ends of wire away
from face of coating.
H. Metal Supports:
1.
Plain lathing: Fix with wire ties at not exceeding 100mm centers along
each support.
2.
Ribbed lathing: fix with wire ties at each intersection of ribs and supports.
I. Concrete And Masonry Backgrounds:
1.
Plain lathing: fix with 38mm clout nails or staples, driven into fixing blocks
or plugs at not exceeding 300 x 300mm staggered centers.
2.
Ribbed lathing: fix with 38mm clout nails driven through each rib into fixing
blocks or plugs at not exceeding 400mm centers.
3.
Self-furring lathing: fix with 38mm galvanized self-furring nails at 150 x
150 mm centers.
J. Corner Lath:
1.
Fix at internal angles of all surfaces to be plastered, except where
otherwise indicated.
2.
Fix with wire ties or 38mm nails, as applicable, at not exceeding 300mm
centers along each outer edge.
K. Strip Lath:
1.
150mm wide lath: fix over cracks in concrete or masonry walls and over
joints between dissimilar backgrounds and over all conduits, pipes and
chases.
2.
Fix with galvanized masonry nails at not exceeding 300mm centers along
outer edges.
3.03
ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for
provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope
accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach
accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and in
alignment during plastering.
B. Beads Generally:
1.
Fix plumb, square and true to line and level.
2.
Concrete/Masonry backgrounds: fix bead on each side of trim with
galvanized masonry nails at not exceeding 300mm centers.
3.
Metal lathing: fix bead with tying wire at not exceeding 600mm centers.
4.
Cut edges of metal beads: paint with black tar-based paint.
C. Corner Beads: Fix at all external angles in plasterwork.
D. Edge Beads: Fix where plasterwork terminates or abuts against dissimilar
surfaces other than frames.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2400/6
E. Control Joint Beads:

1.
Fix control joint beads with galvanized nails at not exceeding 300mm
centers.
2.
Locate Control Joints:
a.
Where indicated on approved shop drawings;
b.
Where joints or natural breaks occur in backgrounds;
c.
At no more than 6m centers.
3.04
PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING
A. Generally:
1.
Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster,
removing loose material and substances that may impair the Work.
2.
Cut off projections and concrete fins.
3.
Remove efflorescence, laitance, dirt and other loose material by
thoroughly dry brushing.
4.
Remove all traces of mould oil, paint, grease, dirt and other materials
incompatible with coating by scrubbing with water containing detergent
and washing off with plenty of clean water.
B. Ferrous Surfaces: Treat with rust-inhibitive paint where plaster will be in direct
contact.
C. Hacking for Key:
1.
Roughen concrete surfaces thoroughly and evenly to a depth of 3mm by
sand blasting, bush hammering or abrasive blasting.
2.
Clean surfaces by washing and brushing.
D. Adjust Suction: Wet hacked concrete masonry backgrounds immediately before
applying coatings.
3.05
PLASTER APPLICATION
A. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials.

B. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 3 mm in 3 m
from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 3m straightedge
placed at any location on surface.
C. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that
neither will be damaged by installation of other.
D. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that
act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not
terminated at metal frame by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal frame
before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
E. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush
with corner beads on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior
work.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2400/7
F. Accuracy: Finish surface to a true plane to correct line and level, with all angles
and corners to a right angle unless otherwise specified and with walls and
reveals plumb and square.
G. Irregular Surfaces:
1.
Curved surfaces, splayed surfaces and other irregular surfaces shall be
true to profile.
2.
Check with accurate metal forms and templates.
H. Frames:
1.
Bring plaster out flush with wood and metal frames and grounds and finish
each coat with a small, neat V joint where plaster finishes against frames.
I. Vertical Surfaces:
1.
Plaster shall extend full height from floor to underside of ceiling/structural
soffit, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Suspended ceiling: finish plaster flush with system bead or angle, or
75mm above ceiling soffit where there is a perimeter bead or angle.
J. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush
with corner beads on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior
work.
K. Moist-cure plaster base and finish coats.
L. Scratch Coat:
1.
Apply with sufficient force and cement slurry (1:1) to form a good key,
cure for 3 days.
M. Brown Coat:
1.
Apply the second coat, scratch the surface, cure for 3 days and allow to
dry for at least 24 hours.
2.
Adjust suction by wetting immediately before applying finish coat.
N. Skim/Finish Coats:
1.
Apply the finish coat and finish with a steel trowel to a smooth, hard finish.
2.
Cure with a light fog spray of water for 4 days, commencing 12 hours after
completion of application.
3.
Protect against rapid drying until thoroughly cured.
4.
Final coat to be left to dry for 30 days after curing period before
proceeding with paint application.
O. Making Good:
1.
Make good defective or damaged plaster before starting decoration. Cut
or rake out defective work, moisten background and fill with finish coat mix
and finish to match adjacent work.
2.
Repair, point, cut, and patch plaster around work abutting, setting into or
extending into plastered surfaces on completion of such work.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2400/8
3.06
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate

other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster
surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or
replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs,
efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work
as necessary to comply with required visual effects.
3.07
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of

plaster on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and
other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise
damaged during plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove
unused materials, containers, equipment, and plaster debris.
Manufacturer and Installer, that ensures plaster work is without damage or
deterioration at date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2400/9
SECTION 09 2519
POLISHED PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of decorative
polished plaster finish system for installation over solid surfaces to areas as
scheduled on the drawings.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on

Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes.
B. ASTM D 2486 - Standard Test Method for Scrub Resistance of Wall Paints.
C. ASTM D 3363 - Standard Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test.
D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
1.03
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Polished plaster system shall be tested by a qualified independent testing agency

for the following properties according to the following test methods:
1.
Pencil Hardness: Minimum of 5H+ when tested in accordance with ASTM
D3363.
2.
Scrub Resistance: Minimum 10,000 cycles using 10 grams of scrubbing
medium and 5 grams of water applied by brush.
3.
Chemical Exposure: Passes ASTM D 1308.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers technical data on products specified,

including installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate designs, colors, locations, and relationship to adjoining
surfaces.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2519/1
Polished Plaster
C. Samples: Submit two samples, 150 x 150 mm in size, illustrating finish color and
texture.
D. Qualification Data: Certificate signed by main distributor indicating that installer
has been trained and is authorized to install specified product.
E. Contractor to submit detailed installation procedure for acceptance by the
Engineer before proceeding with the work. This shall include manufacturer
recommendations and quality control procedures.
F. Warranty: Sample copy of manufacturer's warranty stating obligations,
remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this Section

with a minimum of five years documented experience. Include list of at least
three completed projects of similar scope with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners. Installers must be factory
certified and possess certificate of training.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Provide only proprietary, factory-formulated
materials specifically for applications indicated. Substitutes within the system are
not permitted.
C. Mockups: Before installing polished plaster, install mockups of size and location
as directed by the Engineer, to demonstrate surface finish, color and other
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Simulate
finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
1.
Maintain as a standard for judging the work and remove mockups when
directed by Engineer.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the construction site in their original packaging with

manufacturers labels identifying manufacturer and product; color designation; lot
number; and date of manufacture.
B. Inspect materials upon delivery and immediately report to Engineer damaged or
defective materials.
C. Store materials in a well ventilated area with minimum ambient temperature as
per recommendations of the manufacturer. Prevent deterioration due to
moisture, temperature changes, contamination, or other causes.
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental

conditions for applying finishes.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2519/2
Polished Plaster
B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during and after installation of

polished plaster.
1.08
WARRANTY
A. Submit a written warranty signed by Contractor and applicator agreeing to repair

or replace Work under this Section that fails in materials, workmanship, finish
and color at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2519/3
Polished Plaster
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Armourcoat Ltd.; UK
Tel: + 44 (0) 1732 460668. Fax: + 44 (0) 1732 450930.
Web: www.armourcoat.com.
B. Or approved equal.
2.02
MATERIALS/ PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide manufacturers complete system of proprietary materials

specifically formulated for compatibility with one another and which may include
anti-crack material, primer, key coat, resin, finish coat, color wash and wax polish
as required for designs, finishes, and colors specified.
B. Portland Cement Plaster substrate: As per recommendations of the Polished
plaster manufacturer.
C. Products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes
of establishing minimum quality standards. Products which are equal to, or
better than those specified, and which conform to the Engineers design
requirements and colour selections, may be acceptable subject to Engineers
approval.
D. Polished Plaster System: Mixture of natural mineral material composed of
hydrated lime, crushed marble and cement combined with special additives to
control working characteristics and hand applied by trowel.
1.
Product Ref.: Armourcoat Polished Plaster-smooth-X0081, Armourcoat
Ltd.
E. Total thickness of plaster including key coat: 1.5 2 mm.
F. Material Requirements: As recommended by the manufacturer.
1.
Key coat
:
1 kg/m2.
2.
Finish Coat
:
2 kg/m2 (1 1.5 mm thick).
G. Coating system:
1.
Anticrack: For use over gypsum board substrate which resists cracking at
board joints.
2.
Key Coat: Armourcoat Keycoat K124 mixed on site with Armourcoats
R29 resin solution comprising R29 resin diluted with clean water and
applied in one or two coats as necessary by trowel.
3.
Finish Coat: Armourcoat pre-mixed plaster, 2 or 3 thin coats, applied in
successively thinner layers in one day. Exact number of coats and mixing
procedure as per recommendations of the manufacturer.
4.
Wax Polish: Solvent based natural beeswax (white wax Z11).
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2519/4
Polished Plaster
H. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter, which can
affect plaster.
I. Anti-crack material for application at board joints: Fiber and resin reinforced
gypsum skim-coat plaster which resists cracking at board joints by providing a
solid base for the application of polished plaster.
J. Fiber mesh as recommended by the manufacturer for application of polish plaster
on plaster substrates.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2519/5
Polished Plaster
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify the suitability of existing conditions before starting work. Do not begin
Work of this Section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Before preparation or application of coatings ensure that:
1.
Backgrounds are secure, adequately true and level to achieve specified
tolerances, free from contamination and loose areas, reasonably dry and
in a suitable condition to receive specified coatings.
2.
All cutting, chasing, fixing of concealed conduits, service outlets and the
like, and making good of the background, is completed.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate preparation.

B. Remove efflorescence, dust and other loose material by thoroughly dry brushing.
Remove all traces of paint, grease, dirt and other materials incompatible with
coating by scrubbing with water containing detergent and washing off with plenty
of clean water. Allow to dry before applying coatings unless specified otherwise.
C. Keying/Bonding: Prepare backgrounds as specified for the type of coating to be
applied. Methods other than those specified may be submitted otherwise.
D. Remove hardware, electrical switch and outlet plates, lighting fixtures and other
items already in place that are not to receive plaster finish.
After completion of work, reinstall items using workers skilled in the trades
involved.
E. Protect adjacent surfaces and items that are not to receive plaster finish, but
which cannot be removed, from finish work. Use masking materials that will not
damage protected items and surfaces.
F. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond including mold, mildew,
oil, grease, salts, contamination and dirt using methods recommended by
manufacturer.
G. Plaster substrates shall be prepared as per written instructions from
manufacturer. Apply fibre mesh using adhesive.
3.03
APPLICATION
A. Mix and apply anti-crack materials for gypsum board substrates as per
recommendation of manufacturer. Anti-crack shall be allowed to dry fully before
applying polished plaster.
B. Keycoat: Mix and apply Keycoat in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2519/6
Polished Plaster
C. Finish: Apply finish coats in successively thinner layers all applied in one day.
Number of coats and total dry mil thickness shall be as recommended by
manufacturer for specified system. Allow to dry overnight.
1.
Polished plaster hand applied by trowel in three or more thin coats. Each
individual coat in the system applied as a continuous process for each
wall area.
2.
Finish/Texture:
Apply texture using technique recommended by
manufacturer.
D. Wax: Apply wax sparingly to obtain sheen in accordance with manufacturers
instructions using type of wax recommended by manufacturer for particular finish.
Ensure that the wall and all previous treatments are completely dry.
E. Finished surfaces shall match approved sample and mock-up.
F. Provide finish free of unsightly variations in texture and other defects.
3.04
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary coverings used to protect adjacent surfaces and reinstall

hardware, plates, lighting fixtures and other items previously removed.
B. Clean and repair adjacent surfaces and items soiled or damaged during Work of
this Section.
C. Maintain and protect completed polished plaster surfaces until time of
acceptance at Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 2519/7
Polished Plaster
SECTION 09 2713
GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED GYPSUM (GRG) FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of factory-molded,
glass-fiber-reinforced gypsum (GRG1) fabrications for interior applications.
B. The contractor to structurally design the supporting systems to ensure the safety
and stability of the system and submit the shop drawings and calculations for
review before fabrication.
C. Related Sections: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with
this specification includes but is not restricted to:
1.
Section 05 5000
Metal Fabrications for steel framing, blocking,
and bracing supporting GRG fabrications.
2.
Section 06 1000
Rough Carpentry for blocking, nailers, shims,
and carpentry supporting GRG fabrications.
3.
Section 09 9100
Painting.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, weight, dimensions of individual components and profiles,
and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show profiles, thicknesses, embedded supports, and
anchorage details for fabrications. Indicate requirements for joint treatment,
clearances, and attachment to supports.
C. Shop Drawings: Show profiles, thicknesses, finishes, joints, ornamentation,
installation tolerances, anchorage details and coordination with other works.
Indicate attachment methods, embedded supports, reinforcement, fabrication
methods, joint treatments, clearances, and supports.
1.
Ceiling suspension system members.
2.
Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure.
3.
Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; diffusers speakers;
sprinklers; and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other
junctures of ceilings with adjoining construction.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 2713/1
Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum (GRG) Fabrications
D. Samples: For each exposed product in each profile and size required, and as
follows:
1.
Linear Moldings: 600-mm long section with finished joint. Show complete
pattern.
2.
Nonlinear Shapes: Full-size units.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glass

reinforced gypsum fabrication installations in material, design and extent to those
indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a
record of successful in-service performance.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standard for fabrication and installation.
1.
Build mockups of each type of GRG fabrication.
2.
Paint mockups to match final decoration scheduled or indicated and to
comply with requirements specified in other Division 09 Sections.
3.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if
undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.04
A. Comply with ASTM C 1467/C 1467M.

B. Delivery: Deliver all materials in original, unopened containers with all labels
intact and legible at time of use.
C. Storage: Store all materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations as approved.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions:
1.
Comply with requirements in ASTM C 1467/C 1467M.
2.
Do not deliver or install GRG fabrications until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and continuously
maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels intended for
building occupants.
B. Conditioning: Acclimatize GRG fabrications to ambient temperature and humidity
of spaces in which they will be installed. Remove packaging and move units into
installation spaces not less than 48 hours before installing them.
C. Field Measurements: Where GRG fabrications are indicated to fit to other
construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements
before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 2713/2
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of glass-reinforced gypsum fabrications and

suspension system components with other construction, including ceilings, light
fixtures, HVAC equipment
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 2713/3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Arabesque Qatar
B. Decoration World Qatar
C. Or approved equal.
2.02
GRG FABRICATIONS
A. Fabrications: Molded, glass-fiber-reinforced plaster-glass-reinforced gypsum

units complying with ASTM C 1381.
B. Embedments: Cold-rolled steel channels with ASTM 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip
galvanized coating or as standard with GRG fabrication manufacturer and as
required for reinforcement and for anchorage to substrates and framing.
2.03
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: As recommended in GRG fabrication manufacturer's written

instructions.
1.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Steel Drill Screws: Of sufficient length and size to securely fasten GRG
fabrications to framing members, and as follows:
1.
Screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for fastening GRG fabrications to
steel members less than 0.84 mm thick.
2.
wood members.
3.
steel members from 0.84 to 2.84 mm thick.
C. Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475/C 475M.
D. Control Joints: ASTM C 1047, one-piece control joint with V-shaped slot and
removable strip covering the slot opening.
1.
Material: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process.
2.04
STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS

B. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper,
0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 2713/4
C. Hangers Rod: Galvanized steel.

D. Hangers: 5mm X 25mm Galvanized steel straps (ASTM A653M, G60) or 6mm
diameter galvanized rods (ASTM A510) as approved and height adjustable.
E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal
thickness of 1.37mm, a minimum 12.7mm wide flange with ASTM A 653M, hotdip galvanized zinc
coating, 38.1 mm deep, 0.707 kg/m, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Furring Channels: Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A653M, hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating, ASTM C645, 22 mm deep, 0.45 kg/m unless otherwise
indicated.
G. All steel framing/suspension members are to be hot-dip galvanized.
2.05
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate GRG units to comply with ASTM C 1381, with smooth-finished

surfaces; repair hollows, voids, scratches, and other surface imperfections.
Fabricate units in lengths and sizes that will minimize number of joints between
abutting units.
B. Embedments: Incorporate embedded items into units to develop the full strength
of GRG fabrications. Cover embedded items with not less than 5-mm thickness
of GRG composite.
C. Connection Hardware: Designed and fabricated to support and connect GRG
fabrications to hangers, support framing, and substrates.
2.06
A. ASTM A 653/A 653 M:
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc

Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process.
B. ASTM C 475:
Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint

Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
C. ASTM C 840:
Standard Specification for Application and Finishing

of Gypsum Board.
D. ASTM C 954:
Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screen for the

Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal
Plaster Bases.
E. ASTM C 1002:
Standard Specification for Steel Self Piercing Taping

Screens for the Application of Gypsum Panels to
Wood Studs.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 2713/5
F. ASTM C 1047:
Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum

Wallboards and Gypsum Veneer Base.
G. ASTM C 1381:
Standard Specification for Molded Glass Fiber

Reinforced Gypsum Parts.
H. ASTM C 1467/C 1467 M: Standard Specification for the Installation of Molded

Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Parts.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 2713/6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02
STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with

ASTM C 754 and with details indicated. Select framing components of type,
size, and spacing needed to support weight of glass-reinforced gypsum
fabrications and to maintain erection tolerances.
B. Supplementary Framing, Blocking, and Bracing: Install supplementary framing
as required not only to support glass-reinforced gypsum fabrications but also
fixtures and other items penetrating glass-reinforced gypsum fabrications.
3.03
GRG INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in ASTM C 1467/C 1467M.

B. Install GRG fabrications level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials.
Use concealed shims where required for alignment.
C. Attach GRG fabrications to framing and substrates with steel drill screws, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use pneumatic staple guns. Countersink screw
heads below adjoining finished surface.
1.
Predrill fastener holes in units. Clean fastener holes to remove dirt and
oil.
2.
Locate fasteners not less than 8 mm from edges or ends of units.
D. Where GRG fabrications are joined to form composite units, join fabrications with
adhesive. Band or brace units together until adhesive cures.
E. Install control joints between GRG fabrications where indicated.
F. Use joint-treatment materials to finish GRG fabrications to produce surfaces
ready to receive primers and paint finishes specified in other Division 09
Sections.
1.
Finish joints between units, other than control joints, and countersunk
fastener heads to comply with ASTM C 840 for Level 5 and to match
surface texture of units.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 2713/7
2.
3.04
Repair hollows, voids, scratches, and other surface imperfections on

units.
PAINTING
A. After installation all exposed surfaces shall be finished as indicated on drawings

and as per Section 09 9100.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 2713/8
SECTION 09 3013
CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of porcelain tiles
and glass mosaic tiles as scheduled in drawings and finishing schedule.
B. Related Sections: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with
1.
Section 05 5000
Metal Fabrications for metal subframing for
ledge
2.
Section 06 1000
Rough Carpentry for plywood backing where
indicated.
1.02
PERFORMANCE RQUIREMENTS
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide

products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM C 1028:
1.
Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. (Wet)
2.
Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. (Wet)
3.
Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8. (Wet)
1.03
SUBMITTALS:
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturers' specifications and installation

instructions for materials specified. Include certifications and other data to show
compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Samples: Submit samples of each type, class and color of tile, not less than
300mm square on plywood backing, and grouted as required. Submit samples of
control joint material. Sample submittal for approval, thereof shall be for color,
pattern, texture and joint width only. Compliance with all other requirements is
the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings for floors and walls showing
layout of all field tiles, trim shapes, and edging profiles jointing pattern. Shop
drawings to indicate location of all fixtures, accessories, service points etc.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 3013/1
Ceramic Tiling
Provide 1:2 scale details of expansion joints, control joints, special tiles, frame
and service abutments etc.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain each material required for any type and color of tile work from a single
source, so as to minimize variations in appearance and quality.
B. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Before installing tile, erect mock-ups for each form
of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials
and execution. Build mock-ups using materials indicated for final unit of Work for
each type of installation using materials indicated for final unit of Work as
directed.
C. Approved mock up to become part of completed work if approved by the
Engineer at the time of Substantial Completion.
1.05
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken
and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for
labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a
dry location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be
maintained and contamination avoided.
D. Store liquid latexes in unopened containers.
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent
coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does
contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before
setting tile.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is

complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the
levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturers written instructions.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 3013/2
Ceramic Tiling
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIER/MANUFACTURERS
A. Products and Manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes
of establishing minimum quality standards of selected tiles. Products and
Manufacturers which are equal to, or better than those specified, and which
conform to the design requirements and color selections, may be acceptable
subject to the Engineers approval. For type of tiles refer to drawings.
1.
Porcelain Tiles
a.
Caesar Ceramichie
Italy
b.
Vitra
Turkey
c.
Keope,
d.
ItalyMirage Granito Ceramico
Italy
e.
Gres Ceramiche
Italy.
f.
Or approved equal.
2.
Glass Mosaic
a.
Hakatai
USA
b.
Bisazza
Italy
www.bisazza.com
c.
Or approved equal
B. Adhesives, Mortar and Grouting Materials
1.
Laticrete International
USA.
2.
Mapei
Italy
3.
Technokolla
Italy
4.
Ardex UK Ltd.
UK.
5.
Or approved equal.
C. Control Joints and Trims
1.
Vexcolt UK Ltd.
UK
2.
Schluter UK Ltd
UK
3.
Or approved equal.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 3013/3
Ceramic Tiling
2.02
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are

indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface
textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific
products or materials compiling with the following requirements:
1.
Match sample.
2.
Provide tile trim and accessories that match colour and finish of adjoining
flat tile.
B. Technical Features: all ceramic tile products to comply with EN176 B1/ANSI A
137.1 and as follows:
1.
Water absorption- Less than 3% for vitrified tiles.
2.
Hardness (MOH Scale)- Greater than 6
3.
Frost Resistance- Must not produce noticeable alteration of surface.
4.
Colour Resistance to light- Must not produce noticeable colour variation.
5.
Chemical ResistanceMust not produce noticeable signs of acid and
alkali attack, when tested as per ASTM C650.
6.
Flexural Strength- Min. 27 N/mm2
7.
Abrasion resistanceMax. 205 (Volume lost in mm3).
C. Allow for required percentage of wall tiles to be edge glazed for use on exposed
corners. Identify boxes containing such tiles accordingly.
2.03
TILE PRODUCTS
A. Porcelain tiles shall be fully body colour. Product references are indicated on
drawings. Porcelain Tiles Technical features:
1.
Water absorption (ISO 10454-3): 0.05%
2.
Bending Strength (ISO 10545-4) 50 N/mm2
3.
Scratch resistance (ISO 10545-6) 135 mm3
4.
Thermal Shock resistance (ISO 10545-9):
Resistant.
5.
Resistance to chemical attack (ISO 10545-13): Resistant.
6.
Resistance to stains (ISO 10545-14):
Cleanable.
B. Glass Mosaic tiles.

1.
All glass mosaic tiles to comply with ANSI A137.1 for fully vitrified and the
following:
a.
Resistance to chemical attacks.
b.
Water absorption: None
c.
Colors resistant to fading.
d.
Frost resistant.
2.
Product Ref.: As indicated on drawings.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 3013/4
Ceramic Tiling
2.04
SUB FLOOR SMOOTHING COMPOUND
A. Powder and water based design mix for application up to 35 mm to be pumped

or power onto a prepared sub floor.
1.
Use of approved primer to substrate is required.
2.
Ardex K15 B, pumpable, sub floor smoothing compound base mix on
Ardex P 82 primer or approved equal.
2.05
SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:

1.
Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive for thin-set application:
Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix and liquid-latex additive.
a.
Use of the above is required for all thin set applications and as
slurry bond coats at mortar and bed applications.
b.
Laticrete 211 Crete Filler Powder and Laticrete 4237 latex thin bed
adhesive mortar admixture or approved equal.
B. For wall applications, provide non sagging mortar that complies with paragraph
F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
C. For Glass tiles use Laticrete 317 thin set powder mixed with Laticrete 333, Super
Flexible Additive.
D. Engineer reserves the right to select any product for setting and grouting
materials from the complete catalogue range of the specified manufacturers.
2.06
GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Sanded grout ANSI A 118.6 premium factory prepared sanded cement grout
Laticrete 1500 series, fortified with Laticrete 1776, Grout Admix Plus or approved
equal.
B. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Epoxy grout (for reflective pool): to
ANSI A118.3 Laticrete, Latapoxy SP-100 or approved equal.
C. Grout Color: To approval.
2.07
CONTROL JOINTS MATERIAL
A. Control joints comprising a stainless steel envelope encapsulating a flexible

synthetic rubber extrusion core (Vamac) as manufactured by Vexcolt, U.K. or
approved equal. Colour to approval.
B. Provide control joints or expansion joints where shown, or required by ANSI or
TCA standard for proper workmanship and to approval.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 3013/5
Ceramic Tiling
2.08
A. ASTM A 66
Standard Specification for Austenitic stainless steel, sheet,

strip, plate and flat bar.
B. ASTN C578
Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene

Thermal Insulation,
C. ASTM C650
Standard Test Method for determining resistance of

Ceramic Tiles to chemical substances.
D. ASTM C1028
Standard Test Method for determining the static coefficient

of friction of Ceramic Tile.
E. ASTM E90
Standard Specification for Laboratory Measurement of

Airborne Sound Transmission loss of building particles and
elements.
F. ASTM E413
Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
G. ASTM E492
Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of

Impact Sound Transmission through Floor Ceiling
Assemblies.
H. ASTM 1007
Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of impact

sound transmission through floor ceiling assemblies and
associated support structure.
I. ANSI A108
American National Standard Specifications for the

installation of Ceramic Tiles.
J. ANSI A118
American National Standard Specifications for setting

Mortars, grouts, epoxy, adhesives.
K. ANSI A138
American National Standard specifications for Ceramic

Tiles.
L. UNI EN104
European Quality Standards for Chemical Resistance of

Ceramic Tiles.
M. ISO 10545-3
Determination of water absorption, apparent porosity,

apparent relative density and bulk density.
N. ISO 10545-4
Determination of modulus of rupture and breaking strength.
O. ISO 10545-6
Determination of resistance to deep abrasion for unglazed

tiles.
P. ISO 10545-9
Determination of resistance to thermal shock.
Q. ISO 10545-13
Determination of chemical resistance.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 3013/6
Ceramic Tiling
R. ISO 10545-14
Determination of resistance to stains.
S. EN 176.B1
European Quality Standards for Vitrified and Porcelain

Tiles.
T. EN 202
European Quality Standard for Frost Resistance of Ceramic

Tiles.
U. DIN 51094
European Quality Standard for Light and Colour Fastness of

Glazed and Unglazed Ceramic Tiles.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 3013/7
Ceramic Tiling
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during
sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in factory and packaged
accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the same range in
colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not
factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before
installing, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B. Etch substrate with 10% solution of muriatic acid as may be required to remove
curing compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of
specified mortar for tiles. Rinse with water to remove all traces of acid.
C. Seal substrate with sealer as recommended by manufacturer of mortar.
3.02
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series
Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile that apply to types of setting and
grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCAs Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation
schedules.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for the
installation of each material required.
D. Allowable Variations in Finished Work: Do not exceed the following deviations
from level and plumb, and from elevations, locations, slopes and alignments
shown:
1.
Floors: 1/100 run any direction; +/- 3mm at any location; 0.8mm offset at
any location.
2.
Walls: 1/800 run any direction; +/- 3mm at any location; 0.8mm offset at
any location.
3.
Joints: +/- 0.8mm joint with variation at any location; 1/600 run for
deviation from plumb and true; and for other variations in alignment of
joints.
E. Lay out tile work in pattern shown using field tile and trim shapes as shown.
Center tile fields both directions in each space or on each wall area, and adjust to
minimize tile cutting. Do not use cut tiles smaller than 2/3 of the dimensions in
both directions. Use uniform joint widths. Cut field tile, not trim shapes, unless
otherwise shown.
F. Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures in the spaces
shown or scheduled to receive tiles. Form a complete covering without
interruptions except for control and expansion joints as shown and as required to
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 3013/8
Ceramic Tiling
comply with requirements. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and

corners without disruption of pattern or joint alignments.
G. Liquid Latex Mortar Thin-Set Installation: Use liquid latex mortar for thin-set tile
work, unless otherwise shown.
H. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile
without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim,
finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical
outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers
overlap tile.
I. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints
when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile
work and centre tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area.
Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
shown.
J. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1.
For ceramic tile grouts (sand, Portland cement; and latex-Portland cement
grouts). Comply with ANSI A108.10.
2.
For chemical resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
K. Provide control joints or expansion joints required by job conditions for proper
workmanship. Install removable divider strip of proper width and depth of the tile
and setting bed. Remove strips after grouting tiles and properly curing the work.
Install joint fillers and sealants, in control joints and expansion joints, of type as
recommended by the tiling manufacturer.
3.03
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile
surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
1.
Remove Latex-Portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as
possible.
2.
Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by
tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14
days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous
plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean
water before and after cleaning.
3.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by
coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer.
Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked,
chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to
manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 3013/9
Ceramic Tiling
1.
2.
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of

neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect
installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after
grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner
from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 3013/10
Ceramic Tiling
SECTION 09 5126
GYPSUM PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of gypsum panel
ceilings as scheduled on drawings.
B. Refer Appendix B - Acoustic Report for the acoustic requirements of the Project.
1.02
SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.

B. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of gypsum panel ceilings and
components with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current
products.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected-ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating
penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1.
Ceiling suspension system members.
2.
Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure.
3.
Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets;
speakers; sprinklers; and special moldings at walls, column penetrations,
and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction.
4.
Minimum Drawing Scale: 1:100.
D. Samples: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in sets for
each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations
expected in these characteristics.
1.
Full-size samples of each gypsum panel type, pattern, and color.
2.
Set of 300-mm- long samples of suspension system members.
3.
Set of 300-mm- long samples of exposed moldings for each color and
system type required.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5126/1
Gypsum Panel Ceilings
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed

gypsum panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from
one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from
one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
1.
Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the
same manufacturer.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide material and products with flame
spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less as determined
by testing identical products as tested per ASTM E 84 (Class A), NFPA 255 or
another acceptable testing and inspection agency acceptable.
E. Mockups: Before installing gypsum panel ceilings, construct mockups for each
form of construction and finish required in a location and of size as directed to
verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for completed work:
1.
Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of Substantial
Completion may become part of the completed Work.
1.04
A. Deliver gypsum tile/panels and suspension system components to Project site in

original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where
they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface
contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing gypsum tile/panels, permit them to reach room temperature and
stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle gypsum tile/panels tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging
units in any way.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install gypsum panel ceilings until spaces are
enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are
maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5126/2
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of gypsum panels and suspension system with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.07
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Contractor and Manufacturer

agreeing to repair or replace gypsum tile/panel ceiling that fail in materials, finish
or workmanship.
B. Provide a warranty of 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5126/3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Product and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes of
establishing minimum quality standards. Products which are equal to, or better
than those specified, and which conform to the design requirements may be
acceptable, subject to approval by the Engineer.
2.02
A. Danogips Limited (Danoline)

UK
B. Gyptone (Gyproc)
Denmark
C. Knauf
Dubai, UAE.
D. Or approved equal.
2.03
GYPSUM PANELS, GENERAL
A. Gypsum ceiling tiles/panels (plain and perforated) manufactured of high grade

non-combustible gypsum produced according to BS EN 520.
B. Fire Performance
1.
Non combustible to BS 476.
2.
Class 1 spread of flame to BS 476, part 7.
2.04
CEILING TYPES
A. Perforated Gypsum Ceiling: GT01

1.
Ceiling panels with exposed recessed suspension system, linear system.
2.
Finish: Factory applied water based acrylic paint off white in colour to
match approved sample.
3.
Size: 600 x 600 x 12.5 mm.
4.
Product Ref.: Linear 600 by Danoline, Micro perforation M1.
5.
Perforation: Panels to have acoustic fiber felt backing, coloured grey and
having an airflow resistance of 330-410 N/m3.
a.
3 mm square holes at 8.33 mm centres (10.2%).
B. Acoustic Gypsum Board Ceiling: GB03
1.
Perforated panels installed in metal suspension system, with tapered
edges on all sides. The tapered edges shall be joint filled with tape and
filler to give even and smooth surface.
2.
Panel size: 900x2700x12.5mm.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5126/4
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.05
Perforation: Panels to have acoustic fiber felt backing, coloured grey and
having an airflow resistance of 330-410 N/m3.
a.
3 x 3mm square holes at 8.33 mm c/c, 9.82% perforation, pattern
ref. M1F, Designpanel by Danogips.
Product Ref.: Design panel 900.
Joint treatment materials and finishing: As recommended by the
manufacturer.
Painting: As per section 09 9100- Painting.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Suspension system shall be as recommended by Manufacturer.

B. System manufactured from galvanized steel consisting of main runners, cross
tees, wall angles, shadowline trim, adjustable hangers, swing profiles, clips etc.
as applicable for each system. Suspension system shall include support for
expansion joint assemblies.
C. All visible surfaces factory painted in white color.
2.06
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard

nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the
following requirements:
1.
Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by
testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
2.07
A. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.
B. NFPA 255 Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
C. BS EN 520
Gypsum Plasterboard Definitions, requirements and test methods.
D. DIN 18180 Gypsum Plasterboard for Building Construction, Guidelines

regarding Workmanship.
E. BS 476
Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures.
F. ASTM C 834 Standard Specifications for Latex Sealants.

G. ASTM E 90 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5126/5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which gypsum panel ceilings attach
or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this
and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other
conditions affecting performance of gypsum panel ceilings. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors
whose installation is specified in other Sections.
1.
Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation
well in advance of time needed for coordinating other work.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of gypsum panels to balance
border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width
units at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gypsum panel ceilings to comply as per manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other
objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of
ceiling suspension system.
2.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
3.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum
produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at
spacings required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of
trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members
and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established
by referenced standards and publications.
4.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports
above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly
either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are
secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or
otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
5.
Space hangers not more than 900 mm o.c. along each member supported
directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5126/6
not more than 200 mm from ends of each member. Main runners 600
mm o.c. and furring channels as required.
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a
minimum of four tight turns. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place
or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of gypsum panel
ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units.
1.
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of
vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.
2.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches
(400 mm) o.c. and not more than 75 mm from ends, levelling with ceiling
suspension system to a tolerance of 3 mm in 3.6 m. Miter corners
accurately and connect securely.
3.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install gypsum panels in coordination with suspension system and exposed
moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed
edges so panel-to-panel joints are closed by double lap of material.
1.
Scribe and cut panel for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations
through panel.
2.
Hold panel field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel
spacers between panel and moldings, spaced 305 mm o.c.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of gypsum panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings,
and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and
replace panels and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned
and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5126/7
SECTION 09 5133
ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of metal ceiling
systems as shown on drawings.
B. Refer Appendix B: Acoustic Report for the acoustic requirements of the Project.
1.02
A. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install metal ceiling

systems to withstand the effects of applicable loads and without showing
permanent deformation of ceiling system components including panels and
suspension system; noise caused by vibration, deflection, and displacement of
ceiling units; and permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
1.03
SUBMITTALS:
A. Product data for each type of product specified. Include installation methods for
each type of substrate.
B. Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and
coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1.
Ceiling Pattern.
2.
Joint pattern.
3.
Ceiling suspension members.
4.
Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
5.
Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets,
speakers, sprinkler heads, and access panels. Ceiling perimeter, Special
moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures with adjoining
construction.
C. Samples of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size
indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of
Work.
1.
Panel: 300 mm long samples of each type of ceiling.
2.
300mm long samples of suspension system members.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5133/1
Acoustical Metal Ceilings
3.
4.
1.04
Sound absorber: 300mm long.

Samples of all accessories required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer with minimum five years

experience in metal ceiling systems installations similar in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of metal ceiling panels and
suspension system from one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical metal panel ceilings with
surface bearing characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A
materials as developed by an acceptable testing per ASTM E 84 by an agency.
D. Mockups: Before installing metal ceilings, construct mockups for each form of
construction and finish required in a location and of size as directed to verify
selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and qualities of materials and execution.
1.
Approved mock up may become part of finished work if approved by the
Engineer at the time of Substantial Completion.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install metal ceiling system until work in

plenum is complete. Do not install metal ceiling system until space is enclosed
and weatherproof and wet work in space is completed and dry.
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of metal ceiling units

and suspension system components with other work supported by, or penetrating
through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression
system components and partition systems if applicable.
1.07
A. Delivery metal ceiling, suspension system components, and accessories to

Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed,
conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture,
humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other
causes.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5133/2
1.08
PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.09
WARRANTY

agreeing to repair or replace acoustical metal pan ceiling that fails in materials,
finish or workmanship.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5133/3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Products and manufacturers specified hereafter are specified for the purposes of
establishing minimum quality standards. Products which are equal to or better
than those specified, and which conform to the design requirements and color
selections, may be acceptable, subject to the Engineers approval.
2.02
A. Luxalon Architectural Products

Hunter Douglas Middle East
Dubai, UAE.
B. Gema Metal Ceilings by Armstrong
Switzerland
C. Burgess
UK
2.03
ACOUSTICAL METAL CEILING PANS: GENERAL
A. Acoustical Metal Ceiling Panels: Provide manufacturers standard acoustical

metal panels of configuration indicated.
B. Pan Fabrication: Manufacturers standard units of size, profile and edge
treatment indicated and finished to comply with requirements indicated.
1.
Lay-in Panels: Set in exposed suspension grid.
C. Sound Absorbent Fabric Layer: Provide fabric layer, sized to fit concealed
surface of pan and consisting of black, non-woven, nonflammable, soundabsorbent material with surface-burning characteristics for flame-spread index of
25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as determined by testing
per ASTM E84.
2.04
PERFORATED METAL PANEL CEILING SYSTEM: MC03
A. Ceiling system consisting of ceiling elements hooked-on to a fully concealed

suspension system.
B. Planks in electrolytic galvanized steel, phosphatised and chemically treated.
Plank ends have a double bent edge at one end to form a hook to engage the Zprofile and a single bend at the opposite end.
Plank sides sufficiently high to ensure a minimum deflection across the length of
the plank. All planks square edged.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5133/4
C. Perforations: Manufacturer shall supply planks with perforation pattern with a

nominal 10 mm plain border on all sides. Perforations pattern shall have a 1.5
mm diameter hole resulting in a 22% open area.
D. Manufacturer shall supply acoustic mineral wool pad (100 kg/m3) 40 mm thick,
and factory applied inside the panels, to completely fill the plank.
E. Finish: The coating shall consist of a tough and durable 2-layer polyester finish
applied in a continuous coil-coating process ensuring uniform coating and
absolute adhesion. Colour as selected by the Engineer.
F. Suspension System
1.
Suspension system components shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer for a complete and stable installation.
2.
Primary Suspension: Rows of L-shaped, 2 mm galvanized steel 30 x 30
primary angles installed on 1200 mm centres supported by a suitable
hanger fixed to the upper structure at a maximum distance of 1250 mm on
centres. Primary suspension runner shall be fixed on both ends to the
wall to prevent upward movement.
3.
Secondary Suspension: Pre-punched Z-profile 1.25 mm galvanized steel
secondary runners shall be fixed perpendicular to the primary suspension
at a correct distance to support the plank ends.
G. Perimeter Profiles: Manufacturers standard or custom made profiles as
recommended by the manufacturer.
H. Product Reference Luxalon Hook-on Plank Ceiling system, perforation pattern
138.
I. Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer for a complete installation.
2.05
A. ASTM A 240/A 240 M
Standard Specification for Chromium & Chromium

Nickel stainless steel plate, sheet and strip for
General Applications.
B. ASTM A 591/A 591 M
Standard Specification for steel sheet, etectrolytic

Zinc coated for light coating weight applications.
C. ASTM C 635
Standard Specification for the Manufacture,

Performance and Testing of Metal Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel
Ceilings.
D. ASTM E 84
Standard Test Method for Surface

Characteristics of Building Materials.
E. ASTM E 1264
Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling

Products.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5133/5
Burning
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and

substrates to which linear metal ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect
ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of linear metal ceilings.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. All materials shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers written

recommendations including specific additional requirements as may be called for
in the specification or shown on the drawings.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1.
objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or
ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to avoid
obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2.
produces hanger spacing that interfere with the location of hangers at
spacing required to support standard suspension system members, install
supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or
equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers
to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by
referenced standards and publications.
3.
Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye-screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for structure to which hangers are attached as well as for type
of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to
deteriorate or fail because of age, corrosion, and elevated temperatures.
4.
Space hangers not more than 1200 mm on center along each member
supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown.
5.
Install edge moldings at edge of each metal ceiling area and at locations
where edge of units would otherwise be exposed after completion of
Work. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system to level tolerance of
3mm in 3.5m.
a.
Scribe and cut metal panel units for accurate fit at borders and at
interruptions and penetrations by other work through ceilings.
Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence of
buckling or variations in flatness exceeding referenced standards
for stretcher-leveled metal sheet.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5133/6
6.
3.03
Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to

room axis in both directions, unless otherwise shown.
CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of metal tile ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturers written instructions
for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace panels
and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired
to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5133/7
SECTION 09 5134
METAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of metal ceiling
systems as scheduled on drawings.
1.
Section 05 5000
Metal Fabrications.
2.
Section 09 5200
Gypsum Board Suspended Ceiling.
3.
Section 09 5443
PVC Stretched Ceiling.
4.
Division 21 "Fire Protection" for sprinkler heads in metal ceilings.
5.
Division 23 "Air Outlets and Inlets" for grilles, registers, and diffusers in
metal ceilings.
6.
Division 26 Section "Lighting" for lighting fixtures in metal ceilings.
1.02
A. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install metal ceiling

systems to withstand the effects of applicable loads and without showing
permanent deformation of ceiling system components including panels and
suspension system; noise caused by vibration, deflection, and displacement of
ceiling units; and permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
1.03
SUBMITTALS:
A. Product data for each type of product specified. Include installation methods for
each type of substrate.
B. Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and
coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1.
Ceiling Pattern.
2.
Joint pattern.
3.
Ceiling suspension members.
4.
5.
Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets,
speakers, sprinkler heads, and access panels. Ceiling perimeter, Special
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5134/1
Metal Ceilings
moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures with adjoining

construction.
C. Samples of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size
indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of
Work.
1.
Panel: 300 mm long samples of each type of ceiling.
2.
300mm long samples of suspension system members.
3.
Samples of all accessories required.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer with minimum five years

experience in metal ceiling systems installations similar in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of metal ceiling panels and
suspension system from one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test Response Characteristics: Provide metal panel ceilings with surface
burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as
developed by testing per ASTM E 84 by an acceptable agency.
D. Mockups: Before installing metal ceilings, construct mockups for each form of
construction and finish required in a location and of size as directed to verify
selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and qualities of materials and execution.
E. Approved sample may become part of finished work if approved by the Engineer
at the time of Substantial Completion.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.06
COORDINATION
A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of metal ceiling units

and suspension system components with other work supported by, or penetrating
through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression
system components and partition systems if applicable.
1.07
A. Delivery metal ceiling, suspension system components, and accessories to

Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed,
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5134/2
Metal Ceilings
conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture,
humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other
causes.
1.08
PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.09
WARRANTY

agreeing to repair or replace metal ceiling that fails in materials, finish or
workmanship.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5134/3
Metal Ceilings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Manufacturers specified hereafter are specified for the purposes of establishing

minimum quality standards. Manufacturers which are equal to or better than
those specified, and which conform to the design requirements and color
1.
Luxalon Architectural Products
Hunter Douglas Middle East
Dubai, UAE.
2.
Gema Metal Ceilings by Armstrong
Switzerland
3.
Burgess
UK
4.
Or approved equal.
2.02
METAL CEILING PANS: GENERAL
A. Metal Ceiling Panels:

configuration indicated.
Provide manufacturers standard metal panels of
B. Sheet Metal Characteristics: Smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes

1.
Stainless Steel Sheet: Complying with ASTM A 240/A 240 M, Type 304.
2.
Aluminum Sheet: Roll formed aluminum sheet complying with ASTM
B209/B209M, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer for
type of use and finishes indicated.
C. Fabrication: Manufacturers standard units of size, profile and edge treatment
indicated and finished to comply with requirements indicated.
1.
Lay-in Panels: Set in exposed suspension grid.
2.
Clip-in Panels: Designed to clip in and be securely retained by formed
edges or accessory clips.
2.03
STAINLESS STEEL SHEET CEILING: MC01
A. Design and engineer the custom made ceiling consisting of stainless steel panels
and hot-dip galvanized suspension system.
1.
Stainless steel panel finish to match approved sample.
2.04
PERFORATED METAL CEILING: MC03
A. Refer Section 09 5133.

2.05
STAINLESS STEEL FEATURE CEILING: MC04
A. Design and engineer the custom made ceiling consisting of stainless steel ring
on metal framing and stainless steel threaded rod suspended system.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5134/4
Metal Ceilings
B. Metal framing shall be galvanized and painted. Perforation requirement beside

speakers are indicated on drawings.
C. Finish: Brushed finish to match approved sample.
2.06
METAL PANEL CEILING SYSTEM: MC05
A. System: 300mm wide lay-on panel system, square edged, concealed grid
access sub-construction.
B. Ceiling panels roll formed from 0.7 mm thick pre-painted stove enameled
aluminum strips, polyester finished. 29 mm high upstand at the panel ends give
enhanced rigidity, panels with 5 mm beveled edges to form visually closed Vgroove joints.
C. Finish: Color and finish to match approved sample.
D. Suspension System: Suspension system components shall be as recommended
by the manufacturer for a complete and stable installation.
1.
Wall angles: L-shaped and W-shaped edge profiles.
E. Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer for a complete installation.
F. Product Ref.: Luxalon wide panel 300 C Lay-on on wall profiles system.
2.07
SUSPENSION SYSTEM: GENERAL
A. Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturers standard direct hung

metal suspension system of types, structural classifications and finishes
indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Provide complete systems with runners, splices, connector clips hangers,
molding, retention clips and other suspension components required for a
complete and stable installation.
2.08
FINISHES
A. Finishes General: Comply with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
and Metal Products.
B. Aluminum Finish: Manufacturers standard powder coated finish, complying with
coating manufacturers written instructions for surface perforation, pretreatment,
application, baking and minimum dry film thickness.
C. Stainless Steel Finishes:
1.
As indicated on drawings and match approved sample.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5134/5
Metal Ceilings
2.09
A. ASTM A 240/A 240 M
Standard Specification for Chromium & Chromium

Nickel stainless steel plate, sheet and strip for
General Applications.
B. ASTM A 591/A 591 M
Standard Specification for steel sheet, etectrolytic

Zinc coated for light coating weight applications.
C. ASTM B 209/B 209 M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet Plate.
D. ASTM C 635
Standard Specification for the Manufacture,

Performance and Testing of Metal Suspension
Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel
Ceilings.
E. ASTM E 84

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5134/6
Burning
Metal Ceilings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and

substrates to which linear metal ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect
ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of linear metal ceilings.
corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. All materials shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers written

recommendations including specific additional requirements as may be called for
in the specification or shown on the drawings.
1.
ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to avoid
obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2.
produces hanger spacing that interfere with the location of hangers at
spacing required to support standard suspension system members, install
referenced standards and publications.
3.
Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye-screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for structure to which hangers are attached as well as for type
of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to
deteriorate or fail because of age, corrosion, and elevated temperatures.
4.
Space hangers not more than 1200 mm on center along each member
supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown.
5.
Install edge moldings at edge of each metal ceiling area and at locations
where edge of units would otherwise be exposed after completion of
Work. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system to level tolerance of
3mm in 3.5m.
a.
Scribe and cut metal panel units for accurate fit at borders and at
interruptions and penetrations by other work through ceilings.
Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence of
buckling or variations in flatness exceeding referenced standards
for stretcher-leveled metal sheet.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5134/7
Metal Ceilings
6.
3.03
Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to

room axis in both directions, unless otherwise shown.
CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of metal tile ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturers written instructions
for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace panels
and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired
to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5134/8
Metal Ceilings
SECTION 09 5200
GYPSUM BOARD SUSPENDED CEILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of the following:
1.
Gypsum board panels for ceilings.
2.
Steel framing systems to receive gypsum board.
3.
Access panels.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each type of product specified.

B. Shop Drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and
expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, locations of access panels,
details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.
C. Samples:
1.
Trim Accessories: Full size sample in 300mm long length and suspension
system.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with five years
experience.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide material and products with flame
spread index or 25 or less smoke develop index of 450 or less as determined by
testing identical products as tested per ASTM E 84 (Class A), NFPA 255 or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Mockups: Prior to commencing gypsum board ceiling, construct mockups of at
least 9 sq. m in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects of finishes as well
as qualities of materials and execution. The mock-up should indicate fixture of
light, supply and return air diffuser, and sprinkler. Simulate finished lighting
conditions for review of in-place unit of Work.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5200/1
Gypsum Board Suspended Ceiling
1.04
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand

name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against
damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion,
construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to
prevent sagging.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5200/2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. British Gypsum Co.

UK.
B. National Gypsum Co.
Saudi Arabia
C. USG
Dubai, UAE
D. Knauf
Dubai, UAE
2.02
STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED

CEILINGS

B. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.6
mm thick.
C. Hangers: 5mm X 25mm Galvanized steel straps (ASTM A653M, G60) or 6mm
diameter galvanized rods (ASTM A510) as approved and height adjustable.
D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal
thickness of 1.37mm, a minimum 12.7mm wide flange with ASTM A 653M, hotdip galvanized zinc coating, 38.1 mm deep, 0.707 kg/m, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Furring Channels: Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A653M, hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating, ASTM C645, 22 mm deep, 0.45 kg/m unless otherwise
indicated.
F. All steel framing/suspension members are to be hot-dip galvanized.
2.03
GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
A. Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
B. Gypsum Board (GB01 & GB02): ASTM C 36/ ASTM C 1396 manufactured to
have more sag resistance than Regular Type Gypsum Board.
1.
Type: Water resistant type in wet areas.
2.
Edges: Tapered and beveled.
3.
Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5200/3
C. Acoustic Gypsum Board GB03 is specified in Section 09 5126 - Gypsum Panel

Ceilings.
2.04
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Complying with ASTM C 1047 and

requirements indicated below:
1.
Material: Steel sheet zinc coated by hot-dip process or rolled zinc.
a.
Corner bead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
b.
LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to
receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim, unless
c.
One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot and removable
strip covering slot opening.
B. Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide
manufacturer's extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated
including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying
with the following requirements:
1.
Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer
and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the
strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with
ASTM B 221/B 221M for alloy and temper 6063-T5, powder coated finish.
2.05
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.

B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board:
indicated.
Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise
C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinylbased products complying with the following requirements for formulation and
intended use.
1.
Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
a.
Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat
over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories.
b.
Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third)
coats.
D. Retempering of joint compound will not be permitted, nor, will the use of partially
set joint compound be permitted.
2.06
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Non sag, paintable, non staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that
effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints as
demonstrated by representative assemblies according to ASTM E90.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5200/4
2.07
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation

standards.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Expansion (Control) Joints: Provide as indicated or as required with required
support system.
2.08
A. ASTM A 510/A 510 M
Standard Specification for General Requirements for

Wire Rods, Carbon Steel.
B. ASTM A 641/A 641 M
Standard Specification for Zinc coated Carbon Steel

Wire.
C. ASTM A 653
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc coated

by Hot Dip Process.
D. ASTM B 221/B 221 M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum

Alloy for extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and
Tubes.
E. ASTM C 36/C 36M
Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboards.
F. ASTM C 475/C 475 M
Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint

Tape for finishing Gypsum Board.
G. ASTM C 645
Standard Specification for Non-structural Steel

Framing Members.
H. ASTM C 834
Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
I. ASTM C 840
Standard Specification for Application and Finishing

of Gypsum Board.
J. ASTM C 1002
Standard Specification for Self Tapping Screws for

the Application of Gypsum Panels to Wood or Steel
Studs.
K. ASTM C 1047
Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum

Wallboard.
L. ASTM C 1395/C 1395 M
Specification for Gypsum Ceiling Boards.
M. ASTM E 84

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5200/5
Burning
N. ASTM E 90
Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement

of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building
Partitions and Elements.
O. GA 216
Gypsum Association, Specification for

Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5200/6
the
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach to or abut, cast-inanchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with

installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure that inserts and other
provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive
ceiling hangers that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to
support ceilings.
3.03
INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to
framing installation.
1.
ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss
obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counters
playing, or other equally effective means.
2.
produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers
required to support standard suspension system members, install
referenced standards.
3.
Secure hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or
other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated,
but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation
standard.
D. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports
as indicated.
E. Provide additional framing and blocking at openings and to support built-in
anchorage and attachment devices for other work.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5200/7
3.04
APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting
end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling.
Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing
member.
C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or
damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not
more than 1.5 mm of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications
where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind
end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger
vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints
at corners of framed openings where possible.
E. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
F. Form control and expansion joints at locations indicated and as required, with
space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing
behind gypsum panels.
G. Fasten gypsum board to furring channels at not more than 300mm O.C.
3.05
GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS
A. Single-Layer Application:
1.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels after wall/partition board application to
the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless
3.06
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Install corner bead at external corners.

B. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed.
Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except
where other types are indicated.
C. Install control joints at locations required and in specific locations as approved.
3.07
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5200/8
prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint
compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using settingtype joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories
having flanges not requiring tape.
D. Fill openings around cutouts with compound or acoustical sealant as
E. Reinforce all joints at tapered edges and interior corners with joint reinforcing
tape set in joint compound.
F. Fill all joints, fastener heads, trim recesses, cracks and other depressions with
joint compound. Finish smooth and flush so that joints, screws and other items
will not be visible after painting.
3.08
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Engineer will conduct an above-ceiling observation

prior to installation of gypsum board ceilings and report any deficiencies in the
Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling
support framing until deficiencies have been corrected.
B. Tolerances: Finish surface within 3mm in 2.4 meter for plumb, level, warp and
bow.
3.09
A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

Installer, that ensure gypsum board assemblies are without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5200/9
SECTION 09 5443
PVC STRETCHED CEILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of the following:
1.
PVC stretched ceiling system consisting of custom cut, flexible PVC
membrane facing material held in place by aluminium wall-mounted rails.
B. The Contractor to submit method statement for execution of work for approval by
the Engineer before proceeding with the work.
This shall include
recommendations of the manufacturer and quality control procedures.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASTM C423 Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption
Coefficients by Reverberation Room Method.
B. ASTM E84 Test Methods for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
C. NFPA 255 Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1.
Submit manufacturers literature describing system to be provided.
Include installation procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1.
Submit scaled shop drawings showing general layout, jointing, anchoring
sizes and types, shapes, thickness, and other similar detailed information
necessary to fully describe installation.
2.
Elevations shall indicate arrangement of joints. Clearly indicate locations
of seams, methods of joining seams, direction of membrane.
3.
Shop drawings shall be of sufficient detail and scale to determine
compliance with design intent.
C. Samples
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5443/1
PVC Stretched Ceiling
1.
2.
Submit 2 samples as follows:

a.
Each type mounting extrusion, 300 mm long.
b.
Each type membrane facing 300 x 300 mm.
Submit 2 samples of stretched ceiling system mounted on a substrate,
demonstrating typical joining conditions.
D. Certificates:
1.
Provide certification from manufacturer of ceiling system attesting to their
products compliance with specified requirements.
2.
Provide certification that specialized equipment as may be required by
manufacturer for proper installation of system shall be utilized.
3.
Provide certification that technicians utilized for installation have been
trained or qualified by manufacturer.
E. Submit listing of not less than 5 of installers most recent installations
representing similar scope and complexity to Project requirements. Listing shall
include information as follows:
1.
Project Name and Address.
2.
Name of Owner.
3.
Name and phone number of Contractor.
4.
Name and phone number of Architect.
5.
Date of Completion.
F. Submit procedures to be followed in cleaning and maintaining stretched ceiling.
Include a copy of instruction in Operating and Maintenance Data Manual.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer shall be trained, or qualified by manufacturer in installation techniques

and procedures of stretched ceiling system and shall demonstrate a minimum of
3 years successful experience in such installation.
B. Single Source Responsibility:
1.
To greatest extent possible, materials shall be products of a single
manufacturer or items standard with manufacturer of ceiling system.
2.
Provide secondary materials which are produced, or are specifically
recommended by system manufacturer to ensure compatibility.
1.05
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturers

original unopened packaging.
B. PVC materials shall be unwrapped and inspected upon arrival for flaws and
defects. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of inspection.
C. Storage and Protection:
1.
Store materials in a clean areas, free from dust and damage from
construction activities.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5443/2
2.
3.
4.
1.06
Do not store facing material in bolts in an upright position, or beneath

other materials.
Cover materials with plastic in a manner to provide air circulation.
Remove damaged, defective, or rejected materials from Site.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements
1.
Maintain ambient temperature and humidity within spaces to receive
stretched ceiling system at levels indicated for final acceptance. Levels
shall be maintained continuously from at least 48 hours prior to installation
until space is turned over to Owner.
B. Field Measurements: Verify field dimensions prior to fabrication.
1.07
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule installation of stretched ceiling system as late as possible in sequence

of construction schedule to reduce damage.
1.
Do not install system until space is enclosed, weather tight and
conditioned.
2.
Under no circumstances shall installation begin prior to completion of
abutting grid ceiling installation.
1.08
SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Submit a written warranty signed by Contractor agreeing to repair or replace

Work under this Section that fails in materials, workmanship, finish and color at
no additional cost to the Owner. Stretched ceiling system shall remain
dimensionally stable and shall not sag or distort due to normal variances of
temperature or humidity.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from the date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5443/3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Barrilux
www.barrilux.com
B. Barrisol
www.barrisol.com
C. Extenzo
www.extenzo.com
2.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: PVC 01
A. Stretched ceiling from wall to wall without intermediate suspenders. Custom

made to the required dimensions, shapes and designs.
B. Components:
1.
The membrane made of one or multiple sheets welded together in the
factory in function of the dimensions and shapes of the room.
2.
A proprietary PVC semi rigid hook, welded on the contour of the
membrane, permitting the hooking under tension on a wall rail.
3.
A specially designed aluminium rail, assuring good rigidity, is fixed to the
walls all around the treated space or fixed to rigid supports at a desired
level.
C.
System to ffacilitate the technical maintenance of all type of services installations

in the plenum and permit the installation of all electromechanical fixtures.
D. PVC Membrane Specification:
1.
Composition: 100% PVC, recyclable.
2.
Thickness: 0.17 mm.
3.
Surface Mass: 240 g/m2.
4.
Width: 1.30 m 2.95 (sheeting).
5.
Type: Translucent to match approved sample.
6.
Light Transmission: 44% Reflection, 55% Transmission.
7.
Physical Properties:
Length
Transv.
Tensile strength
21
22
N/mm2
Elongation at break
230
240
%
Tearing strength
220
225
N/mm
E. Membrane Fire Resistance: Non-flammable (Class 0 to BS 476), no flame
propagation, no toxic fumes.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5443/4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions.

1.
Examine substrate and spaces in which work is to be performed.
2.
Do not begin installation until;
a.
Space has been enclosed and is weather tight.
b.
Wet work has been completed and is dry.
c.
Painting is completed and wall base and floor covering is installed.
d.
Adjacent work of other trades have been completed.
3.
Penetrations shall be sealed against air and moisture leakage through
wall.
4.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing
substrate conditions.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements:
1.
Visible surface shall be full covered and free from wrinkles, sags, blisters,
and foreign mater,.
2.
Joints shall be tight, straight, true, plumb, and in proper relation to building
lines without ripples and waviness.
3.
Visible seams shall not be allowed.
B. Framework
1.
Install framework in strict compliance with shop drawings and
manufacturers instructions.
2.
Framework shall be installed around perimeter of each panel area. To
greatest extent possible, install members in continuous lengths.
3.
Installation of wall mounted rails
a.
Rails screwed or nailed horizontally to the walls of the treated
space, at the desired level.
b.
Rails shall takes the shape of the space and perfectly adhere to
angular and curved shapes.
4.
Install framework shimmed, plumbed, and scribed to align with adjacent
surfaces. Attach in a manner to prevent sagging or moving out position
after membrane has been stretched tightly. Framework members shall
not telescope through face of membrane.
C. Installation of the stretch PVC membrane
1.
The false ceiling shall be tailored in the factory to the dimensions and
shapes of the space, then heated and stretched and hooked in the rails.
2.
A proprietary semi rigid hook, welded all around the membrane makes
this installation possible.
3.
All cuts for electromechanical fittings reinforced by rigid, 3 to 4 mm thick
elements.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5443/5
3.03
CLEANING
A. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris, leaving area in a neat and clean
condition.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 5443/6
SECTION 09 6340
STONE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation, but not limited to:
1.
Stone flooring and skirting.
2.
Stone thresholds.
3.
Stair Tread & Riser.
4.
Crystallized glass for flooring and ablution seating in Prayer Hall.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A. Polished Finish: Smooth finish that produces sharp, mirror like reflections.
Reflected images of overhead fluorescent tubes have straight lines without
visible distortion when viewed at arms length.
B. Honed Finish: Smooth, non reflective finish similar to that produced by grinding
with a 400 to 1200 grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 0.13 mm when faces
are tested for flatness with a 600 mm straightedge.
C. Flamed Finish: Textured finish achieved by blowtorch strength heat application
to create a deeply textured surface.
D. Antique Finish: Textured finish with stone tumbled with sand, pebbles or ball
bearings to create a weathered, textured, aged finish.
E. Filled Finish: Travertine slabs, filled with cement or epoxy and then polished or
honed to produce typical finish.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum value of 10, based on testing according to

ASTM C 241, unless a higher value is required by the referenced building stone
standard.
B. Static Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C 1028, values as follows:
1.
Level Surfaces: A minimum of 0.6.
2.
Ramp: A minimum of 0.8.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6340/1
Stone Flooring
1.04
SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For the following:

1.
Each variety of stone. Include data on physical properties.
2.
Stone accessories and other manufactured products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other Work.
C. Samples for Verification:
1.
For each stone type indicated: Include five samples 300 x 300 mm
showing the full range of variations in appearance characteristics
expected in completed Work.
2.
For each color of grout required.
D. Maintenance Data: For stone flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
Include Product Data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer
and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who employs experienced stone fitters who

are skilled in installing stone flooring similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project and whose projects have a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm that employs skilled workers who fabricate stone
flooring similar to those indicated for this Project and whose products have a
C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish,
from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
D. Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of cementitious
material, grout, admixture, stone accessory, sealant, and other material from a
single manufacturer.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1.
Build mockups for each kind of flooring design approximately 2400 mm
square unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed Work if
undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion and approved by the
Engineer.
1.06
A. Lift stone with wide belt slings. Do not use wire ropes that may cause staining.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6340/2
Stone Flooring
B. Store stone on pallets with non staining separators and non staining waterproof
covers and maintain ventilation to prevent condensation.
C. Store cementitious material on elevated platforms under cover and in a dry
location.
1.07
WARRANTY

agreeing to repair or replace wood flooring that fails in materials, finish or
workmanship.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6340/3
Stone Flooring
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS
Stone Suppliers
1.
Marble and Granite Centre
Doha Qatar
Tel: 974 4422828
Fax: 974 4422303
2.
Indu Stone
Doha Qatar
Tel: 974 4436496
Fax: 974 4436496
3.
National Marble
Doha Qatar
Tel: 974 4352971
Fax: 974 4420497
4.
Savema SPA
Marble & Granite
Italy
Tel 39 0584 79441
Fax: 39 0584 790690
5.
Kuwait Standard Group
Kuwait
Tel: 261 0821
Fax: 264 0643
Mobile: 9750084
6.
Salam Al Kuwait.
Kuwait
Tel: 2421440
Mob: 961 3260
Fax: 532 2836
7.
Stone Boutique
Kuwait
Tel: 729 1326
8.
Hayat Marble Co.
Kuwait
Tel: 481 2459/483 1659
9.
Or approved equal
B. Adhesives and Grouting Materials

1.
U.S.A.
2.
Mapei
Italy
3.
Technokolla
Italy.
4.
BAL Adhesives
UK.
5.
Or approved equal.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6340/4
Stone Flooring
C. Sealer
1.
Glaze N Seal, USA.
2.
Billinzoni, Italy
3.
BASF.
4.
Or approved equal.
2.02
STONE, GENERAL
A. Match approved samples for variety, color, finish, and other stone characteristics
relating to aesthetic effects.
B. Provide stone that is free of cracks, seams, and starts impairing structural
integrity or function.
C. Provide stone from a single quarry for each variety of stone required.
D. Quarry stone in a manner to ensure that as-quarried block orientations yield
finished stone with required characteristics.
E. All stone shall be of soundness, texture, graining, color and tone matching the
sample approved.
2.03
STONE TYPES
A. Stone Standard: ASTM C 503 for Marble Dimension Stone and, ASTM C 568 for
limestone.
B. Finish: The final finish of the stone shall be as indicated on drawings.
C. Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
D. Stone type: Refer to Finishing schedule.
E. Stone type and characteristics:
Name
ST01
ST02
ST03
ST04
ST05
ST06
ST07
Crema Marfil Marble

(Grade A to match
Architects sample)
Ligure Beige (Grey)
Marble
Emperador Light
Marble
M076-Dark Brown
Marble
Not Used
Sinai Pearl (Light)
Marble
Limestone Classic
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Origin
Compression
Breaking Load
2
kg/cm
Water
Absorption
%
Bulk
Density
3
kg/m
Spain
1775
0.20
2669
Turkey
1017
0.103
2700
Turkey
1580
0.40
2702
China
750
0.15
2600
Egypt
939
0.58
2638
Turkey
200
2200
09 6340/5
Stone Flooring
ST08
ST21
Bursa Beige Marble

Travertino Navona
2.04
CRYSTALLIZED GLASS
Turkey
Italy
2020
957
A. Quartz based artificial stone comprising

characteristics:
1.
Sizes
2.
Finishes
3.
Density
4.
Compressive strength
5.
Water Absorption
2.05
0.109
1.00
2695
2410
mainly marble and having the following

As shown on drawings.
As indicated on drawings.
2650 kg/m3 (ASTM C97)
400 MPa (ASTM C170)
0.02% (ASTM C97).
SETTING BED MATERIALS
A. Flooring and threshold thick bed installation: Latex-Portland Cement Mortar

ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:
6.
Mixture of factory prepared high strength Portland cement and graded
aggregate and Latex Additive.
7.
Product ref.: Laticrete 226 thick bed mortar and Laticrete 3701 mortar
admix or approved equal.
B. Skirting Thin Bed Installation: Latex Portland mortar ANSI A 118.4 consisting
of the following
1.
sand and latex additive.
2.
Product ref.: Laticrete 211 concrete filler powder and laticrete 4237 latex
thin set adhesive mortar admix or approved equal.
C. Stair Tread & Riser: Epoxy adhesive ANSI A118.3.
1.
High strength 100% solid epoxy adhesive.
2.
Product ref.: Laticrete Latapoxy 300 or approved equal.
D. Setting bed for crystallized glass panels: As per recommendations of the
manufacturer.
2.06
GROUT
A. Grout shall be shrink free type as recommended by the manufacturer for the type
of stones.
B. Grout Colors: To approval.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, composed as follows:
1.
Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared,
dry-grout mix and latex additive.
a.
Sanded and Unsanded Grout: Laticrete series 1500/1600 or
approved equal.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6340/6
Stone Flooring
D. Epoxy Grout 100% solid epoxy stainless grout for reflective pool: ANSI A118.3.
1.
Latacrete Latapoxy SP-100 or approved equal.
E. Jointing for Crystallized Glass Panels shall be as per recommendations of the
manufacturer.
2.07
CONTROL JOINTS MATERIAL
A. Stainless steel with compressible infill as manufactured by Vexcolt Limited, U.K

(Tel: 44 0 1420 478226; Fax: 44 0 1420 475826) or similar approved equal and
as per manufacturer recommendations. Control joint location as per approved
shop drawings. Colour to approval.
2.08
DIVIDER STRIP
A. Angle or L shaped, stainless steel divider strips as indicated on drawings, longest

available length and depth equal to stone thickness plus depth of setting bed.
Exposed edge shall be polished.
2.09
ABRASIVE STRIP INSERTS
A. Provide abrasive insert strips made of two part epoxy combined with aluminum
oxide grit set in epoxy adhesive for step tread as per location and details on
drawings. Color to approval.
2.10
STONE SEALER
A. Sealer: As per manufacturers recommendation usage. Colorless, slip, stain and

graffiti resistant sealer specifically formulated for stone types, finishes and not
affecting color or physical properties of stone surfaces.
2.11
STONE CLEANER
A. Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming
stone tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations
indicated by stone tile producers and grout manufacturers.
2.12
STONE FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone flooring in sizes and shapes necessary to comply with
requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1.
Fabricate stone thresholds in sizes and profiles as indicated or required to
provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.
B. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to
comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6340/7
Stone Flooring
stone association. Do not execute field cutting except those approved by the
Engineer.
1.
Pattern: As indicated.
2.
Thickness of Stone Flooring: As indicated on Drawings.
3.
Cut stone to produce uniform joints.
4.
Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles.
C. Pattern Arrangement: Fabricate and arrange stone units with veining and other
natural markings to comply with the following requirements:
1.
Cut stone from one block or contiguous, matched blocks in which natural
markings occur.
2.
Arrange units in such a way that stone veins in adjacent panels shall
match unless otherwise indicated and shall be uni-directional.
D. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with
requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
1.
Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in
place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone
units match range of colors and other appearance characteristics
represented in approved samples and mockups.
2.13
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions

for mix proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing
time, and other procedures needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with
optimum performance characteristics.
1.
Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or
other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium
chloride.
2.
Mixing:
a.
Machine Mixing: Mixer shall be a rotating blade type mortar mixer.
Place liquid in mixer, start machine and add dry material. Mix only
long enough to wet out the batch. DO NOT OVERMIX. Stop
mixer and dump mortar from mixer promptly. Clean out mixer
promptly with water.
b.
Hand Mixing: Place liquid in clean container or mixing box, add dry
material and mix. Adjust amount of liquid or dry material to obtain
proper consistency.
c.
Epoxy Mixing: Stir A & B liquids separately. Pour entire contents
of A and B jars into a clean mixing pail. Mix until uniform with a
clean mixing stick or slow speed electric drill mixer. Add filler
powder and stir to a smooth, trowelable consistency. Adjust the
quantity of filler powder for grouting purposes; add more filler for
wide grout joints and less filler powder for narrow joints.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6340/8
Stone Flooring
2.14
A. ASTM C 97:
Test Methods for absorption and Bulk specific gravity of

dimensions stone.
B. ASTM C 99:
Test methods for Modules of Reptive of Dimension stone.
C. ASTM C 119:
Terminology relating to Dimensioned Stone.
D. ASTM C 144:
Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
E. ASTM C 170:
Test Methods for compressive strength of dimension stone.
F. ASTM C 241:
Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to

Foot Traffic.
G. ASTM C 503:
Specification for Marble Dimension Stone.
H. ASTM C 568:
Specification for Limestone.
I. ASTM C 615:
Specification for Granite Dimension Stone.
J. ASTM C 616:
Specification for Quartz-based Dimension Stone.
K. ASTM C 880:
Test Method for Flexural strength of dimension stone.
L. ANSI A 108.3:
Installation of Control/Expansion Joints.
M. ANSI A 108.4:
Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesive or Water

Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
N. ANSI A 108.6:
Specifications for Polymer modified cement grouts for Tile

Installation.
O. ANSI A 108.10:
Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework.
P. ANSI A 118.1:
Specifications for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.
Q. ANSI A 118.3:
Specifications for Epoxy Adhesive Grout.
R. ANSI A118.4:
Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
S. ANSI A 118.6:
Specification for Latex-Portland Cement Grout.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6340/9
Stone Flooring
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION OF STONE
A. Installation by thin bed:

1.
The mortar shall be applied with the flat side of the trowel using a scraping
motion to work the material into good contact with the surface to be
covered. Additional mortar is then applied with the notched edge of the
trowel. A trowel having minimum notch size of approximately 6 mm x 10
mm is recommended for Marble or Stone.
2.
Only as much mortar shall be applied as can be covered within 20-30
minutes, or while surface is still tacky and wet. When installing larger
pieces of marble/stone, a small quantity of the mortar shall be troweled or
scraped onto the back of each. Marble/stone pieces shall then be set in
place and rapped or beaten with a small beating block to insure 100% full
bedding and a true surface. Marble/stone shall be aligned to show
uniform joints and then allowed to set unit firm.
3.
Excess mortar shall be cleaned from the surface of the marble/stone with
a wet cloth or sponge while the mortar is fresh.
B. Installation by thick bed
1.
Place a slurry bond coat on concrete prepared to receive mortar bed.
Introduce mortar bed while slurry is tacky, to the required thickness.
2.
Before placing marble/stone on a green or wet screed bed, a slurry bond
coat (white cement based) shall be applied to the mortar bed using a flat
trowel. Thickness of the bond coat shall be approximately 1.5 mm. A
skim coat of the mortar shall be applied to the back of each marble/stone
just prior to placing on the bed.
3.
Marble/stone shall be placed in the wet slurry bond coat before the
surface dries. Uniform joints shall be maintained.
4.
After each piece is laid, it shall be beaten in with a wooden block or rubber
mallet to level the surface and imbed the marble/stone. Beating shall be
done before mortar takes initial set.
5.
Surface shall be pitched to drains where specified.
6.
Rake out joints to depth required to receive grout, as units are set.
3.03
STONE THRESHOLD INSTALLATION
A. At locations adjacent to stone flooring, install stone thresholds in same type of

setting bed as abutting stone flooring, unless otherwise indicated.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6340/10
Stone Flooring
3.04
GROUTING OF STONE FLOORING
A. Grout stone joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed. Force grout into
joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining stone and other surfaces.
After initial set of grout, finish joints by tooling to produce a slightly concave
polished joint, free of drying cracks.
C. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days except as
otherwise recommended by latex-additive manufacturer.
3.05
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Level: For horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 3m or 6 mm in 6m.
B. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion
of walls and partitions, do not exceed 3 mm in 2400 mm or 6 mm in 6 m.
C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1.5 mm or of
nominal joint width, whichever is less.
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 0.8
mm difference between planes of adjacent units.
3.06
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace stone flooring of the following description:

1.
Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be
repaired if methods and results are approved.
2.
Defective joints.
3.
Stone flooring, and joints not matching approved samples and mockups.
4.
Stone flooring not complying with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace in a manner that results in stone flooring's matching approved samples
and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of
replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone flooring as work progresses. Remove mortar
fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Clean stone flooring after setting and grouting are complete. Use procedures
recommended by stone fabricator for types of application.
E. Apply sealer to cleaned stone flooring according to sealer manufacturer's written
instructions.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6340/11
Stone Flooring
3.07
PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from installed stone for a minimum of 72 hours.

B. Protect stone surfaces, edges, and corners during curing and during the
construction period from damage. Use securely fastened untreated wood,
plywood, or heavy cardboard, and a layer of plastic sheeting to prevent damage.
C. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective coverings and
clean paving surfaces. Reseal cleaned surfaces.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6340/12
Stone Flooring
SECTION 09 6513
RESILIENT BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of resilient wall
bases as scheduled.
1.02
SUBMITTALS

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's
standard-size Samples but not less than 300 mm long, of each resilient product
color, texture, and pattern required.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide resilient base with a Critical

Radiant Flux Classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm, as
determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648.
1.04
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from
the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended
by manufacturer, but not less than 10 deg C or more than 32 deg C.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less

than 21 deg C or more than 35 deg C, in spaces to receive resilient products
(tiles, sheet) during the following time periods:
1.
48 hours before installation.
2.
During installation.
3.
48 hours after installation.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6513/1
Resilient Base
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended

by manufacturer, but not less than 13 deg C or more than 35 deg C.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer and the

Manufacturer agreeing to replace any of the resilient bases, described within this
section that does not comply with requirements or that fails within the specified
warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years form date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6513/2
Resilient Base
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes of establishing

minimum quality standards. Manufacturers which are equal to, or better than
those specified and which conform to the designs requirements and color
selections, may be acceptable subject to the Engineers approval.
B. Nora Rubber Flooring
www.nora.com
C. Johnsonite
www.johnsonite.com
D. Mondo Rubber International, Inc
www.mondousa.com
2.02
RUBBER SKIRTING (SK05)
A. Product name: Nora rubber cove base, Art. S 1024 U, thickness approx 3 mm.
B. Material: Rubber compound.
C. Back of base: Smooth.
D. Standard: ASTM F 1861, for resilient wall base.
E. Halogen-Free: Products shall contain no halogens.
F. PVC-Free: Products shall contain no poly vinyl chloride.
G. Color: 716 slate grey.
2.03
VINYL SKIRTING (SK04)
A. Vinyl skirting to match adjacent flooring specified in Section 09 6536.

2.04
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement

based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by
manufacturers for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient
products and substrate conditions indicated.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6513/3
Resilient Base
2.05
A. ASTM E 648:
Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering

Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
B. ASTM F 710:
Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient

Flooring
C. ASTM F 1861:
Specification for Resilient Wall Base
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6513/4
Resilient Base
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting
performance.
1.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other
requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of
cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might
interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
2.
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to

ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D. Use trowellable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and
depressions in substrates.
E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1.
Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the
space where they are to be installed.
F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products
immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture,
alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after
3.03
RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturers written instruction for installing resilient base.

B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with
tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6513/5
Resilient Base
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base
in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top
edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.
G. Job-Formed Corners:
1.
Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.
Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of
base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to
length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without
removing more than half the wall base thickness.
2.
Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form
by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point
where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce
a snug fit to substrate.
3.04
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product

installation:
1.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a.
Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage
from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during
remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6513/6
Resilient Base
SECTION 09 6536
STATIC CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of anti-static
homogeneous vinyl tile flooring VLT1.
1.
Section 09 6900 - Access Flooring.
1.02
SUBMITTALS

B. Samples for Verification: Full size tile for type of floor covering indicated.
C. Maintenance Data: For floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project
that are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for static-control floor
covering installation indicated.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested
for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm
per ASTM E 648.
C. Static-Control Properties: Provide floor coverings with static-control properties
indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated
by an independent testing and inspecting agency.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6536/1
Static Control Resilient Flooring
1.04
A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the
weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by
manufacturer but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32
deg C).
1.
Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less

than in spaces to receive floor coverings for at least 48 hours before and during
installation and for at least 48 hours after installation unless manufacturer's
written recommendations specify a longer time period.
1.
After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range
B. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
D. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6536/2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Gerflor
UK.
B. Tarkett Sommer
France
C. Freudenberg System
USA
2.02
STATIC-CONTROL FLOOR COVERINGS
A. Homogeneous, calendered antistatic vinyl floor covering for factory applied

application on access flooring panels.
1.
Total thickness: 2 mm.
2.
Color Ref.: Mipolam Accord EL7, color 3103 Leda, by Gerflor.
B.
2.03
Products and manufacturers are specified for the purposes of establishing

minimum quality standards. Products which are equal to, or better than those
specified, and which conform to the Engineers design requirements and colour
selections, may be acceptable subject to Engineers approval.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Static-Control Adhesive: Adhesive product of floor covering manufacturer that

produces conductive continuity of floor covering system.
B. Grounding Strips: Provided and approved by floor covering manufacturer and
that produce conductive continuity of floor covering system to ground connection.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6536/3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer and manufacturer's representative present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and
other conditions affecting performance.
1.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other
requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of
cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might
interfere with adhesion or static-control characteristics of floor coverings.
2.
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations and

with oversight by manufacturer's representative to ensure adhesion of floor
coverings and conductive continuity of floor covering systems.
B. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using
method recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
3.03
A. Arrange for manufacturer's representative to oversee installation of static-control

resilient floor coverings.
B. Embed grounding strips in static-control adhesive. Extend strips beyond
perimeter of static-control resilient floor covering surfaces to ground points.
C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces,
permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets,
edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar
openings.
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for
future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use
chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
F. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar
items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with
pieces of floor coverings installed on covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges
to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to
substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6536/4
and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other

surface imperfections.
3.04
A. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during
remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.
Do not wax static-control resilient floor coverings.
2.
If recommended in writing by static-control resilient floor tile manufacturer,
apply protective static-control floor polish formulated to maintain or
enhance tile's electrical properties to tile surfaces that are free from soil,
adhesive, and surface blemishes.
a.
Verify that both polish and its application method are approved by
tile manufacturer and that polish will not leave an insulating film
that reduces tile's effectiveness for static control.
3.
Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Place
plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while
they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving
panels.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6536/5
SECTION 09 6723.13
EPOXY FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of epoxy flooring
and skirting (EC01 and SK02) as scheduled on drawings.
1.
Section 03 3000
Cast in Place Concrete.
2.
Section 03 5300
Concrete Topping
3.
Section 07 1800
Traffic Coating.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated including thickness of different layer
coats and application procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of flooring. Include details for treating substrate
joints and cracks, penetrations, and other termination conditions. Include layout
of traffic striping and markings.
C. Samples: Prepared on rigid backing and of same thickness and material
indicated for the Work.
1.
Provide stepped samples on backing large enough to illustrate build-up of
floorings.
D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that flooring comply with
requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations
within the last three years.
E. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals. Identify substrates and
type of flooring applied. Include recommendations for periodic inspections,
cleaning, care, maintenance, and repair of flooring.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6723.13/1
Epoxy Flooring
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer (Applicator) Qualifications: An experienced applicator who has

specialized in installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations:
1.
Use flooring of a single manufacturer.
2.
Obtain primary flooring materials, including primers, from flooring
manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials including aggregates, sheet
flashings, joint sealants, and substrate repair materials of type and from
source recommended by flooring manufacturer.
C. Mockups: Apply each type of flooring to at least 20 sq. m of substrate to
demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture,
color, and standard of workmanship.
1.
Remove and reapply mockups until they are approved.
2.
Keep approved mockups undisturbed during construction as a standard
for judging completed flooring.
1.04
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken and
bearing manufacturer's labels showing the following information:
1.
Manufacturer's brand name.
2.
Type of material.
3.
Directions for storage.
4.
Date of manufacture and shelf life.
5.
Lot or batch number.
6.
Mixing and application instructions.
7.
Color.
B. Store materials in a clean, dry location protected from exposure to direct sunlight.
In storage areas, maintain environmental conditions within range recommended
in writing by manufacturer.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply flooring within the range of ambient and

substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Contractor, Flooring Manufacturer

and Installer agreeing to repair or replace flooring that do not comply with
requirements or that deteriorate during the specified warranty period.
1.
Deterioration of flooring includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
Adhesive or cohesive failures.
b.
Abrasion or tearing failures.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6723.13/2
Epoxy Flooring
c.
d.
Surface crazing or spalling.

Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or
acids into deck substrate.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6723.13/3
Epoxy Flooring
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. BASF
B. Fosroc
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, and top coats; and miscellaneous

materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
2.03
EPOXY COATING
A. Description: Multi component solvent free epoxy floor flooring applied in two
coats with the following properties:
1.
Compressive strength:
75 N/mm2.
2.
Flexural strength:
19 N/mm2.
3.
Tensile strength:
15N/mm2.
B. Thickness: 1.5mm.
C. Color as selected.
D. Primer: Solvent free epoxy primer.
E. Product ref.: BASF Master Top 1210 plus, or approved Equal
2.04
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealants: Sealant recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate

and joint conditions indicated and for compatibility with coatings; complying with
ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications
or Grade P for deck applications, and use Grade T where subject to traffic or use
Grade NT elsewhere.
B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-mm) sheet material recommended by manufacturer.
C. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.
D. Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6723.13/4
Epoxy Flooring
2.05
ABRASIVE NOSING
A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast Iron Class 20 with an integral abrasive finish consisting of
aluminum oxide, in safety yellow color. Fabricate units in sizes and
configurations indicated and in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or
conditions.
2.06
A. ASTM C 920
Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
B. ASTM C1127
Standard Guide for use of High Solids Content, Cold, Liquid

applied Elastomeric Waterproofing membrane.
C. ASTM D 4258
Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning, Concrete for

Coating.
D. ASTM D 4259
Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete.
E. ASTM D 4263
Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete

by Plastic Sheet Method.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6723.13/5
Epoxy Flooring
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

and for other conditions affecting performance of flooring.
1.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates.
2.
Begin flooring application only after minimum concrete curing and drying
period recommended by flooring manufacturer has passed, after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, and after surfaces are dry.
3.
Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for
moisture by method recommended in writing by manufacturer or by plastic
sheet method according to ASTM D4263.
4.
Application of flooring indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrates according to manufacturers written

recommendations to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for flooring
application.
B. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving flooring, deck drains, and other deck
substrate penetrations to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings.
C. Substrates: Mechanically abrade surfaces to a uniform profile according to
ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch.
1.
Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from
concrete.
2.
Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections.
3.
Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete
hardeners, form-release agents, and other incompatible materials that
might affect coating adhesion.
4.
Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean
surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.
3.03
TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS
A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through

coatings according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
3.04
JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to
ASTM C 1127 and flooring manufacturer's written recommendations. Before
coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to
ASTM D 4258.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6723.13/6
Epoxy Flooring
3.05
APPLICATION
A. Apply flooring as per manufacturer's written recommendations.

1.
Start flooring application in presence of manufacturer's technical
representative.
2.
Verify that wet film thickness of each component coat complies with
requirements every 9 sq. m.
3.06
CURING AND PROTECTING
A. Cure flooring according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Prevent

contamination and damage during application and curing stages.
B. Protect flooring from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6723.13/7
Epoxy Flooring
SECTION 09 6816
SHEET CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of carpet of type
indicated in the finishing schedule and carpet cushion.
B. Related Section: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with
1.
Section 03 5416
Self Levelling Screed.
1.02
SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data
on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation
recommendations for type of substrate required.
B. Certification: Submit certified laboratory test reports for fire hazard classifications
and indoor air quality of carpet and carpet cushion.
C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1.
Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and
locations where cutouts are required in carpet.
2.
Carpet type, color, and dye lot.
3.
Seam locations, types, and methods.
4.
Type of subfloor.
5.
Type of installation.
6.
Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
7.
Pile direction.
8.
Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
9.
Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
10.
Transition details to other flooring materials.
11.
Type of carpet cushion.
D. Samples: For the following products and for color and texture required.
1.
Carpet: Four Samples of carpet, color, texture, quality, backing and
pattern specified, of sufficient size that will show one full repeat of any
repeated pattern or design, but not less than 450mm square in size and
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6816/1
Sheet Carpeting
2.
3.
showing full range of any texture and colour variations, which may be
expected.
Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 300-mm- long Samples.
Two samples of each type of carpet cushion and other material required
for installation.
E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1. Include the following:
1.
Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal
products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance
schedule.
2.
Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental
to carpet.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in carpet manufacturing with a minimum ten

continuous years of documented experience.
1.
Submit a list of at least (5) installations that have been in use for a
minimum of three (3) years using carpet similar to what is specified in this
document. Provide contact name and numbers.
B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by manufacturer.
All Carpet, Carpet pad, and required accessories, shall be installed using
experienced, skilled workmen to the highest standard of workmanship. The
finished appearance of the installed Carpet shall be free from streaks, wrinkles,
mismatched patterns, or any other defects due to faulty workmanship.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Carpet and pad shall meet requirements of
local codes where applicable.
Provide products with the specified
characteristics, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by
an acceptable testing and inspecting agency.
D. Mockups: Before installing carpet, install mockups in the location and of size as
directed for each type of carpet installation required to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1.
Obtain approval of mockups before starting work.
2.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work. Approved mock-ups may
become part of the completed Work with approval.
1.04
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6816/2
Sheet Carpeting
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and
Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is
complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are
maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking accurate job-site measurements
for all dimensions related to the work prior to placing orders for carpet.
D. Examine all conditions pertaining to the installation of Carpet and provide all coordination as required to achieve the proper and timely completion of the
installation.
E. Subfloor shall be inspected to determine the special care required to make it a
suitable foundation for carpet.
F. Substrate shall be cured, clean and dry. It shall be free of paint, dirt, grease, oil
and other contaminants.
G. To minimize wrinkling and buckling, carpet should be unrolled, allowed to relax,
and ventilated with the induction of fresh air for a minimum of 24 hours.
H. Where other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet
before installing these items.
1.06
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match
products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 2 percent of amount installed for each
type indicated.
1.07
WARRANTY
A. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Contractor and Carpet

Manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements
or that fails within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited
to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and
delamination.
1.
Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6816/3
Sheet Carpeting
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers and products specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes
better than those specified and which conform to the requirements and color
2.02
A. Ege Carpets, Denmark

B. Brintons, UK
C. Louis De Poortere, Belgium
D. Cambridge Weavers, USA
2.03
CARPET:
A. Carpet CPT1: Basis of Design (Product Ref.: Mosque Collection Highline 630,
RF 5285920, COLOR 5285 Carpet by Ege).
1.
Structure
ISO 2424
Tufted cut pile
2.
Gauge
ISO 2424
1/10
3.
Pile material
100% Polyamide
4.
Backing
CL-Contract Latex Backing
5.
Dimensions
ISO 3018
400 cm
6.
Total thickness
ISO 1765
7.4 mm
7.
Surface Pile
Thickness
ISO 1766
4.1 mm
8.
Total Carpet
Weight
ISO 8543
2100 g/m2
9.
Pile Yearn Weight
630 g/m2
10.
Surface Pile
11.
Density
ISO 8543
0,114 g/cm3
B. Carpet CPT2 laid on access flooring: Color selection is from
CAMBRIDGE WEAVERS axminster carpet:
1.
Custom design consisting of
a.
CPT02a Combination of :
Cambridge Weavers CW 1032 AZURE RISE D8 - ( 40%)
Cambridge Weavers CW 1028 BLUE BIRD D7 (40%)
Cambridge Weavers CW 6028 PURPLE HAZE M6 ( 20%).
b.
CPT02b Combination of
Cambridge Weavers CW 6018 TURKISH PLUM K4 - ( 50%)
Cambridge Weavers CW 1018 MING BLUE B5 (50%)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6816/4
Sheet Carpeting
c.
2.
CPT02c Combination of:

Cambridge Weavers CW 1021 SPRING BLUE A6 - ( 50%)
Cambridge Weavers CW 6017 MOON WAVE J4 -(50%).
Quality code: AX1282P(Woven Axminster)
a.
Item Axminster carpet with 12 Rows per inch
b.
Pile Yarn 80% Wool, 20% Nylon
c.
Yarn Count 3/2 (2/47)
d.
Backing Materials Polyester, Polypropylene
e.
Pitch 27.6 per dm (7 per inch).
f.
Row 47.2 per dm (12 per inch).
g.
Tuft Density 1303 per sq.dm (84 per sq.inch)
h.
Pile Height above Back - 7.6 mm (0.30 inches)
i.
Total Carpet Thickness - 10.6 mm (0.42 inches)
j.
Face Pile Weight - 1295 gms per sq.m (38.39 oz per sq.yd)
k.
Total Pile Weight - 1768 gms per sq.m (52.41 oz per sq.yd)
l.
Total Carpet Weight - 2481 gms per sq.m (73.54 oz per sq.yd)
m.
Carpet Width 4 meters (13.12 ft)
C. Carpet shall be anti soiling, antistatic and antibacterial treated.

2.04
CARPET CUSHION
A. Carpet Cushion: Needled synthetic and natural fiber for dimensional stability.
Top rubber coated with brown latex embossed with waffle design and bottom
latex rubber coated with non-skid design.
2.05
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydrauliccement-based formulation provided by or recommended by Carpet
manufacturer/cushion.
B. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood in strips as required to
match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 11.3.
C. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products
and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements
for installed carpet and that is recommended by the carpet and carpet cushion
manufacturer.
D. Metal edge strips: Stainless Steel edge strips of height required to protect
exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6816/5
Sheet Carpeting
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for
maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions
are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified.
B. Subfloors: Verify for the following:
1.
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,
hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond.
Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and
moisture tests recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
2.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign
deposits.
C. Holes and Protrusions: Any holes greater than 3mm in diameter must be patched
regardless of floor surface. All protrusions in excess of 0.8mm must be
smoothed.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation,"
and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing
substrates indicated to receive carpet installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. Concrete
floors shall be sealed using non-silicone sealers.
C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing
carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts,
carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Installation:
Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturers written
recommendations.
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations
and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At
doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.
C. Tackless Installation
1.
Install tackless strip at perimeter of carpeting in accordance with
manufacturers directions. Maintain uniform spacing from stripping to wall
so that cut carpet edge will turn down to substrate in a light slot.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6816/6
Sheet Carpeting
2.
3.
4.
Install carpet cushion in the largest possible size over the entire area to be
carpeted. Place cushion with face in direction recommended by the
manufacturer. Butt cushion tight against tackless strip. Layout cushion
seams so as not to occur under carpet seams. Butt edges of cushion and
adhere cushion to substrate with daubs of adhesive approximately
100mm in diameter, spaced approximately 600mm apart at all edges.
Stretch, adjust and trim carpet in accordance with recognized industry
practices. Use power stretcher of a type recommended by the carpet
manufacturer. Secure edges to tackless strip.
Make seams so that pile of adjoining pieces has the same directional run
and so as to be practically invisible. Install carpet with seams sewn or
taped using permanent type construction, which is of sufficient strength
for stretching and wear without failure during the life of the carpet.
Maintain straight seams running true with the lines of the building.
D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and builtin furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
E. Provide cut-outs as indicated for floor outlets.
F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed
obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
G. All patterned carpet shall be matched exactly at seams.
H. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for
future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use
nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
I. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to
substrate.
3.04
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:

1.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes
using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3.
Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor
Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of
equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use
protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 6816/7
Sheet Carpeting
SECTION 09 6900
ACCESS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of fire resistant anti
static access (raised) flooring systems, as shown on drawings and finishing
schedule.
B. Related works to be coordinated and used in conjunction with this section
includes but is not restricted to:
1.
Section 09 6536
Static Control Resilient Flooring.
2.
Section 09 6816
Sheet Carpeting.
3.
Section 23 3113
Metal Ducts (HVAC).
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Access Flooring System: Assemblies composed of modular floor panels on

pedestals with or without stringers.
1.03
A. Structural Performance:
Provide access flooring systems capable of
withstanding the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated, as determined by testing manufacturer's current standard products
according to referenced procedures in CISCA A/F, "Recommended Test
Procedures for Access Floors" :
1.
Concentrated Loads: Provide floor panels, including those with cutouts,
capable of withstanding a concentrated design load of 5 kN with a
permanent set not to exceed 0.25 mm to top surface deflection according
to CISCA A/F, Section I, "Concentrated Loads."
2.
Ultimate Loads: Provide access flooring systems capable of withstanding
a minimum ultimate concentrated load of 10 kN without failing, according
to CISCA A/F, Section II, "Ultimate Loading."
a.
Prayer Hall access flooring to withstand the same live load as for
post tensioned slab below indicated on structural drawings
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6900/1
Access Flooring
B. ESD-Control Properties: Provide floor coverings with ESD-control properties

indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated
by an independent testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Static-Dissipative Floor Covering Properties:
a.
Electrical Resistance: Test per ASTM F 150 with 100-V applied
voltage.
1)
Average greater than 1 megohm and less than or equal to
1000 megohms when test specimens are tested surface to
ground.
2)
Average no less than 1 megohm and less than or equal to
1000 megohms when installed floor coverings are tested
surface to ground.
b.
Static Generation: Less than 300 V when tested per AATCC-134
at 20 percent relative humidity with conductive footwear.
c.
Static Decay: 5000 to 0 V in less than 0.25 seconds when tested
per FED-STD-101C/4046.1.
2.
Panel-to-Understructure Resistance: Not more than 10 ohms as
measured without floor coverings.
1.04
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design the system according to applicable procedure in Ceilings and Interior

System Construction Association (CISCA) Recommended Test Procedures for
Access Floors.
B. Raised Access Floor:
1.
The system shall allow for panels to be secured directly to the pedestal to
provide a rigid floor fixing connection.
2.
The access floor system shall consist of a series of interchangeable
removable metal faced rigid panels supported from the structural floor at
the corners only by adjustable steel pedestal fixed with adhesive to a
prepared concrete floor surface. Necessary support stringers shall be
provided where required to sustain the design loads specified. The
system shall be as indicated in drawings measured from the structural
floor to top floor panel. The void shall accommodate and permit the free
distribution of electrical conduit service lines as required and various floor
finish thickness.
3.
Finished Floor Height: 200mm unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
4.
Earth Bonding: The system should be complete with earth bonding to all
metal parts and continuity in lightning protection system, to be connected
by others.
5.
Electrical Grounding Connection: As approved by the Engineer.
1.05
SUBMITTALS

B. Shop Drawings: Include layout of access flooring system and relationship to
adjoining Work based on field-verified dimensions.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6900/2
Access Flooring
1.
Details and sections with descriptive notes indicating materials, finishes,

fasteners, typical and special edge conditions, accessories, and
understructure.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of flooring material and exposed finish
indicated.
1.
One complete full-size floor panel, pedestal, and understructure unit for
each type of access flooring system required.
D. Product Certificates: For each type of access flooring system, signed by product
manufacturer.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Laboratory Testing.
1.
The access floor system manufacturer, at no extra cost, will supply the
results of independent laboratory testing performed on each system and
accessories supplied, at the request of the Engineer.
2.
Tests shall be performed to certify compliance with the relevant standards
of CISCA A/F.
1.06
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by
manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain access flooring system through one source from a
C. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and install access flooring to comply with
NFPA 75 requirements for raised flooring.
D. Provide floor panels that are clearly and permanently marked on their underside
with panel type and concentrated-load rating.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1.
Build mockup of typical access flooring assemblies as shown on drawings
Size to be an area no less than five floor panels in length by five floor
panels in width.
2.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install access flooring until spaces are

enclosed, and subfloor has been sealed, ambient temperature is between 4 and
32 deg C, and relative humidity is not more than 70 percent.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6900/3
Access Flooring
1.08
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of electrical work in underfloor cavity to prevent interference

with access flooring pedestals.
B. Mark pedestal locations on subfloor by use of a grid to enable mechanical and
electrical work to proceed without interfering with access flooring pedestals.
C. Proceed with installation only after completion of other construction within
affected spaces.
1.09
WARRANTY
A. Submit a written warranty signed by Manufacturer and Contractor, that the work
involving access floor panels are of good quality, shall be free from defects and
in conformance with the requirements of the contract documents and further
promising to repair or replace defective work during a 5 year period following
Substantial Completion of the Works.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6900/4
Access Flooring
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIAL
A. Mero, Germany
B. Tate Access Floors, USA
C. Lindner, UK
D. Or approved Equal.
2.02
FLOOR PANELS AND UNDERSTRUCTURE
A. Floor Panels, General: Provide modular panels complying with the following
requirements that one person, using a portable lifting device, can interchange
with other field panels without disturbing adjacent panels or understructure.
1.
Nominal panel size: 600 x 600 mm.
B. Calcium sulphate filled panels: Fibre-reinforced calcium sulphate panel
(consisting of gypsum, Alpha-2000 cellulose fibres and binding agents), dieformed and stiffened galvanized steel sheet at bottom, surrounding edge trim
protection against damage and humidity, with metal surfaces protected against
corrosion by manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish.
C. Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base, column with provisions for height
adjustment, and head cap; made of steel.
1.
Base: Square or circular base with not less than 103 sq. cm) of bearing
area.
2.
Column: Of height required to bring finished floor to elevations indicated.
Weld to base plate.
3.
Provide vibration-proof leveling mechanism for making and holding fine
adjustments in height over a range of not less than 51 mm and for locking
at a selected height, so deliberate action is required to change height
setting and vibratory displacement is prevented.
4.
Head: Designed to support understructure system indicated.
a.
Provide sound-deadening pads or gaskets at contact points
between heads and panels.
D. Stringer Systems: Modular steel stringer systems made to interlock with
pedestal heads and form a grid pattern placing stringers under each edge of
each floor panel and a pedestal under each corner of each floor panel. Protect
steel components with manufacturer's standard galvanized or corrosion-resistant
paint finish.
1.
Snap-on Stringers: System of stringers attached to pedestals with
nonbolted interlocking connections to provide a stable understructure and
to prevent accidental disengagement.
2.
Provide continuous gasket at contact surfaces between panel and
stringers to deaden sound, to seal off underfloor cavity from above, and to
maintain panel alignment and position.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6900/5
Access Flooring
3.
Provide stringers that support each edge of each panel where required to
meet design-load criteria.
E. Oversize or undersize panels shall be used at the perimeter where curved panels
may be required. The installed finished access flooring height shall be as shown
on drawings.
F. All panels with the exception of cut panels are to be removable and fully
transferable in both position and direction. The removable panels shall be such
that they are easily removed and replaced without damage and without the use
of undue force by the lifting devices supplied by the manufacturer.
G. Pedestal base shall be stamped or embossed on its underside, and shall be
adhered to sub-floor with an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer.
H. Fabricate raised flooring as shown and as detailed on final approved shop
drawings. Finished Floor Height (F.F.H) is the measurement from the highest
point of the existing sub floor to the top of the raised floor, excluding carpet or
other finishes.
I. For access flooring in Prayer Hall, provide rigid steel frame understructure as
indicated on drawings. It shall be designed and engineered to minimize frame
and panel deflection; tolerance and performance shall be compatible with floor
panels.
2.03
FLOOR PANEL COVERINGS
A. General: Provide factory applied floor coverings of type indicated that are
laminated by manufacturer to the tops of floor panels.
1.
Type as per Section 09 6536- Static Control Resilient Flooring.
2.04
ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives: Manufacturers Standard adhesive for bonding pedestal bases to

subfloor.
B. Cutouts: Provide cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service
outlets. Provide reinforcement or additional support if required to ensure panels
comply with standard performance requirements.
1.
Fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets in sizes indicated or, if
size of cutouts exceeds maximum grommet size available, trim edge of
cutouts with manufacturer's standard plastic molding having tapered top
flange. Furnish removable covers for grommets.
C. Panel Lifting Device: Manufacturers standard portable lifting devices of type
required for specified panels. Provide one lifting device for each room of type
required.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6900/6
Access Flooring
D. Perimeter Support (in addition to the pedestals): Provide manufacturer's

standard method for supporting panel edge and forming transition between
access flooring and adjoining floor coverings at same level as access flooring.
2.05
ANTI-DUST PRMER
A. Anti-dust Primer: Used to harden the concrete sub-floor surface, in order to avoid
undesired emission of dust of any other title fragments of material. Such a
primer is applied to the concrete sub floor after a careful cleaning and vacuuming
of the sub floor surface and before starting with the floor installation. Dust
sealant and pedestal glue must be compatible.
1.
One component polyurethane primer
a.
Application: by roll or brush
b.
Coverage: 1 kg per 3 m2.
c.
2 layers recommended.
d.
Minimum temperature allowed during application: 5oC.
2.06
A. AATCC 134
American Association of Textile Chemists and

Colorista Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets.
B. ASTM E 84

C. ASTM E 85
Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Die

Casting.
D. ASTM F 150
Standard Test Method for Electrical Resistance of

Conductive and Static Dissipative Resilient Flooring.
E. ASTM F 1700
Standard Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile.
F. CISCA A/F
Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction

Association. Recommended Test Procedures for
Access Floors.
G. FED-STD 101C
Federal Specification for Testing of Electrostatic

Materials.
H. NEMA LD3
National Electrical Manufacturers Association High

Pressure Decorative Laminates.
I. NFPA 75
National Fire Protecting Association Standard for the

Protection of Information Technology Equipment
J. BS EN 12825
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
Burning
Raised Access Floors
09 6900/7
Access Flooring
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify site measurements are as shown on shop drawings.

B.
Examine substrates, with Installer and manufacturer's representative present,

for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
1.
2.
Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements

specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges,
depressions, scale, foreign deposits, and debris that might interfere with
attachment of pedestals.
corrected.
C. Verify required services are available and properly located.

3.02
PREPARATION
A. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter
to a minimum. Avoid using panels cut to less than 152 mm.
B. Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and
vacuum clean subfloor to remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before
beginning installation.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install access flooring system and accessories under supervision of access

flooring manufacturer's authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm
installation that complies with performance requirements and is free of vibration,
rocking, rattles, and squeaks.
B. Set pedestals in adhesive as recommended in writing by access flooring
manufacturer to provide full bearing of pedestal base on subfloor.
C. Adjust pedestals to permit top of installed panels to be set flat, level, and to
proper height.
D. Secure stringers to pedestal heads according to access flooring manufacturer's
written instructions.
E. Install flooring panels securely in place, properly seated with panel edges flush.
Do not force panels into place.
F. Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no
voids greater than 3 mm where panels abut vertical surfaces.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6900/8
Access Flooring
G. Cut and trim access flooring and perform other dirt-or-debris-producing activities
at a remote location or as required to prevent contamination of subfloor under
access flooring already installed.
H. Ground flooring system as recommended by manufacturer and as needed to
comply with performance requirements for electrical resistance of floor coverings.
I. Scribe vertical closures to closely fit against subfloor and adjacent finished-floor
surfaces. Set in mastic and seal to maintain plenum effect within underfloor
cavity.
J. Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, and vacuum
subfloor area, as installation of floor panels proceeds.
K. Install additional pedestals where grid pattern is interrupted by room
appurtenances and cutouts.
L. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter
to a minimum.
M. Seal filed cuts of floor panels for moisture protection.
N. Allow for minor on site cutting of holes in floor panels for installation of
equipment. Include cable cut out protection.
O. Install access flooring without change in elevation between adjacent panels and
within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.04
Plus or minus 1.5 mm in any 3-m distance.

Plus or minus 3 mm from a level plane over entire access flooring area.
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on access flooring for 24 hours and removal of floor panels for 72
hours after installation to allow pedestal adhesive to set.
B. Thoroughly clean, using cleaning materials recommended for the purpose by the
manufacturer.
C. Cover cut-outs with material to support loads likely to be encountered.
D.
Replace access flooring panels that are stained, scratched, or otherwise

damaged or that do not comply with specified requirements.
E. Protect work with non-staining plastic sheets until end of project.

F. Clean out and vacuum void of debris, prior to hand over.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
09 6900/9
Access Flooring
SECTION 09 7500
STONE FACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of interior
dimension stone wall cladding and countertops as shown in the drawings and
Finishing Schedule.
B. Related Section: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with
1.
Section 05 5000
Metal Fabrications.
2.
Section 07 9200
Joint Sealants.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A. Polished Finish: Smooth finish that produces sharp, mirror like reflections.
Reflected images of overhead fluorescent tubes have straight lines without
visible distortion when viewed at arms length.
B. Honed Finish: Smooth, non reflective finish similar to that produced by grinding
with a 400 to 1200 grit abrasive; with a gap not exceeding 0.13 mm when faces
are tested for flatness with a 600 mm straightedge.
C. Filled Finish: Travertine slabs, filled with cement or epoxy and then polished or
honed to produce typical finish.
1.03
SUBMITTALS:

1.
Variety of stone, stone accessories and other manufactured products.
Include data on physical properties.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, joint patterns, details, and
attachments to other Work, including reinforced concrete and unit masonry.
1.
Show installation details at special and substrate conditions.
C. Samples for Verification:
1.
For each stone type indicated: Include a minimum of three units full size
showing the full range of color and texture.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7500/1
Stone Facing
D. Maintenance Data: For interior stone facing to include in maintenance manuals.

Include Product Data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer
and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in supplying custom fabricated

products similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: An installer who employs experienced stone masons and
stone fitters who are skilled in installing interior stone facing similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose products have a
C. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish,
from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
1.
Source Limitations for Other Materials: Obtain each type of stone
accessory, sealant, and other material from a single manufacturer.
2.
Mockups: Build mockup of typical stone cladding approximately 1000 mm
wide by 1000 mm high. Approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion and
approved by the Engineer. Assemble and fit mockup for counters as
directed by the Engineer.
1.05
A. Lift stone with wide-belt slings, do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause
staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports.
B. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with non staining separators and non
staining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone by field

measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B. Do not set stone when air or material temperature is below 10 deg C.
C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 10 deg C during installation and for 7
days after completion unless higher temperatures are required by fabricators or
suppliers instructions.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7500/2
Stone Facing
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE SUPPLIERS
A. Stone Suppliers
1.
Marble and Granite Centre
Doha Qatar
Tel: 974 4422828
Fax: 974 4422303
2.
Indu Stone
Doha Qatar
Tel: 974 4436496
Fax: 974 4436496
3.
National Marble
Doha Qatar
Tel: 974 4352971
Fax: 974 4420497
4.
Savema SPA
Marble & Granite
Italy
Tel 39 0584 79441
Fax: 39 0584 790690
5.
Kuwait Standard Group
Kuwait
Tel: 261 0821
Fax: 264 0643
Mobile: 9750084
6.
Salam Al Kuwait.
Kuwait
Tel: 2421440
Mob: 961 3260
Fax: 532 2836
7.
Stone Boutique
Kuwait
Tel: 729 1326
8.
Hayat Marble Co.
Kuwait
Tel: 481 2459/483 1659
9.
Or approved equal
B. Adhesives, Setting, Grouting and Jointing Materials
1.
U.S.A.
2.
Mapei
Italy
3.
BAL Adhesives
UK.
4.
Technokolla
Italy
5.
Or approved equal.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7500/3
Stone Facing
C. Sealer
1.
Glaze N Seal, USA.
2.
Billinzoni, Italy
3.
BASF (MBT) UAE.
4.
Or approved equal.
2.02
STONE, GENERAL
A. All stone shall be of soundness, texture, graining, color and tone matching the
sample as approved.
B. Provide stone that is free of cracks, seams, and starts impairing structural
integrity or function. Provide stone from a single quarry for variety of stone
required.
C. Quarry stone in a manner to ensure that as-quarried block orientations yield
finished stone with required characteristics.
2.03
STONE TYPES
A. Stone Standard: ASTM C 503 for Marble dimension stone and ASTM C568 for
Limestone dimension stone.
B. Thickness and Finish: As indicated on drawings.
C. Stone Type: Refer to finishing schedule and drawings.
D. Stone Characteristics: Refer Section 09 6340.
2.04
STONE ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Provide anchors and anchoring systems and attachments of type and size
required to support stone works and fabricated in accordance with ASTM C 1242
from the following metals for conditions and anchors indicated below:
1.
Stainless steel: ASTM A 666, Type 316, to support loads imposed without
exceeding allowable design stresses, for anchors in direct contact with
stone and the fasteners connecting them to other anchors and to building
structure.
B. All sub-frame works to be fabricated from steel complying with requirements of:
ASTM A 36/A 36 M hot dip galvanized, and painted.
2.05
JOINTING, SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Joint sealants where indicated on drawings: Manufacturer's standard sealants

that comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 920 - "Joint Sealants" and
will not stain the stone they are applied to.
B. Grout for cladding as per locations indicated on drawings:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7500/4
Stone Facing
1.
Water Cleanable, Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy adhesives: ANSI

A118.3
C. Grout Colors: To approval.

D. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:
1.
aggregate and Latex Additive.
E. Polymer modified Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.
1.
Mixture of Dry-Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory-prepared,
dry-grout mix and latex additive.
F. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for mix proportions, mixing
equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures
needed to produce mortar of uniform quality and with optimum performance
characteristics.
1.
Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or
other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium
chloride.
2.
Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and
aggregates in a mechanical batch mixer, unless otherwise indicated.
Discard mortar when it has reached initial set.
2.06
STONE ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Shims: Resilient plastic shims, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint
thicknesses.
B. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and
applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning
compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.
C. Stainless steel inserts in wall cladding: Stainless Steel, Type 316, profile as
indicated on drawings or as required.
2.07
STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fabricate interior stone facing in sizes and shapes required to comply with
requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1.
For marble, comply with recommendations in MIAs Dimensional Stone
Design Manual IV.
2.
For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILLIs Indiana Limestone
Handbook.
B. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to
comply with fabrication and construction tolerances. Do not execute field cutting
except to those edges of stones invisible under wall claddings or any other
adjacent finishing.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7500/5
Stone Facing
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles.
Dress joints straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated.
Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and lifting
devices as indicated or needed to set stone securely in place; shape beds
to fit supports.
Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to
accommodate adjacent work.
C. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated
for finish of each type of stone required and to match approved samples and
mockups. All visible edges shall be polished.
D. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with
requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.
2.08
STONE COUNTERTOPS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIAs Dimensional Stone- Design

Manual IV.
B. Thickness: Provide thickness as per drawing.
C. Seams: Fabricate countertops without seams.
D. Splash plate to be provided where indicated.
E. Cutouts and Holes for Lavatories, Sinks, and Fittings:
1.
Undercounter Lavatories: Make cutouts for undercounter lavatories in
shop using template or pattern furnished by lavatory manufacturer. Form
cutouts to smooth, even curves with edges at right angles to top. Ease
juncture of cutout edges with tops, and finish edges to match tops.
2.
Counter-Mounted Sinks: Prepare counterstops in shop for field cutting
openings for counter-Mounted sinks. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes
at corners of cutout locations. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at
corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.
3.
Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercoutner soap
dispensers, and similar items.
2.09
STANDARDS
A. ASTM C 97:
Test Methods for absorption and Bulk specific gravity of

dimensions stone.
B. ASTM C 119:
Standard Terminology Relating to Dimension Stone.
C. ASTM C 170:
Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of

Dimension Stone.
D. ASTM C 503:
Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7500/6
Stone Facing
E. ASTM C 568:
Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone.
F. ASTM C 615:
Specification for Granite Dimension Stone.
G. ASTM C 880:
Standard Test Method for Flexural strength of Dimension

Stone.
H. ASTM C 1242:
Standard Guide for Selection, Design and Installation of

Exterior Dimension Stone Anchors and Anchoring Systems.
I. ASTM C 1354:
Standard Test Method for Strength of Individual Stone

Anchorages in Dimension Stone.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7500/7
Stone Facing
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive interior stone facing and conditions under
which interior stone facing will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.02
SETTING OF STONE, GENERAL
A. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals and openings as required to accommodate

contiguous work.
B. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop
Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated
or necessary to secure interior stone facing in place. Shim and adjust anchors,
supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with
uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to
established relationships and indicated tolerances. Arrange panels with veining
and other natural markings to approval.
C. Erect interior stone facing units level, plumb, and true with uniform joint widths.
Use temporary shims to maintain joint width. Remove shims before grouting.
D. Provide expansion and control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at
locations required. Keep expansion joints free of plaster, mortar, grout, and
other rigid materials.
E. Where grouted joints are indicated on drawings, force grout into joints and clean
excess grout from the surfaces of stone. After initial set of grout, tool grout joints
smooth.
F. Where joint sealants are indicated on drawings, prepare joints and apply sealants
of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying
sealants.
3.03
INSTALLATION OF STONE PANELING
A. Erect interior stone facing units at levels, plumb, and true with uniform joint
widths. Remove shims before grouting or pointing.
B. Set units firmly against setting spots located at anchors.
C. Anchors: Provide anchors around perimeter of interior stone facing panels with a
minimum of 4 anchors per panel.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7500/8
Stone Facing
D. Joint details are indicated on drawings. Tool joints uniformly and smoothly with
plastic tool.
3.04
INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS
A. General: Install countertops by adhering to supports as per approved shop

drawings.
B. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to
cutouts to prevent damage while cutting.
3.05
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 3 mm in
2400 mm or 6 mm maximum.
B. Variation from Level: For horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 3 mm in 3 m or 6 mm in 6 m.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion
of walls and partitions, do not exceed 3 mm in 2400 mm, or 6 mm in 6 m.
D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions
indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 3 mm.
E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/4 of nominal
joint width, whichever is less.
F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 0.8mm difference between planes of adjacent units.
3.06
A. Remove and replace interior stone facing of the following description:

1.
Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be
repaired if methods and results are approved by Engineer.
2.
Defective countertops, including those with misaligned seams.
3.
Defective joints and seams.
4.
Interior stone facing and joints not matching approved samples and
mockups.
B. Replace in a manner that results in interior stone facing's matching approved
samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no
evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean interior stone facing as work progresses. Remove
mortar and grout smears before tooling joints.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7500/9
Stone Facing
3.07
PROTECTION
A. Protect stone surfaces, edges, and corners from construction damage. Use
securely fastened untreated wood, plywood, or heavy cardboard to prevent
damage.
B. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective coverings, clean
surfaces and apply approved sealed.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7500/10
Stone Facing
SECTION 09 7733
METAL PANELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of decorative metal
paneling as shown on drawings.
1.
Paneling on doors.
B. Related Sections
1.
Section 08 1113
1.02
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product and related accessories, fully describing
the metal panel and accessories that include the following.
1.
Metal Content.
2.
Finish.
3.
Substrate.
4.
Maintenance Instructions.
5.
Installation Instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of fixation:
1.
Dimensioned lay-out all of the panels.
2.
Dimensioned lay-out of all of the mounting accessories.
C. Samples
1.
Provide three 150 mm square samples of each panel type with respective
substrate, edge detail, pattern and background material and color
reflecting anticipated color range of finished product.
2.
Provide three 150 mm long samples of each type of accessories.
D. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures for normal cleaning and removal
of stains. Include precautions in use of cleaning materials that may be
detrimental to surfaces.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7733/1
Metal Paneling
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm with minimum 5 years experience in

manufacturing panels similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Employ installers with minimum 5 years experience on
works of similar type.
C. Source Limitations for Panels: Obtain wall panels of each type from one source
with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with the following surfaceburning characteristics as determined by testing identical product per ASTME 84
by UL or another acceptable testing and inspecting agency. Identify wall panels
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2.
Smoke Develop: 450 or less
E. Mockups: Before installing panels, build mockups of size and location as
directed for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections
made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities
of materials and execution.
1.04
A. Comply with panel manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum
temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install panels until construction in spaces is

complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the
levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect panels from exposure to airborne odors, such as
tobacco smoke, and install panels under conditions free from odor contamination
of ambient air.
C. Field Measurements: Verify surface dimensions by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7733/2
Metal Paneling
1.06
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair

or replace components of wall panel system that fail in performance, materials,
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7733/3
Metal Paneling
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERES
2.02
A. Gage Corporation International

USA.
www.gageverticalsurfacing.com
www.tridentgulf.com
B. Moz Designs
USA.
www.mozdesigns.com
2.03
METAL PANELING (MP02)
A. Decorative aluminum sheets for adhesive application on doors with the following
features:
1.
Metal: 5005 AQ Aluminum.
2.
Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
3.
Finish: Anodized nickel (matte) to match approved sample.
4.
Product ref and Design: GVS Gage Carve, Design C 1000 (Organic
Linear Vertical orientation)
2.05
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide adhesives, components and accessories recommended or

required by panel manufacturer to suit project conditions.
2.06
REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
C. ANSI A208.2: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) for Interior applications.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7733/4
Metal Paneling
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting panel performance.
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Acclimatize Panel: Before installation, allow panels to adjust to and become

stable at ambient temperature and humidity of spaces where it will be installed.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install as per recommendations of the manufacturer.

3.04
CLEANING
A. Clean panels on completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign

materials according to manufacturers written instructions.
B. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved,
before time of Substantial Completion.
3.05
PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and Installer that ensure install panels are without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 7733/5
Metal Paneling
SECTION 09 9100
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of field painting of
exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the
surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a
surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as
similar adjacent materials or surfaces.
1.
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and
ducts (including colour coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports,
and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a
factory-applied final finish.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces,
operating parts, and labels. Do not paint over UL or other code-required labels or
equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Finish type (matte, eggshell, semi-gloss etc) shall be as defined as defined in
ASTM D16.
E. Related Sections include the following: Related work to be coordinated and used
in conjunction with this specification includes but is not restricted to:
1.
Section 05 1200 Structural Steel for shop priming structural steel.
2.
Section 05 5000 Metal Fabrications for shop priming ferrous metal.
1.02
SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture
to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1.
Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block
fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for
review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2.
Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9100/1
Painting
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Concrete: Provide two 200x200mm samples for each color and

finish.
Concrete Unit Masonry: 200x200mm samples of masonry, with
mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color.
Plastered Finish: 200 x 200 sample for each color and finish.
Natural Wood: 100x200mm samples of natural wood finish on
representative surfaces.
Painted Wood: 200x200mm samples for each color and material.
Ferrous Metal: Two 100mm square samples of flat metal and two
200mm long samples of solid metal for each color and finish.
C. Submit a detailed "Painting Schedule" for review. Prepare this schedule on the
basis of surfaces, types of paint materials, types of primers and sealers, number
of coats and list the brand name of the products/manufacture for each use.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and

coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from
the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components,
duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at
least 10 sq.m. of surface until required sheen, color, and texture are obtained;
simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work.
1.
One room or surface will be selected to represent surfaces and conditions
for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in
this room or surface according to the schedule or as specified. After
finishes are accepted, this room or surface will be used to evaluate
coating systems of a similar nature.
1.04
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages

and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following
information:
1.
Product name or title of material.
2.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3.
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5.
Thinning instructions.
6.
Application instructions.
7.
Color name and number.
8.
VOC content.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9100/2
Painting
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at

a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage
containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9100/3
Painting
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Dulux Paints
B. Sigma Paints.
C. Hempel Paints.
D. Jotun Paints.
E. Caparol.
F. Or approved equal.
2.02
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials

that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the
various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by
manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying
manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
C. Paint Types: Refer to schedule at end of Part 3.
D. Colors: Match approved sample.
2.03
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS
A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory-formulated high-performance latex

block fillers.
2.04
A. BS EN ISO 12944
British/European Standards for Paints and

Varnishes. Corrosion protection of steel structures
by protective paint systems.
B. SSPC
Steel Structures
Specifications.
C. ASTM D 16
Standard Terminology for Paint, Related coatings,

Materials and Applications.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9100/4
Painting
Council
Protection
Painting
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for

compliance with requirements for paint application.
1.
Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2.
Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces
and conditions within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to
ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request,
furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of
compatible primers.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined

surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be
painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the
item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items
removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of
substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and
grease before cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other
contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted
surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as
specified.
1.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry and
cement plaster surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk,
dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to
remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing,
use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
3.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with
scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces
exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a.
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat
of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying
primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces
with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9100/5
Painting
b.
4.
5.
Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery.

Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood,
including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.
c.
If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
d.
Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster,
or other wet wall construction occurs on back side.
e.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a
heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not
been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other
foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that
comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a.
Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system
manufacturer.
b.
Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal
treatment wash coat before priming.
c.
Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been
damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint
manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleumbased solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants.
Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil
stock by mechanical methods.
D. Material Preparation:
Mix and prepare paint materials according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
2.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density.
Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If
necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.
3.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within
recommended limits.
3.03
APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use

applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being
applied.
1.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or
conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
2.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
3.
The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or
built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation,
and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as
required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
4.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as
similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint
surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat
only.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9100/6
Painting
5.
6.
7.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where
visible through registers or grilles.
Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to
match exposed surfaces.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned,
pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after
preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1.
The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless
of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat
has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to
produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written
instructions, sand between applications.
2.
Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup
painted.
3.
If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint,
apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and
appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners,
crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness
equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4.
Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying.
Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and
does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until
application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose
adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or
other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush
of appropriate size for surface or item being painted.
2.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
3.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as
recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness:
Apply paint materials no thinner than
manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness
indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended
by manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is
limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
1.
Refer to Divisions 22, 23 and 26 for Schedule of colour-coding and
identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit.
2.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on
mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.
3.
Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated
and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except
where items are prefinished.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9100/7
Painting
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment

when painted accidentally.
Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished
areas.
Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and
telephone equipment before installing equipment.
Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, that are visible through grilles and
louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint
dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles.
F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure
complete coverage with pores filled.
G. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended
by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that
has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where
evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a
finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage.
Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and
other discarded paint materials from Project site.
1.
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces.
Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or
damaging adjacent finished surfaces.
3.05
PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from
painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
approved by Engineer.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing
painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others
to protect their work. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.06
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete, Concrete Block, Plaster (for all areas other than wet areas).
1.
One coat latex primer sealer.
2.
Two coats putty to provide smooth regular surface.
3.
Two coats latex, matt.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9100/8
Painting
B. Oil Paint to concrete, plaster, gypsum board in wet areas and as scheduled.
1.
One coat primer sealer.
2.
Two coats putty to provide smooth regular surface.
3.
Three coats oil based paint with good water and moisture resistance.
C. Wood Opaque Paint Finish (Spray Applied).
1.
One Coat
Wood Primer
2.
Two Coats Wood Filler
3.
One Coat
Undercoat (thinned 5%)
4.
Two Coats Alkyd Paint, semi-gloss.
D. Wood Lacquer Finish.
1.
Polish finished substrates to eliminate marks and sander scratches and
wipe clean prior to application of undercoat.
2.
1st Coat: Alkyd resin, nitrocellulose lacquer base, 65% solids, undercoat,
color best suited to achieve final color appearance of subsequent coats.
3.
2nd Coat: Lacquer, nitrocellulose plasticizer base, 45% solids, color and
gloss as selected.
4.
3rd Coat: Clear catalyzed lacquer, alkyd urea base modified nitrocellulose
resin, 26% solids, gloss as selected.
5.
Total dry film thickness between 3 and 5 mils.
E. Stained Woodwork 2 finish coats of an alkyd based clear satin varnish over a
sealer coat and an alkyd based, interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before
applying stain.
1.
One coat
Wood Filler
2.
One coat
Stain
3.
One coat
Sealer
4.
Two coats
Varnish
F. Steel - Primed (including exposed sprinkler pipes).
1.
Touch-up with original primer.
2.
One undercoat alkyd enamel paint.
3.
Two coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, spray applied.
G. Spray applied for Galvanized Steel.
1.
One coat two-component polyamide cured epoxy primer.
2.
Two coats two-component polyurethane, isocyanite cured acrylic resin
based.
H. GRG, Gypsum Board/Access panels with gypsum board finish (for all
other than wet areas).
1.
One coat latex primer sealer.
2.
Two coats putty as a filler.
3.
Two coats latex eggshell finish.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9100/9
areas
Painting
I. Concrete/Plaster: Anti carbonation Coating for car park interiors-walls and

ceilings).
1.
Treat the substrate to kill mould growth (Fongimousse Ronacrete) and
repair/level surface as required (Ronacrete concrete repair mortar and
Ronabond Slurry/fairing coat).
2.
One coat primer (Ronabond Joltec Roller)
3.
Two coats of elastomeric smooth finish anticarbonation coating
(Ronabond Joltec 2).
4.
Product Ref.: Products and manufacturers are specified for the purpose
of establishing minimum quality standards. Products which are equal to,
or better than those specified, and which conform to the Engineers
design requirements and colour selections, may be acceptable subject to
Engineers approval.
5.
Manufacturer:
a.
Ronacrete
UK
www.ronacrete.co.uk
b.
BASF
c.
Dulux Paints
d.
Or approved equal.
3.07
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Fairface Concrete/Exposed Masonry Construction

1.
One coat - Primer.
2.
One Coat - Block Filler.
3.
Two Coats - (Exterior grade) acrylic paint, matte finish or latex aggregate
textured.
B. Steel - Shop Primed.
1.
Touch-up with original primer.
2.
One undercoat alkyd enamel paint.
3.
Two coats alkyd enamel semi-gloss, spray applied.
C. Spray applied for Steel.
1.
One coat two-component high solid polyamide cured epoxy primer,
containing zinc phosphate, of 75 microns, complying with BS EN ISO
12944.
2.
One coat two-component high build epoxy of 100-125 microns, complying
with BS EN ISO 12944.
3.
One coat two-component polyurethane, isocyanite cured acrylic finish of
75 microns.
D. Spray applied for Galvanized Steel.
1.
One coat two-component high solid epoxy pigmented with
MIO(micaceous iron oxide) of 100 microns, complying with BS EN ISO
12944.
2.
One coat two-component polyurethane, isocyanite cured acrylic finish of
75 microns.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9100/10
Painting
E. Pavement Marking Paint: Solvent- borne coating based on alkyd resin and
chlorinated rubber, pigmented with a high quality light and weather fast pigment,
with a total dry film thickness of 125-150 microns or as required. Add glass beads
for reflection effect.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9100/11
Painting
SECTION 09920
EXPOSED STEEL PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labour, materials, products, equipment and services to complete the

exposed steel painting work, including but not limited to all exposed exterior and
interior structural steel at towers, podium and other locations indicated.
1.
Section 05 1200
Structural Steel Framing

2.
Section 05 5000
Metal Fabrications
3.
Section 08 4229.23 Sliding Automatic Entrances Doors.
4.
Section 08 4223
Revolving Door Entrances
5.
Section 08 4413
Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall
6.
Section 08 6300
Metal Framed Skylight
7.
Section 08 9000
Louvers.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and

finish products with 5 years experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 5
years documented experience.
C. Arrange with the paint manufacturer's representative to visit the site prior to the
commencement of the painting operation to discuss the painting and finishing
procedures to be used and to analyze the substrate surface conditions,
environmental conditions and protection methods in order that alternative
recommendations may be made to the Engineer, should adverse conditions
exist.
D. A testing area on the building will be designated by the Engineer. Apply samples
of finishes in the testing area with the correct material, number of coats, colour,
texture and degree of sheen or gloss required. Refinish if required, until
acceptable to the Engineer.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9200/1
Exposed Steel Painting
E. Leave test areas undisturbed until completion of the Work. Accepted work in the
test area shall serve as a standard for acceptability of subsequent work. Work
which does not match the accepted finishes shall be corrected and refinished.
F. Visual Mock-up; Contribute to visual mock-ups requested in other Sections of the
Specifications. Once mock-up has been reviewed and accepted for quality and
appearance of steel work, it shall be retained for exposed steel painting mock-up
specified herein. Prepare and apply paint finish to primed ferrous metal; prepare
apply primer and paint finish to galvanized steel. Mock-up will be reviewed for
quality of workmanship and appearance. Adjust mock-ups as required to gain
acceptance.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturers literature describing surface preparation of substrate, film

thickness of coating, number of coats, texture and finishing procedures.
B. Submit samples in triplicate, 300 mm x 300 mm size indicating colour and
texture.
C. Submit cleaning instructions, repair, touch-up, maintenance and stain removal
guidelines for incorporation into Operating and Maintenance Manual.
1.04
A. Store paint materials at ambient temperature recommended by material

manufacturer, in well ventilated area.
B. Accept only paint and finishing materials and products delivered to the site in the
manufacturer's unbroken, sealed containers, with manufacturer's label indicating
type of paint, colour and instructions for reducing.
C. Store packaged materials undamaged in their original wrappings or containers
with manufacturer's labels and seals intact.
1.05
PROTECTION
A. Protect surfaces and elements surrounding work of this Section from damage,
pitting and paint splatter.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain surface and ambient temperatures before, during and after application
of finishes in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9200/2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. General: Ready mixed except field catalysed coatings. Process pigments to a

soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a
homogeneous coating. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or
curing free of streaks or sags. Paints and finishing materials to be of highest
grade, first line quality of the manufacturer and all components of the finishing
system shall be by single manufacturer including paint applied under other
Sections.
B. Galvanized Steel Surfaces and Non-galvanized Steel Surfaces
C. Primer and topcoat Gloss epoxy siloxane, resistant to very high temperatures,
unaffected by ultraviolet radiation, excellent weatherability, high solids 90% 3%
PSX 700' by Ameron International, or other approved manufacture; custom
colour to match samples approved by the Engineer.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9200/3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate is ready to receive work as instructed by the product

manufacturer. Examine substrate prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
B. Verify substrate surface temperature and ambient air temperature is within range
recommended by material manufacturer before applying finishes.
C. Prepare galvanized surfaces for application of primer. Remove oil or soap film
with neutral detergent or emulsion cleaner, then use zinc treatment such as
Galvaprep or other approved manufacture or blast lightly with fine abrasive to
neutralize galvanizing.
3.02
APPLICATION
A. Ensure primed surfaces are free of pinholes, damaged or bare areas. Touch up
shop primed metal work. Ensure coated surfaces are free of pinholes.
B. Clean galvanized surfaces and apply primer in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations. Ensure primed surfaces are free of pinholes, damaged or
bare areas.
C. All previous coats shall be clean and dry. Adhere to all minimum and maximum
topcoat times for primers.
D. Apply topcoat in accordance with manufacturers recommendations to a dry film
thickness of 0.18 mm minimum.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9200/4
SECTION 09 9646
INTUMESCENT PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of fireproof paints

(intumescent paint) to exposed structural steel works, including prime and finish
coats, to provide 2 hours fire rating.
B. Protective decorative finish (top seal).
1.
Section 05 1200
Structural Steel.
1.02
SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: For fireproof paint system indicated. Include fillers and primers.
1.
Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required fireproof paint materials.
Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system,
and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number
and general classification.
2.
Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information,
including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying
fireproof paint materials.
3.
Certification: By the manufacturer that products supplied comply with
local regulations controlling use of VOCs.
B. Samples: For each color to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions,
on representative samples of the actual substrate.
1.
Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including primers,
and finish coats. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for
review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2.
Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each finish
sample. Label each sample for location and application.
3.
Submit Samples on the following substrates for review of color and texture
only:
a.
Ferrous Metal: Two 300mm square samples of flat metal, and two
300mm long samples of solid metal.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9646/1
Intumescent Painting
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: An experienced applicator who has completed fireproof

painting applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for the Project
and whose work has resulted in application with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers, and undercoat materials for each fireproof
paint system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide intumescent paints with the
following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical
products per ASTM E 84, by UL, or by another acceptable testing and inspecting
agency.
1.
2.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
D. Mockups: Provide a full-coat finish sample for each type of coating and
substrate required. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.
1.
Select one typical area as directed to receive fireproof paint to represent
surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating.
2.
Notify seven days in advance of dates and times when benchmark
samples will be applied.
3.
Apply according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent
lighting and other environmental services have been activated.
4.
Obtain the approval of mock-up before starting fireproof paint application.
5.
Maintain mock-up during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
1.04
A. Deliver fireproof paint materials to the Project site in manufacturer's original,

unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and
the following information:
1.
Product name or title of material.
2.
Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3.
UL label, indicating tested fire rating.
4.
Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
5.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
6.
Thinning and mixing instructions.
7.
Application instructions.
8.
Color name and number.
9.
VOC content.
10.
Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at
a minimum ambient temperature recommended by the manufacture. Maintain
containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9646/2
1.
1.05
Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are
protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing,
and application.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temperature and Weather Conditions: Apply coatings only when the

temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are as
recommended by the manufacturer.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Include coverage for fireproofing to remain free from cracking,

checking, dusting, flaking, spalling, separation, and blistering. Reinstall or repair
failures as per the instructions. Provide a warranty for a period of 5 years from
the date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9646/3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
APPROVED MANUFACTURER
A. Al Gurg Leighs Paints

Abu Dhabi, UAE
Product Refs. Epigrip L425T Firetex FX 7000
Firetex M75T
B. Nullifire Limited
UK.
Tel: + 44 24 7685 5000
Fax: + 44 24 7646 9547
Product: System S605 Basecoat and TS615 Acrylic Topseal.
C. Nofire Technologies Inc
USA
Tel: 912 994 0545
Fax: 912 994 0309
Product: Nofire A.18
2.02
COATINGS
A. Intumescent Coating: Solvent based intumescent coating for steelwork. Coating

must have the following characteristic.
1.
Specific Gravity:
1.33 gm/cm3
2.
Fire rating:
Minimum 120 minutes.
B. Top Seal: Semi glossy modified acrylic top seal to be used on Intumescent
Coating (based coat) having the following characteristics:
1.
Specific gravity:
0.8 1.0 gm/cm3
2.
Colour
To match approved sample.
C. Primer: Of type recommended by fire proofing manufacturer.
D. Provide all accessory items required for applying fire proofing materials and as
recommended by manufacturers of the fire proofing materials.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9646/4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that clips, hangers, supports, sleeve, and other items required to penetrate
fire proofing, are in place.
C. Verify ducts, piping, equipment, or other items which would interface with
application of fire proofing are not positioned until fire proofing work is complete.
D. Verify that voids and cracks in substrate are filled, and projections are removed
where fireproofing is exposed to view as a finish material.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter, which
affect bond of fire proofing. Clean backgrounds as necessary following
manufacturers recommendations.
B. Remove incompatible materials, which affect bond by scraping, brushing,
scrubbing, or recommendations.
3.03
APPLICATION
A. Apply fire proofing strictly in accordance with manufacturers written instructions,

using recommended equipment, installing all necessary background
reinforcements, fixings, restraints, or other accessories required to comply with
the performance requirements of this section and as indicated on drawings.
B. Apply primer and fire proofing in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
C. Mix and apply fire proofing in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
D. Apply intumescent coating and top seal only by spray application.
E. Provide ventilation as required by manufacturer for installation in enclosed areas.
3.04
A. Inspect the installed fire proofing after application for integrity of fire protection,
prior to concealment of work.
B. Re-inspect the installed fire proofing for integrity of fire protection, after
installation of subsequent work.
C. Have the completed work in all aspects, as per requirement of local inspectors
and provide approval certificate from Fire Department.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9646/5
3.05
A. Leave all work clean following installation. The Contractor shall be responsible
for protecting the complete work from excessive dirt, misuse and damage. Any
damage shall be repaired/replaced as directed and in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions.
B. Remove excess material, overspray, dropping, and debris.
C. Remove fire proofing from materials and surfaces or required to be fire proofed.
Protect surfaces not scheduled to receive fire proofing and equipment from
damage by overspray, fall-out and dusting.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
09 9646/6
SECTION 10 1453
TRAFFIC SIGNS AND MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of supply and
installation of the following as per drawings.
1.
Traffic signs and markings.
2.
Speed guards.
3.
Reflectorized Traffic Studs.
1.
Section 05 5000 Metal Fabrications.
2.
Section 03 4800 Precast Concrete Specialties for Precast Concrete
Wheel Stoppers.
3.
Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated
signs.
1.02
SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans,

elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components.
Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation
details.
1.
Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details
of wording and lettering layout.
2.
For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide
setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts
and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years experience in

producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of
successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce
sign units required without causing delay in the Work.
B. Traffic Signs And Markings
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 1453/1
Traffic Signs and Markings
1.
2.
3.
1.04
Comply with the relevant schedules and requirements stated in the

manuals in respect of the layout, legend, dimensions and colours of signs
to be used within the Project.
Unless otherwise stated, the design, materials, construction and erection
of signs shall comply with the standards in the General Specification for
the Traffic Signs Manual prepared by the Local Authorities.
Sign plates employing any method of construction, irrespective of their
size and shape, shall be capable of passing the rigidity tests stated in the
relevant standards.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop

drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements
on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delay.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 1453/2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Steel
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cold-rolled sheet steel: ASTM A 366, commercial quality.

Steel pipe: ASTM A53, hot-dip galvanised.
Steel tubing: ASTM A 500, hot-dip galvanised.
Base plates, anchor bolts etc.: non-corrosive, zinc coated of the type and
sizes approved.
All components shall be hot-dip galvanised after fabrication.
B. Aluminum: Aluminum sheet as per ASTM B 209 and aluminum extrusions as per
ASTM B221.
C. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metal that are not corrosive
to the sign material and mounting surface.
D. Anchors and Inserts: use non-ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors
and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion
resistance. Furnished inserts as required to be set into concrete or masonry
work.
E. For the fabrication of metal work that will be exposed to view, use only materials
which are smooth and free of surface blemishes. Do not use materials which
have stains and discolorations including welds which do not match the materials.
F. Flatness and Edges: For exposed works provide materials which have been
cold-rolled, cold-finished, cold-drawn, extruded, stretcher leveled, machine cut
and otherwise produced to the highest commercial standard for flatness with
edges and corners sharp and true to angle or curvature as required.
G. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide the alloy and type required for
strength, workability, compatibility and colour match after grinding smooth and
finishing the fabricated product.
2.02
TRAFFIC SIGNS
A. Graphic Image Process

1.
Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy to comply with
requirements indicated for sizes, styles, spacings, content, positions,
materials, finishes and colours of letters, numbers, symbols and other
graphic devices.
2.
Sign Face Design: Comply with relevant standards in the Traffic Signs
Manual prepared by the local authority as appropriate.
B. Non-illuminated signs
1.
Reflectorisation: Provide unlit signs with approved reflective sheeting
material applied to all parts of the sign face except any coloured black, to
ensure that these signs have the same appearance after dark as during
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 1453/3
daylight. The reflective sheeting material shall embody minute glass

spheres within a waterproof plastic film so as to produce a retro-reflective
type of reflectivity when illuminated by a vehicle headlamp.
C. Illuminated Signs:
1.
Fabricate illuminated signs using extruded aluminium frames and acrylic
sheet panel materials. Co-ordinate electric characteristics with those of
the power supply provided. Make provision for servicing and concealed
connection. For exit signs, provide battery back-up service with a duration
of minimum two hours.
D. Sign Plate and Stiffening Frame
1.
Sign Plate
a.
Steel Construction: Sheet steel not less than 1.25mm thick.
b.
Aluminium Construction: Aluminium sheet not less than 3mm
thick.
2.
Stiffening Frame: Manufactured from approved aluminium sections.
Provide stiffening frames for plate signs having the following:
a.
The horizontal or vertical dimension of the sign exceeds 1000mm.
b.
The maximum dimension is greater than 600mm and the ratio W/D
or D/W is equal to or greater than 2.5; where D is the depth and W
is the width of the sing.
E. All steel used for the complete work shall be of hot-dip galvanized and all
aluminum shall be of anodized finish, as approved.
2.03
MARKING PAINT
A. Solvent- borne coating based on alkyd resin and chlorinated rubber, pigmented
with a high quality light and weather fast pigment, with a total dry film thickness of
125-150 microns or as required. Add glass beads for reflection effect.
2.04
SPEED GUARDS
A. Speed bumps: Extruded profiles made from durable rubber with resilient and
impact resistant properties, supplied with integral hardware and reflective eyes
on approach sides.
1.
Size: As per drawings.
B. Manufacturer:
1.
Waston Bowman Acme (BASF)
UAE
2.
Durable Corporation
USA
3.
ICS Group
USA
4.
Or approved equal.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 1453/4
2.05
TRAFFIC STUDS
A. Traffic studs, reflectorized: Stainless steel, with yellow reflectorized markings on

2 sides, embedded onto paving as indicated on drawings.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 1453/5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate all units and accessories, using mounting methods of the type
described and in compliance with the applicable standards.
1.
Install signs and traffic studs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with
sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.
2.
Install speed guards as per recommendations of the manufacturer.
3.02
A. Upon completion of installation of illuminated signs, apply electrical energy to

demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Test illuminated
emergency signs to demonstrate operation under emergency conditions. Where
possible, correct malfunctioning at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance,
otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.
3.03
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's

instructions. Protect units from damage until time for completion.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 1453/6
SECTION 10 1805
INTERNET BOOTHS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labor, materials, plant, tools and equipment, and perform all
operations and services necessary for the supply and installation of indoor and
outdoor internet booths (WIFI booths) indicated on drawings.
1.
Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes for booths.
other work.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for the units.
C. Samples: Samples of each material and color indicated.
D. Maintenance Data: For booths to include in maintenance manuals.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer for

installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
Obtain booths through one source from a single
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 1805/1
Internet Booths
1.04
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorage for booths. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete
inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.05
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees

to repair or replace components of booths that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
Structural failures of booths.
b.
Faulty operation of system.
c.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering.
2.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 1805/2
Internet Booths
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
WIFI INTERNET KIOSKS
A. Description: The WIFI multimedia booth should serve as an information access

point (IAP) with a web-based community mapping software which contains a
directory, social events, scores of nearby city services and attractions. The unit
should be customized with a whole variety of hardware including keyboard, RFID
reader, barcode scanner, receipt printer (for indoor units), webcam and full
customized branding, power outlet for mobiles charging, a Bluetooth adapter and
DSL modem/router.
B.
Model Ref:
1.
Outdoor Units: WIFI Internet Kiosk Model IK-630 with Roof canopy, with
19 screen (www.internetkioskos.com)
2.
Indoor Units: ProTouch Zurich 7000 kiosk with 19 touch screen
(www.protouch.co.uk)
C. Products are specified for the purposes of establishing minimum quality

standards. Products which are equal to or better than those specified, and which
conform to the design requirements and color selections, may be acceptable,
subject to the Engineers approval.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 1805/3
Internet Booths
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine floors, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, surface conditions, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power system to verify actual locations of
connections before installation of booths.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install booths in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.03
A. Upon completion of installation, demonstrate the units for capability and

compliance with requirements specified.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 1805/4
Internet Booths
SECTION 10 2113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of toilet cubicles.
Door hardware for the cubicle doors shall be integral with the system.
1.
Toilet Enclosures: Floor anchored.
2.
Type:
a.
Solid phenolic core cubicles.
b.
Glass cubicles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Section 09 3013
Tiling
2.
Section 10 2813
Toilet Accessories.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include details of construction
relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors,
hardware, and fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of cubicles. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples of color and finish for panel required, prepared on 150-mm square
samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. Include samples of
exposed hardware and accessories.
1.03
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field

Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
B. Co-ordination: Finish inserts and anchorages, which must be built into other work
for installation of compartments and related items. Co-ordinate delivery with
other work to avoid delay.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2113/1
Toilet Compartments
1.04
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by Manufacturer and

Contractor agreeing to repair or replace components of toilet compartments that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Structural failures.
2.
Faulty operation of locks or hardware.
3.
Deterioration of finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2113/2
Toilet Compartments
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
Products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes
approval.
A. Solid Phenolic Units

1.
Schafer Trennwandsysteme
Germany.
2.
Thrislington
UK
3.
Global
USA.
4.
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
USA
5.
Hermeta
Netherlands
6.
Gibca Furniture
UAE
7.
Or approved equal.
B. Glass Cubicles
1.
Thrislington
UK
2.
Or approved equal.
2.03
MATERIALS IN GENERAL
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and
smoothness. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on
finished units are unacceptable.
2.04
PHENOLIC-CORE UNITS
A. Door, Panel and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic-core panel material with
melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not
separately laminated), and with eased and polished edges. Provide minimum 19
mm thick doors and pilasters and minimum 13 mm thick panels.
1.
Facing Sheet Color: As indicated on drawings.
2.
Core Color: Manufacturer's standard dark color.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2113/3
Toilet Compartments
B. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 304, not
less than 0.8 mm specified thickness and 75 mm high, finished to match
hardware.
C. Brackets (Fittings):
1.
Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, stainless steel, chrome-plated,
nonferrous, cast zinc alloy zamac or clear anodized aluminium.
2.
Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless
steel / aluminium.
D. Product Reference
1.
Icon, laminate finish cubicles by Thrislington Cubicles.
E. Door Hardware
1.
Hinges: Stainless Steel, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold
doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees.
2.
Stainless steel doorknob fittings, with fixed doorknob and vacant/engaged
indicator, with emergency unlocking facility on the outside of the cubicle,
and fixed knob and bolt with cover housing on the inside.
3.
Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped
bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted
accessories.
4.
Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper.
2.05
GLASS UNITS
A. Framework: Aluminum framing. Extruded satin anodized head-rail and vertical

posts, with integral full height door closing buffer.
B. Door: 10mm toughened glass, ceramic baked to required level of obscurity.
Pivots from headrail encapsulating concealed hydraulic door closer, with antifinger trap clearance on pivot side.
C. Divider: 10mm toughened glass, ceramic baked to required level of obscurity,
supported on engineered 304 grade stainless steel foot.
D. Fittings: Engineered 304 grade stainless steel lock, with concealed fixing through
door and emergency release facility. Lock locates into stainless steel receiver,
integral to the aluminum framework. Door fixed to hydraulic closer and stainless
steel lower pivot bracket, using engineered 304 grade stainless steel fittings,
fixed through glass with flush countersunk stainless steel snake-eye machined
fixing.
E. Product Reference
1.
K32 Oasis Glass cubicles by Thrislington Cubicles.
2.06
ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating accessories.

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2113/4
Toilet Compartments
2.07
FABRICATION
A. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant

anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling
adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at
pilasters to conceal anchorage.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2113/5
Toilet Compartments
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install

units rigid, straight, level, and plumb.
Secure units in position with
manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1.
Maximum Clearances:
a.
Pilasters and Panels: 13 mm.
b.
Panels and Walls: 25 mm.
2.
Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less
than two brackets attached near top and bottom of panel.
a.
Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or
tile joints.
b.
Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters or feet with anchors penetrating not less
than 50 mm into structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's
written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust
so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position.
3.02
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to

manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position
when unlatched.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet cubicles are
without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2113/6
Toilet Compartments
SECTION 102600
WALL GUARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of wall and corner
guards.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include physical characteristics, such as durability, resistance to

fading, and flame resistance, for wall guards system component indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, extent, and installation details of wall guard
system component. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.
C. Samples: Samples of type of wall guard component required, showing the full
range of color and texture variations expected for wall guards system
component. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation

of impact-resistant wall protection system components similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing wall protection
system components similar to those required for this Project and with a record of
successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain color, grade, finish, and type of wall guards system
component from a single source with resources to provide components of
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wallprotection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing
identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to local authorities.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2600/1
Wall Guards
1.04
A. Store wall surface-protection materials in original undamaged packages and

containers inside a well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling,
extreme temperatures, and humidity.
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other
construction contiguous with impact-resistant wall-protection units by field
1.05
WARRANTY

to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall-protection units that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
a.
Structural failures.
b.
Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.
2.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2600/2
Wall Guards
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. CS-Acrovyn
USA
www.cs-group.com
B. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems
www.inprocorp.com
C. Pawling Corporation
USA
www.inprocorp.com
D. Construction Specialties
USA
www.c-sgroup.com
E. Stelatex
www.cs-france.fr
F. Waston Bowman Acme (Degussa)
MBT Middle East
G. Or approved equal.
2.02
COLUMN GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Rubber Guards in parking areas: Manufactured from impact

resistant rubber and fixed to the substrate using epoxy adhesives or proprietary
fastenings recommended by the manufacturer.
1.
Shore A Hardness: 75 (ASTM D 412).
2.
Dim: As indicated on drawings.
2.03
WALL GUARD
A. Materials in General
1.
Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and
stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic
with integral color throughout; thickness as indicated.
a.
Impact Resistance: Minimum 1356 J/m of notch when tested
according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
b.
Chemical and Stain Resistance:
Tested according to
ASTM D 543.
c.
Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635.
d.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
e.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2.
Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer
for type of use and finish indicated but with not less than strength and
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2600/3
Wall Guards
3.
durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for

Alloy 6063-T5.
Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive
metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being
fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.
B. Crash Rail: Heavy-duty assembly consisting of continuous snap-on plastic cover

installed over continuous retainer; with continuous rubber or vinyl bumper
cushion(s) centered in the retainer; designed to withstand impacts.
1.
Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 2.5-mm wall thickness; [in
dimensions and profiles indicated on drawings.
a.
Color and Texture: As selected by Engineer.
2.
Retainer: Minimum 2.0-mm thick, 1-piece, extruded aluminum.
a.
Mounting: Surface mounted on cushion spacers.
3.
End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color with
cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.
4.
Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware.
C. Bumper Rail: Assembly consisting of continuous snap-on plastic cover installed
over continuous retainer; designed to spring back when hit.
1.
Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 2.0 mm wall thickness: in
dimensions and profiles indicated on drawings.
a.
Color and Texture: As selected by Engineer.
2.
Retainer: Minimum 1.6 mm thick, 1-piece, extruded aluminum.
a.
Mounting Surface mounted on cushion spacers.
3.
End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color
matching with cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on
cover.
4.
Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware.
2.04
FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate wall and corner guards to comply with requirements indicated
for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including thickness of
components.
B. Pre assemble components in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
C. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting members to other
construction.
D. Provide inserts and other anchoring devices for connecting components to
concrete or masonry. Fabricate anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.
Coordinate anchoring devices with the supporting structure.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2600/4
Wall Guards
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances[, fire rating,] and other conditions
affecting performance of work.
1.
Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached
for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in
the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.
2.
For impact-resistant wall-protection units attached with adhesive or foam
tape, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including
compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
3.
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impactresistant wall-protection system components.
B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install impact-resistant wall-protection units level, plumb, and true to

line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or
other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
1.
Install impact-resistant wall-protection units in locations and at mounting
heights indicated on Drawings.
2.
Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories
required for a complete installation.
a.
Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.
b.
Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 6.1 m, splice
aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along
the run, but no closer than 305 mm.
c.
Adjust [end] [and] [top] caps as required to ensure tight seams.
3.04
CLEANING
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories

using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.
B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing
by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2600/5
Wall Guards
SECTION 10 2813
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of toilet accessory
items indicated on drawings.
B. Related Section:
1.
Section 06 4000
1.02
Architectural Woodwork.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1.
Construction details and dimensions.
2.
Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts
in other work and substrate preparation.
3.
Material and finish descriptions.
4.
Mirrors and mirror hardware.
B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and
finish requirements.
C. Product data and installation instructions.
D. Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room)
for each toilet accessory item for project.
E. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including templates,
substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and
installing anchorage devices.
F. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and
attachments to other work.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard inserts and

anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2813/1
Toilet Accessories
B. Code Compliance:
1.
Local regulations.
2.
International Code Council ICC/ANSI A117.1: Accessible and usable
building and facilities.
3.
ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act.
4.
ADAAG: Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.
C. Safety Glazing Products: For tempered mirrors, provide products complying with
testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
1.04
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Co-ordination: Co-ordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with

other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation,
adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to
prevent delaying the Work.
1.05
DELIVERY, STOREAGE AND HANDLING
A. All accessories shall be delivered at the job site completely packaged with all
necessary screws, bolt, miscellaneous parts, instructions and installation
templates. Each package shall be properly labeled.
B. All accessories shall be stored in a dry, secure area, in a manner to facilitate
sorting, checking and unpacking.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2813/2
Toilet Accessories
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
B. Vola
Germany
C. D line
Denmark
D. Hansgrohe - Axor Steel
Germany
E. Vitra
Turkey
F. Bobrick
USA
G. Or approved equal.
2.02
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 304, 0.8 mm minimum nominal thickness,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM
B 456, Type SC 2.
C. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, Clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0
mm thick.
D. Tempered Glass Mirrors: Comply with ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, for
blemish requirements in annealed float glass before silver coating is applied, for
coating requirements, and with other requirements not affected by tempering
process; and comply with ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float
glass before silver coating is applied.
E. Steel channels, ASTM A 36, hot-dip galvanized for vanity counter support.
F. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication.
G. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit,
or of galvanized steel where concealed.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2813/3
Toilet Accessories
2.03
TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. Refer Drawings for Schedule of items.

B. Product references:
1:
Trash/Waste Receptacle: Vitra Arkitekta, polished stainless steel
A44056 (12lt)
1A:
Waste Bin Vitra, Faucets & Accessories, Trash Box polished stainless
steel A44358(12 Lt).
2:
Toilet Paper Roll Holder: Hansgrohe - Axor Steel - Roll Holder With Cover
41238800.
2A:
Toilet Paper Roll Holder Spare: D-Line F110.0 14mm. Satin Stainless
Steel - 14.7062.02 Code 006.
3:
Coat Hook (Height From Ffl.-1800mm): Vola - T17 (S.S. Brushed Finish).
3C: Towel Hook: Vola-T18, Stainless Steel, Satin Finish.
4:
Surface Paper Towel Dispenser: D - Line, F 112.0 satin stainless steel
14.7080.02
5:
Liquid Soap Dispenser: Liquid Soap Dispenser: Vola - T36 (S.S. Brush
Finish), 80 mm Ht (custom)
5A:
Wall Mounted Liquid Soap Dispenser: Vola (S.S. Brushed Finish) T10
Wall Mounted.
6:
Sanitary Panel Program, Stainless Steel: D Line, Paper Towel
Dispenser - 14.7180.02 code 000, Maxi Waste Paper Bin - 14.7197.02
code 200
7:
Framed Mirror: 10mm thick clear glass mirror with marine grade plywood
backing. Comply with Section 06 4000.
a.
Framing Product (WD04b): Santa Maria grass, to match approved
sample, with marine grade plywood substrate. Surfaces treated
with polyurethane to make it resistant to abrasion, water and
chemicals.
b.
Manufacturer: Nature Squared, Switzerland,
www.naturesquared.com or approved equal.
7A:
Adjustable Mirror: Vitra, Project Solution, 320 1130.
7B:
Frameless Mirror: 10mm thick clear glass mirror with marine grade
plywood backing. Tempered glass shall be used for full height mirrors.
10:
Toilet Brush: D Line F110.0 Satin Stainless Steel 14.7060.02, Code 007.
GR1: Grab Rail: 40mm dia stainless steel grab bar with snap flange, satin
finish, Bobrick B-6806, length 1200mm.
GR2: 40mm dia stainless steel grab bar with snap flange, satin finish, Bobrick
B-6806, length 600mm.
11:
Soap Dish: Vitra Arkitekta, A44274, Chrome finish.
C. Stone Counter Top: As per Section 09 7500.
2.04
FABRICATION
A. General: Only a maximum 37 mm diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer

logo, as approved, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units.
On either interior surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2813/4
Toilet Accessories
identification by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate,

indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise
indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled.
Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C. Mirrors
1.
Tempered mirrors: Before tempering, cut mirrors to final sizes and
shapes.
2.
Mirror Edge Treatment: As indicated on the drawings.
3.
Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
4.
Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in
factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.
B. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permit
rigid, tamperproof, and theft proof installation. Use stainless steel brackets and
hardware for concealed fixation.
2.05
A. ASTM A 153/A 153M:
Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and

Steel Hardware
B. ASTM A 653/A 653M:
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized)
or
Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
C. ASTM A 666:
Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic

Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
D. ASTM C 1503:
Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror
E. ASTM F 446:
Consumer Safety Specification for Grab Bars and

Accessories Installed in the Bathing Area
F. NFPA 70:
National Electrical Code
G. ASTM C 1048
Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind FT

Coated Glass
H. 16 CFR 1201
Code of Federal Regulations: Safety Standard for

Architectural Glazing Materials.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2813/5
Toilet Accessories
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using

fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install
units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with Z-clips/special
hangers, toggle bolts, or screws suitable for concealed fixation. Set units plumb,
level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions
for type of substrate involved.
3.02
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms
function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's
recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 2813/6
Toilet Accessories
SECTION 10 4413
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Section Includes:
1.
Fire protection cabinets for the following:
a.
Portable fire extinguishers.
b.
Fire hose valves.
c.
Fire hoses and racks.
B. Related Sections:
1.
Division 09 painting Sections for field painting fire protection cabinets.
2.
Division 10 Section "Signage" for directional signage to out-of-sight fire
extinguishers and cabinets.
3.
Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers."
4.
Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for hose
systems, racks, and valves.
5.
Division 26 Sections for low-voltage wiring for fire protection cabinet
alarms.
6.
Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for fire extinguisher location lights.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes for fire protection cabinets.
1.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing
mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding
construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
2.
Show location of knockouts for hose valves.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
Samples of size indicated below:
1.
Size: 6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) square.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4413/1
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
E. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection
cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
F. Maintenance Data:
manuals.
1.03
For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with

requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are
installed.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C. Preinstallation.
1.
Review methods and procedures related to fire protection cabinets
including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Schedules and coordination requirements.
D. Conform to the requirements of the following:
1.
QCS: Qatar Construction Standards.
2.
QCDD: Qatar Civil Defense Department.
1.04
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire
hoses, hose valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
1.05
SEQUENCING
A. Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is

complete.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4413/2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:

Type B.
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and

manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
1.
Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2.
Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Copper-Alloy Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge
brass, 70 percent copper).
E. Copper-Alloy Bronze Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz
metal, 60 percent copper).
F. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, [3] [6] mm thick.
G. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3,
3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).
H. Break Glass: Clear annealed float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1,
Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick, single strength.
I. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3,
1.5 mm thick.
J. Wire Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 1, Quality q8, Mesh m1
(diamond), 6 mm thick.
K. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 6 mm
thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).
L. Acrylic Bubble: One piece.
2.02
FIRE PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher, extinguisher and hose valve, hose,
rack, valve, and extinguisher.
1.
Approved Manufacturers:
a.
Fire End & Croker Corporation.
b.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde
plc.
c.
Potter Roemer LLC.
d.
Approved Alternatives/Substitutions under provision of the General
Conditions of Contract.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4413/3
B. Cabinet Construction: 1-hour fire rated.

1.
Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls
fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined
with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick, fire-barrier material. Provide
factory-drilled mounting holes.
C. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel, sheet.
1.
Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style
of trim indicated.
1.
Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes
flush with exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without
overlapping trim attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same
material as box, attached to box to act as plaster stop.
2.
Trimless with Hidden Flange: Flange of same metal and finish as box
overlaps surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by an
overlapping door.
3.
Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall
return at outer edge (backbend).
E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth
to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door
frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall
return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for
recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed
cabinet installation.
1.
Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch (32- to 38-mm) backbend depth.
2.
Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) backbend depth.
F. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on
wall with no trim. Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for semirecessed
cabinet installation.
G. Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
H. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.
I. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.
J. Door Glazing: Clear float glass.
1.
Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet.
2.
Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet painted [white] [red]
[black] on unexposed side.
3.
Acrylic Bubble Color: Clear, transparent.
K. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper
type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1.
Provide recessed door pull and friction latch.
2.
Provide [concealed hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4413/4
L. Accessories:
1.
Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire
extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and
capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel
finish.
2.
Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with
chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet.
3.
Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word
"FIRE" embossed into face.
4.
Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by
pulling sharply on door handle.
5.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for
letter style, size, spacing, and location.
a.
Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words
"FIRE EXTINGUISHER."
1)
Location: Applied cabinet glazing.
2)
Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters.
3)
Lettering Color: Red.
4)
Orientation: Horizontal.
6.
Alarm: Manufacturer's standard alarm that actuates when fire protection
cabinet door is opened and that is powered by low voltage, complete with
transformer.
M. Finishes:
1.
Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:
a.
Exterior of cabinet door, and trim except for those surfaces
indicated to receive another finish.
b.
Interior of cabinet and door.
2.
Aluminum: Clear anodic.
3.
Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat.
4.
Stainless Steel: No. 8.
5.
Copper Alloy, Brass: Hand rubbed, lacquered.
6.
Copper Alloy, Bronze: Hand rubbed, lacquered
2.03
FABRICATION
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim,
frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style
indicated.
1.
Weld joints and grind smooth.
2.
Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
3.
Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.
4.
Install door locks at factory.
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from
materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1.
Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal
design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
2.
Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.
3.
Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4413/5
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded,
and ground smooth.
2.04
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from
damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if
they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
2.05
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, or thicker.

B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, or thicker.
1.
Color: Light bronze.
2.
Color: Match Architect's sample.
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry
film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written
instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1.
Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample.
2.06
STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated
steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning"
After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be
applied over it.
B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and
chromate-free, universal primer immediately after surface preparation and
pretreatment.
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and
pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting
of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's
written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
1.
Color and Gloss: [Match Architect's sample.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4413/6
2.07
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.
B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of
cross scratches.
1.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
2.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
3.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
4.
Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
5.
Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7.
6.
Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8.
C. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B.
2.08
COPPER-ALLOY FINISHES
A. Buffed Finish, Lacquered: M21-O6x (Mechanical Finish: buffed, smooth

specular; Coating: clear organic, air drying, as specified below).
1.
Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by
air spray in 2 coats per manufacturer's written instructions, with interim
drying, to a total thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm).
B. Hand-Rubbed Finish, Lacquered:
M31-M34-O6x (Mechanical Finish:
directionally textured, fine satin; Mechanical Finish: directionally textured, hand
rubbed; Coating: clear organic, air drying, as specified below).
1.
Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by
air spray in 2 coats per manufacturer's written instructions, with interim
drying, to a total thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm).
C. Statuary Conversion Coating over Satin Finish: M31-C55 (Mechanical Finish:
directionally textured, fine satin; Chemical Finish: conversion coating, sulfide).
1.
D. Patina Conversion Coating:
CDA-M36-C12-C52 (Mechanical Finish:
directionally textured, uniform; Chemical Finish: nonetched cleaned, degreased;
Chemical Finish: conversion coating, ammonium sulfate).
1.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4413/7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves, racks and cabinets to verify actual
locations of piping connections before cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where
recessed semirecessed, recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed.
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire protection cabinets as

required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights

indicated.
B. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of
cabinet.
C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall
thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire
protection cabinets.
E. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.
F. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square
and plumb.
G. Fire-Rated, Hose and Valve Cabinets:
1.
Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) tolerance between
pipe OD and knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout.
2.
Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
H. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4413/8
3.04
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire

protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers
written installation instructions.
B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that
integral locking devices operate properly.
C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior
surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be
restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures
recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket
manufacturers.
E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4413/9
SECTION 10 4416
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried, wheeled fire extinguishers and mounting

brackets for fire extinguishers.
B. Owner-Furnished Material: Hand-carried and wheeled fire extinguishers.
C. Related Sections:
1.
Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."
2.
Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for hose
systems, racks, and valves.
3.
Division 23 Section "Commercial-Kitchen Hoods" for fire extinguishing
systems provided as part of commercial-kitchen exhaust hoods.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and
classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and
profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.
B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher
schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.
C. Remaining paragraphs are defined in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures"
as "Informational Submittals."Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire
extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with

NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4416/1
Fire Extinguishers
C. Preinstallation.
1.
Review methods and procedures related to fire extinguishers including,
but not limited to, the following:
a.
Schedules and coordination requirements.
D. Conform to the requirements of the following:
1.
QCS: Qatar Construction Standards.
2.
QCDD: Qatar Civil Defense Department.
1.04
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to
ensure fit and function.
1.05
WARRANTY

to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
a.
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b.
Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
2.
Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4416/2
Fire Extinguishers
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire extinguishers indicated.
1.
a.
Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.
b.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde
plc.
c.
Potter Roemer LLC.
d.
2.
Valves: Nickel-plated, polished brass body.
3.
Handles and Levers: Stainless steel.
4.
Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with
NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher
location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.
B. Stored-Pressure Water Type: UL-rated 2-A, 2.5-gal. (9.5-L) nominal capacity,
with water in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.
C. Regular Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 10 lb (4.5 kg) nominal capacity, with
sodium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled
container.
D. Regular Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg)
nominal capacity, with sodium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel
container.
E. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb
(4.5-kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical
in enameled-steel container.
F. Carbon Dioxide Type: 10-B:C, 15-lb (6.8-kg) nominal capacity, with carbon
dioxide in manufacturer's standard enameled-metal.
2.02
MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to

secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and
capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.
1.
a.
Amerex Corporation.
b.
c.
Chubb.
d.
Potter Roemer LLC.
e.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4416/3
Fire Extinguishers
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter

style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1.
Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.
a.
Orientation: Vertical.
2.03
WHEELED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Wheeled Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for locations indicated,
complete with carriage.
1.
a.
Amerex Corporation.
b.
c.
Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.
d.
2.
Carriage: Fabricated from enameled-steel pipe, complete with hanger
assembly, long-range nozzle, hose, and semipneumatic solid-rubber tires.
a.
Hose: 100 feet (30.5 m).
B. Carbon Dioxide Type: UL-rated 20-B:C, 100-lb (45-kg) nominal capacity, with
carbon dioxide in manufacturer's standard enameled-metal container.
C. Dry-Powder Type: UL-rated Class D, copper-based powder, 250-lb (113-kg)
nominal capacity, in regulated-pressure, enameled-steel container; with
pressure-indicating gage.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4416/4
Fire Extinguishers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1.
Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire
extinguishers.
corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated

and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm)] above finished floor to top of
fire extinguisher.
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at
locations indicated.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 4416/5
Fire Extinguishers
SECTION 10 7316
CANOPIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Design, engineer and furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment and
perform all services and operations necessary for the complete supply and
installation of canopies including associated support system with design intent
indicated on drawings.
1.
Canopy (ring design) with stainless steel sheet cladding and support
system.
2.
Canopy with point fixed glazing, laminated glass fins, stainless steel
support system and steel cable.
B.
Refer Appendix C: Wind Tunnel Test Report.
1.
Section 04 4200
2.
Section 05 1200
3.
Section 05 5000
4.
Section 08 8000
5.
Section 09 9100
6.
Section 08 44 23
7.
Section 08 4433
1.02
Exterior Stone Cladding.

Structural Steel Framing.
Metal Fabrications.
Glazing.
Painting.
Point Support Structural Glass Wall System
Bonded Glass fin Structural Glass Wall
System
DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Have glass canopies and anchorage designed by a professional engineer

licensed to design structures and registered at the Place of the Work.
B. Structural Loads:
1.
Wind Loads: Refer Appendix C: Wind Tunnel Test Report.
2.
Seismic Loads: As applicable for the Project.
C. Material thicknesses stated herein are a minimum, increase as required. Be
responsible for engineering calculations to ensure structural adequacy of panels,
supports, connections.
D. The Work shall accommodate, by means of expansion and contraction
provisions, any movements in the glass assemblies themselves and between the
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7316/1
Canopies
assemblies and the building structure, caused by structural movements, both

deflection and racking; and/or thermal expansion and contraction, without
breakage of glass, distortion, damage, or misalignment.
E. Provide exterior glass assemblies to allow for thermal movements resulting from
the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures.
Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime heat loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 70oC, ambient; 100oC, material surfaces.
F. The Work shall have a method of attachment to the structure which shall take
into account site peculiarities so that there shall be no possibility of site and air
vibrations or normal temperature movements of the building to loosen, weaken
and/or fracture the connection between the glass assembly components and the
structure or between the components themselves.
G. Design glass assemblies to accommodate expansion and contraction of
components within service temperature range to be expected, and surface
temperature variance of components without causing distortion, breakage of
glass, undue stress on fasteners or other defects detrimental to appearance or
performance.
H. Design members, panels, connections and assemblies to withstand within
acceptable deflection limitations as specified their own weight, the weight of the
glass, loads imposed by the motion of operable elements, and the maximum
design loads and combination of loads due to rain, seismic loads, the pressure
and suction of wind and internal pressures.
I. Design glass in accordance with ASTM E1300, except where greater
requirements are specified.
J. Deflection limits for glass: A maximum of L/240 of span under design loading.
Deflection limits shall be such that the integrity of the glass will be maintained at
design loading. Permanent deformation, anchorage, weld or fastener failure,
disengagement or breakage, of any assembly component shall not occur under
loading equal to 1.5 times the design loads. Permanent deformation is defined as
deflection without recovery exceeding length/1000.
K. Connections and anchorage shall be designed to prevent high stress
concentration at the hole positions and accommodate negative and positive wind
loading, seismic loads, thermal movement, construction tolerances, live load and
dead load movements.
L. Metal anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not more than
50% of the allowable stress when maximum load conditions are applied.
M. All tempered glass shall be heat soaked. Use a safety factor for glass to the
statistical probability of failure. Provide statistical analysis of test data that the
probability of failure is not greater than 1 in 54,000 sq.ft. of tempered glass.
Written warranties against nickel sulfide inclusions or statistical heat soaking in
lieu of heat soaking will not be accepted.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7316/2
Canopies
N. Glass assemblies shall be of thickness and design, and shall be installed to keep
panels free from up-lift, flutter and vibration under loads specified.
O. Assemblies shall be designed, assembled and secured to the structure in a
manner which will permit adequate freedom of movement to compensate for
anticipated deflections as well as dimensional changes induced by temperature
variations and building movements.
P. Comply with the design and performance requirements of the building codes,
other regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and as
specified, and design and engineer the work accordingly. In designing and
engineering the work, the following principles shall be followed:
1.
In general, follow profiles, plans and sizes shown on the Drawings;
2.
Glass and metal components shall have a uniform appearance;
3.
Glass system shall provide for unitized pre-fixing of all items to glass prior
to erection;
4.
Glass units shall be removable and replaceable;
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product used, including finishing materials and methods.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of items specified in this
section. Include plans, elevations (maximum scale of 1:50), component details
(maximum scale of 1:5), connection design and attachments to other Work.
Indicate materials and profiles of each metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes,
fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
1.
Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchor
bolts and other anchorages.
2.
Submit detailed design calculations covering all the structural engineering
and safety aspects.
C. Samples: For each profile and pattern of fabricated metal and for each type of
metal finish required, prepared on metal of same thickness and alloy indicated for
the Work.
1.
150-mm- long samples of linear shapes and profiles.
2.
300mm square samples of glass.
3.
300mm square samples of metal sheet.
4.
Actual size samples for all exposed accessories.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing work similar to that

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Welding Standards: Qualify procedures and personnel according to:
1.
AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code- Steel.
2.
AWS D1.6: Structural Welding Code- Stainless Steel.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7316/3
Canopies
C. Before installing panels, construct mockups for each form of construction and
finish required in a location and of size as directed to verify selections made
under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of
materials and execution.
1.
Completion may become part of the completed Work if approved by
Engineer.
1.05
A.
1.06

Store units protected from moisture, soiling and abrasion.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where items of work are indicated to fit to other

1.07
CO-ORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish Setting Drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete.
Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7316/4
Canopies
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE FABRICATORS
A. Alico
UAE.
B. Armetal
UAE.
C. Seele U.A.E
Dubai
D. Josef Gartner GmbH (Dubai Branch)
Dubai
E. Or approved equal
2.02
METALS
A. General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in
finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not
acceptable.
B. Stainless Steel:
1.
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 316L.
2.
Stainless Steel Sheet, Plate and Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316L.
C. Structural steel shapes, plates and bars: As per Section 05 1200.
components shall be hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A 123.
All
D. Cables and fittings: Stainless Steel.

2.03
GLASS, GLAZING AND FITTINGS
A. Thickness and Type: As indicated on drawings and comply with Section 08

8000.
B. Fittings
1.
Spider fittings shall be manufactured from stainless steel Grade 316L.
a.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineers satisfaction
that the stresses induced in the glass by these fittings are
compatible with the strength of the glass and the needs of the
performance specification.
b.
The strength and performance of these fittings meets the overall
requirements of the performance specification and provide a safe
and serviceable design. The finish on the fittings shall be to
Engineers approval.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7316/5
Canopies
c.
The design of fittings shall include anti loosening features to

prevent back off of the fasteners which could result in torque
reduction.
C. All glass to metal contact shall be prevented by the use of non-compressive

gasket such as fully vulcanized fiber or neoprene at the fitting/glass interface and
by nylatron polyamide bushings at all hole positions. Where visible these
gaskets and bushings shall be black and be resistant to the effects of UV
radiation.
D. Electrolytic corrosion caused by contact between dissimilar metal surfaces shall
be prevented with isolation material where appropriate.
2.04
OTHER MATERIALS
A. Stone cladding: As per Section 04 4200.

2.05
A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes
as recommended by producer of metal to be welded, complying with applicable
AWS specifications, and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility
in fabricated items.
B. Fasteners: Use fasteners of same basic metal as fastened metal, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with
materials joined.
2.06
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Form metal work to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines, and
angles. Provide components in sizes and profiles indicated on shop drawings
and not less than that needed to comply with requirements indicated for
structural performance.
B. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to
other work. Drill and tap for required fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing.
Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or
discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of all flux,
and dress all exposed and contact surfaces.
D. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed
to weather to exclude water penetration.
E. Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other
defects that impair strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7316/6
Canopies
buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting
marks.
F. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.
G. Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
2.07
FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete

the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction as per
approved shop drawings. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and
as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports.
2.08
STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
B. Stainless steel finish as indicated on drawings and shall match sample approved
by the Engineer.
2.09
A. AWS D1.1:
Structural Welding Code Steel.
B. AWS D1.3:
Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
C. AWS D1.6:
Structural Welding Code Stainless Steel.
D. ASTM A 276:
Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
E. ASTM A 653/A 653M:

(Galvanized)
or
Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated
F. ASTM A 666:

G. ASTM B 633:
Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc

on Iron and Steel
H. NAAMM: Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7316/7
Canopies
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from

established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints. Where
cutting, welding, and grinding are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of
metal, restore finishes to eliminate any evidence of such corrective work.
C. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field.
Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by
complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.
D. Field Welding: Comply with applicable AWS specification for procedures of
manual shielded metal arc welding, for appearance and quality of welds, and for
methods used in correcting welding work. Weld connections that are not to be
left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Grind exposed welded joints smooth and restore finish to match
finish of adjacent surfaces.
E. Paint concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials with a heavy coating of
bituminous paint, or provide other separation as per manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.02
INSTALLING FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements
indicated on Shop Drawings.
3.03
CLEANING
A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water
and soap, and drying with soft clothes.
3.04
PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of metal from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by metal fabricator. Remove protective covering
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7316/8
Canopies
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no

evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in
the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide
new units.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7316/9
Canopies
SECTION 10 7317
GLASS ARBOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
installation of glass arbor including associated support system with design intent
indicated on drawings.
B.
1.
Section 05 1200
2.
Section 05 5000
3.
Section 08 8000
4.
Section 08 4423
5.
Section 09 9200
1.02

Metal Fabrications.
Glazing.
Point Support Structural Glass Wall System.
Exposed Steel Painting.
A. General: Provide assemblies capable of withstanding structural movement, inservice conditions, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather
without failure or infiltration of water.
B. Proceed with fabrication and erection only after approval of shop drawings and
design calculations.
C. Structural Loads:
1.
Wind Loads: Refer Appendix C: Wind Tunnel Test Report.
2.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7317/1
Glass Arbor
1.
2.

and safety aspects.
the Work.
1.
2.
300mm square samples of glass.
3.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.
2.
AWS D1.6: Structural Welding Code- Stainless Steel.
1.
Engineer.
1.05
A.
1.06

Store units protected from moisture, soiling and abrasion.
PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.07
CO-ORDINATION

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7317/2
Glass Arbor
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Alico
UAE.
B. Armetal
UAE.
C. Seele U.A.E
Dubai
Dubai
2.02
METALS
acceptable.
B. Stainless Steel:
1.
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 316L.
2.
Stainless Steel Sheet, Plate and Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 316L.
C. Structural steel shapes, plates and bars: As per Section 05 1200.
components shall be hot-dip galvanized, ASTM A 123.
All
D. Cables and fittings: Stainless Steel.

2.03
GLASS, GLAZING AND FITTINGS
A. Thickness and Type: As indicated on drawings and comply with Section 08

8000.
B. Fittings
1.
Glass fittings shall be manufactured from stainless steel Grade 316L.
a.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineers satisfaction
that the stresses induced in the glass by these fittings are
compatible with the strength of the glass and the needs of the
performance specification.
b.
The strength and performance of these fittings meets the overall
requirements of the performance specification and provide a safe
and serviceable design. The finish on the fittings shall be to
Engineers approval.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7317/3
Glass Arbor
c.
The design of fittings shall include anti loosening features to

prevent back off of the fasteners which could result in torque
reduction.
C. All glass to metal contact shall be prevented by the use of non-compressive

gasket such as fully vulcanized fiber or neoprene at the fitting/glass interface and
by nylatron polyamide bushings at all hole positions. Where visible these
gaskets and bushings shall be black and be resistant to the effects of UV
radiation.
D. Electrolytic corrosion caused by contact between dissimilar metal surfaces shall
be prevented with isolation material where appropriate.
2.04
materials joined.
2.05
E. Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other
marks.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7317/4
Glass Arbor
2.06
FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete

the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction as per
approved shop drawings. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and
as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports.
2.07
STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
B. Stainless steel finish as indicated on drawings and shall match sample approved
by the Engineer.
2.08
STEEL FINISHES
A. Galvanizing
1.
All steel exposed to outside shall be blast cleaned and hot dip galvanized
in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A153 minimum coating mass
610 g/m2. Thread dimensions shall be such that nuts will thread over
bolts without re-threading or chasing galvanized threads.
2.
Galvanize after fabrication where possible. Follow standard precautions
to avoid embrittlement of the base metal by overpickling, overheating or
during galvanizing.
B. All exposed steel components painted as per Section 09 9200 Exposed steel
Painting, color as indicated on drawings
2.09
A. AWS D1.1:
B. AWS D1.3:
C. AWS D1.6:
Structural Welding Code Stainless Steel.
D. ASTM A 276:
Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
E. ASTM A 653/A 653M:

(Galvanized)
or
Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7317/5
Glass Arbor
F. ASTM A 666:

G. ASTM B 633:
Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc

on Iron and Steel
H. NAAMM: Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7317/6
Glass Arbor
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

recommendations.
3.02
INSTALLING FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements
indicated on Shop Drawings.
3.03
CLEANING
3.04
PROTECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7317/7
Glass Arbor

new units.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7317/8
Glass Arbor
SECTION 10 7318
TRELLIS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
installation of trellis system with design intent indicated on drawings.
B.
1.
Section 04 4200
2.
Section 05 1200
3.
Section 05 5000
4.
Section 09 9100
1.02
Exterior Stone Cladding.

Metal Fabrications.
Painting.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Have trellis system and anchorage designed by a professional engineer licensed

to design structures and registered at the Place of the Work.
B. Structural Loads:
1.
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on basic wind speed indicated on
drawings. Refer Appendix C: Wind Tunnel Test Report.
2.
C. Material thicknesses stated herein are a minimum, increase as required. Be
responsible for engineering calculations to ensure structural adequacy of panels,
supports, connections.
D. The Work shall accommodate, by means of expansion and contraction
provisions, any movements in the trellis assemblies themselves and between the
assemblies and the building structure, caused by structural movements, both
deflection and racking; and/or thermal expansion and contraction, without
breakage of glass, distortion, damage, or misalignment.
E. Provide trellis assemblies to allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base
engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar
heat gain and nighttime heat loss.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7318/1
Trellis
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 70oC, ambient; 100oC, material surfaces.
F. The Work shall have a method of attachment to the structure which shall take
into account site peculiarities so that there shall be no possibility of site and air
vibrations or normal temperature movements of the building to loosen, weaken
and/or fracture the connection between the glass assembly components and the
structure or between the components themselves.
G. Design trellis assemblies to accommodate expansion and contraction of
components within service temperature range to be expected, and surface
temperature variance of components without causing distortion, breakage of
glass, undue stress on fasteners or other defects detrimental to appearance or
performance.
H. Design members, panels, connections and assemblies to withstand within
acceptable deflection limitations as specified their own weight, and the maximum
design loads and combination of loads due to rain, seismic loads, the pressure
and suction of wind and internal pressures.
I. Connections and anchorage shall be designed to prevent high stress
concentration at the hole positions and accommodate negative and positive wind
loading, seismic loads, thermal movement, construction tolerances, live load and
dead load movements.
J. Assemblies shall be designed, assembled and secured to the structure in a
manner which will permit adequate freedom of movement to compensate for
anticipated deflections as well as dimensional changes induced by temperature
variations and building movements.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
and safety aspects.
the Work.
1.
2.
300mm square samples of steel box sections.
3.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7318/2
Trellis
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.
1.
Engineer.
1.05
A. Store units protected from moisture, soiling and abrasion.

1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.07
CO-ORDINATION

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7318/3
Trellis
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Alico
UAE.
B. Armetal
UAE.
C. Seele U.A.E
Dubai
Dubai
2.02
METALS
acceptable.
B. Structural steel components: As per Section 05 1200.
C. Steel shapes, plates and bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. All components shall be hotdip galvanized, ASTM A 123.
D. All exposed steel members shall be hot-dip galvanized and painted as per
Section 09 9100 - Painting
2.03
OTHER MATERIALS
A. Stone cladding: As per Section 04 4200.

2.04
materials joined.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7318/4
Trellis
2.05
E. Provide metal units that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other
marks.
2.06
A. AWS D1.1:
B. AWS D1.3:
C. ASTM A 36/A 36M:
Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
D. ASTM A 123/A 123M-01a: Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings

on Iron and Steel Products
E. NAAMM: Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7318/5
Trellis
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

recommendations.
3.02
CLEANING
3.03
PROTECTION
new units.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
10 7318/6
Trellis
SECTION 11 1200
PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations and services necessary for the supply and installation of the following:
1.
Automatic Barrier Gates.
2.
Access Control Units.
a.
Ticket Dispensers
b.
Card Readers
3.
Vehicle Detectors
4.
Security Kiosk(parking booths)
1.
Division 26 Sections for electrical wiring for, connections to and grounding
of parking control equipment and security systems.
2.
Section 28 1300- Security Management System (SMS) Security and
Access Control Systems
1.02
A. Thermal Movements: Provide parking control equipment that allows for thermal
movements resulting from maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects.
1.03
SUBMITTALS

other work. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For parking control equipment to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1200/1
Parking Control Equipment
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative with minimum

5 years experience in similar installations, who is trained and approved for
installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain control equipment through one source from a single
manufacturer.
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by an acceptable testing agency, and marked for
intended use.
1.05
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for each type of parking control equipment.

Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,
including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,
that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project
site in time for installation.
B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of parking
control equipment with connections to power supplies.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the Contractor/

installer and or/manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of works
specified in this Section that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period
B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1200/2
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Gunnebo Wego (Wego Systems)

Germany
B. Broughton Controls Ltd.,
UK
C. Elkosta Security Systems,
Germany
D. FAAC
USA
E. CAMME
Italy
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and

manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:
1.
Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2.
Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:
Type B.
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),
C. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial

quality, with G60 (Z180) coating designation; mill phosphatized.
D. Anchorages:
Anchor
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.03
bolts,
hot-dip
galvanized
according
to
AUTOMATIC BARRIER GATES
A. General: Provide UL-approved parking control device consisting of operator and

controller housed in cabinet enclosure with gate arm. Device shall be activated
by a signal from access or revenue control device. Fabricate unit with gate arm
height in down position of not more than 850 mm to prevent even small vehicles
from passing under gate arm.
1.
Controller: Factory-sealed, solid-state, plug-in type, with galvanized steel
box for wiring connections. Equip unit with the following features:
a.
Capable of storing successive inputs and sequentially processing
each one.
b.
Automatic instant-reversing mechanism that stops downward
motion of gate arm if arm strikes an object and that immediately
returns arm to upward position. Include a 0- to 60-second
variable-time reset device.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1200/3
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
On-off power supply switch.

Automatic-manual switch.
Plug-in connectors for [two] [three] vehicle loop detectors.
Switch to test motor and limit switches or raise gate arm manually.
Single, 115-V ac grounded power receptacle.
B. Cabinets: Fabricated from metal sheet with seams welded and ground smooth.
Provide single, gasketed access door for each cabinet with flush-mounted locks.
Furnish two keys for each lock, all locks keyed alike. Fabricate cabinet with
internal reinforcing and four mounting holes accessible only from inside cabinet.
1.
Material: 3.2-mm thick aluminum sheet.
a.
Finish cabinet, interior and exterior, with manufacturer's standard
baked-enamel finish over primer, color to approval.
C. Barrier Pole: Manufactured from aluminum sections and painted with red,
reflecting stripes.
2.04
OPERATION
A. While entering, the automatic barrier is controlled by card reader or ticket

dispenser controlled unit. Exit is controlled by electronic sensor or manual
operation
B. Emergency operation: Provide for emergency manual operation.
2.05
VEHICLE DETECTORS
A. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Provide self-tuning electronic detector with

adjustable detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and
panel indicator light designed to detect presence or transit of a vehicle over an
embedded loop of wire and to emit signal activating gate-arm operator. Include
automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before closing, timer cut-off
switch, and vehicle loop detector designed to open, close gate arm and hold gate
arm open until traffic clears. Provide number of loops consisting of multiple
strands of wire, number of turns, loop size, and method of placement at location
shown on Drawings, as recommended in writing by detection system
manufacturer for function indicated.
B. Vehicle Presence Detector: Provide detector with adjustable detection zone
pattern and sensitivity, designed to detect the presence or transit of vehicle in
gate-arm pathway by interrupting infrared beam in zone pattern and to emit
signal activating gate-arm operator. Include automatic closing timer with
adjustable time delay before closing, timer cut-off switch, and vehicle presence
detector designed to open and close gate arm or hold gate arm open until traffic
clears.
2.06
TICKET DISPENSERS
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1200/4
A. General: Provide ticket dispenser units, consisting of ticket printing and issuing
mechanisms, ticket magazines, and controllers housed in cabinet enclosures.
Include the following features:
1.
Activation button with "Push for Ticket" message.
2.
Time and date display.
3.
Removable ticket tray with capacity of 5000 fan-folded tickets.
4.
Operation: On-line communication to remote computer.
5.
Battery backup for clock and RAM memory.
6.
RS-422 communication port.
7.
Thermostatically controlled heater with auto switch.
B. System Performance: Capable of the following:
1.
Automatic ticket validation.
2.
Program ticket numbering.
3.
Low-ticket alarm.
4.
Out-of-ticket alarm.
5.
Ticket jam detection.
6.
Print test ticket.
C. Cabinets: Fabricated from metal sheet with seams welded and ground smooth,
consisting of base and top components. Provide single, gasketed access door
for each base component with flush-mounted locks. Furnish two keys for each
lock, [all locks keyed alike]. Fabricate cabinet with internal reinforcing and four
mounting holes accessible only from inside cabinet. Fabricate top component so
it can be unlocked and opened for ticket loading and maintenance. Include flushmounted lock in rear of top, keyed the same as base component lock.
1.
Material: 3.2-mm thick aluminum sheet.
a.
Finish cabinet, interior and exterior, with manufacturer's standard
baked-enamel finish over primer.
D. Ticket-Dispensing Mechanisms: Manufacturers standard removable assembly,
with self-sharpening ticket cutter and plug-in controller.
1.
Units shall be activated by vehicle loop detector or push-button operation.
On activation, unit automatically records entry time and date on
ticket, sounds buzzer, and dispenses ticket.
2.
Time Indicator: 24-hour cycle with [A.M. and P.M.] [military-time] clock
mechanism.
3.
Tickets: [Standard paper] [Magnetic-stripe] [Bar-code] type.
2.07
ACCESS CONTROL UNITS
A. Coordinate with Section 28 1300.

B. Card Reader Access Unit: Access control system that activates barrier gates
and functions only when authorized card is presented. Fabricate housing from
welded cold-rolled steel sheet with weatherproof front access panel equipped
with flush-mounted lock and two keys. Finish units with manufacturer's standard
baked-enamel coating system. Provide face-lighted unit fully visible at night.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1200/5
C. PARKING BOOTHSManufacturers standard prefabricated booths to monitor all

vehicular traffic and payment of parking fees, as indicated on drawings.
D. General: Provide a complete, integrated set of mutually dependent components
that form a completely assembled, prefabricated booth. Booths shall be capable
of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and
exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into booth interior.
Include structural framing, roof and wall panels, door(s), windows indicated on
drawings and all accessories complying with requirements indicated.
E. Kiosks to be prefabricated interlocking metal panels, bolted to floor slab, with
concealed fixings and fitted with grommetted access connections for all control
wiring from access control units, ticket dispensers, barrier poles and connections
to security alarm system.
F. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
2.08
A. ASTM A 153/A 153M
Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on

Iron and Steel Hardware.
B. ASTM A 653/A 653M

(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.
C. ASTM B 209
Specification for Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Sheet and Plate.
D. ASTM B 221
Specification for Aluminum Alloy Extruded

Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
E. NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1200/6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
with requirements for installation tolerances, critical dimensions, and other
conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before parking control equipment installation.
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Prepare foundation system as per recommendations of the manufacturer for

each system.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Automatic Barrier Gates: Anchor cabinets to concrete bases with anchor bolts or
expansion anchors and mount barrier-gate arms.
B. Vehicle Loop Detectors: Bury and seal wire loop at locations indicated on
Drawings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to parking
control equipment operated by detector.
C. Traffic Controllers: Anchor controllers to substrates with anchor bolts or
expansion anchors.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
3.04
A. Manufacturer's Field Service:

Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and
equipment installation, including connections and to assist in field testing. Report
results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, units shall
be started to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2.
Controls and safeties shall be tested and adjusted. Report any damaged
and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1200/7
C. Remove and replace parking control equipment where test results indicate that it
does not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.05
A. Adjust parking control equipment to operate smoothly, easily, and properly.

Confirm that locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Lubricate hardware, gate operators, and other moving parts.
C. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished parking control
equipment, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
D. Remove barrier-gate arms during the construction period to prevent damage,
and install them immediately before Substantial Completion.
3.06
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain parking control equipment.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1200/8
SECTION 11 1220
VEHICLE BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations and services necessary for the supply and installation of the following:
1.
Road Blockers Controlled by Traffic Lights.
2.
Traffic Spike Systems.
1.
Section 03 3000- Cast-in place Concrete
2.
Division 26 Sections for electrical wiring for, connections to and grounding
of vehicle barrier systems.
1.02
SUBMITTALS

other work. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: To include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative with minimum

5 years experience in similar installations, who is trained and approved for
installation of units required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
intended use.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1220/1
Vehicle Barriers
1.04
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for each type of barrier. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of barrier
system with connections to power supplies.
1.05
WARRANTY

warranty period
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1220/2
Vehicle Barriers
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Pevac Middle East

Dubai
www.pevacmiddleeast.com
B. Guardian traffic System
USA
www.guardiantrafficsystem.com
2.02
PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers and products are specified for the purposes of establishing

minimum quality standards. Products which are equal to or better than those
specified, and which conform to the design requirements may be acceptable,
subject to the Engineers approval.
2.03
ROAD BLOCKER
A. Product Ref.: Road Blocker RB by Pevac.

B. Specially designed steel blockade for permanent installation in a reinforced
concrete foundation. Under pneumatic power it will completely seal off the road
to vehicles or quickly retract into its foundation such that vehicles can pass.
C. Dimensions: As per drawings.
D. Material and Finish: Hot galvanized steel, heavy gauge construction, top plates
and front plates powder coated. The top plates and front plates powder coated
in a black color. After that the front plates get a yellow striping.
E. Cylinders: Pneumatic.
F. Proximity Switches: Two proximity switches are mounted to detect the upper and
lower position of the blocking element. The switches are connected to a
specially designed connection board (PCB) that is mounted in a junction box.
After connecting the cables, the junction box is filled with special resin to make it
waterproof (IP class 68).
G. Driving Unit: To raise and lower the road-blocker, a pneumatic drive unit shall be
used.
H. Control Unit: Traffic Lights on poles.
I. Provide battery back-up for emergency operation in case of power failure.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1220/3
Vehicle Barriers
J. Provide lights in front of road blocker to increase visibility.

K. Mounting: The road blocker mounted in a concrete foundation.
L. Provide control and installation cabinets, pneumatic hoses, detection loops,
traffic lights on poles mounting devices, cabling sets etc as required and
recommended by the manufacturer for a complete system.
M. Anchorages: Anchor bolts, hot-dip galvanized.
2.04
TRAFFIC SPIKE SYSTEM
A. Product Ref.: Cobra 1160.100 in-ground by Guardian Traffic System

B. Traffic Spike Systems designed and engineered to allow traffic to proceed freely
in one direction only. The function is to prevent vehicle from proceeding through
controlled entry locations by puncturing tires while allowing unrestricted passage
for vehicles traveling in the allowable directions.
C. Heavy duty galvanized steel construction with stainless steel springs, zinc pated
moving parts, special engineered tooth and built-in latch.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1220/4
Vehicle Barriers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
connections before barrier installation.
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Prepare foundation system as per recommendations of the manufacturer for

each system.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be according to manufacturers recommendations.

3.04

equipment installation, including connections and to assist in field testing. Report
results in writing.
B. Remove and replace equipment where test results indicate that it does not
comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
3.05
A. Adjust barrier system to operate smoothly, easily, and properly. Confirm that
locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Lubricate hardware, operators, and other moving parts.
C. After completing installation, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged
finishes.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1220/5
Vehicle Barriers
3.06
DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain barrier system.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1220/6
Vehicle Barriers
SECTION 11 1300
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations and services necessary for the supply and installation of loading dock
equipment.
B. This Section includes the following:
1.
Dock Bumpers.
2.
Drawbridge Dock Leveller for Tower 1.
3.
Dock Levellers for Towers 2,3,7,9
4.
Scissor lift for Tower 4, 5, 6, 8.
5.
Truck Restraints.
6.
Parking Guides.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Section 03 3000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete work
for recessed loading dock equipment.
2.
Section 05 5000
"Metal Fabrications".
3.
Division 22
Section "Plumbing Specialties" for pit drains
for loading dock equipment permanently
installed in pits.
4.
Division 26
Section "Interior Lighting" for dock lighting
fixtures.
5.
Division 26
Sections for electrical wiring and connections
for loading dock equipment.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, rated

capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, accessories,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans,
1.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
2.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1300/1
Loading Dock Equipment
C. Manufacturers catalogue and specification of each unit.

D. Samples: For each type of dock leveler platform steel.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer
and supervised and verified by a qualified independent professional engineer,
indicate compliance of dock levelers with requirements of MH 30.1/MH 29.1, BS
EN 1398 or equivalent for determining rated capacity, which is based on
comprehensive testing within the last two years of current products.
F. Maintenance Data: For loading dock equipment to include in maintenance
manuals.
G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained

and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of loading dock equipment through one
source from a single manufacturer.
1.04
A. Store and handle dock levelers in a manner to avoid significant or permanent

damage to deck and frame.
1.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and
maximum temperature requirements for storage.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made
without delaying the Work, establish recessed pit dimensions and heights
of loading docks and proceed with fabricating loading dock equipment
without field measurements. Coordinate loading dock construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for loading dock equipment. Furnish

setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including
sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are
to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1300/2
B. Recessed Loading Dock Equipment: Coordinate size and location of pits to

ensure proper clearances and operation of equipment.
1.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified
in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Electrical Requirements:
Coordinate wiring requirements and current
characteristics of loading dock equipment with building electrical system.
1.07
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Dock Levelers: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace dock-leveler components that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
a.
Structural failures including cracked or broken structural support
members and load-bearing welds.
b.
Deck plate failures including cracked plate or permanent
deformation in excess of 6 mm between deck supports.
c.
Hydraulic system failures including failure of hydraulic seals and
cylinders.
d.
Faulty operation of operators, control system, or hardware.
2.
Warranty Period for Structural Assembly: 10 years from date of
Substantial Completion.
3.
Warranty Period for Hydraulic System: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
4.
Warranty shall be for unlimited usage of the leveller for the specified rated
capacity over the term of the warranty.
5.
Warranty of truck scale: 10 years from the date of substantial completion.
1.08
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12

months' full maintenance by skilled employees of loading dock equipment
Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn
or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for
proper equipment operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and
supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original
equipment.
1.
Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during
normal working hours.
2.
Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.
B. Continuing Maintenance Service: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal
from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly maintenance agreement,
starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services,
obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal
options.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1300/3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Crawford
USA
B. Rite-Hite Corporation
USA
C. Blue Giant
USA
D. Brampton
Canada
E. Bondor Manufacturing
USA
F. Or Approved Equal.
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from steel plate complying
with ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 55 (380).
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold formed.
D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for
metal alloy welded.
2.03
DOCK BUMPERS
A. Molded-Rubber Bumpers: Dock bumper cushion fabricated from 100 mm thick

molded-rubber compound reinforced with nylon, rayon, or polyester cord, with
Type A Shore durometer hardness of 80, plus or minus 5, when tested according
to ASTM D 2240; of size and configuration indicated. Fabricate units with not
less than two predrilled anchor holes. Provide two bumper for each dock leveler.
2.04
DRAWBRIDGE DOCK LEVELER (TOWER 1)
A. Product Ref.: Hafa drawbridge by Crawford.

B. Leveler is equipped with a heavy-duty spring enabling it to be conveniently lifted
and lowered by hand. When not in use, the drawbridge is secured in the vertical
position with a safety lock.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1300/4
C. Material: Hot dip galvanized steel.

D. Capacity: 60 kN.
2.05
STATIONARY DOCK LEVELLER WITH SWING LIP (TOWERS 2, 3, 7&9)
A. Model Ref.: Crawford 610 Swing Dock with supervision 105 control unit, service
and fault indicator.
B. The electro-hydraulic dock leveler with swing lip. Once the vehicle has docked,
the leveler is easily positioned by the touch of a single button. By keeping the
button depressed the platform will fully rise and the lip will automatically swing
out, then by releasing the button the leveler will slowly lower until the lip comes to
rest on the vehicle bed, the leveler then adjusts automatically to the varying
heights of the vehicle, as goods are loaded and unloaded.
C. Load Capacity: 60 kN.
D. Swing lip material: Hot dip galvanized Steel.
E. Surface: Hot dip galvanized.
F. Hydraulic Operating System: Electric-powered low-noise hydraulic raising and
lowering of ramp, controlled from a remotely located push-button station. Equip
leveler with a packaged unit including a unitized, totally enclosed, nonventilated
electric motor, pump, manifold reservoir, and valve assembly of proper size,
type, and operation for capacity of leveler indicated. Include means for lowering
ramp below platform level with lip retracted behind dock bumpers. Provide a
hydraulic velocity fuse connected to main hydraulic cylinder to limit loaded ramp's
free fall to not more than 76 mm.
G. Construction: Fabricate dock-leveler frame, platform supports, and lip supports
from structural steel shapes. Weld platform and hinged lip to supports.
Fabricate entire assembly to withstand deformation during both operating and
stored phases of service. Chamfer lip edge to minimize obstructing wheels of
material-handling vehicles.
2.06
DOCK LIFTS (SCISSORS LIFTS) for TOWERS 4,5,6,8
A. Model Ref.: SUEL-15-80, Power-Lift

B. General: Scissors-type electric hydraulic dock lift of capacity, size, and
construction indicated, complete with controls, safety devices, and accessories
required.
C. Hydraulic Operating System: Self-contained, electric, hydraulic power unit for
raising and lowering lift; of size, type, and operation needed for capacity of lift
indicated; controlled from a remotely located push-button station.
1.
Power Unit: Consisting of continuous-duty motor, high-pressure gear
pump, valve manifold, oil-line filters, and oil reservoir.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1300/5
a.
2.
3.
Equip manifold with relief valve, check valve, pressurecompensated flow-control valve, and solenoid valve and with
provisions for lowering lift manually if power fails.
b.
Equip reservoir, valve manifold, and pressure line with oil-line
filters.
Cylinders: Equip lift with not less than two heavy-duty, high-pressure,
hydraulic, ram-type cylinders. Rams shall be manufacturer's standard,
either direct-displacement plunger or rod-and-piston type with positive
internal stops. Cylinder rods shall be chrome plated and polished.
a.
Rate of Descent Protection: Pressure compensated flow control or
hydraulic velocity fuse to limit down speed for each cylinder.
Remote-Control Station: Multibutton control station of the constantpressure type with UP and DOWN push buttons. Controller shall consist
of magnetic motor starter with 3-pole adjustable overloads and 24-V
control transformer with 4-A, fused secondary prewired to terminal strips
and enclosed in NEMA ICS 6, Type 12 box.
a.
Upper-Travel-Limit Switch:
Equip unit with manufacturer's
standard, adjustable, upper-travel-limit switch.
D. Construction: Fabricate lift from structural-steel shapes rigidly welded and

reinforced for maximum strength, safety, and stability. Design assembly to
withstand deformation during both operating and stored phases of service.
Provide mounting brackets and removable lifting eyes for ease of installation.
1.
Platform: Fabricate platform from heavy steel plate with bevelled toe
guards on all four sides.
2.
Hinged Bridge: Hinged, throw-over bridge bolted to full-length, heavyduty, piano-type hinge welded to toe guard at end of platform. Provide
bridge complete with heavy-duty lifting chains. Chamfer edge of bridge to
minimize obstructing wheels of material-handling vehicles.
3.
Scissors Mechanism: Fabricate leg members from heavy, steel-formed
tube or plate members to provide maximum strength and rigidity.
4.
Bearings: Pivot points with permanently lubricated antifriction bushings or
sealed ball-bearings for minimum maintenance.
5.
Maintenance Leg: Removable, safety maintenance leg or hinged, safety
maintenance bars.
6.
Toe Protection: Along entire unprotected side of lifts; painted yellow with
black stripes to comply with ANSI Z535.1.
7.
Standard Features:
Width (W)
:
1100mm.
Length (L)
:
1400mm.
Load Capacity
:
1500kg.
Raised (height)
:
700mm.
Lowered (height)
:
112mm.
2.07
PARKING GUIDES
A. Product Ref.: Parking Guides EG by Crawford.

B. Parking Guides made of painted galvanized steel and cast into foundations.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1300/6
C. Details: As indicated on drawings.

2.08
TRUCK RESTRAINTS
A. Product Ref.: Kelly Star 1 Truck Stop.

B. Description: Manually operated Truck stop with easy-to-use push bar which
allows dock worker to engage and release hook from dock level.
C. General: Manufacturer's standard device designed to engage truck's rear-impact
guard and hold truck at loading dock. Restraint shall consist of an iron or steel
restraining arm that raises until contacting rear-impact guard. Arm shall move
vertically, automatically adjusting to varying height of truck due to loading and
unloading operations.
D. Restraining Capacity: Capable of restraining total gross load (13606kg) without
permanent deflection or distortion.
E. Operating Range: Capable of restraining rear-impact guards within a range from
279 to 762 mm vertically above driveway.
F. Mechanical Operating System: Restraint operates by use of a lifting rod or hook
to raise engagement device.
G. Caution Signs: Exterior, surface mounted; with black text on yellow background,
and with sign copy as follows. Provide one sign at each truck-restraint location.
2.09
FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish loading dock equipment after assembly and testing.
C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable
standard listed below:
1.
ASTM A 123/A 123M for iron and steel loading dock equipment.
2.
ASTM A 153/A 153M for iron and steel hardware for loading dock
equipment.
2.10
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A 36/A 36M-00: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

B. ASTM A 123/A 123M-00: Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products
C. ASTM A 153/A 153M-00: Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
Steel Hardware
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1300/7
D. ASTM A 500-99: Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shape
E. ASTM A 572/A 572M-00: Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy ColumbiumVanadium Structural Steel
F. ASTM A 786/A 786M-00: Specification for Rolled Steel Floor Plates
G. ANSI Z535.1-1998: Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards
H. MH 29.1-1994: Safety Requirements for Industrial Scissors Lifts (ANSI)
I. MH 30.1-2000 (Revision of MH 30.1-1993): Safety, Performance and Testing of
Dock Leveling Devices (ANSI)
J. BS EN 1398: Dock Levelers
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1300/8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
performance of loading dock equipment.
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems for loading dock equipment to verify
actual locations of connections before equipment installation.
C. Examine walls and floors of pits for suitable conditions where recessed loading
dock equipment is to be installed. Pits shall be plumb and square and properly
sloped for drainage from back to front of loading dock.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate size and location of loading dock equipment indicated to be attached

into concrete or masonry, and furnish anchoring devices with templates,
diagrams, and instructions for their installation.
B. Set curb angles in concrete edges of dock-leveler recessed pits with tops flush
with loading platform. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
C. Clean recessed pits of debris.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install loading dock equipment, including motors, pumps, control

stations, wiring, safety devices and accessories as required for a complete
installation.
1.
Rough-in electrical connections according to requirements specified in
Division 26.
B. Dock Bumpers: Attach dock bumpers to face of loading dock in a manner that
complies with requirements indicated for spacing, arrangement, and position
relative to top of platform and anchorage.
1.
Welded Attachment: Plug-weld anchor holes in contact with steel inserts
and fillet weld at other locations.
2.
Bolted Attachment: Attach dock bumpers to preset anchor bolts
embedded in concrete or to cast-in-place inserts or threaded studs welded
to embedded-steel plates or angles. If preset anchor bolts, cast-in-place
inserts, or threaded studs welded to embedded-steel plates or angles are
not provided, attach dock bumpers by drilling and anchoring with
expansion anchors and bolts.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1300/9
C. Recessed Dock Levelers: Attach dock levelers securely to loading dock

platform, flush with adjacent loading dock surfaces and square to recessed pit.
3.04
A. Adjust loading dock equipment for proper, safe, efficient operation.

B. Test dock levelers and lifts for vertical travel within operating range indicated.
C. Restore marred, abraded surfaces to their original condition.
3.05
DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain loading dock equipment.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1300/10
SECTION 11 1400
PEDESTRIAN CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment, and perform all operations and
services necessary for the supply and installation of optical turnstiles indicated on
drawings.
B. Card reader unit will be supplied as per Section 28 1300.
1.
Division 26 Sections for electrical wiring for, connections to, and
grounding of control equipment.
2.
Section 28 1300 Security Management System (SMS) Security and
Access Control Systems
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Two or more adjacent pedestals utilizing active infrared beams to create an

invisible electronic field between pedestals, monitoring the passage of individuals
entering and/or leaving a facility, discriminating between people and nuisances,
such as, some briefcases, umbrellas, and empty wheelchairs; with barrier arms
to physically deter unauthorized individuals from passing through the lane.
1.03
A. Capabilities:
1.
Detect and deter unauthorized persons from entering into the protected
area.
2.
Detect unauthorized persons more than 1/2 cm at waist height, behind
authorized persons, that is, tailgating or piggybacking.
3.
Detect direction of movement, that is, entry and exit.
4.
Closing barrier arm on tailgater as close as 150mm apart, subject to the
speed of movement of the pedestrians.
5.
Verify entry into the protected area following card presentation.
6.
Provide alarm outputs on detection of a violation by means of:
a.
Local sounders.
b.
A relay contact closing.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1400/1
Pedestrian Control Equipment
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Allow bidirectional or single direction movement.

Minimize false alarms through the use of infrared beams connected to
intelligent detection algorithms.
Process a high number of people without security guard intervention,
unless access is rejected by the system or a system anomaly occurs.
Ensure a fast throughput, approximately one person per second, subject
to access control system.
Buffering multiple inputs from an access control system to maximize
throughput.
Easy to use.
Allow free movement for wheelchair users.
Allow safe emergency egress through a fire alarm input to retract the
barrier arm.
Enable counting and accurate monitoring of building population levels and
the analysis of population flows.
Automatically self-resetting breakaway barrier arms.
B. Detecting and Signaling Capabilities within a Two-Stage Audio/Visual System:

1.
Entry with an authorized card.
2.
Entry that is unauthorized.
3.
Authorized card being read by the system but no entry or exit taking
place.
4.
Unauthorized card being presented.
5.
Obstruction of an infrared beam path.
6.
Unauthorized person following an authorized person through the beam
path at least cm inch distance apart at waist height, that is, tailgating or
piggybacking.
7.
A person breaking the arm control beams after an alarm event, that is,
forced entry.
C.
Intelligent Infrared Beams:

1.
Beams controlled by intelligence capable of differentiating between
relatively smaller inanimate objects and human targets, for example, an
umbrella and a person, an empty wheelchair, of certain design, and an
occupied wheelchair.
2.
Sensitivity adjustable via a potentiometer on the main CPU to make the
turnstiles more or less forgiving of user behavior in the infrared beam
path.
3.
At the default sensitivity setting, user behavior tolerated by the software
without generating an alarm condition due to:
a.
Part passage through the beams and moving back out again.
b.
Hesitation in the beam field for less than a pre-selected number of
seconds.
c.
Presenting a card for authorization while within the beam-field, but
before completing passage through it.
D. Speed: Time delay of no greater than 100 ms in signaling passage through the
beams and readying the optical turnstile for the next user except when a greater
delay is caused by the attached access control system.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1400/2
E. Arm Control Beams: Utilize a minimum of four infrared beams as arm control
beams to stop the arm movement in the event any of the beams are blocked.
F. Visitor Management System: Allows either one or an unlimited number of people
to pass through the lane, then once the visitors have entered and the system no
longer sees anyone entering or exiting for 3 seconds, the barrier arm optical
turnstile returns to its original state.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include material descriptions, dimensions, and finishes for optical
turnstiles.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, installation, and attachments to other Work.
Clearly identify standard and handicapped accessible lane dimensions, location
of lane(s) and mounting of card reader.
C. Installation Manual: Manufacturers installation instructions.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Operation Data: For turnstile system and equipment to include model cut sheet,
application manual, and user guide for inclusion in project operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A specialized security integration company with

experience in security system installations of this type.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1.
Minimum 10 years experience in the manufacture of optical turnstiles.
2.
Quality Management System: Compliant with ISO 9001.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain turnstiles through one source.
D. Accessibility Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply
with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines
(ADAAG)."
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
intended use.
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate system with Access Central system specified in Division 28

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1400/3
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for control equipment. Furnish setting

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of control
equipment with connections to power supplies.
1.07
A. Schedule delivery of units to site only when installation is ready to begin.

B. Store units on pallet, as delivered, in upright position, following instructions on
packaging.
C. Store units in a dry interior location with temperature and dust control.
1.08
PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.09
WARRANTY

warranty period.
1.
a.
Faulty operation of software, PCBs, infrared beams, and
mechanical components.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1400/4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Smarter Security Systems

USA.
www.smartersecurity.com
B. Designed Security Inc
USA.
www.dsigo.com
C. Alvarado Manufacturing Co.
USA
www.alvaradomanufacturing.com
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

B. Acrylic Glazing: Perspex brand, which shall not interfere with the infrared
beams.
2.03
TURNSTILE SYSTEM
A. Product Ref: Fastlane Plus Optical Turnstile with Barrier Arm, Model R400 AS.
B. Product Ref.: Products and manufacturers are specified for the purposes of
than those specified, and which conform to the Engineers design requirements
may be acceptable subject to Engineers approval.
C. Method of Operation: Entry by card reader and exit by electronic sensor.
D. Lane Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
E. System shall be compatible with Access Control System Specified in Section 28
1300.
2.04
PEDESTALS
A. End Pieces: Brushed stainless steel.

B. Side Panels: Brushed stainless steel with clear, grooved Perspex filter windows
for the infrared beams.
C. Barrier Arms: 38 mm diameter brushed aluminum tube.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1400/5
D. Top: Brushed stainless steel.

E. Encasement: Brushed stainless steel.
F. Base: Mild steel.
2.05
BARRIER ARM OPTICAL TURNSTILE
A. Pedestal Type:
1.
Variable tension, auto-resetting, breakaway asymmetric arm type,
minimum 20 infrared beams,
2 flowing lane status light arrays per
lane, 2 card reader windows and lane status light bars per lane. Provide
anti-crawl beams feature.
B. Serial Port: One RS485 multi-drop serial port for transmitting flow and other
operational data.
C. Two Stage Audio/Visual System.
1.
First stage notifies user and guard that someone has entered the lane
without authorization.
a.
Allow user to back up and attempt authorization, before going into
a full alarm.
b.
Guard becomes aware that a lane violation may occur.
2.
Second stage notifies user and guard that someone has passed through
the lane without authorization.
a.
Notifies the user that they have passed through the lane without
authorization.
b.
Guard becomes aware that a lane violation has occurred and to
take appropriate action.
D. Audible Alarms: Provide for each lane triggered in an alarm condition.
1.
Local alarm sounders.
2.
Remote alarm sounder output.
3.
Normally open relay contact.
a.
Normally closed relay contact.
4.
Relay Contact: Utilized to trigger audible alarm and alternative alarm
systems.
5.
Additional sounder that will be triggered in the event of forced entry that
is, an individual tries to push throught the barrier arms after an alarm
event.
E. Barrier Arm: Variable tension, auto resetting, breakaway type.
1.
Capability: Designed to close barrier arm on tailgater as close as 100 to
150 mm from authorized user, subject to the speed of movement of the
pedestrians.
2.
Arm Movement: Fabricated and installed to move in a fast acting vertical
plane.
3.
Breakaway Force: Adjustable.
4.
Resetting: Automatic.
5.
Speed: Adjustable.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1400/6
6.
Disabled Access: Accessible version to allow for the passage of

wheelchairs.
a.
Placement of Disable Accessible Lane within Lane Configuration:
Refer to Drawings.
F. Beam Arrays: Minimum 20 pulsed, multi infrared beam array per lane.
1.
Capability: Designed to detect unauthorized persons, more than 1/2 cm at
waist height behind authorized persons, that is, tailgating or
piggybacking.
2.
Anti-crawl beams.
G. Card Reader Unit: Coordinate with Section 28 1300 and install as indicated or as
directed by Engineer.
H. Displays: Lane status displays to instruct, control flow of and warn users at the
entry and exit of the lane.
1.
Two flowing light arrays per lane, positioned between the top and side
panel.
2.
Two red/yellow/green light bar indicators per lane, positioned at the top of
the card reader window.
I. Operation:
1.
Operation: Primary designs for arm and lane operation modes.
a.
Barrier retracted, lane normally open.
2.
Six Modes of Operation: Electronically selectable to change modes at
different times of the day or week.
a.
Normally open (barriers retracted).
b.
Normally closed (barriers extended).
c.
X Mode (barriers partially retracted).
d.
Optical Mode (barriers permanently retracted).
e.
Lane Closed Mode (barriers permanently extended). Subject to
Access Control System.
f.
Auto Mode (barriers extended, alarms one direction only).
3.
Point of Second Stage Alarm Activation: Adjustable between early and
late position.
4.
Throughput Management System: In normally or partially closed mode,
barrier arm waits after a valid entry for a period of time to see if another
authorized access card will be presented. If not presented, arm returns to
original position. If presented, arm remains down. If an unauthorized
person enters when arm is down, arm automatically closes the lane.
2.06
ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide accessories as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Provide anchor bolts and other accessory items as required for installation and
operation. Hot-dip galvanize anchor bolts and other accessory items.
C. Provide Key Switch operation that can be used to change one operational feature
for a variety of options, such as, a) changing from free egress during the day to
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1400/7
requiring carding out at night, b) enabling momentary free passage for disabled
access or carts, or c) closing certain lanes at night to open lanes closer to the
night guard on duty.
2.07
FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMMs Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent
pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved
Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations
in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contract.
C. Stainless Steel Finishes.
1.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
2.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured,
polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long
dimension of each piece.
3.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4 finish.
4.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1400/8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
connections before control equipment installation.
corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be as per manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Co-ordinate installation with Access Control System.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section.
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section.
3.03

equipment installation, including connection, and to assist in field testing. Report
results in writing.
B. Remove and replace control equipment where test results indicate that it does
not comply with specified requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
3.04
A. Adjust control equipment to operate smoothly, easily, and properly. Confirm that
locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Lubricate hardware, operators, and other moving parts.
C. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished control equipment,
inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1400/9
3.05
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owners maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain control equipment.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 1400/10
SECTION 11 2410
FAADE CLEANING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section includes design, engineer, fabricate, supply, installation, testing,

commissioning and maintenance of a suitable, workable and practical FAADE
MAINTENANCE SYSTEM fully in compliance with the requirement of the
relevant parts of specifications, contract drawings and all acceptable codes and
regulations as detailed elsewhere in this section.
B. Delegated Design: Faade Maintenance System, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
C. The project is divided into various areas to explain the breakup of systems used
to cover the facades for cleaning as well as occasional maintenance.
1.
Towers 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
2.
Tower base / Entrance Level
3.
Retail skylight Internal.
4.
Podium level- Retail glazing and canopy
5.
Energy Center Internal.
6.
Parking Building & Energy Center Faade.
7.
Parking Building Roof.
8.
Prayer Hall exterior Faade
9.
Prayer Hall interiors.
10.
Minaret Facade.
D. Towers 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9.
1.
Each tower faade is accessed by using a permanently fixed BMU
(building maintenance unit) that is provided at the top roof.
2.
The BMU has a telescopic mast and telescopic jib. These functions allow
the cradle to reach the outside corners of the building thereby providing
full access, as well as reducing the size of the machine to make it
compact for hiding behind the parapet, and out of sight.
a.
Towers 1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9: BMU is fixed on concrete pedestals.
b.
Tower 7: This tower has 2 BMUs, one running on a double rail
track at the central roof to cover the middle and lower part of the
building, while the second unit is running on double rail track
between grid lines TA and TB. The BMU are custom made to
enable the operator to reach all areas of the faade for regular
cleaning and light duty maintenance.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/1
Faade Cleaning Systems
3.
4.
The BMU shall be provided with an auxiliary winch to lift faade panels for
future replacement if required.
The maximum capacity to be advised as this will determine the
deadweight of the BMU and the loadings imposed on the building.
E. Tower base / Entrance Level

1.
This area is to use a Mobile Elevating Work Platform (MEWP).
F. Retail skylight Internal and External
1.
Internal
a.
In addition to cleaning the inside of the skylight, access will also be
required for maintaining the electrical fittings, hanging decorations,
internal facades, etc.
b.
A dedicated MEWP is to be provided, suitable system for this area
2.
External
a.
Cleaned manually by work personal walking over the skylights.
G. Podium Level Retail glazing and canopy
1.
Provide mobile elevating work platform (MEWP) units to work in parallel.
H. Energy Center Internal.
1.
Provide mobile elevating work platform (MEWP).
I. Parking Building & Energy Center Faade.
1.
Articulated boom.
J. Parking Building Roof
1.
Provide mobile elevating work platform (MEWP).
K. Prayer Hall exterior faade
1.
Use of Tucker pole system is recommended for use by work personal for
cleaning purposes.
2.
Articulated boom used for Parking Building and Energy Center shall be
used for the occasional maintenance of the faade.
L. Prayer Hall Interiors
1.
Provide aerial work platform.
M. Minaret Faade
1.
Davit system with powered platforms
N. The complete equipment, controls and associated parts and accessories
including associated civil works necessary for their installation shall be subject to
review and approval by the Engineer.
O. Include for supports to carry all structural reaction, impact and uplift loads
imposed by the equipment.
P. Electrical and mechanical installation in association with the system.
Q. Co-ordination with other sections of work for the following:
1.
Placement of the anchor plate.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/2
2.
3.
Co-ordinate with glazing for mullion support system.

Power location for the complete system.
R. Related Sections: Related work to be coordinated and used in conjunction with

1.
Section 03 3000
Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2.
Section 04 2200
Concrete Unit Masonry.
3.
Section 04 2170
Terracotta Wall Panels.
4.
Section 04 4200
Exterior Stone Cladding
5.
Division 08 Sections for Curtain Wall.
6.
Appendix C
Wind tunnel Report
1.02
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. The system shall be designed under the direction of a Professional Engineer.

B. Wind Pressure: System shall be designed to withstand the applicable wind
velocities. Refer Appendix C: Wind Tunnel Test Report.
C. All assemblies and components shall be designed with a safety factor of 4 to 1
against failure as a minimum and to be so certified.
D. All apparatus and equipment shall be so designed and constructed that they
operate satisfactorily and without any deleterious effect for prolonged and
continuous periods in the applicable climatic conditions and ambient temperature
conditions.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product data including catalogue for each item of faade cleaning system
required, including the manufacturer's standard details, specification, physical
properties and installation and maintenance instructions.
1.
Provide details of rail track system for Machine with concrete upstands,
Runway platform, Galvanized track, stop ends and anchor plate fixation to
the concrete upstand.
2.
Provide details for the mullion supports for the cradle.
B. Shop drawings for each item of faade cleaning system required. Include plans,
elevations, and details of typical members and other components. Show layout
and installation details, including anchorage details. Indicate the following on the
shop drawings:
1.
Principal parts of the systems.
2.
Reactions at points of support.
3.
Weights of principal components.
4.
Location of circuit breaker, switchboard panel or disconnect switch.
5.
Control functions and operational description.
6.
Dimensions of each unit.
C. Maintenance data for faade cleaning system components for inclusion in the
Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 01.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/3
1.04
CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Design, material, fabrication, examination, testing, inspection, certification,

documentation and operation shall conform to the local regulations, British,
German, American or equivalent standards, OSHA standards and specifications
as applicable.
1.05
REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):

1.
AISC S342L Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for
Structural Steel Buildings (including Supplement No. 1); 1993.
B. Aluminum Association (AA):
1.
AA DAF 45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
2.
AA ADM-1 Aluminum Design Manual; 2000.
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (AMSE):
1.
ASME A 120.1 Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms and
Traveling Ladders and Gantries for Building Maintenance; 2006.
D. American National Standards Institute / International Window Cleaning
Association (ANSI/IWCA):
1.
ANSI/IWCA 1-14.1 Window Cleaning Safety Standard.
E. American Welding Society (AWS):
1.
AWS D1.2/D1.2M Structural Welding Code Aluminum; 2003.
2.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M Structural Welding Code Steel; 2006.
F. ASTM International (ASTM):
1.
ASTM A123/A123M Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002.
2.
ASTM A167 Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium
Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip; 2004.
3.
ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and
Shapes, 2006.
4.
ASTM A492 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Rope, 2004.
5.
ASTM B 221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2006.
G. International Code Council (ICC):
1.
International Building Code.
H. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
1.
OSHA 1910, Subpart D, Walking and Work Surfaces.
2.
OSHA 1910, Subpart F, Appendix C, Personal Fall Arrest Systems.
3.
OSHA Ruling on Window Cleaning by Bosuns Chair.
4.
OSHA 1910.66 Subpart F, Powered Platforms.
I. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA):
1.
The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Fifth Edition.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/4
J. Uniform Building Code (UBC)

1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The system manufacturer shall be qualified and experienced in design,

manufacture, installation and maintenance of the type of equipment to be
provided with documented evidence. The manufacturer shall submit a list of
similar installations, including references to be contacted by the Engineer to
ascertain the reliability, maintenance and experience record of the equipment
installed.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer with minimum 10 years
experience in installation of systems in Middle East similar to this Project and
who is an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer for both
installation and maintenance of the type of units required for this Project, and
whose installations have resulted in construction with a record of successful inservice performance.
1.07
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data. Include description of the system,

method of operation and control, motor control system, and special or nonstandard features provided.
B. Provide parts catalogues with complete list of equipment, replacement parts with
equipment description and identifying numbers. Provide legible schematic wiring
diagrams covering electrical equipment installed, including changes made in final
work.
1.08
MAINTENANCE
A. After completion of the installation and acceptance, a maintenance and call back
service for the equipment shall be provided for a period of Defects Liability
Period.
B. This service shall include
1.
Furnishing complete service and maintenance of the system and
components during the Defect Liability Period.
2.
Examining semi-monthly, clean, adjust and lubricate all equipment as per
3.
Repairing or replacing parts whenever required. Use parts produced by
the manufacturer of the original equipment. Replace wire ropes when
necessary to maintain the required factor of safety.
4.
Maintaining locally, an adequate stock of parts for replacement or
emergency purposes, and have qualified installation personnel available
to ensure the fulfilment of this maintenance service without unreasonable
loss of time.
5.
Performing maintenance work using competent personnel, under the
supervision of the system manufacturer.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/5
6.
1.09
Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or

sub-contractor without prior written consent of the Owner.
SPARE PARTS, TOOLS AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT
A. Supply two new complete sets of tools complete with lockable tool boxes for the
proper operation, routine maintenance and adjustments of all components and
equipment.
B. All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original
packing, clearly labeled and referenced. Provide complete schedules of spare
parts and maintenance equipment clearly cross-referenced with the as-built
record drawings and with operation and maintenance instruction manuals.
C. All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be as recommended by
the equipment manufacturer and shall be subject to the final approval of the
Engineer.
1.10
WARRANTY

warranty period. This warranty shall cover the systems, operating equipment and
other related devices.
C. Any fault or failure due to defective or improper material, equipment,
workmanship or Contractors design which may develop shall be made good
forthwith, by and at the expense of the Contractor, including all other damage
done to areas, materials and other systems resulting such fault or failure.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Manntech Fassadenbefahsystem
Germany
B. Tractel S.A.
France
C. COX
UAE
D. XS Platforms
Dubai
E. GEDA Dechentreiter GmbH
Germany
F. Haulotte
France
G. Genie Industries
UK
H. Or approved equal
2.02
PRODUCT
A. Product Reference: Product are specified for the purposes of establishing

minimum quality. Products which are equal to or better than those specified, and
which conform to the design requirements may be acceptable subject to
Engineers approval.
2.03
FACADE MAINTENANCE UNIT
A. The BMU shall be custom made to enable the operator to reach all areas of the
faade for regular cleaning and maintenance The BMU location is indicated on
drawings. System shall be according to DIN EN 1808.
B. Roof car
1.
The roof car is a welded steel construction. It contains the base slewing
ring, the telescopic mast, the machine house with the drum hoist and the
control system, the two front bogies, the two rear bogies, which are
mounted to a pivoting swing, and the central boom with the head slewing
ring and the counter weight.
C. Base slewing ring
1.
The base slewing ring is located between the chassis and the mast. The
turning angle is 180.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/7
D. Head slewing ring

1.
The head slewing ring is mounted on the front end of the boom. The
suspension ropes are guided through the head slewing ring, the V-shaped
jib arms and the head pulleys into the platform. The turning angle
amounts to 90.
E. Telescopic boom
1.
The telescopic boom consists of a basic part and that is mounted on top
of the mast and the various telescopic parts. The propulsion is realized by
an electric motor and a combination of a rack and pinion system with
chains. The single telescopic parts are guided by ball bearing rollers.
F. Telescopic Mast
1.
To enable the BMU to reach over the higher parapets, the main mast
must be telescopic. The stroke should ensure the cradle can safely clear
the highest point of the structure during slewing of the jib.
2.
The telescopic mast should retract to ensure that the BMU in parking
position is hidden behind the higher parapet.
G. Hoist
1.
The multi layer security hoist consist of four rope chambers, an automatic
rope guiding system, the propulsion unit, the security brake, and the overspeed brake. The hoist is prepared for a manual emergency rescue to the
bottom of the building. The drum system shall guarantee a quiet engine
running a very limited wear of the wire ropes.
H. Platform
1.
The aluminium construction is powder coated according to RAL 7035,
holds two non grating rubber rollers on the facade facing side, anchor
points for two harnesses and a water container with a faucet. It shall be
designed for a safe working load of 240 Kgs
I. Suspension ropes
1.
Four galvanized suspension ropes, DIN 3058, 7 mm, nominal strength
1770N/mm, calculated strength 34,4 kN, each with one electrical
conductor inside, rope safety factor min. 12.
J. Electrical control, security devices
1.
The control box contains the electrical components and the contactor
control. Each, platform and roof car have a control panel.
(a)
Electrical value: 3x400 V, 50 Hz, 5 KVA, control voltage 42V
(b)
Protection class: IP 54
(c)
Overload control on the platform
(d)
Slack rope control
(e)
Operational limit switch for UP and DOWN
(f)
Bottom trip bar under platform
(g)
Limit switch for secondary safety brake
(h)
Limit switch for power cord reel
(i)
Signal bell while roof car is moving horizontally
(j)
Telephone platform to roof car
(k)
Power supply through power cord via roof car mounted reel
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/8
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
Main and control voltage secured against short circuit by security

automat
Protective switch for all electrical motors
Key controlled dead mans button on roof car and platform
Protection against connection in wrong rotation by phase protective
relays
Emergency stop switch on each control box
Operational and emergency switch for each electrical motor
K. Motors
1.
Hoist: 1 gear brake motor, power by demand, prepared for emergency
rescue
2.
Bogies: 2 gear brake motor, power by demand,
3.
Base slewing ring: 1 gear brake motor, power by demand.
4.
Head slewing ring: 1 gear brake motor, power by demand.
5.
Telescopic boom: 1 gear brake motor, power by demand.
L. Corrosion, surface
1.
All steel components hot dip galvanized, resp. zinc-plated, basic- and final
coating in RAL colour as per Engineers approval. All fasteners in stainless
steel, hot dip galvanized resp.
M. Signs/ signals
1.
Signal horn
2.
Metal or plastic plates indicate clearly the device, the max. live load, the
year of manufacturing, the type number and the name of the supplier.
N. Glass Replacement Unit
1.
The BMU should have the facility to fix an additional hoist at the end of the
jib. This serves as a Glass Handling Unit for future repair/maintenance of
the faade
O. Technical data
1.
Live load
: 240 kgs
2.
Platform (L x W x H)
: 2500 x 600 x 1000 [mm]
3.
Lifting height
: varies for buildings
4.
Telescopic boom with adjustable outreach: min and max varies for
buildings.
5.
Telescopic Mast
: To suit building.
6.
Track gauge
: Fixed type
7.
Lifting speed
: ca. 10 m/min.
8.
Slewing speed
: ca. 8 m/min.
9.
Guiding system
: Restraint sockets as per EN 1808.
P. Safety Devices
1.
The following safety devices are required as a minimum:
(a)
Emergency manual descent
(b)
Overload safety device
(c)
Slack wire rope safety device
(d)
Over speed safety device
(e)
Power cable end limit
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/9
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
2.04
End of wire rope safety.

Emergency stop
Lower limit safety device fitted to cradle
Upper limit safety device fitted to cradle
Final upper limit safety device
TRACK SYSTEM
A. The tracks shall be made of steel sections which shall be galvanized by hot dip
galvanization method.
1.
Twin rail track supported every 2m.
B. All rails shall be hot dip galvanized type.
C. The track layout and fixing method shall be subject to approval
D. All necessary fasteners (hot dip galvanized).
2.05
POWER SUPPLY
A. 1 piece main switch in plastic housing w/ integrated key barred breaker (Fuse 25
/ 0,03 A and back-up fuse 10 Amp).
B. 1 piece power outlet, 16 A, 5-poles IP 54 in waterproof execution, mounted on
hot dip galvanized plug bracket at required location.
2.06
WATER SUPPLY
A. 1 no. standard bib tap to be provided on the roof level, to provide the operators a
source of water supply for cleaning operations.
2.07
CONTROL SYSTEM
A. The system shall be equipped with remote control system like which transmits
information between the cradle and the trolley using the carrying wire rope.
B. Signals are transmitted by transducers, using the principle of induction of a
magnetic field in a wire rope. The signals processed by digital filtration.
C. Power supply: The power supply to the cradle control box by batteries (for
normal operation for up to 8 hours usage and back up battery for up to 1 hours
usage)
D. Cradle Sensors: Whether operating from the trolley or the cradle the sensors
should always be operative which means that the control system should always
be connected when the machine is being used.
E. Telephone: Telephone to allow communications between the trolley and the
cradle.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/10
F. Electrical cable embedded in the steel wire rope is not acceptable.

2.08
MOBILE ELEVATING WORK PLATFORM (MEWP)
A. The MEWP shall be an ALULIFT which is a compact unit with a maximum

working of required heights. This unit shall be driven manually and can fit inside a
service elevator for easy transport within the facility.
B. Total 10 numbers are required (Two numbers for each cluster, 3 numbers for
podium level retail glazing and canopy, and 1 for parking building roof).
C. Description: Lightweight, compact and versatile work platform with compact
base (800 x 1360mm), that it pass through standard doors. Consist of adjustable
mast guides, lifting chain controllers and electrical system with dual controls, both
on the cradle and on the base frame.
D. Telescopic platform operation: Power and battery operated (both options are
required).
E. Model Ref.: Alulift AL16 by Tractel Group which will reach height upto 16m,
tipped manually or using the tipping kit.
2.09
MOBILE ELEVATING WORK PLATFORM (MEWP) (ENERGY CENTERINTERNAL)
A. The MEWP shall be an ALULIFT which is a compact unit with a maximum

working of required heights. This unit shall be driven manually and can fit inside a
service elevator for easy transport within the facility.
B. One number is required.
C. Description: Lightweight, compact and versatile work platform with compact
base (800 x 1360mm), that it pass through standard doors. Consist of adjustable
mast guides, lifting chain controllers and electrical system with dual controls, both
on the cradle and on the base frame.
D. Telescopic platform operation: Power and battery operated (both options are
required).
E. Model Ref.: Alulift AL12 by Tractel Group which will reach height upto 12m,
tipped manually or using the tipping kit.
2.10
ARTICULATED BOOM (PARKING BUILDING & ENERGY CENTER FAADE
A. Provide 1 ground mobile /motorized unit with articulating and telescopic booms
for faade cleaning and maintenance to reach any position selected by the
operator, with the following features:
1.
Working height
43.15 m.
2.
Horizontal reach
18.03 m.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/11
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Lift Capacity
Platform length
Platform rotation
Vertical jib rotation
Turntable rotation
Lift Speed
272 kg.
2.44 m.
160
110
360
96 sec.
B. The air line to the platform of motorized units shall be equipped with an adapter
for dual use as water hose.
C. The Contractor in his bid shall include all standard features and any option
features (listed in the manufacturers catalogue) that needs to be built into the
unit, in-order to meet the design criteria.
D. The Contractor in his bid shall also itemize and provide unit rates for all options
and accessories that are listed in the manufacturers catalogue for Engineers
review and selection.
E. Product Ref: Genie Z-135/70.
F. This shall be used for the maintenance of the prayer hall exterior facade
2.11
AERIAL WORK PLATFORM FOR PRAYER HALL INTERIORS
A. Portable powered Aerial work platform transportable through doorways shall be

used.
B. Features:
1.
Working Height
: 14.29 meters.
2.
Platform Height
: 12.29 meters.
3.
Height Stowed
: 2.78m
4.
Length Stowed
: 1.42m
5.
Width
: 0.74m
6.
Lift Capacity
: 136 Kg.
7.
Power
: AC.
8.
Stabilizer Dimensions
: As required.
9.
Ground and platform controls with auxiliary platform lowering for use in
the event of a power outage.
C. The Contractor in his bid shall include all standard features and any option
features (listed in the manufacturers catalogue) that needs to be built into the
unit, in-order to meet the design criteria.
D. The Contractor in his bid shall also itemize and provide unit rates for all options
and accessories that are listed in the manufacturers catalogue for Engineers
review and selection.
E. Product Ref: Genie AWP 40S.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/12
2.12 DAVIT SYSTEM WITH CRADLE FOR MINARET FACADE

A. Portable Davits type to be mounted on base plate permanently fitted on the roof.
These davit receiver socket locations are indicated on drawings. The Davit
Boom should pivot to allow the cradle to be maneuvered over the parapet from
small traversing trolley which allows the movement of the cradle along the davit
boom. A manual machine shall be used to erect the Davit System. The whole
system should be able to be dismantled when required. The machine supplied
should be according to OSHA code and rotation per person should not exceed
401lbs.
B. The cradle is light weight design and extremely stable powered by TIRAK
winches combined with BLOCSTOP safety device mounted on a secondary wire
rope, to ensure complete safety of the operator and two adjustable rollers to rest
against the facade to prevent excessive swaying and spinning. At the instance of
any power failure, the operation of the centrifugal brakes allows controlled
lowering to avoid any long delay in rescue.
C. Specification:
1.
Safe Working Load
2.
Dimensions (LxWxH)
3.
No of persons
4.
Control
5.
Lifting Speed
6.
No of wire rope
7.
200 Kgs.
1500 X 700 X 1050mm.
Two
By push button
8.5 m/min.
4 Nos.(two safety and two
working) Length According the
lift height
8. 3 mm
Diameter
D. The cradle shall be provided with the following built in safety device:
1.
Secondary safety wire rope
2.
Overload safety device
3.
Controlled lowering by centrifugal brake
4.
Upper limit switch
E. The cradle shall be self powered and constructed from Aluminum alloy hollow
section, with aluminum kick boards and flooring. The cradle shall have two hoist
winches of 300Kg capacity, which shall be mounted on galvanized steel stirrups
at the ends of the platform.
F. The cradle suspended from two galvanized steel working ropes & two galvanized
steel safety ropes. The safety ropes passes through anti fall devices bloc stop
which are mounted above the winches.
G. All four ropes stored on electrically operated wire winding drums fixed below the
winches.
H. The cradle is also fitted with rubber wall rollers and a pivoted anti collision bar
with limit switch.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/13
I. The cradle is controlled by a central control panel with waterproof button for the
following operations: UP, DOWN, EMERGENCY STOP & ANTI COLLISION BAR
BY-PASS. Electrical power is supplied to the cradle by means of a suspended
cable, which is stored in a container as the cradle travels upwards.
J. Magtron Control: Control system shall be provided using the principle of
magnetic induction in the suspension wire rope eliminate the need for an
electrical control cable between the stage and the roof equipment and to
eliminate the need for special wire ropes with internal conductors.
K. Communication System: Communication system between the cradle and the
roof-mounted unit shall be via telephone connection.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/14
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Prior to beginning equipment installation, examine areas to receive equipment.

Verify that critical dimensions are correct and that conditions are acceptable.
1.
Do not proceed with installation of equipment until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Provide templates for anchor bolts and other items encased in concrete or below
finished surfaces in sufficient time so as not to delay the Work.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install equipments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions

and placement drawings.
B. Coordinate placement of anchors and accessories encased in concrete with
Division 03.
3.04
A. Perform testing and commissioning of the system as per requirements of Division

01 Sections.
3.05
DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of

equipment. Train the personnel in procedures to follow in the event of
operational failures or malfunctions.
3.06
CLEANING
A. After installation clean finished surfaces. Touch up damaged shop applied

finishes as required to restore damaged areas.
B. Remove tools, equipments and all debris from the work area.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 2410/15
SECTION 11 2600
UNIT KITCHENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations and services necessary for the supply and installation of all kitchen
cabinetwork.
1.
Division 22 plumbing Sections for plumbing services and connections to unit
kitchen appliances and fixtures.
2.
Division 26 electrical Sections for electrical services and connections to unit
kitchen appliances.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes.
other Work for each room layout, related service points and floor drains.
C. Samples: Full-size units of each type of material indicated; in sets for each color,
texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in
these characteristics.
1.
Plastic laminate for cabinets, (full door leaf).
2.
Stone for countertops, 300 x 600 mm.
3.
One unit of each type of exposed and concealed hardware.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm with minimum 5 years experience in

manufacturing unit kitchens similar to those indicated for this Project and with a
B. Engage an experienced installer with minimum 5 years experience in unit kitchen
work similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for project that has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in service performance.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
11 2600/1
Unit Kitchens
C. Source Limitations: Obtain unit kitchens through one source from a single
manufacturer.
D. Perform work to premium quality in accordance with Quality Standards of the
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).
E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and
to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
1.
Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed Work if
1.04
A. Deliver factory-assembled units, individually factory packaged and protected.

Label with manufacturer's name, product name, and model number.
1.
Deliver unit kitchens only after utility roughing-in is complete and
construction in spaces to receive unit kitchens is substantially complete
and ready for installation.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install unit kitchens until construction in spaces

is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at
the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication
and installation.
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Roughing-in Drawings: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved roughing-in

drawings for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical service connections for
installing unit kitchens. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing services to comply with
indicated requirements.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of plumbing, mechanical, and electrical
services with unit kitchens.
1.07
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by Contractor and manufacturer

agreeing to repair or replace components of unit kitchens or appliances that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: Two years from date of substantial completion including two
years of free maintenance.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
11 2600/2
Unit Kitchens
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. SieMatic
USA
B. HTH Kokkener
Denmark
C. Nolte Kitchens
Germany
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, product made without formaldehyde.

B. Plywood: US Product Standard PS 1, softwood plywood, APA A-C, exterior
grade.
C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. Color to approval.
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, austenitic Stainless Steel, Grade 316L.
2.03
CABINETS
A. Fabricate doors and frames from high pressure decorative laminate finished
19mm thick MDF board. Fabricate base unit so that space shall be left for under
counter refrigerator. Fabricate back panels, drawers, and shelvings of 12mm
thick hardboard or plywood.
B. Countertops: Stone countertop as per Section 09 7500.
2.04
SINK UNIT
A. Sink Units and faucets are specified in Division 22.

2.05
HARDWARE
A. Manufacturer's standard concealed adjustable hinges, drawer slides, pulls,

catches and rubber bumpers on doors and drawers. Finish for exposed
hardware is as indicated on drawings and match approved sample.
B. Comply with BHMA A156.9.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers:
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
11 2600/3
Unit Kitchens
1.
2.
3.
SOSS, USA.
Hafale, Germany.
Blum, USA.
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
11 2600/4
Unit Kitchens
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical systems to verify

actual locations of connections before unit kitchen installation. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with unit kitchen manufacturer's written installation instructions,

unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Anchorage: Securely anchor components and appliances to supporting cabinets
or countertops with concealed fasteners. Securely anchor unit kitchens to
adjacent walls and floor with concealed devices.
C. Clearances: Verify that clearances are adequate to properly and freely operate
appliances.
D. Connections: Connect unit kitchens to plumbing, mechanical, and electrical
systems.
3.03
A. Testing: Test, adjust, and verify operation of plumbing fixture, and component of
the unit kitchen. Repair or replace any item found to be defective or operating
below rated capacity.
3.04
A. Verify that operating parts work freely and fit neatly. Adjust and lubricate
hardware and moving parts.
B. After completing unit kitchen installation, including appliances and accessories,
inspect exposed finish. Remove protective coverings, if any, and clean exterior
and interior of unit kitchens.
C. Repair or replace damaged parts, dents, buckles, abrasions, and other defects
affecting appearance or serviceability so unit kitchens are in an acceptable
condition at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha Qatar
11 2600/5
Unit Kitchens
SECTION 11 9401
CRANES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Design, engineer and furnish all labor, materials, plant, tools and equipment, and
perform all operations and services necessary for the supply and installation of a
top running, single girder, overhead traveling bridge cranes with electric wire
rope trolley hoist and controls.
1.
Section 03 3000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete
supports.
2.
Section 05 1200
"Structural Steel".
3.
Section 05 5000
4.
Division 26
for equipments.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1.
Provide information on all components, sub-assemblies, control systems,
mechanical features, etc. relating to the equipment supplied under this
Section.
2.
Include brochures, catalogue cuts, parts breakdowns, operation and
maintenance manuals, clearance diagrams, dimensional data (not
supplied in the shop drawings) and any other data necessary for the
engineer to determine compliance with specifications.
1.
2.
Include member sizes, model numbers, specifications, reactions and
complete shop and field notes such as welding symbols, paint
requirements, bolt sizes, etc.
3.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/1
Cranes
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer

indicate compliance of equipment with requirements specified.
D. Maintenance Data: For equipments to include in maintenance manuals.
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Crane suppliers shall have documented experience of ten (10) years, having
successfully designed and built installations of similar scope.
B. Crane suppliers shall be responsible for providing equipment of highest quality
and workmanship which will perform specific functions reliably and safely and
allow required maintenance procedures with a minimum amount of interference
to operation of the equipment.
C. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained
D. Hoists, trolleys, bridge end trucks, drives and controls shall all be from only one
supplier.
1.04
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for minimum and maximum
temperature requirements for storage.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.06
COORDINATION
A. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,

B. Electrical Requirements:
characteristics of equipments with building electrical system.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/2
Cranes
1.07
MAINTENANCE
service for the equipment shall be provided for a period of two years.
B. This service shall include:
1.
components.
2.
3.
the manufacturer of the original equipment.
4.
loss of time.
5.
6.
C. Spare Parts, Tools And Maintenance Equipment
1.
Supply two new complete sets of tools complete with lockable tool boxes
for the proper operation, routine maintenance and adjustments of all
components and equipment.
2.
All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be provided in
original packing, clearly labeled and referenced. Provide complete
schedules of spare parts and maintenance equipment clearly crossreferenced with the as-built record drawings and with operation and
maintenance instruction manuals.
3.
All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be as
recommended by the equipment manufacturer and shall be subject to the
final approval of the Engineer.
1.08
WARRANTY

to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within
1.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/3
Cranes
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. American Crane &Equipment Corporation, USA.

www.americancrane.com
B. Overhead Cranes International, USA.
www.ocieq.com
C. Bridge Crane, USA.
www.bridgecrane.com
D. Dear borncrane, USA.
www.dearborncrane.com
2.02
MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be new and meet the requirements of CMAA, HMI, NEC and
ANSI. All load bearing parts shall have a 5:1 factor of safety.
B. Structural steel used in the fabrication of bridge girders and end trucks shall meet
the minimum ASTM standards.
2.03
GENERAL
A. Modular, pre-engineered design: Crane system shall be capable of expansion,

disassembly and relocation.
1.
Crane shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in accordance with
ANSI B30.16, and OSHA 1910.179.
2.04
PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
2.05
SPECIFICATIONS:
A. Capacity:
15 Ton.
B. Span:
As per drawings.
C. Height of Lift:
As per drawings.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/4
Cranes
D. Hoisting Speed:
16/5 FPM.
E. Trolley Speed:
75/17 FPM.
F. Bridge Speed:
100/25 FPM.
G. Hoist Brakes:
DC Disc type regenerative braking.
H. Trolley Brakes:
DC Disc Type.
I. Bridge Brakes:
DC Disc Type.
J. Hoist Motor:
Sq. Cage, TEFC, 30 min., Class F insulation.
K. Trolley Motor:
Sq. Cage, TEFC, Continuous Duty, Class F

insulation.
L. Bridge Motor:
Sq. Cage, TEFC, Continuous Duty, Class F

insulation.
M. Thermal Overload Protection: Include.

N. Motor Circuit Fuses:
Include.
O. Control Type:
Full magnetic in NEMA rated enclosure.
P. Main Contactor:
Include.
Q. Rope Guide:
Included to insure proper winding of wire rope on

hoist drum thus providing longer wire rope life.
R. Limit Switch:
Upper & Lower include.
S. Operator Station:
Pushbutton station suspended from festooned track

system.
T. Bridge Drive:
A-4 dual drive.
U. Bridge Girders:
Welded plate box or beam type.
V. Bumpers:
Rubber bumpers on end trucks and trolley.
W. Trolley Conductors:
Festooned Cable on roller track.
X. Bridge Collectors:
Include to suit.
Y. Bearing Life:
Class C.
10,000 Hours L-10 Min Class D, 5000 Hours L-10 min
Z. Product Ref: Top running single girder crane with modular hoist, 15T, American
Crane &Equipment Corporation.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/5
Cranes
2.06
RUNWAY BEAMS and RAILS
A. Runway beams shall be designed to meet the requirements of AISC. Beams,

bracing, end stops, and electrification brackets shall be supplied by the crane
manufacturer.
B. Beam sizes, connection details, bracing, etc., shall be clearly shown on the
stamped design drawings submitted by the crane supplier. The top flange of the
runway beams will be braced to the building structure at each support point
C. Rails shall be rails, sized according to the crane wheel loads. Rails, splice bars
and bolts shall be supplied by the crane supplier.
2.07
BRIDGE CRANE
A. Crane Girder
1.
Girders shall be designed to resist all vertical, horizontal and torsional
forces.
2.
Bridge girders shall be designed to meet the requirements of CMAA.
B. End trucks
1.
End trucks shall be constructed of structural steel tubes, providing a rigid
structure. Design shall allow easy wheel removal and exchange.
2.
End trucks shall be fitted with shock absorbing bumpers.
3.
Crane wheels shall be high strength ductile iron, machined with double
flanges and straight treads. Wheels shall be sized to meet the minimum
allowable wheel loads per CMAA. The wheel axle assembly shall rotate
on dual high quality anti-friction, lifetime lubricated bearings having a
minimum life of 10,000 hours.
4.
The end truck to girder connection shall be bolted for easy removal of end
truck. Bridge girder shall be coped to provide the highest possible
positioning of the runway beams.
C. Bridge and Trolley Drives
1.
Bridge drives shall employ fixed axles with totally enclosed motors.
Trolleys shall employ two drive wheels.
2.
The gear reducers shall be fully enclosed with oil bath for gears.
2.08
WIRE ROPE HOIST
A. Hoist Motor and Braking System

1.
Hoist motor shall develop sufficient power to lift the rated load at the
specified speed.
2.
The hoist shall have a DC rectified disc type motor brake. Brake material
shall not contain asbestos.
B. Hoist Gearing
1.
Hoist gearing shall be helical, heat treated alloy steel and shall operate in
an oil bath.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/6
Cranes
C. Hoist Drum and Rope

1.
The rope drum shall be welded construction, deep grooved and precision
machined to give maximum rope life. Drum shall be supported at each
end by sealed anti-friction bearings.
2.
The hoisting rope shall be of a proper design and construction for hoist
service.
3.
Double wrapping of the rope shall not be permitted. A drum rope guide
shall be provided. A minimum of two wraps shall remain on the drum with
the hook in the lowest position.
4.
Bottom block shall have a totally enclosed housing fabricated of steel. The
rope sheaves shall be supported on an anti-friction thrust bearing. Hook
shall be a single barbed type hook and shall be equipped with a heavy
spring safety latch.
5.
Hoist shall be equipped with upper and lower limit switches as well as a
redundant block operated upper limit switch. The switches shall be
adjustable to set the extreme upper and lower limits of hook travel.
6.
Hoist shall be equipped with an overload device to prevent lifting loads in
excess of 125%.
2.09
BRIDGE ELECTRIFICATION AND CONTROLS
A. Electrification
1.
To supply the electrical power across the crane for bridge, trolley and
hoist motions, a flat cable festoon system shall be utilized. The flat cable
shall be extra flexible with color coded wires according to NEMA
standards. Wire shall be stranded copper per CMAA.
2.
The trolleys that carry the flat cable shall have steel wheels with sealed
ball bearings. The rack that the trolley operates in shall be a minimum of
14 gage galvanized metal.
3.
Flat cable connectors shall be heat shrinkable, corrosion resistant and
flame retardant
B. Controls
1.
Bridge, trolley and hoist controls shall be mounted in NEMA 4 enclosures.
2.
A magnetic mainline contactor, controlled by momentary on/off switches
on the pushbutton shall be included.
3.
A control transformer shall be provided with separate and isolated primary
and secondary winding, all copper wound.
4.
Trolley and hoist functions shall be controlled by separate magnetic
contactors.
5.
Bridge functions shall be controlled by a variable frequency drive.
6.
All controls shall be sized to meet ambient temperatures. A cooling
system will be provided for each enclosure when the ambient temperature
exceeds the maximum allowable operating temperature of the individual
electrical components.
C. Pendant Station
1.
Pendant station shall be provided with a separate pushbutton for each
direction.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/7
Cranes
2.
2.10
The enclosures shall have durable, clearly marked legend plates, guards
to protect switches from damage or accidental actuation and shall allow
for right or left hand operation.
PAINTING
A. All structural steel shall be cleaned of rust and mill scale with a minimum SSPC-6
commercial blast cleaning.
B. Cranes shall be painted with Safety Yellow Industrial Enamel.
C. Hoists shall be painted per the Hoist manufacturers standard coating.
D. Structural components shall be painted with Industrial Enamel.
E. All component colours to approval by Engineer.
2.11
FACTORY TESTING
A. Following complete assembly of the equipments in the factory, all components

shall be tested to insure correct operation.
B. Push-buttons shall be tested for operation of each movement.
C. All motors shall be phased correctly in the factory for proper operation.
2.12
SAFETY DEVICES
A. Each crane shall be provided with all required safety devices.

B. Each Crane will be provided with a capacity plate with 75 mm high letters on
each side of the crane giving the capacity in tons.
C. Cranes shall be supplied with a readily accessible power disconnect on the
bridge, adjacent to or part of the control panel.
2.13
ELECTRICAL
A. The electrical control panel shall be custom designed and engineered in

accordance with all applicable codes. Panel wiring shall be labeled to match the
wiring diagram. Branch circuit protection shall be provided by fuses or breakers.
A manual disconnect switch and mainline contactor, mounted in the electrical
enclosure shall be provided to allow maintenance personnel to shut off the power
supply to the crane.
B. Mainline contactor and reversing starters, where applicable shall be modular
plug-in-style, and designed for rugged reliability and a mechanical life of up to 10
million operations.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/8
Cranes
C. The electrical controls shall be housed in a heavy-duty 14 gauge gasketed steel

NEMA 12 gasketed enclosure designed to provide protection from dust, dirt, oil
and water. The door shall be mounted on a continuous hinge and easily
removed by pulling the single hinge pin. A hasp and staple shall be provided for
padlocking.
D. The pendant pushbutton station shall be suspended from a steel roller track to
allow operator flexibility of movement across the entire bridge length and made
from double insulated polypropylene. The enclosure shall be rated NEMA 4, 4X
and 5 to IP65. The station shall be designed for ease of handling with work
gloves.
E. A galvanized heavy gage steel track system to support the festooned cable,
designed to supply power and control to the trolley hoist.
F. Wiring shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 610. With the exception of
festooning wire, conductor bars and leads for motors, limit switches and
collectors, all wiring external to an electrical enclosure shall be placed in rigid
galvanized steel conduits, the fittings and junctions watertight.
2.14
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA)

1.
Specification No. 74 for Top Running & Under Running Single Girder
Electric Overhead Traveling Cranes.
G. American National Standard (ANSI)
1.
ANSI B-30.16 Overhead Hoists
H. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
1.
Par. 1910.179 Overhead & Gantry Cranes
I. Hoist Manufacturers Institute (HMI)
J. National Electric Code (NEC)
1.
NEC (Latest Edition Article 610 Cranes and Hoists)
K. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
1.
Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel
for Buildings
L. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.
A36/A36M - Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
M. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) - Manual of Steel Construction,
Part 5, Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts.
N. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):ANSI B30.11 - Monorails and
Underhung Cranes.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/9
Cranes
O. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A36 - Carbon Structural
Steel.
P. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A325 - Structural Bolts,
Steel, Heat Treated, 120/150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
Q. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A490 - Structural Bolts,
Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
R. American Welding Society (AWS).
1.
Structural Welding Code - Steel
2.
D14.1 - Overhead Cranes
S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) - Specification 1910.179
- Overhead and Gantry Cranes.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/10
Cranes
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
performance of equipments.
B. Do not begin installation until support structures have been properly prepared.
C. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems for equipments to verify actual
locations of connections before equipment installation.
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate size and location of components indicated to be attached into

concrete or structural steel and furnish anchoring devices with templates,
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install crane and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

shop drawings.
B. Do not modify crane components in any manner without advance, written
approval by crane manufacturer.
3.04
A. Conduct testing for final acceptance after the erection work has advanced to the
point that inspection and testing can proceed without interruption.
B. Allow inspection of all parts of the crane containing electrical parts or moving
mechanical parts by the Engineer.
C. Test the cranes for capacity, speed and deflections in the presence of the
Engineer and Employer with 125 percent of the hoist capacity load on the hook.
Test weights shall be supplied by crane supplier.
D. Move hoist trolley through entire travel to ensure crane is clear of obstructions
and moves freely and smoothly.
E. Ensure crane movement is smooth and proper. Adjust as required and correct
deficiencies.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/11
Cranes
F. Crane supplier will transmit to the Employer a certificate of load test and
compliance with OSHA requirements.
3.05
PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
3.06
A. Adjust equipment, for proper, safe, efficient operation.

B. Restore marred, abraded surfaces to their original condition.
3.07
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employers

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain equipments. This shall
include but not necessarily be limited to techniques of safe operation, daily and
monthly inspections, minor troubleshooting.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9401/12
Cranes
SECTION 11 9402
SCISSOR LIFT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations and services necessary for the supply and installation of:
1.
Scissor Lift.
1.
Division 26
for equipments.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, rated

capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, accessories,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details.
1.
Include plans,
C. Manufacturers catalogue and specification of each unit.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer
indicate compliance of equipment with requirements specified, which is based
on comprehensive testing within the last two years of current products.
E. Maintenance Data: For equipments to include in maintenance manuals.
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in designing and

manufacturing equipments of type specified in this section with 10 years
successful experience.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9402/1
Scissor Lift
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of equipments through one source from a
1.04

1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.06
COORDINATION

1.07
MAINTENANCE
1.
components.
2.
3.
4.
loss of time.
5.
6.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9402/2
Scissor Lift

1.
2.
3.
1.08
WARRANTY

1.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9402/3
Scissor Lift
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Saxon Lifts, UK.

www.saxonlifts.com
B. Genie Industries
UK
www.genielift.com
C. Worlifts
UK
www.worlifts.co.uk.com
2.02
A. Products and manufacturers hereafter are specified for the purposes of

establishing minimum quality standards. Products which are equal to or better
than those specified, and which conform to the design requirements and color
2.03
SCISSOR LIFT
A. General: Scissor-type electric hydraulic lift of capacity, size, and construction

indicated, complete with controls, safety devices, and accessories required.
B. Hydraulic Operating System: Self-contained, electric, hydraulic power unit fully
integrated and fitted with a three phase electrical motor for raising and lowering
lift; of size, type, and operation needed for capacity of lift indicated; controlled
from a hand held push button control unit fitted with a three meter length low
voltage flexible cable.
C. Construction: Fabricate lift from structural-steel shapes rigidly welded and
reinforced for maximum strength, safety, and stability. Design assembly to
withstand deformation during both operating and stored phases of service.
Provide mounting brackets and removable lifting eyes for ease of installation.
D. Features:
Dimension and travel
Load Capacity
Speed
:
:
:
As indicated on drawings.
1000kg.
65mm/sec.
E. Lift to have access ramp to facilitate roll-on, roll- off of the machines at floor level.
F. Safety Features:
1.
A safety trip frame fitted under all four sides of the lift platform to reduce
the risk of an accident when lowering. If an obstacle is encountered the
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9402/4
Scissor Lift
2.
lift shall be stopped. Further lowering prevented until the reset button is
pressed.
Provision of a 30 mm wide clearance distance between the scissor
mechanism arms to reduce the risk of finger trapping etc. by an operative.
G. Model Ref.: Saxon Universal type Multiple Scissor Lift Type.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9402/5
Scissor Lift
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate size and location of equipments indicated to be attached into

concrete, and furnish anchoring devices with templates, diagrams, and
instructions for their installation.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install lift as per recommendations of the manufacturer.

1.
Provide electrical connections according to requirements specified in
Division 26.
3.04
A. Field test scissor lift for operating functions. Ensure lift movement is smooth and
proper. Adjust as required and correct deficiencies.
B. Clean surfaces. If necessary, touch-up paint damage, scratches, and blemishes
with manufacturer provided matching paint.
C. Protect scissor lift from other construction operations.
3.05
PROTECTION

3.06

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9402/6
Scissor Lift

3.07
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain equipments.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9402/7
Scissor Lift
SECTION 11 9403
HOISTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Design, engineer and furnish all labor, materials, plant, tools and equipment, and
perform all operations and services necessary for the supply and installation of
electric hoist attached to trolley for the waste treatment plant in hotel basement.
1.
Section 03 3000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete
supports.
2.
Section 05 1200
"Structural Steel".
3.
Section 05 5000
4.
Division 26
for equipments.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1.
Provide information on all components, sub-assemblies, control systems,
mechanical features, etc. relating to the equipment supplied under this
Section.
2.
Include brochures, catalogue cuts, parts breakdowns, operation and
maintenance manuals, clearance diagrams, dimensional data (not
supplied in the shop drawings) and any other data necessary for the
engineer to determine compliance with specifications.
1.
2.
Include member sizes, model numbers, specifications, reactions and
complete shop and field notes such as welding symbols, paint
requirements, bolt sizes, etc.
3.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer
indicate compliance of equipment with requirements specified.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9403/1
Hoists
D. Maintenance Data: For equipments to include in maintenance manuals.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hoist suppliers shall have documented experience of ten (10) years, having
successfully designed and built installations of similar scope.
B. Hoist suppliers shall be responsible for providing equipment of highest quality
and workmanship which will perform specific functions reliably and safely and
allow required maintenance procedures with a minimum amount of interference
to operation of the equipment.
C. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained
D. Hoists, trolleys, bridge end trucks, drives and controls shall all be from only one
supplier.
1.04

1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.06
COORDINATION

1.07
MAINTENANCE
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9403/2
Hoists
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

components.
loss of time.

1.
2.
3.
1.08
WARRANTY

1.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9403/3
Hoists
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Budgit Hoist, USA

www.budgithoist.thomasnet.com
B. American Crane & Equipment Corporation, USA.
www.americancrane.com
C. Overhead Cranes International, USA.
www.ocieq.com
D. Bridge Crane, USA.
www.bridgecrane.com
E. Dear borncrane, USA.
www.dearborncrane.com
2.02
2.03
ELECTRIC HOIST
A. Hoist shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in accordance with applicable

sections of ANSI B30.16, HMI, National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and OSHA.
B. Design of hoist, trolley and incidental accessories shall be based upon the use of
a factor of safety 5.
C. Hoist features:
1.
The hoist frame and housing constructed from light-weight, rugged
aluminum alloy. Housing precision machined for accurate gear and
bearing alignment.
2.
High- torque, heavy duty hoist motor, motors 30 minute rated with class
B insulated provided with a thermal actuated switch (TAS) embedded in
the motor winding for protection.
3.
Load sprocket provided with a full floating chain guide that assures proper
engagement of chain on sprocket.
4.
All gearing totally enclosed, oil-bath lubricated for long life.
5.
The lower block provided with a 360 degree rotating hook riding on thrust
bearings, the hook provided with a spring loaded latch.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9403/4
Hoists
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
All hoists provided with mechanical load brake and overload protection.
The load brake provides load lowering control and a backup for the DC
disc motor brake. Manguard prevents lifting loads beyond the hoists load
range which may damage the hoist.
Hoist control located under a removable cover for easy access
Provide with an upper and lower control circuit limit switch.
Hoist operation controlled by a pendent push button station.
Provide weatherproofing cord grips on electric cables and seal all
electrical joints.
Provide overload clutch designed to help guard against excessive
overloads.
Hoist Specifications:
a.
Capacity:
2 Ton.
b.
Speed:
4fpm.
c.
Chain Type:
Link chain.
Product Ref: Budgit BEHC0204-20-MT
D. Trolley shall be designed to operate with hoists and forming an integral

hoist/trolley combination.
1.
Trolley shall be provided with a four button pendant station for controlling
the hoist and trolley motions.
2.
Wheels shall be forged heat treated steel.
3.
Traverse motor 30min rated, totally enclosed in non-ventilated with F
class insulation.
4.
Trolley controls housed in NEMA 1 enclosure mounted on the trolley side
for easy access. Controls to include a reversing contactor, terminal strip
and pendant station with hoist and trolley push-button control.
E. Provide all safety features and electrical components required for a complete
installation.
F. Hoists shall be finished with hoist manufacturers standard coating. All
component colours to approval by Engineer.
2.04
RUNWAY RAILS
A. Runway rails for trolleys shall be designed to meet the requirements of AISC.
B. Beam sizes, connection details, bracing, etc., shall be clearly shown on the
stamped design drawings submitted by the crane supplier. The top flange of the
runway beams will be braced to the building structure at each support point
C. Rails shall be sized according to the wheel loads.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9403/5
Hoists
2.05
FACTORY TESTING
A. Following complete assembly of the equipments in the factory, all components

shall be tested to insure correct operation.
B. Push-buttons shall be tested for operation of each movement.
C. All motors shall be phased correctly in the factory for proper operation.
2.06
SAFETY DEVICES
A. Hoist shall be provided with all required safety devices.

B. Hoist shall be provided with a capacity plate with 75 mm high letters giving the
capacity in tons.
C. System shall be supplied with a readily accessible power disconnect on the
bridge, adjacent to or part of the control panel.
2.07
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American National Standard (ANSI)

1.
ANSI B-30.16 Overhead Hoists
B. Hoist Manufacturers Institute (HMI)
C. National Electric Code (NEC)
1.
NEC (Latest Edition Article 610 Cranes and Hoists)
D. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
1.
Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel
for Buildings
E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.
A36/A36M - Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
F. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) - Manual of Steel Construction,
Part 5, Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts.
G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):ANSI B30.11 - Monorails and
Underhung Cranes.
H. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A36 - Carbon Structural
Steel.
I. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A325 - Structural Bolts,
Steel, Heat Treated, 120/150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
J. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A490 - Structural Bolts,
Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9403/6
Hoists
K. American Welding Society (AWS).

1.
Structural Welding Code - Steel
2.
D14.1 - Overhead Cranes
L. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) - Specification 1910.179
- Overhead and Gantry Cranes.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9403/7
Hoists
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Coordinate size and location of components indicated to be attached into

concrete or structural steel and furnish anchoring devices with templates,
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install hoist and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

shop drawings.
B. Do not modify hoist components in any manner without advance, written
approval by hoist manufacturer.
3.04
A. Conduct testing for final acceptance after the erection work has advanced to the
point that inspection and testing can proceed without interruption.
B. Allow inspection of all parts of the hoist containing electrical parts or moving
mechanical parts by the Engineer.
C. Test the hoist for capacity, speed and deflections in the presence of the Engineer
and Employer with 125 percent of the hoist capacity load on the hook. Test
weights shall be supplied by hoist supplier.
D. Move hoist trolley through entire travel to ensure hoist is clear of obstructions
and moves freely and smoothly.
E. Ensure hoist movement is smooth and proper. Adjust as required and correct
deficiencies.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9403/8
Hoists
F. Crane supplier will transmit to the Employer a certificate of load test and
compliance with OSHA requirements.
3.05
PROTECTION

3.06

3.07
DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employers

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain equipments. This shall
include but not necessarily be limited to techniques of safe operation, daily and
monthly inspections, minor troubleshooting.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
11 9403/9
Hoists
SECTION 12 4813
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of entrance floor
mats.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions,

and material descriptions.
B. Samples: 300x300mm square samples of floor mats, assembled section of floor
mat. Include frame members and all accessories, 300-mm- long Samples.
C. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1.
Doorways and enclosing walls.
2.
Mat type and color.
3.
Frame type and color.
4.
Type of subfloor.
5.
Type of installation.
6.
Type, colour, and location of edge, transition, and other accessories
required.
7.
Transition details to other flooring materials.
D. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include the following:
1.
Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal
products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance
schedule.
2.
Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental
to carpet.
1.03
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimension requirements before ordering.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
12 4813/1
Entrance Floor Mats
1.04
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish

floors to receive floor mats and frames.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
12 4813/2
Entrance Floor Mats
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. Gradus
UK
B. EMS
UK.
C. Emco
Germany.
2.02
MAIN ENTRANCE FLOOR MAT (FM01)
A. Mat Frame: Extruded aluminum, clear anodized.

B. Mat constructed using an aluminum base supported by rigid PVC-u bridging strip.
C. Aluminum scrapers interspaced with 100% solution dyed nylon wipers.
D. Hinge color: Black.
E. Wiper color Ref.: Boulevard 6000, Latte.
F. Installation accessories: As recommended by manufacturer.
G. Product Ref.: Esplande Plus 18 mm closed construction by Gradus.
H. Products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the purposes
approval.
2.03
A. AAMA 611
Voluntary Specifications
Aluminum.
B. ASTM B 221
Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded

Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
12 4813/3
for
Anodized
Architectural
Entrance Floor Mats
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location and size
affecting installation of floor mats. Proceed with installation only after
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Provide a template of mat assemblies to ensure proper installation.

3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions at locations

indicated; coordinate with entrance locations and traffic patterns. Install units
flush with adjacent floor finishes or as per drawings.
3.04
PROTECTION
A. Defer installation of floor mats until Project is near Substantial Completion.

B. After completing required installation, provide temporary protection until
construction traffic has ended and Project is near time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
12 4813/4
Entrance Floor Mats
SECTION 13 1200
WATER FEATURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Filters.
B. Pipes, Fittings and Valves.
C. Water Display Specialities.
D. Cleaning Equipment.
E. Control Panels and Electrical Works.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ANSI B 2.1 -
Pipe Threads.
B. BS 4375
PTFE Tape for Pipe Thread Sealing Application.
C. ASTM B 88
Seamless Copper Water Tube.
D. ANSI B 16.18 -
Cast Bronze Solder Joints Pressure Fittings.
E. ANSI B 16.22 -
Wrought Copper Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
F. ASTM D 1785 -
UPVC Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
G. ASTM D 2466 -
Socket Type PVC Fittings, Schedule 40.
H. ASTM D 2467 -
Socket Type PVC Fittings, Schedule 80.
I. ASTM D 2564 -
Solvent Cement for PVC Pipes and Fittings.
J. ASTM D 2855 -
Making Solvent Cemented Joints with PVC Pipes and

Fittings.
K. ASME Sec. 9 -
Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
L. AWS A 5.8 -
Brazing Filler Metal.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
13 1200/1/C1 Revised as per RFI 860
Water Features
M. ANSI B 16.21 -
Non-metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges.
N. API 600
General Design Specifications for Gate, Globe and Check

Valves.
O. ANSI B 16.34 -
Pressure Temperature Ratings for Valves.
P. ANSI B 16.10 -
Face to Face Dimensions of Cast Iron Gate, Globe and

Check Valves.
Q. ANSI B 16.24 -
End Flange Dimensions of Bronze Valves.
R. ANSI B 16.1 -
End Flange Dimensions of Cast Iron Valves.
S. AWS D 10.9 -
Standard for Building Services Piping.
T. AWWA C 601 -
Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste

Water.
U. ANSI B 31.1 -
Power Piping.
V. ASTM A 74
Coated Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings with Bell and Spigot for
Drainage Services (BS 437).
W. ASTM C 564 -
Neoprene Gasketed Joints for Cast Iron Drainage Piping

(BS 6087).
X. ISO 2531
Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings (BS 4772, AWWA C

151 and AWWA C 110).
Y. AWWA C 111 -
Rubber Gasketed Joints for Ductile / Gray Iron Pipes and

Fittings.
Z. BS 1710
Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems (ANSI A 13.1).
AA. ASHRAE
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves.
Water Features
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. Refer to schedules on drawings for selection of equipment.

2.02
DRY PUMPS
A. Type: Single-stage centrifugal volute pump type of 1450 rpm speed. Materials
of construction shall be as follows:
Impeller:
Bronze
Shaft:
Stainless Steel
Casing:
Bronze
Shaft Sleeve:
Stainless Steel
B. Pump Meters and Control Panels: See Division 26 for details.
C. Accessories: Air bleed off valve, pressure gauges and flexible connections at
suction and discharge.
D. Capacity: Schedules on drawings shall be referred to for selection and capacity
rates.
2.03
FOUNTAIN PUMPS
A. Type: Self priming centrifugal pump made of reinforced glass fiber, complete
with prefilter.
B. Pump Meters and Control Panels: See Division 26 for details.
C. Accessories: Air bleed off valve, pressure gauges and flexible connections at
suction and discharge.
D. Capacity: Schedules on drawings shall be referred to for selection and capacity
rates.
2.04
OVERFLOW AND DRAIN ARMATURES
A. Wall mounted overflows shall be fitted to remove excess water from the pools
with drain and plugs provided for pool drain down. All pump chambers shall be
constructed with open floor drains or sumps with drainage pumps.
2.05
WATER INLETS (AUTOMATIC TOP-UP)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
A. Fresh water from the automatic water top-up system shall be introduced via wall
mounted niches. The water supply shall be pumped from a break tank within the
plant room.
2.06
PUMP SUCTION STRAINER
A. All pumps shall draw water via coarse suction strainers within the pools.
Strainers shall be sized to suit the corresponding pump units.
B. Coarse suction strainers shall be of bronze and/or stainless steel. They shall
incorporate a puddle flange and be fitted with a removable dirt and debris
screen. Connections shall be screwed BSP.
C. Hair and lint strainers shall be fitted to all dry sited pumps and shall be in cast
iron with a quick release lid sealed with 0-rings, drain cocks and stainless steel
baskets that allow good water flow when filled with debris. Connections shall be
flanged.
2.07
CABLE LEADOUTS, DUCTS, JUNCTION BOXES AND TRAYS
A. All cable lead-outs shall be of bronze. A puddle flange shall be incorporated

together with a screwed duct connection.
B. Cable glands shall be of the compression type suitable for cable diameters 7mm
to 14mm.
C. Lead-outs to be fitted with 4 nos. or 7 nos. glands.
D. All dueling between the various cable leadouts and pump chambers, to include
puddle flange seals where ducts penetrate the chamber structure. All ducts to be
lightweight PVC either 2" or 4" as indicated on the drawings.
E. All underwater cables shall be fitted with submersible terminal boxes. Each box
fitted with 4 nos. compression glands suitable for cable diameters 7mm to 14mm,
8 - way terminal strip with body mounted earth tab and clear inspection cover.
Case to be in bronze.
F. Pump chamber cables shall be run on standard 102mm cable trays
manufactured to G.O.C.D. standard 23 (formerly C.E.G.B. standard 12171) with
admiralty type perforations in mild steel and hot dip galvanised. Fixings to be no
more than 900mm apart.
2.08
CABLES (SUBMERSIBLE & DRY)
A. Cable sizing shall be the responsibility of the water feature specialist supplier,
but generally as follows:
Lighting cables
3 core x 1.5mm2
Pumps (single phase)
3 core x 1.5mm2
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
Pumps (three phase)

Level sensors
4 core x 2.5mm2
3 core x 1.5mm2
B. Underwater/submersible cables shall be rubber sheathed type H07RNF, rated

voltage 450/750V in accordance with DIN/VDE0282 part 810. Dry mounted and
all non-submersible equipment cables shall be steel wired armoured type rated
voltage 450/750V.
2.09
LOCAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ISOLATORS
A. All items of an electrical nature with a rating of more than 220V/1ph/50Hz shall
be fitted with a local isolator, as VDE0660/12.73 regulations. Isolators shall be
supplied with a red handle and a contrasting yellow plate, protection rating to be
IP55.
2.10
ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR
REQUIREMENTS
CONTROL
PANELS
GENERAL
A. Cubicle style motor control panels (CP) shall be installed in the pump chamber
and shall provide power distribution, control and monitoring facilities for all
mechanical services plant and equipment in, or local to, the plant room.
B. The panels shall include all necessary instruments, relays, indication lamps,
control and test switches, main and auxiliary fusing isolators, starters, protective
devices, labels and wiring terminals.
C. This specification shall apply to all control panels containing starters and
controls, to separate starters and, where applicable, to control panels
incorporated in packaged equipment.
D. Individual control systems shall be provided for each filtration plant, these shall
be housed in individual panels within the same plantroom.
E. Provide full control for the water treatment and features systems, inclusive of
incorporation all necessary fail-safe requirement.
F. Panel Construction:
1.
Cabinet type galvanised sheet steel enclosure, damp and dust proofed to
IP55, fitted with hinged and gasketed doors and complete with
mechanical interlocking isolator. Wall mounted.
2.
Finish stove enamelled. BS Colour.
3.
Compartmentalised to divide the 240V and below sections from 415V
section housing starters etc.
4.
Mains power 415V 3 pH 50 Hz.
5.
Earth leakage protection and sequential starting after a main failure shall
be provided in accordance with WED requirements.
6.
On the front of the panel, locate all necessary selector switches complete
with running and tripped lights.
7.
Engraved traffolite labels for each drive etc.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
8.
9.
Fault indication on panel to include:

Circulating pump trip
Earth leakage trip
Volt free contact to be provided for others to connect to the BMS
(Building Management System) to control and indicate as follows:
Start/stop filtration plant
Monitor operation of plant
Indicate plant fault alarms
Indicate out of design range alarms for temperature, pH and chlorine
level.
Log temperature
Log plant running hours of each pump for maintenance records
Emergency stop switches operated
Position of all local isolators
G. Installation Method
All wiring shall be contained within as surfaced fixed conduit system and
wiring shall be PVC singles. Box lids and covers shall be fitted with gaskets.
H. Underwater Lighting Cabling
All cabling to underwater lighting shall be XLPE/SWA/PVC and direct buried
to a suitable sealed junction box and connection to the luminaire flexible
cable (factory fitted).
Niche / cable entry point shall be a factory fitted epoxy encapsulated
compression type cable gland into the housing.
2.11
ELECTRICAL SERVICES GENERAL
A. An electrical supply shall be provided from the main electrical system to a

isolator distribution panel located in each plantroom by others to serve all
filtered systems, lighting, underwater lighting and small power within each
plantroom.
B. The pool / fountain CONTRACTOR shall provide his own power supply from the
distribution board into the control panels and all associated electrical WORKs to
each system control panel, lighting, underwater lighting and small power.
C. Allow for interconnecting cabling from the control panel(s) to all items on the
water treatment and feature systems.
D. Local isolators shall be provided for each items of equipment. It must not be
possible under normal operation to restart equipment from isolators.
E. The complete electrical installation including all wiring and equipment to be in
accordance with the latest edition of the IEE Regulations for the electrical
equipment of building and WED requirements.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
2.12
ILLUMINATION
A. All light fittings should be of bronze and/or stainless steel and should operate
using a standard 12v low voltage system.
2.13
AUTOMATIC WATER TOP-UP SYSTEMS
A. The water displays shall be fitted with automatic water top-up systems to replace
water lost due to evaporation and splash. A water level sensor shall be fitted to
constantly monitor the water level. In the event of a demand, fresh water shall be
pumped into the pools to top up the system via a break tank with a type 'A' air
gap.
2.14
FILTRATION EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS
A. All features shall be fitted with vertical hi-rate sand filter systems coupled with
fully automatic chemical dosing systems with additional ionisation. The filter
systems shall be sized to accommodate a turnover rate of the complete volume
every 4 hours. The water shall be treated using chlorine to between 1 & 1.5ppm
and pH minus/plus to maintain a level of 7.6. These systems shall be fully
automatic.
2.15
CHEMICAL DOSING SYSTEMS
A. Automatic chemical dosing systems to be provided for each filtration plant.

B. The selection of chemicals to be based on the most suitable for raw water
supply.
C. Each system to dose and control the following :
Chlorine
Automatic
PH control
Automatic
Flocculant
Manual
Others if appropriate
As required
D. The equipment to be Prominent or equal and approved, comprising of:
Mixing tanks
Dosing pumps
Measuring cells and transmitters
Automatic controllers
Dosing hose, valves, PRV and NRVs
E. Chemical solution lines
1.
Reinforced flexible tubing supported in continuos PVC conduit with long
radius bends and supported as manufacturers recommendations.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
2.
3.
At the pump and injection point, the tubing shall be connected directly to
high pressure compression fitting and special removable mains injection
fittings.
All solution lines to be run separately and laid to fall back to dosing tanks.
F. Dosing controllers
1.
Separate measurement control system to be provided for each filtration
system, panel/board mounted by equipment suppliers.
2.
Each system to incorporate :
a.
Free chlorine monitoring
b.
PH monitoring
G. Chemical stores
CONTRACTOR to confirm storage requirements including :
1.
Bunded area, protective coatings, ventilation, cold water supply, drainage
etc.
H. Protective clothing
1.
Protective clothing and equipment
2.
Face shields conforming to BS2092
3.
Rubber boots, sizes to be confirmed by the client
4.
Pairs of rubber elbow length industrial gloves
5.
2 No. full length rubber aprons
2.16
INSTRUMENTATION: PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Dial type pressure gauges

Size
100mm
Range0-4 Bar
B. Gauges case to be in stainless steel or chrome finish.
C. Dial face to have graduations in both meters and feet (H2O) and be complete
with zero reset screw.
D. Gauges to be complete with connecting pipework and cocks with lever handles
and fittings.
E. Gauges to be mounted no higher than 2m from floor level and have identification
labels.
F. Where pressure is negative, gauge to be suited as necessary.
G. All gauges to be of same manufacture, Wika, Nuova Fima or equal and
approved.
H. To be supplied at the following locations:
1.
Filter Inlet and Outlets,
2.
Pump Suction and Delivery Headers
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
2.17
POOL WATER MAINTENANCE KIT
A. CONTRACTOR to include for the supply of complete pool water maintenance kit
suitable for a commercial pool.
2.18
PIPES AND FITTINGS:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SERVICE
LOCATION
TYPE
-------------------------------------------------------------A. Fountain pump
suction and discharge
All
UPVC
schedule 80.
B. Automatic make-up.
connection
All
Copper
Type K.
C. Pool drainage and

over flow
All
UPVC
Schedule 80.
D. Pumped waste pipe
All
UPVC Schedule 40
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.19
PIPE JOINTS
A. UPVC: Solvent welded joints. Use threaded adaptors / flanges etc. where
required.
B. Copper: B cup-5 brazed joints. Use threaded adaptors / flanges for connection to
PVC piping, nozzles etc. as appropriate.
C. Pipe joints shall be rated for 1034 KPa (150 Psig) working water pressure at
121oC (250oF)
2.20
VALVES
A. General
1.
Provide valves from the same manufacturer throughout where possible.
B. GATE VALVES
1.
Upto 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, non-rising stem and union
bonnet, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
2.
Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM),

outside screw and Yoke (O.S.&Y), solid wedge, renewable seats, flanged
ends.
C. Globe Valves
1.
Upto 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, rising stem, union bonnet,
renewable composition disc, threaded ends.
2.
Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze mounted (IBBM), rising
stem, O.S&Y, renewable seat, flanged ends.
D. Ball Valves
1.
Upto 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, Teflon
seats and stuffing box ring, lever operated, threaded ends.
2.
Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Cast steel body; stainless steel, full bore,
floating ball; Teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever or key operated
flanged ends.
E. Check Valves
1.
Upto 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Bronze, in-line, resilient seat and disc,
spring loaded, screwed ends.
2.
Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze trim, spring loaded,
renewable composite disc and seat, flanged ends.
3.
Over 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size: Iron body, bronze trim, swing type with
external lever and weight, renewable seat and disc, flanged ends.
F. Drain Valves
1.
Bronze angle globe pattern, key operated, threaded inlet and hose
connection outlet with cap and chain.
G. Pressure Ratings
1.
Unless otherwise indicated all valves shall be rated for 1034 Kpa (150
psig) working water pressure at 121 deg.C (250 deg.F)
2.
Contractor shall allow for selecting higher pressure rated valves to meet
the valve construction features.
H. Valve Operators
1.
Provide hand wheels / operating levers for valves as appropriate. Hand
wheels for gate and globe valves 50 mm (2 inch) nom. size and smaller,
shall be non-ferrous metal (die cast zinc / aluminium alloy etc.).
2.
Provide one key / wrench of appropriate size per lever operated valve
installed.
3.
Provide chain operated sheaves for valves located more than 2 Ms (7
feet) above floor. Extend chains to about 150 cm (5 feet) above floor and
hook to clips in order to clear walk ways and equipment.
4.
Provide geared operators for valves 200 mm (8 inch) nom. and larger in
size.
I. TRIPLE DUTY VALVE: IBBM combined globe and check valve with calibration
stops, specially made for use at the discharge of centrifugal pumps.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
J. QUADRUPLE DUTY VALVE: IBBM, combined globe and check valve with
calibration stops and flow measurement ports with cocks and hose adaptor,
specially made for use at the discharge of centrifugal pumps. Furnish one flow
measuring instrument for the project.
K. AUTOMATIC AIR RELEASE VALVE: Bronze body with non-ferrous float and
internal working parts. Construction shall be take-apart type for easy
maintenance. Outlet shall be tapped for connection to drain.
L. AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL VALVES: bronze body with stainless steel
cartridges. The valve shall be factory set to the required capacity and shall
operate within + or - 5 % over an operating pressure differential of at least 14
times the minimum required for control. Valve body shall be rated for minimum
1034 Kpa (150 psig) wwp and shall have threaded/flanged ends. Each valve
shall be furnished with a set of nipples, quick disconnect valves and other
fittings suitable for use with the measuring instrument specified.
M. FLOW MEASURING INSTRUMENT: Pressure gauge with -100 to 1034 Kpa (14.7 to 150 psig) range, dual 150 cm (5 feet) long connection hoses with vent
and shut off valves, flow conversion charts and carrying case.
2.21
FLASHING AND SEALING
A. Provide sheet lead (minimum 3 mm thick) flashing of minimum (3 feet) diameter

at all drains and flashing sleeves in the fountains.
B. Use age proof, water compatible, poly sulphide sealant at the joint of nozzles
stand pipes with the flashing sleeve.
2.22
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER AND OTHER ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS.
A. Electric Motors
1.
All motors shall be manufactured to BS 2613, wound for the system
power supply ratings and suitable for continuous operation in the ambient
conditions stated and designed to work for a period of at least five (5)
minutes at 75 % of the system power supply voltage without abnormal
overheating and damage.
2.
All motors shall be squirrel cage induction type, with TEFC enclosure
unless otherwise stated on particular schedules or dictated by selection
(oil cooled type for submersible pumps).
3.
Rotation and color of phase shall be in accordance with BS 158.
4.
The ends of the windings shall reach a terminal box; fitted with a junction
box, cable inlet and adaptor plate with adjustment (cable pincers etc.);
adequately sized to suit the type of cable used and arrangement shall be
such that an easy permutation of two phases is possible without upsetting
the connections. Tapping for cable entry shall be made to suit the site
requirements
5.
Motors shall have foundations, bolts and sliding rails where required.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
6.
7.
8.
9.
All motors shall have a minimum power factor of 0.85 from 75 % to full
load.
All motors shall have windings with class 'B' temperature rise and class
'F' insulation. Provide anticondensation heaters in stator windings for all
motors.
Winding bridges, where used shall be tinned copper of adequate size
and supplied by the manufacturer.
Motor name plates of etched aluminum shall state:
a.
Name of manufacturer.
b.
Serial no. and frame size.
c.
Power, speed and power factor.
d.
Electrical supply.
e.
Type of starting.
The name plate shall be attached to the body by riveting.
C. MOTOR CONTROL CENTER FOR REFLECTING POOL: .Furnish MCC with

single intake, but separate sections for the following. Details given below are
intended for defining the requirements, but not to limit other safety measures /
components which are required by the codes and standards.
1.
Mains isolator section containing 4 pole MCCB with adjustable trip rating
and power on indicator (red), which shall be lit only when all the three
phases are healthy.
2.
Bus bar section: Bus bars shall be of electrolytic copper of appropriate
rating. All tap offs shall have tinned contact surfaces, securely bolted
together.
3.
Pool circulating pump control sections: There shall be 2 sections (for duty
and stand by pumps electrically interlocked for only one pump operating
at a time) containing the following:
a.
Mains isolator interlocked with door and power on indicator (red).
b.
COELCB with 300 m Amps trip rating
c.
Set of HRC fuses and starter contactor with over load trip.
d.
Manual / off / auto selector switch.
e.
Pump run (green) and trip (amber) indicator with audible alarm for
trip and alarm test and mute facility.
f.
Minimum run timer and relay with 0 to 6 minutes adjustable range.
4.
Pump operation programming section containing the following:
a.
24 hour timer with half (1/2) hour increments for the planned
operation of the pumps.
b.
Automatic sequence invertor for changing duty pump on 24 hour
basis.
c.
Low water cutout with audio visual alarm, complete with alarm
mute facility.
d.
Set of terminals / relays for controlling the start / stop of the pumps
and relays with volt free contacts for remote operation of the
systems from the Building automation system.
5.
Pool lighting control section shall contain the following:
a.
Mains isolator interlocked with door and power on indicator (red).
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
b.
6.
7.
8.
2.23
Contactor (TPN) for Automatic / Remote operation of the lighting

system.
c.
Distribution assembly consisting of 10 or 15 amps MCBs with
integral 10 m Amps earth leakage trip. See schematic diagrams
for electrical installation.
d.
24 hours timer with half (1/2) hour increments for the planned
operation of the lights.
e.
Relays (240 volts, 5 amps rating) in series for interlocking the
lights with the pool circulating pumps.
f.
Selector switch (hand / off / auto) for bypassing the pump
interlocking relays (in hand position).
g.
Start / stop push buttons.
h.
Run (green) and trip (amber) indicators.
i.
Set of terminals / relays with volt free contacts for remote
operation from the Building automation system.
Lighting transformer section containing 10 nos. 300 watts, 240/12 volts
transformers with tapping for 12,13 and 14 volts on the secondary side (6
nos for main pool and 4 nos for wading pool) //.
Auxiliary power supply section containing the following:
a.
MCCB with 300 m Amps COELCB for wading pool filter pump.
Spare sections containing the following:
a.
Furnish 1 no. 30 Amps TPN MCCB with 300 m Amps COELCB as
spare.
CLEANING EQUIPMENT
A. Vacuum Cleaner.
1.
Chrome plated, cast bronze body, 18 inch long with 4 wheels and 1
inch suction fitting.
2.
Telescopic, aluminium handle, 3.2 to 7.8 meters long, with connectors.
3.
Corrugated plastic , vacuum hose, 1 inch diameter, 50 feet long, with
vacuum cleaner sleeve and suction adaptor.
B. Pool Brush
1.
Nylon bristles on 18 inch long ABS body.
2.
Telescopic, aluminium handle, 3.2 to 7.8 meters long, with connectors.
2.24
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. Refer to and comply with Section 22 0529.

2.25
FLASHING AND SEALING
A. Provide sheet lead (minimum 3 mm thick) flashing of minimum (3 feet) diameter

at all drains and flashing sleeves in the fountains.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
B. Use age proof, water compatible, poly sulphide sealant at the joint of nozzles
stand pipes with the flashing sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
COORDINATION
A. Study all drawings and specifications and familiarize with the structural and
architectural details and the work of other trades.
B. Ensure that the work under this section will not interfere with those of other
trades and are compatible with the architectural finishes, prior to placing orders,
fabrication and installation.
C. Inform the electrical contractor of the exact power requirements and location and
type of the interface. Furnish all information as required by the Civil Defense for
obtaining approvals.
D. Furnish the civil works contractor with necessary templates, patterns, setting out
plans and other items for incorporation in his works or for leaving necessary
provisions for the work. Ensure timely placement of sleeves, inserts and the like.
E. Where work is installed in close proximity to or will interfere with work of other
trades, assist in working out satisfactory space arrangements. Prepare
composite shop drawings to a suitable scale, showing how the work is installed
in relation to the work of other trades.
F. Ensure the sufficiency of dimensions of plant areas, door ways etc. and
suitability of slabs and other structural members for placement, operation and
maintenance of equipment.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
G. Provide hooks, rails or other items to allow for hoisting or movement of

equipment in technical areas.
3.02
PIPING INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.

B. Install piping in a way that conserves building space and does not interfere with
the use of space.
C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe joints
or connected equipment.
E. Install exposed piping parallel or at right angles to the building walls, except
where otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.
F. Where changes in pipe sizes occur, install tapered reducer fittings. Use of
bushings is not permitted except with the written permission of the Engineer.
Install eccentric reducer fittings with level crown. Provide steel fittings coated
with food grade epoxy, where standard PVC fittings are not available as for
reducing fittings.
G. Where changes in pipe direction occur install factory manufactured fittings.
Bending or forming of pipe is not permitted without Engineer's written
permission.
H. Provide adequate clearance for access to valves and fittings.
I. Provide minimum clearances between piping covered by this Section and other
services.
J. Provide access doors where valves and fittings are not exposed.
K. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at system low points.
L. During progress of work keep the ends of all piping closed with factory
manufactured plugs or blind flanges to prevent entry of foreign matter. Ensure
the removal of such plugs or flanges on completion of the works. All blind
flanges shall have integral indicating flags.
M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted, except with written
permission of the Engineer for each location.
N. All valves shall be same size as pipeline except if otherwise noted on the
Contract Drawings.
O. Provide flanges / unions on horizontal pressure piping at spacing not exceeding
18.0 Ms (60 feet).
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
P. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.

Q. Install unions or flanges downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus
connections.
R. Install dielectric unions or flanged fittings wherever joining dissimilar metals.
3.03
PIPING INSTALLATION - PARTICULAR FOR UPVC
A. Use only approved (as recommended by the manufacturer) solvent cement for
making the joints.
B. Do not make solvent joints in humid or dusty atmosphere.
C. Prior to making the joint, mark the required penetration and fitting alignment, in a
clearly visible manner, on the pipe end for later verification.
D. Allow a minimum period of twenty four (24) hours from the time of making the
joint, before filling the line.
3.04
VALVES - SELECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install full bare ball valves for isolation purposes and for drainage of pools.
B. Install self closing (spring loaded) type check valves at the discharge of pumps.
C. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
3.05
SUPPORT AND ANCHORS
*A. Refer to and comply with Section 22 0529.

3.06
PUDDLE FLANGES
A. Install puddle flanges on all pipe penetrations on walls and floors of water
holding structures.
B. Erect puddle flanges in the form work, perpendicular to the wall face and rigidly
to resist displacement during pouring of concrete.
C. Seal the openings around, so as to avoid leakage (and resultant honey combing)
and undesirable formation of concrete.
D. Check alignment immediately after pouring of concrete. Make adjustments,
where necessary.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
3.07
VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. Refer to and comply with Section 22 0548.

3.08
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS AND ELECTRICAL WORKS
*A. Refer to and comply with Division 26.

3.09
PUMPS AND MOTORS
A. Select all pump motors for the maximum loading of the selected impeller.
B. Select the pumps with operating points within 20 % on either side of the
maximum efficiency point.
C. Do not select the maximum and minimum impeller sizes, as far as possible.
D. Provide anti-condensation heaters in windings of all motors.
3.10
INSPECTION, TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. During the manufacture and installation and after completion of works; the
system, sections of the system or its components shall be tested by the
Contractor / specialist Subcontractor in the presence of the Engineer, as
directed below or elsewhere. The Contractor shall procure all testing instruments
and accessories and bear all costs in connection therewith.
1.
Basic materials for conformity with the specified standards.
2.
Supports and anchors for ability to withstand required loads.
3.
Pumping equipment for the specified flow, head, controls, safety
interlocks and alarms, vibration and noise criteria etc.
4.
Filtration equipment for flow, head loss, filtration fineness, controls and
alarms, regeneration etc.
B. Balance And Regulate The Following Items, Systems:
1.
Globe valves on pump discharge for design flow.
2.
Balancing valves in circulating system for equal or proportionate flow.
3.
Water level sensors for cut out level or range.
4.
Float control assembly for opening and closing levels.
3.11
TESTING OF PIPING
A. The pipes shall be jointed, plugged and shall have been in position for at least
24 hours, before the tests are carried out.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
B. The piping shall be tested for line, gradient and water tightness. The Contractor
shall furnish all labour, and necessary testing instruments such as gauges,
pumps etc. as directed by the Engineer. A minimum of Two (2) nos identical
pressure gauges shall be installed at extremities of the piping circuit to be
tested.
C. Fill the piping with clean fresh water, leaving all high points open to allow for
purging of air.
D. Pressurize the system using manual pumps in increments of 25 percent of the
test pressure. Allow a standing period of 10 minutes after each pressure
increment. Pressure testing using motor driven pump is not permitted.
E. Do not over pressurize the system under any circumstance. If the test pressure
is close to the maximum permissible pressure of any of the system components,
install calibrated pressure relief valves in the tested circuit.
F. Prior to testing keep all valves and control devices in open position. After
completion of pressure test, close each valve one at a time starting from the
pressure release end, so as to ensure tightness of the valve.
G. The piping shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 690 Kpa (100 psig) or
1.5 times the system working pressure, whichever is greater, but limited to 1034
Kpa (150 psig). The pressure shall be maintained for at least 4 hours.
H. Check for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue. Drop in pressure to the order of
10 Kpa (1.5 psig) per hour shall be considered as acceptable.
I. Piping shall be tested in segments during the progress of the work. Maintain an
official log book for recording the tests carried out on sections of piping,
including test pressure, date of test and approval signature of Engineer's
representative witnessing the test.
3.12
SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide the services of a competent engineer to supervise the commissioning of

all equipment and to train the Owner's personnel in all aspects of the same
during a five (5) working days period, in normal working hours. Allow for all costs
in connection with the above.
B. This shall only be done on completion of all tests to the Engineer's approval.
Give minimum one weeks written notice and obtain Owner's written consent prior
to such demonstrations.
3.13
GUARANTEE (defined in General Conditions as Defects Liability) AND

MAINTENANCE.
A. Refer to conditions of contract for requirements.

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
B. Allow for the following activities in respect of the complete system, for a period of
two calendar years from the date of substantial completion.
1.
Defect liability / breakdown maintenance, inclusive of replacement parts.
2.
Preventive maintenance as scheduled, inclusive of replacement parts,
water treatment chemicals and consumables.
3.
Attending to emergency situations, which may damage property or
endanger lives, even outside normal working hours.
C. Provide a written report to the Owner, detailing the maintenance work
performed; including dates, parts replaced etc.
D. The Owner's personnel shall be allowed to witness or participate (without
damageous interference) in the above activities.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Water Features
SECTION 13 1200.12
FOUNTAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labour, materials, plant, tools and equipment, and perform all
operations and services necessary for the supply and installation of fountains as
indicated on drawings:
1.
Provide complete fountain installation to include all mechanical, electrical,
grading, earth work, concrete, waterproofing and other work as required.
1.
Section 03 3000
Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2.
Division 22
Plumbing
3.
Division 26
Electrical
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications: Installer must be qualified who has had previous

experience doing this type of work. Submit a list of previous projects properly
identified.
B. Code: Comply with all applicable building, plumbing, and electrical codes.
1.03
GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee water feature equipment and installation for one year after final
acceptance.
1.04
OPERATIONS
A. Prior to substantial completion, demonstrate a 14 day, 8 hours per day automatic

operation.
B. Prior to substantial completion, make necessary arrangements with the
manufacturer of the fountain equipment to provide a skilled operation of the
fountain equipment.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
13 1200.12/1
Fountains
C. Provide three (3) complete operations manuals and equipment brochures neatly
bound in a hardback binder and a videotape of the training session.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit product data for products furnished under this Section.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit the following items:
1.
Thru-wall fittings
2.
Piping specialties
3.
Junction boxes and seals
C. Identify each piece of equipment by specification article number.
D. Submit shop drawings at a minimum of 1:25 scale newly prepared and not
reproduced from the Drawings. Show clearances of piping and conduits from
paving and concrete footings.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
13 1200.12/2
Fountains
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: Ref: Division 22.
2.02
ELECTRICAL : Ref. Division 26
2.03
REINFORCING STEEL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A. Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM Section A-615 Grade 40 with standard
deformations conforming to ASTM Section A-305
B. All miscellaneous hardware and fabricated metals required by these documents
shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with the Standard Specifications.
C. Stainless Steel finish shall be 316, finish - brushed #4.
2.04
AIR PLACED CONCRETE
A. Air placed concrete shall have a minimum of six (6.0) sacks of Type II Portland
cement per cubic yard, a maximum water/cement ratio to size (6.0), and a
minimum 28 day compressive strength of 28 Mpa.
2.05
FORM WORK/ CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE: Ref: Concrete Sections 03 1000 /

03 3000.
2.06
SAND BACKFILL
A. Clean bank run sand per Unified Soil Classification System Group SM or SC
compacted at Optimum Moisture - (-1%) to (+3%) to between 90 to 95 percent of
Maximum Density obtained by Standard Proctor Density Procedures (ASTM
D698).
2.07
GROUT
A. All epoxy grouting shall be performed with Five Star Epoxy Grout as
manufactured by FIVE STAR PRODUCTS, INC., 425 Stills on Rod, Fairfield, CT
06430. The grout shall be mixed and installed according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
2.08
FOUNTAIN OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT: ref to 13 1200 Water Features
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
13 1200.12/3
Fountains
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. Install and connect equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

and recommendations. Comply with NEC and UPC. Provide piping, valves and
connections recommended by manufacturer for proper operations. Coordinate
installation or related materials specified and drawn elsewhere.
B. Contractor shall supply waterstop protection for piping penetrating pool floor or
walls and fittings cast therein.
C. This installation shall comply with local plumbing codes.
3.02
ELECTRICAL Ref: Div 26
3.03
MECHANICAL Ref: 22
3.04
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
A. Form Work
1.
All form material and formwork shall be in accordance with acceptable
modern practice.
2.
The location of all expansion and construction joints not specifically shown
in the documents shall be approved by the Engineer prior to placing
reinforcing steel.
B. Reinforcing Steel and Miscellaneous Metals
1.
All reinforcing steel, anchor bolts, and other inserts shall be secured in
position and subject to inspection per local ordinances as required prior to
placing concrete.
2.
All conduit and pipe indicated as cast into concrete structures shall be
wired to adjacent reinforcing steel.
3.
All reinforcing steel shall be fabricated, shipped, stored, treated, and
placed in accordance with acceptable modern practice.
4.
All miscellaneous hardware and fabricated metals required by these
documents shall be primed and painted at the Architect's direction.
C. Precast Concrete
1.
All precast concrete structures shall be manufactured, shipped, stored,
and installed in accordance with standard industry practice.
2.
All joints between the various sections of a structure shall be watertight.
D. Air Placed Concrete
1.
Air placed concrete (Gunnite) shall be construction in accordance with the
best modern practices by a Contractor or Sub-contractor with a minimum
of three (3) years of experience.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
13 1200.12/4
Fountains
2.
Air placed concrete shall be placed in a manner consistent with the plans
in reference to thickness and finish. Care should be taken to minimize
rebound and overspray.
E. Cast in Place Concrete: Re: Section 03 3000

3.05
ADJUSTMENTS
A. Make necessary temporary and final adjustments for each system and piece of
apparatus installed, using factory trained technicians whenever necessary.
3.06
COORDINATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Fountain Construction must be coordinated between Contractor, the mechanical
engineer, and Landscape Architect.
C. Coordinate fountain installation with other trades including water supply,
irrigation, and sanitary and storm sewer connections.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
13 1200.12/5
Fountains
SECTION 14 2100
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A. Work Included: The specification included in this Section is intended to cover the
complete provision and installation of 123 Nos (122 nos. for Towers plus 1 No. for
Energy Center) of elevators (which includes gearless traction elevators and MRL
elevators as scheduled). All work and material necessary to accomplish this installation
in a complete and workmanlike manner, except that specifically excluded as Work by
Others, shall be provided. This work shall be done in accordance with the
requirements of local codes, which may govern the requirements of the installation.
B. Applicable requirements of the following sections of these specifications apply to all
works required under this section.
1.
Conditions of the Contract.
2.
Division 01 General Requirements of the Contract.
C. Work Installed, But Furnished by Others:
1.
A life safety, supervised all building paging speaker to be installed in each
elevator cab canopy.
2.
A sound-powered firefighters telephone jack to be installed in each elevator main
car operating station.
*3. Security Card (proximity type) Readers Interface and Computer: Card reader,
interface boards, security computer, monitor and keyboard for encoding,
overriding, and monitoring restricted access floors on selected Passenger
Elevators T1: EL01-EL05, T2: EL01-EL06, T3: EL01-EL07, T4: EL01-EL08 &
EL11, T5: EL01-EL05 & EL6-EL10, T6: EL01-EL06 and EL07-EL12 & EL15,
T7: EL01-EL08 & EL9-EL16, T8: EL01-EL06 and EL07-EL12 and T9: EL01-EL08
and Service/ Firefighters Elevators, T1: EL06 & EL07, T2: EL07 & EL08, T3:
EL08 & EL09, T4: EL09 & EL10, T5: EL11, T6: EL13 & EL14, T7: EL17 & EL18,
T8: EL13 & EL14, T9: EL09 & EL10 and Parking Elevators ELG1-ELG2, ELG3ELG6, ELG7-ELG10, ELG11-ELG14, Retail Shuttle Elevators G15-G16, G17G18, Handicapped Elevators H1-H3 and Energy Center Elevators
EC-EL-01. System compatible card readers shall be furnished and installed in
each of the listed elevators in the elevator main car operating stations and all
lobby floors (passenger elevators) with interface controllers and wiring to the
machine room junction boxes by the Elevator Contractor.
4.
Remote CCTV color monitors to display elevator cab camera signals and hook
up to coaxial trail cable run to machine room junction boxes. CCTV color
cameras shall be furnished in each of the listed elevators by the Elevator
Contractor.
D. Work or Items Furnished, But Not Installed:
1.
Passenger/Service Elevator cab protection pads (1 set/car/group).
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/1/R4
2.
3.
One print, one Mylar and one sepia of elevator maintenance manuals, operating
instructions, wiring diagrams and parts ordering manuals, and lubrication charts.
Alternately, a Windows compatible CD disc containing this information may be
provided.
Elevator operating keys (5 sets of each key).
E. No Elevator Company Cab Nameplates or Logos Shall be Exposed to Public View.

1.02
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with the Most-Stringent Requirements of the Following:

1.
International Building Code (IBC) 2007
2.
Applicable Local Building Laws
3.
Local Codes, Ordinances and Laws
4.
ASME A17.1-2007 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
5.
Elevator Inspectors Manual, ASME A17.2-2006
6.
National Electrical Code No. NFPA 70-2005
B. Permits: Obtain and pay for all local construction permits, commissioning inspections,
and the first years elevator operating permits.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Gearless Elevators: Fujitec (Japan), Hitachi (Japan), Mitsubishi (Japan), Otis
(USA), Schindler (Switzerland), Toshiba (Japan), Thyssen (Germany) Krupp
(Germany) or Kone (Finland).
a.
Elevator supplier shall be capable of providing maintenance service,
including adequate local parts inventory located within 10 kilometers of
the installation.
b.
Supplier shall be capable of providing 24-hour-a-day emergency service
and respond to trouble calls within 1-1/2 to 2 hours and passenger
entrapments within 30 minutes of notification.
c.
Supplier shall employ competent personnel, experienced in elevator
maintenance.
d.
Supplier shall perform all maintenance during specified maintenance
period and shall offer contract maintenance service to Employer.
Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred.
2.
Elevator Cab Enclosures: The Elevator Contractor, Brice-Southern, Hauenstein
& Burmeister or Tyler, as a Subcontractor to the Elevator Contractor. Other cab
suppliers must be approved by the employer.
3.
1 - 2 Hour Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrances: The Elevator Contractor, BriceSouthern, Hauenstein & Burmeister, or Tyler, as a Subcontractor to the Elevator
Contractor.
4.
Guarantee:
a.
The materials and workmanship of the elevator apparatus installed shall
comply in every respect with these specifications and any defects not due
to ordinary wear and tear, or improper use or care which may develop
within 1 year from date of final acceptance (issue of take over certificates)
and/or beneficial use of each individual elevator shall be corrected to the
satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost.
b.
The Elevator Contractor shall make any and all modifications, adjustments
and improvements to the elevator systems necessary to meet the
performance requirements specified in Part 2 of these specifications.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/2/R4
B. Equipment Country of Origin:

1.
The Elevator Supplier shall provide a list detailing the Country of Origin proposed
for their major gearless elevator components. Include hoist machines, power
conversion units, car and group dispatch controllers, dispatch, motor & motion
control software, elevator monitoring system and software, door operators,
governors, safeties, buffers, hoist ropes and rails.
1.04
SUBMITTALS AND SAMPLES
A. Within 60 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit a sepia (or Windows CD or
DVD ) and 3 copies of the shop drawings and required material for review. In general,
the following are required:
1.
Scaled Layouts: Equipment arrangement, entrances and car enclosures.
Provide drawings at the following scale: hoistway sections 1:50; hoistway shaft
details 1:33-1/3; hoistway and machine room plans 1:20; elevator cabs and
hoistway entrances 1:20; fixtures 1:10.
2.
Design Information: Indicate equipment lists, reactions, rail loads and stacking
plan, door weights, heat emissions, ride quality, and pertinent design information
on layouts.
3.
Power Confirmation Sheets: Include hp (kw), code letter, accelerating current,
full-load running current, demand factor and regenerative loads for applicable
motors and power conversion units.
4.
Finish Material: Submit samples per the Engineers requirements. Submit
three samples of the following: 30 cm x 30 cm materials and finishes exposed to
view; welded entrance frame detail, engraving (one word in each size); extruded
stainless steel car sill.
5.
Fixtures: Submit cuts and shop drawings and samples of all fixtures including
one of each of the following: each type of hall lantern; hall pushbutton; light
fixture; car operating panel; color LCD display screen; elevator monitoring CRT,
CPU and keyboard, etc.
6.
Certificates: Submit certificate of elevator performance with contract closeout
documents. After adjustments, test, and inspections are performed, forward
certificate signed by Elevator Manufacturer stating that the equipment and
controls provide the level of elevator service and ride qualities specified. Include
certification that elevator hoistway doors, frames, transom panels, hardware and
accessories comply with specified fire rating requirements.
1.05
MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall furnish:

1.
Preventative maintenance on all equipment described herein for a period of 24
months commencing on date of final acceptance and/or beneficial use by the
Employer of each elevator unit, including unlimited 24-hour emergency callbacks.
The maintenance shall include systematic examinations, adjustment, cleaning
and lubrication of all equipment. The Contractor shall also repair or replace
electrical and mechanical parts whenever required and shall use only genuine,
standard parts produced by the Manufacturer of the equipment installed.
Maintain elevator machine rooms, hoistways, and pits in clean condition.
2.
All maintenance work shall be performed by competent personnel under the
supervision and in the direct employment of the Contractor.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/3/R4
3.
4.
The Employer, at his option, may choose to delete this maintenance from the
capital contracts and to pay this amount in 24 equal installments directly to the
Contractor during the period in which the work is being accomplished.
Indicate the amount included for this maintenance on the contract bid form.
B. Interim:
1.
When one or more elevators have been installed to a stage near completion and
declared ready for service before the entire installation of all elevators has been
completed and accepted, the Employer may accept the interim elevators for use
and place them in regular service.
2.
During this period, the Employer may agree to pay the Contractor for a mutually
agreed amount per day per elevator for regular maintenance of elevators on
interim service. Bidders shall indicate the amount per unit with their bids.
3.
The maintenance and guarantee periods herein specified shall not commence for
units accepted on an interim basis or accepted and shut down due to lack of
need.
1.06
MOCK UP FACTORY VISIT
A. Cab mock ups: provide a cab mock up in the car enclosure manufacturing facility for
each type of passenger elevator to be provided. Include the travel costs for two
Employer Representatives plus two Design Architects to visit the facility (Business
Class Airfare for overseas travel) and view the cab mock ups. Required modifications to
the cabs shall be incorporated in the manufacture of all of the cabs without additional
cost to the Employer. The visit shall be of four days duration.
1.07
KEYS
A. Five sets of keys to operate all keyed switches and locks shall be furnished upon
completion. Keys shall be properly tagged. All keying shall be arranged with the
Employer.
1.08
HOISTING
A. All required hoisting and movement of elevator equipment shall be the responsibility of
the Elevator Contractor.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/4/R4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Manufacturers
1.
Otis
USA.
2.
Hitachi
Japan
3.
Schindler
Switzerland
4.
Mitsubishi
Japan
5.
Kone
Finland
6.
Fujitec
Japan
7.
Toshiba
Japan
8.
Thyssen Krupp
Germany
9.
Or Approved Equal
2.02
SUMMARY TRACTION ELEVATORS
A. TOWER 1 PASSENGER ELEVATORS:

Number of Cars:
5ea, Elevators 1-5, T1 (EL01-EL05)
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
2.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1
Supervisory Control:
Mitsubishi Sigma AI 2200

Fujitec Flex N 300 AIHitachi CIP 3800 AI
Otis Elevonic 411 AI
Schindler Miconic TX-AITP
Toshiba Command EJ 1000 FN
Kone TMS 9900GA
ThyssenKrupp TAC 50-03
All with artificial intelligence
dispatching capabilities
and
advanced
Controller and associated panels including all

software, keys, etc. to be non-proprietary.
Encoder:
Machine-room mounted, digitally pulsed type
Motor Control:
ACV3F with automatic leveling and digital closedloop motor feedback
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/5/R4
Power Converter:
I.G.B.T. converter/inverter regenerative drive

equipped with isolation transformers and EMI filter
network
Power Characteristics:
415 Volts, 3 Phase, 50 Hertz
Stops
1, 3 & 4:
14 Stops and openings in line
2 & 5:
Floors Served
1, 3 & 4:
GR, 2-14
2 & 5:
B1, GR, 2-14
Travel
1, 3 & 4:
65.5M
2 & 5:
69.5M
Platform Size:
2100 wide x 1750 deep x 2750 high (to car canopy)
Car Inside:
2000 wide x 1500 deep x 2550 high (to dropped

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
1100 wide x 2400 high
Entrance Type:
Single speed, center opening
Min. Hoistway Size Required:

1, 2 & 3:
7800 wide x 2410 deep for 3 lifts
4 & 5:
Door Operation:
High-speed, heavy-duty, closed-loop master ACV3F

door operator (minimum opening speed 0.750.90m/sec)
Door Protection:
Infrared, pulsed matrix proximity detectors with

variable timing feature and nudging
Machine:
Overhead gearless traction (ACV3F PMSM or

induction type)
Safety:
Flexible guide clamp (Type B), car only
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:
Oil, spring return with access ladders, inspection

platforms and blocking
Compensation:
Wire rope with pit sheaves
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/6/R4
Car Enclosures:
Mirror finish decorative (colour) stainless steel
Entrances:
Mirror finish decorative (colour) stainless steel at B1

& GR floors
SIGNALS
Registration Lights:
Car and hall pushbuttons (dual risers)

& GR floors
Stainless steel etching finish of choice at typical
floors
Position Indicators:
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):
Car (dual color LCD digital type), BMS Fire Safety

(Security) room and lobby panel
At all floors with adjustable-volume electronic chimes
(sound twice for down direction travel)
& GR floors
floors
Communication System:
Intercoms and distress signal system
Cab Video:
CCTV pinhole color camera and coaxial trail cables
Life Safety:
Sound powered telephone jacks, all building paging

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevators 1-5):
Upfall and unintended car movement protection

(individual, dual acting hoist machine emergency
brakes, counterweight safeties or hoist machine rope
brakes).
Car and counterweight roller guides
Car top inspection station
Emergency cab lighting with battery packs, chargers
and a test button
ADA Handicapped accommodations
Emergency operation (Firefighters Service) ASME
A17.1, Rule 2.27.3 Firefighters Service
Zone 2A Seismic designs and operations
Standby power transfer (automatic switching to
ground)
Dual car operating panels
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/7/R4
Hinged cab front return panels

Cab card reader (By Others) installation, trail cables
and interface box
Elevators EL02 & EL05: VIP/Priority service features
and lobby mounted card readers (By Others) to be
provided at all floors
Hoistway access switches
Independent service feature
Platform isolation
Load-weighing device (pre-dispatch and hall call
bypass)
False-call canceling
Conduits and remote wiring to control panels
Rail backing (as required)
Extruded or milled stainless steel car sills (narrow)
Hoistway sill support angles (groutless)
24-Month maintenance with 24-hour call-back
service
Extended pit depths to B3 level, buffer blocking
access ladders and work platforms
Full interactive elevator monitoring, control, and
security (E.M.S.) system
E.M.S. computer, color monitor and keyboard at
office reception lobby panel, BMS Fire (Security
Room) control panel and elevator machine room
Hoist machine, power converter and controller sound
isolation
*Card readers to be provided

*(The Elevator to operate as follows:
Card readers will be deactivated during normal office
hours and will be activated after office hours.
Card readers are considered in the low voltage
drawing and included in electrical contractor scope of
work)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/8/R4
As-built wiring diagrams, operating instructions,

maintenance instructions, parts ordering information,
and a lubrication chart
B. TOWER 1 SERVICE ELEVATOR:
Number of Cars:
1ea, Elevator T1 (EL06)
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
2.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1
Microprocessor based, simplex, selective collective

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3-B1, GR, P, 1-15
Travel:
80.1M
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Size:
1200 wide X 2400 high
Entrance Type:
Two speed, side opening
2500 wide x 2850 deep
Door Operation:

Door Protection:
Infrared, pulsed matrix, 3D proximity detectors with

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/9/R4
Compensation:
Car Enclosure:
Standard service elevator with rigidized No. 4

stainless steel finished interior and doors with a steel
shell and interior protection bumpers
Entrances:
Stainless steel doors and frames at all, bolted

construction (1.5-2.0 hour fire rating)
SIGNALS
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):
Car and hall pushbuttons

Car (multi-light digital type), BMS Fire Safety
At all floors with adjustable-volume, electronic
chimes (sound twice for down direction travel)
Intercoms and Distress Signal System
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

Sound powered telephone jack, all building paging
speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T1 EL06):
Up fall and unintended car movement protection

brakes).
and a test button
Emergency Operation (ASME A17.1, Rule 211.3
Firefighters Service)
Standby power transfer (stays on)
Recessed, single car operating panel with No. 4
stainless steel faceplate
Extended door hold open button
and interface box
Attendant service features
Platform isolation
Load-weighing device (hall call bypass)
Lobby and BMS Firefighters (Security) Control
Panels (Color LCD displays and keyboards)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/10/R4

3650 high doghouse in rear 1/3rd portion of cab
canopy
Full height, fire resistant, quilted cab protection pads
and pad hangers to cover cab front return panel,
side and rear cab walls
service
isolation

Card readers will be activated 24/7
work)
maintenance parts ordering information and a
lubrication chart.
C. TOWER 1 RETAIL SERVICE ELEVATOR:
Number of Cars:
1ea, Elevator T1 EL07 (Machine-room-less)
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
1.0 mps and opening
Roping:
1:1, 2:1 or 2:1 underslung
Microprocessor based, two stop collective

Encoder:
Hoistway room mounted, digitally pulsed type
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/11/R4
Stops:
Floors Served:
GR & Podium level
Travel:
6.75M
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:
Medium-speed, heavy-duty, closed-loop master

ACV3F door operator (minimum opening speed 0.450.75m/sec)
Door Protection:

nudging
Machine:
Machine-room-less (MRL) gearless traction (ACV3F

PMSM type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
None required
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS

Hall Lanterns:

Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T1 EL07):

brakes).
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/12/R4

and a test button
and interface box
Platform isolation
Lobby and BMS Firefighters (Security) control
panels (Color LCD displays and keyboards)
Extended pit depths to B3 level, buffer blocking,
service
security (E.M.S.) System
office lobby panel, BMS Fire (Security Room) control
reception panel and elevator machine room
isolation

work)
lubrication chart.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/13/R4
D. TOWER 2 PASSENGER ELEVATORS:

Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
2.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Fujitec Flex N 300 AI
Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Kone TMS 9900GA
and
advanced

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops
1, 3, 4 & 6:
2 & 5:

Floors Served
1, 3, 4 & 6:
2 & 5:
GR, 2-17
B1, GR, 2-17
Travel
1, 3, 4 & 6:
2 & 5:
77.5M
81.5M
Platform Size:
2100 wide x 1750 deep x 2750 (to car canopy)
Cabin Inside:
2000 wide x 1500 deep x 2550 (to dropped ceiling)
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
7800 wide x 2410 deep (2 sets of 3 lifts)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/14/R4
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevators 1-6):

brakes).
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/15/R4

and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
bypass)
service
Security (E.M.S.) System
office reception lobby panel, BMS fire (Security
room) control panel and elevator machine room
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/16/R4

isolation

work)
E. TOWER 2 SERVICE ELEVATOR:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
2.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Encoder:
Machine room mounted, digitally pulsed type
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3-B1, GR, P, 1-18
Travel:
92.1M
Platform Size:
Cabin Size:
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/17/R4

Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosure:
Entrances:
SIGNALS
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):
Cab Video:
Life Safety:
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T2 EL07):

speaker
brakes).
and a test button
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/18/R4
and interface box

Platform isolation
canopy
service
Full interactive elevator monitoring, Control, and
E.M.S. Computer, color monitor and keyboard at
isolation

work)
maintenance instructions, parts ordering information
and a lubrication chart.
F. TOWER 2 RETAIL SERVICE ELEVATOR:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
1.0 mps and opening
Roping:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/19/R4

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
GR & Podium level
Travel:
6.75M
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

ACV3F door operator (minimum opening speed 0.450.75m/sec)
Door Protection:

nudging
Machine:

PMSM type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
None required
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/20/R4
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T2 EL08):

brakes).
and a test button
and interface box
Platform isolation
service
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/21/R4

isolation

work)
lubrication chart.
G. Tower 3 Passenger Elevators:
Number of Cars:
7ea, Elevators EL01-EL07
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
3.5-4.0mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Kone TMS 9900GA
and
advanced

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:
I.G.B.T. converter/inverter regenerative drives

networks
Stops:
1, 3, 4, 5 & 7:
2 & 6:

Floors Served:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/22/R4
1, 3, 4, 5 & 7:
2 & 6:
GR, 2-20
B1, GR, 2-20
Travel:
1, 3, 4, 5, & 7:
89.50M+
2 & 6: 93.50M+
Platform Size:
Car Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
1100mm wide x 2400mm high
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
7800mm wide x 2410 deep for 3 lifts and

10395mm wide x 2410 deep for 4 lifts
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Flexible guide clamp (Type B only), car only
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Wire rope, lock down type
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS
Car and hall pushbuttons (single riser)

& GR floors
floors
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/23/R4
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevators EL01-EL07):

brakes).
and a test button
Zone 2A seismic designs and operations
ground)
and interface box
and lobby mentioned card readers (By Others) to be
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/24/R4
Platform isolation
bypass)
service

* (The Elevator to operate as follows:
work)
isolation
H. Service Elevator Tower 3
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
2.5mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/25/R4

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

networks
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3 B1, GR, P, 1-21
Travel:
104.1M+
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Size:
1200mm Wide X 2400mm High
Entrance Type:
Two Speed Side Opening
Hoistway:
2500mm wide x 2850mm deep
Door Operation:
High-Speed, Heavy-Duty, Closed-Loop Master

ACV3F Door Operator (Minimum Opening Speed
0.75-0.90m/Sec)
Door Protection:

Machine:
Overhead Gearless Traction (ACV3F PMSM or

Induction Type)
Safety:
Flexible Guide Clamp (Type B Only), car only
Guide Rails:
Planed Steel Tees
Buffers:
Oil, Spring return with access ladders, inspection

Compensation:
Wire Rope and Pit Sheaves
Car Enclosure:
Standard service elevator with rigidized No.4

Entrances:

Signals
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/26/R4

(Security) Room and Lobby Panel
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

Cab Video:
CCTV Pinhole Color Camera and Coaxial Trail

Cables
Life Safety:
Sound Powered Telephone Jack, All Building Paging

Speaker
Additional Features
(Elevator T3 EL08):

brakes).
Car and Counterweight Roller Guides
Car Top Inspection Station
Emergency Cab Lighting with Battery Packs,
Chargers and a Test Button
Zone 2A Seismic Designs and Operations
Standby Power Transfer (stays on)
Recessed, single car operating panel with No.4
Cab Card Reader (By Others) installation, Trail
cables and interface Box
Hoistway Access Switches
Independent Service Feature
Attendant Service Features
Platform Isolation
Load-Weighing Device (Hall Call Bypass)
False-Call Canceling
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/27/R4

Panels (Color LCD Displays and Keyboards)
Conduits and Remote Wiring to Control Panels
Rail Backing (As Required)
canopy
Extruded or Milled Stainless Steel Car Sills (Narrow)
Hoistway Sill Support Angles (groutless)
24-Month Maintenance with 24-Hour Call-Back
Service
Full Interactive Elevator Monitoring, Control, and
E.M.S. Computer, Color Monitor and Keyboard at
office reception Lobby Panel, BMS Fire (Security
Room) Control Panel and Elevator Machine Room
Hoist machine, Power Converter and Controller
Sound Isolation

work)
As-Built Wiring Diagrams, Operating Instructions,
Maintenance parts ordering information and a
lubrication chart
I. Tower 3 Retail Service Elevator:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
1.0 mps and opening
Roping:

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/28/R4
Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
GR & Podium level
Travel:
6.75M
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

ACV3F door operator (minimum opening speed
0.45-0.75m/sec)
Door Protection:

nudging
Machine:

PMSM type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
None required
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/29/R4

Hall Lanterns:

Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T3 EL09):

brakes or hoist machine rope brakes).
and a test button
and interface box
Platform isolation
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/30/R4

service
isolation

work)
lubrication chart.
J. Tower 4 Passenger Elevators:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
3.5-4.0mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Kone TMS 9900GA
and
advanced

Encoder:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/31/R4
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

networks
Stops:
1, 3, 4, 5, 7 & 8:
2 & 6:
Floors Served:
1, 3, 4, 5, 7 & 8:
GR, 2-23
2 & 6:
B1, GR, 2-23
Travel:
1, 3, 4, 5, 7 & 8:
101.50M+
2 & 6:
105.50M+
Platform Size:
Car Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
10395mm wide x 2410 deep (2 sets of 4 lifts)
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/32/R4
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES

brakes).
and a test button
ground)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/33/R4

and interface box
Platform isolation
bypass)
service
isolation

work)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/34/R4

K. Tower 4 Service Elevator:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
2.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3-B1, GR, P, 1-24
Travel:
116.10M+
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/35/R4
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS

Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T4 EL09):

brakes).
and a test button
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/36/R4

and interface box
Platform isolation
canopy
service
isolation

work)
lubrication chart.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/37/R4
L. Tower 4 Retail Service Elevator:

Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
1.0 mps and opening
Roping:

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
GR & Podium level
Travel:
6.75M
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

0.45-0.75m/sec)
Door Protection:

nudging
Machine:

PMSM type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/38/R4
Compensation:
None required
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS

Hall Lanterns:

Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T4 EL10):

and a test button
and interface box
Platform isolation
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/39/R4

service
isolation

work)
lubrication chart.
M. Tower 4 - Handicapped Passenger Lift:
Number of Cars:
1ea, Elevator EL11 (Machine-room-less)
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
1.0 mps
Roping:
Microprocessor based, simplex selective collective

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/40/R4
Encoder:
Digitally pulsed type
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
G, P & M
Travel:
12.5M
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size -
Entrance Type:
Min. Hoistway Size:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

PMSM or Type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:
Mirror finish decorative (colour) stainless steel at GR

floor
SIGNALS

& GR floors
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/41/R4

floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

floor
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator EL11):

and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
Load-weighing device (overload and hall call bypass)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/42/R4
service
Full Interactive elevator monitoring, control, and
lobby panel, BMS Fire (Security Room) control panel
and elevator machine room
Machine, power converter and controller sound
isolation

work)
N. Tower 5 Passenger Elevators (Low-Rise Zone):
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
2.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1
Mitsubishi Sigma AI 2200Fujitec Flex N 300 AI

Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Kone TMS 9900GA
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/43/R4

and
advanced

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops
1, 3 & 5:
2 & 4:
Floors Served
1, 3 & 5:
GR, 2-15
2 & 4:
B1, GR, 2-15
Travel
1, 3 & 5:
69.5M
2 & 4:
73.5M
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Hoistway 1, 3 & 5:
2 & 4:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/44/R4
Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES

brakes)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/45/R4

and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Elevators EL02 & EL04:
VIP/Priority service
features and lobby mounted card readers (By
Others) to be provided at all floors
Platform isolation
bypass)
service
isolation
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/46/R4

work)
O. Tower 5 Passenger Elevators (High-Rise Zone):
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
3.5-4.0 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Kone TMS 9900GA
and
advanced

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops
6, 8 & 10:
7 & 9:
6, 8 & 10:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
GR, 15(t), 16-26

14 2100/47/R4
7 & 9:
B1, GR, 15(t), 16-26
Travel
6, 8 & 10:
113.50M+
7 & 9:
117.50M+
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Hoistway
6. 8 & 10:
7 & 9:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/48/R4
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES

brakes).
and a test button
ground)
and interface box
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/49/R4
Platform isolation
bypass)
service
isolation

work)
P. TOWER 5 SERVICE ELEVATOR:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
2.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/50/R4

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3-B1, GR, P, 1-27
Travel:
128.1M+
Entrance Size:
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/51/R4

Hall Lanterns (Prediction Type): At all floors with adjustable-volume, electronic

Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T5 EL11):

brakes).
and a test button
and interface box
Platform isolation
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/52/R4

canopy
service
isolation

work)
and lubrication chart.
Q. Tower 6 Passenger Elevators (Low-Rise Zone):
Number of Cars:
6ea, Elevators 1-6, T6 EL07-EL12
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
2.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/53/R4
Kone TMS 9900GA

and
advanced

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops
7, 9, 10 & 12:
8 & 11:

Floors Served
7, 9, 10 & 12:
8 & 11:
GR, 2-18
B1, GR, 2-18
Travel
7, 9, 10 & 12:
8 & 11:
81.5M
85.5M
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
7800 wide x 2410 deep (2 sets of 3 Lifts)
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/54/R4
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES

brakes)
and a test button
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/55/R4

ground)
and interface box
Elevators EL08 & EL011: VIP/Priority service
Platform isolation
bypass)
service
isolation

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/56/R4

work)
R. Tower 6 Passenger Elevators (High-Rise Zone):
Number of Cars:
6ea, Elevators, T6 EL01-EL06
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
3.5-4.0 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Kone TMS 9900GA
and
advanced

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops
1, 3, 4 & 6:
2 & 5:
Floors Served
1, 3, 4 & 6:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
GR, 18(t), 19-29

14 2100/57/R4
2 & 5:
B1, GR, 18(t), 19-29
Travel
1, 3, 4 & 6:
125.50m+
2 & 5:
129.50m+
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors

Hall Lanterns
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/58/R4
(Prediction Type):

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES

brakes).
and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/59/R4

bypass)
service
isolation

work)
S. Tower 6 Service Elevator:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
2.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/60/R4

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3-B1, GR, P, 1-30
Travel:
140.1M+
Entrance Size:
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/61/R4


Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T6 EL13):

brakes).
and a test button
and interface box
Platform isolation
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/62/R4

canopy
service
isolation

work)
T. Tower 6 Retail Service Elevator:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
1.0 mps and opening
Roping:

Encoder:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/63/R4
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
GR & Podium level
Travel:
6.75M
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

0.45-0.75m/sec)
Door Protection:

nudging
Machine:

PMSM type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
None required
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/64/R4
Hall Lanterns:

Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T6 EL14):

and a test button
and interface box
Platform isolation
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/65/R4

service
isolation

work)
lubrication chart.
U. Tower 6 - Handicapped Passenger Lift:
Number of Cars:
1ea, Elevator EL15 (Machine-room-less)
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
1.0 mps
Roping:

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
G, P & M
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/66/R4
Travel:
12.5M
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size -
Entrance Type:
Min. Hoistway Size:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

PMSM or Type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

floor
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

floor
floors
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/67/R4
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T6 EL15):

and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
service
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/68/R4

isolation

work)
V. TOWER 7 PASSENGER ELEVATORS (LOW-RISE ZONE):
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1600kg
Speed:
3.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Kone TMS 9900GA
and
advanced

Encoder:
Motor Control:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/69/R4
Power Converter:

network
Stops
1, 3, 4, 5, 6 & 8:
2 & 7:

Floors Served
1, 3, 4, 5, 6 & 8:
2 & 7:
GR, 2-13, 14, 15-23

B1, GR, 2-13, 14, 15-23
Travel
1, 3, 4, 5, 6 & 8:
2 & 7:
101.5M
104.5M
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/70/R4

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevators 1-8):

brakes)
and a test button
ground)
and interface box
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/71/R4

Platform isolation
bypass)
service
isolation

work)
W. TOWER 7 - PASSENGER ELEVATORS (HIGH-RISE ZONE):
Number of Cars:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/72/R4
Capacity:
1600kg
Speed:
6.0 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Kone TMS 9900GA
and
advanced

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops
9, 11, 12, 13, 14 & 16:
10 & 15:

Floors Served
9, 11, 12, 13, 14 & 16:
10 & 15:
GR, 23(t), 24-34, 36-45

B1, GR, 23(t), 24-34, 36-45
Travel
9, 11, 12, 13, 14 & 16:
10 & 15:
189.5M
193.5M
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/73/R4
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevators 9-16):
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/74/R4

brakes).
and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
bypass)
service
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/75/R4

isolation

work)
X. TOWER 7 SERVICE ELEVATOR:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
3.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3-B1, GR, P, 1-45
Travel:
204.1M
Entrance Size:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/76/R4
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS

Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T7 EL17):
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/77/R4

brakes).
and a test button
and interface box
Platform isolation
canopy
service
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/78/R4

isolation

work)
Y. TOWER 7 RETAIL SERVICE ELEVATOR:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
1.0 mps and opening
Roping:

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
GR & Podium level
Travel:
6.75M
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/79/R4
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

0.45-0.75m/sec)
Door Protection:
Infrared, pulsed matrix proximity detectors with 3.0

nudging
Machine:

PMSM type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
None required
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS

Hall Lanterns

Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T7 EL18):

brakes).
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/80/R4

and a test button
and interface box
Platform isolation
service
Hoist machine, power converter and controller
sound isolation

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/81/R4

work)
lubrication chart.
Z. Tower 8 Passenger Elevators (Low-Rise Zone):
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
2.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Kone TMS 9900GA
and
advanced

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops
1, 3, 4 & 6:
2 & 5:
Floors Served
1, 3, 4 & 6:
GR, 2-17
2 & 5:
B1, GR, 2-17
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/82/R4
Travel
1, 3, 4 & 6:
77.5M
2 & 5:
81.5M
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/83/R4

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES

brakes)
and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
bypass)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/84/R4

service
isolation

work)
AA. Tower 8 Passenger Elevators (High-Rise Zone):
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
3.5-4.0 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Kone TMS 9900GA
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/85/R4

and
advanced

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops
7, 9, 10 & 12:
8 & 11:

Floors Served
7, 9, 10 & 12:
8 & 11:
GR, 17(t), 18-27

B1, GR, 17(t), 18-27
Travel
7, 9, 10 & 12:
8 & 11:
117.50M+
121.50M+
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/86/R4
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES

brakes).
and a test button
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/87/R4

ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
bypass)
service
isolation

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/88/R4

work)
BB. Tower 8 Service Elevator:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
2.5 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3-B1, GR, P, 1-28
Travel:
132.1M+
Entrance Size:
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/89/R4
Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS


Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T8 EL13):

brakes).
and a test button
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/90/R4

and interface box
Platform isolation
canopy
service
isolation

KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/91/R4

work)
CC. Tower 8 Retail Service Elevator:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
1.0 mps and opening
Roping:

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
GR & Podium level
Travel:
6.75M
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

0.45-0.75m/sec)
Door Protection:

nudging
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/92/R4
Machine:

PMSM type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
None required
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS

Hall Lanterns:

Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevator T8 EL14):

and a test button
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/93/R4

and interface box
Platform isolation
service
isolation

work)
lubrication chart.
DD. Tower 9 Passenger Elevators:
Number of Cars:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/94/R4
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
3.5-4.0mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Kone TMS 9900GA
and
advanced

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

networks
Stops:
1, 2, 4, 5, 6 & 8:
3 & 7:
Floors Served:
1, 2, 4, 5, 6 & 8:
GR, 2-24
3 & 7:
B1, GR, 2-24
Travel:
1, 2, 4, 5, 6, & 8:
105.5M+
3 & 7:
109.5M+
Platform Size:
Car Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/95/R4
Hoistway:
10395mm wide x 2410 deep for 4 lifts and 10395mm

wide x 2410 deep for 4 lifts
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

& GR floors
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

& GR floors
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/96/R4

brakes).
and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
bypass)
service
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/97/R4

isolation

work)
EE. Service Elevator Tower 9
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
2.5mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

networks
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3 B1, GR, P, 1-25
Travel:
120.10M+
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/98/R4
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Size:
1200mm Wide X 2400mm High
Entrance Type:
Two Speed Side Opening
Hoistway:
Door Operation:

0.75-0.90m/Sec)
Door Protection:

Machine:
Overhead Gearless Traction (ACV3F PMSM or

Induction Type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed Steel Tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosure:
Standard service elevator with rigidized No.4

Entrances:

Signals

(Security) Room and Lobby Panel
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

Cab Video:

Cables
Life Safety:

Speaker
Additional Features
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/99/R4
(Elevator T9 EL09):

brakes).
Standby Power Transfer (stays on)
Recessed, single car operating panel with No.4
Cab Card Reader (By Others) installation, Trail
cables and interface Box
Attendant Service Features
Platform Isolation
Load-Weighing Device (Hall Call Bypass)
canopy
Hoistway Sill Support Angles (groutless)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/100/R4

Service
office reception Lobby Panel, BMS Fire (Security
Room) Control Panel and Elevator Machine Room
Hoist machine, Power Converter and Controller
Sound Isolation

work)
Maintenance parts ordering information and a
lubrication chart
FF. Tower 9 Retail Service Elevator:
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1800kg
Speed:
1.0 mps and opening
Roping:

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
GR & Podium level
Travel:
6.75M
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/101/R4
Platform Size:
Car Inside:
Entrance Size:
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

0.45-0.75m/sec)
Door Protection:

nudging
Machine:

PMSM type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
None required
Car Enclosure:

Entrances:

SIGNALS

Hall Lanterns:

Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/102/R4
(Elevator T9 EL10):

and a test button
and interface box
Platform isolation
service
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/103/R4

isolation

work)
lubrication chart.
GG PODIUM PARKING SHUTTLE ELEVATORS (ELG3-ELG6):
Number of Cars:
4 Elevators ELG3-ELG6 (Machine-room-less)
Capacity:
1600kg
Speed:
1.75 mps
Roping:
Microprocessor based, group automatic

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3-B1, GR, P & 1
Travel:
23.1M
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size -
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
12050 wide x 2200 deep (for 4 units)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/104/R4
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

PMSM or Type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

floor
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

floor
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevators ELG3 ELG6): Up fall and unintended car movement protection (individual,
dual acting hoist machine emergency brakes,
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/105/R4
counterweight safeties or hoist machine rope

brakes).
and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
service
isolation
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/106/R4

work)
HH. PODIUM PARKING SHUTTLE ELEVATORS (ELG7-ELG10):
Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1600kg
Speed:
1.75 mps
Roping:

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3-B1, GR
Travel:
10.75M+
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size -
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/107/R4
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

PMSM or Type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

floor
SIGNALS

floor
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

floor
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevators ELG7 ELG10):
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/108/R4
brakes
or hoist machine rope brakes).
and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
service
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/109/R4
isolation

work)
II.
PODIUM PARKING SHUTTLE ELEVATORS (ELG11-ELG14):

Number of Cars:
Capacity:
1600kg
Speed:
1.75 mps
Roping:

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3-B1, GR
Travel:
10.75M+
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size -
Entrance Type:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/110/R4
Hoistway:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

PMSM or Type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

floor
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

floor
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevators ELG11-ELG14): Up fall and unintended car movement protection (individual,
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/111/R4
dual acting hoist machine emergency brakes

and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
service
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/112/R4
isolation

work)
JJ. PARKING BUILDING ELEVATORS
Number of Cars:
2 Elevators # EL-G1 EL-G2 (Machine room les)
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
1.75 mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1
Microprocessor based, duplex, selective collective

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:
I.G.B.T. Converter/Inverter regenerative drives

networks
Stops:
Floors Served:
B3 B1, GR, M, LCL, UCL, Mechanical
Travel:
about 23.3M+/-
Platform Size:
Cabin Size:

ceiling)
Entrance Size -
1100mm Wide x 2400mm High
Entrance Type:
Single Speed, Center Opening
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/113/R4
Hoistway:
Door Operation:

0.75-0.90m/Sec)
Door Protection:

Machine:
Machine-room-less (MRL)
(ACV3F PMSM or Type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed Steel Tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

floor
Gearless
Traction
SIGNALS

floor
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

floor
floors
Cab Video:

Cables
Life Safety:

Speaker
Additional Features
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/114/R4
(Elevators EL-G1-EL-G2):

Standby Power Transfer (Automatic Switching to
Ground)
Dual Car Operating Panels
Hinged Cab Front Return Panels
Cab Card Reader Installation, Trail Cables and
Interface Box
Platform Isolation
Load-Weighing Device (Overload and Hall Call
Bypass)
Hoistway Sill Support Angles
Service
Lobby Panel, BMS Fire (Security Room) Control
Panel and Elevator Machine Room
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/115/R4
Machine, Power Converter and Controller Sound

Isolation

work)
Maintenance
KK. RETAIL SHUTTLE PASSENGER ELEVATORS (G15-G16):
Number of Cars:
2 Elevators G15-G16 (Machine-room-less)
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
1.0 mps
Roping:

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
GR, P & M
Travel:
12.5M
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size -
Entrance Type:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/116/R4
Hoistway:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

PMSM or Type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

floor
SIGNALS

floor
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

floor
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevators G15-G16):
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/117/R4

brakes).
Emergency cab lighting with battery packs,
chargers and a test button
ground)
Cab card reader (By Others) installation, trail
cables and interface box
Platform isolation
Load-weighing device (overload and hall call
bypass)
service
lobby panel, BMS Fire (Security Room) control
panel and elevator machine room
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/118/R4

isolation

work)
maintenance instructions, parts ordering
information and a lubrication chart
LL. RETAIL SHUTTLE PASSENGER ELEVATORS (G17-G18):
Number of Cars:
2 Elevators G17-G18 (Machine-room-less)
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
1.0 mps
Roping:

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
GR, Mezzanine & Podium
Travel:
6.75M+
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size -
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/119/R4
Entrance Type:
Hoistway:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

PMSM or Type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

floor
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

floor
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/120/R4
(Elevators G17-G18):

brakes
and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
service
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/121/R4

isolation

work)
MM. HANDICAPPED PASSENGER LIFT (H1-H3):
Number of Cars:
3 Elevators, H1-H3 (Machine-room-less)
Capacity:
1350kg
Speed:
1.0 mps
Roping:

Encoder:
Motor Control:
Power Converter:

network
Stops:
Floors Served:
G, P & M
Travel:
12.5M
Platform Size:
Cabin Inside:

ceiling)
Entrance Size -
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/122/R4
Entrance Type:
Min. Hoistway Size:
Door Operation:

Door Protection:

Machine:

PMSM or Type)
Safety:
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Compensation:
Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

floor
SIGNALS

& GR floors
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

floor
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
(Elevators H1-H3):
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar

14 2100/123/R4
brakes).
and a test button
ground)
and interface box
Platform isolation
service
isolation
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/124/R4

work)
NN PASSENGER ELEVATOR: EC-EL-01 (ENERGY CENTRE)
Number of Cars:
1 Elevator
Capacity:
1000kg
Speed:
1.0mps
Roping:
1:1 or 2:1

Fujitec Flex N300 AI
Hitachi CIP 3800 AI
Schindler Miconic TX AITP
Toshiba Command EF 1000 FN
Kone TMS 9900GA
and
advanced

Encoder:
Machine-roomless, digitally pulsed type
Motor Control:
Power Converter:
I.G.B.T. Converter/Inverter regenerative drives

networks
Stops:
Floors Served:
B2, G, M
Travel:
About 12.15M+
Platform Size:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
To Suit
14 2100/125/R4
Car Inside:
About 1700 Wide X 1400 Deep X 2175 High (to

dropped ceiling)
Entrance Size:
1000 Wide X 2200 High
Entrance Type:
Door Operation:

door operator (minimum opening speed 0.750.90m/Sec)
Door Protection:

Machine:

induction type)
Safety:
Flexible guide clamp (Type B only), car and

counterweight
Guide Rails:
Planed steel tees
Buffers:

Car Enclosures:
Entrances:

floor
SIGNALS

floor
floors
Hall Lanterns
(Prediction Type):

floor
floors
Cab Video:
Life Safety:

speaker
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/126/R4
Additional Features
(Elevator 1):

brakes).
and a test button
Emergency operation (ASME A17.1, Rule 211.3
ground)
Cab card reader installation, trail cables and
interface box
Platform isolation
bypass)
Hoistway sill support angles
service
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/127/R4

isolation

work)
As-Built wiring diagrams, operating instructions,
2.03
PERFORMANCE
A. Speed: 3% under any loading condition or travel direction.

B. Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold up to 125% of the rated load
C. Stopping Accuracy: 6 mm under any car loading condition.
D. Door Times: The door opening time shall be measured from the instant the doors start
to open until they are in the fully open position.
E. The door closing times shall not be less than those permitted by the ASME A17.1 Code,
Rule 112.4 and the kinetic energy of the hoistway door and all parts rigidly connected
thereto (includes the sum of the weights of the hoistway and car doors and related
parts) computed for the average closing speed shall not exceed 12J. The force
necessary to prevent closing of the hoistway door or car door from rest shall not exceed
13.5 kilograms.
The door opening times shall meet the indicated times and the door closing times
shall approximate the following:
DOORS
ELEVATOR
S
W
TYPE
DOOR
OPENING
TIME
(SECONDS)
DOOR
CLOSING
TIME
(SECONDS)
T1(EL01EL05)
1.5
2.4
2400
2SSO T1(EL06)
2.3
5.4
1200
2400
2.3
5.4
1100
2100
2SSO T1(EL07)
T2(EL01CO
EL06)
1.5
2.4
1200
2400
2SSO T2(EL07)
2.3
5.4
1200
2400
2SSO T2(EL08)
2.3
1100
2100
1200
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
CO
14 2100/128/R4
5.4
DOORS
ELEVATOR
S
DOOR
OPENING
TIME
(SECONDS)
DOOR
CLOSING
TIME
(SECONDS)
TYPE
1100
2400
CO
T3(EL01EL07)
1.5
2.4
1200
2400
2SSO
T3(EL08)
2.3
5.4
1200
2400
2SSO
2.3
5.4
1100
2400
CO
T3(EL09)
T4(EL01EL08)
1.6
2.4
1200
2400
2SSO
T4(EL09)
2.3
5.4
1200
2400
2SSO
T4(EL10)
2.3
5.4
1000
2200
CO
1.5
2.4
1100
2400
CO
1.6
2.4
1100
2400
CO
T4(EL11)
T5(EL01EL05)
T5(EL06EL10)
1.6
2.4
1200
2400
2SSO
1100
2400
CO
1100
2400
1200
2.3
5.4
1.6
2.4
CO
T5(EL11)
T6(EL07EL12)
T6(EL01EL06)
1.6
2.4
2400
2SSO
T6(EL13)
2.3
5.4
1200
2400
2SSO
T6(EL14)
2.3
5.4
1000
2200
CO
T6(EL15)
T7(EL01EL08)
T7(EL09EL16)
1.5
2.4
1.6
2.7
1.6
2.7
1200
2100
CO
1200
2100
CO
1200
2400
2SSO T7(EL17)
2.3
5.4
1200
2400
2.3
5.4
1.6
2.4
1.6
2.4
1100
2400
1100
2400
2SSO T7(EL18)
T8(EL01CO
EL06)
T8(EL07CO
EL12)
1200
2400
2SSO
T8(EL13)
2.3
5.4
1200
2400
2SSO
2.3
5.4
1100
2400
CO
T8(EL14)
T9(EL01EL08)
1.6
2.4
1200
2400
2SSO
T9(EL09)
2.3
5.4
1200
2400
2SSO
T9(EL10)
2.3
5.4
CO
PK1-PK4
1.5
2.4
1100
2100
1000
2400
CO
PK5-PK8
1.5
2.4
1000
2400
CO
PK9-PK12
1.5
2.4
1100
2400
CO
ELG1-ELG2
1.6
2.4
1100
2400
CO
G17-G18
1.6
2.4
1100
2100
CO
H1
1.5
2.4
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/129/R4
DOORS
ELEVATOR
S
W
1000
2100
TYPE
DOOR
OPENING
TIME
(SECONDS)
EC-EL-01
DOOR
CLOSING
TIME
(SECONDS)
1.6
2.4
F. Floor-to-Floor Time: Floor-to-floor time shall be measured from the instant the doors
start to close at one floor until the car is level and stopped at the next floor. Doors shall
not be more than 3/4 open (1/2 open on Service Elevators) before the car is level and
stopped. These performance times shall be obtainable with dependable, consistent
operation without undue wear or stress on the equipment and without excessive
maintenance. The elevator shall provide a comfortable ride with smooth acceleration,
retardation and a soft stop. The time for the elevators to travel from floor to floor under
any loading condition shall not exceed the following:
TYPICAL
FLOOR
MEASURE AT TIME
ELEVATORS
HEIGHT
FLOORS
(SECONDS)
T1(EL01-EL05)
4.0M
2-15
8.5
T1(EL06)
4.0M
2-15
9.2
T1(EL07
6.75M
GR & P
16.3
T2(EL01-EL06)
4.0M
2-18
8.5
T2(EL07)
4.0M
2-18
9.2
T2(EL08)
6.75M
GR & P
16.3
T3(EL01-EL07)
4.0M
2-20
8.5
T3(EL08)
4.0M
2-21
9.2
T3(EL09)
6.75M
GR & P
16.3
T4(EL01-EL08)
4.0M
2-23
8.5
T4(EL09)
4.0M
2-24
9.2
T4(EL10)
6.75M
GR & P
16.3
T4(EL11)
3.3M
G, P & M
13.0
T5(EL01-EL05)
4.0M
2-15
8.5
T5(EL06-EL10)
4.0M
16-26
8.5
T5(EL11)
4.0M
1-27
9.2
T6(EL07-EL12)
4.0M
2-18
8.5
T6(EL01-EL06)
4.0M
19-29
8.5
T6(EL13)
4.0M
1-30
9.2
T6(EL14)
6.75M
GR & P
16.3
T6(EL15)
3.3M
G, P & M
13.0
T7(EL01-EL08)
4.0M
2-13, 15-23
8.5
T7(EL09-EL16)
4.0M
24-34, 36-45
8.5
T7(EL17)
4.0M
2-45
9.2
T7(EL18)
6.75M
GR & P
16.3
T8(EL01-EL06)
4.0M
2-17
8.5
T8(EL07-EL12)
4.0M
18-27
8.5
T8(EL13)
4.0M
1-18
9.2
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/130/R4
ELEVATORS
TYPICAL
FLOOR
HEIGHT
MEASURE AT TIME
FLOORS
(SECONDS)
T8(EL14)
6.75M
GR & P
16.3
T9(EL01-EL08)
4.0M
2-24
8.5
T9(EL09)
4.0M
1-25
9.2
T9(EL10)
6.75M
GR & P
16.3
3.3M
B3-B1
9.8
PK5-PK8
3.3M
B3-B1
9.8
PK9-PK12
3.3M
9.8
ELG1-ELG2
3.3M
B3-B1, GR
B3-B1, GR, M,
LCL, UCL,
MECHANICAL
9.8
G17-G18
6.75M
GR, M & P
16.3
H1
3.3M
B3-B1
13.0
EC-EL-01
3.8M
B2-M
8.9
PK1-PK4
G. System-Response Time: The group passenger system-response times for the indicated
group Elevators as measured by registration of hall calls, shall meet the following criteria
during any 15-minute period of the day with all passenger elevators in group service:
1.
Office Passenger Elevators (T1: EL01-EL05, T2: EL01-EL06, T3: EL01-EL07,
T4: EL01-EL08, T5: EL01-EL05 & EL06-EL10, T6: EL01-EL06 & EL07-EL12, T7:
EL01-EL08 & EL09-EL16, T8: EL01-EL06 & EL07-EL12 and T9: EL01-EL08)
a.
Average system-response time shall not exceed: 20 Seconds
b.
Percent of all hall calls registered shall be answered within 30 seconds:
>75%
c.
>98%
d.
>99-100%
The system response time requirements are based upon not more than 150 office hall
calls being registered within each 15 minute period. The system-response time for
service at floors not served by all group elevators shall not be included in the verification
of system-response time performance.
At the completion of the project, and when the passenger elevator group office floors
and hotel guest floors are at least 70% occupied, the Elevator Contractor shall record
each elevator groups system response time and submit the results to the elevator
consultant for verification.
2.04
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
A. All elevator equipment (including hoist machines, deflector sheaves, power conversion
units and support equipment) shall be mechanically isolated from the structure and
electrically isolated from the building power supply and each other to prevent noise and
vibration being transmitted to occupied area of the building.
B. Passenger Elevator equipment shall be designed, installed and adjusted to meet the
performance requirements of Part 2 within the following parameters.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/131/R4
1.
2.
3.
Horizontal acceleration (postwise and front to back) within cars during all riding
and door operating conditions shall not exceed 8-10mg peak-to-peak in the 1-10
Hz range.
Acceleration and deceleration shall be constant and shall be at least 1.0m/sec2
and not exceed 1.4m/sec2 on the gearless elevators with an initial ramp between
0.5 and 0.75 second.
Sustained jerk shall be a minimum of 1.5m/sec3 and not exceed 1.8m/sec3.
C. Measured noise levels relating to elevator equipment and its operation shall not exceed
50-60 dBA in the elevator machine rooms and lobbies and 65 dBA in elevator cars
under any condition including door operation and cab exhaust blower on highest speed.
2.05
MATERIALS
A. Steel: Low carbon, cold rolled to stretcher leveled standard flatness per ASTM A366 for
sheet, ASTM A36 for structural.
B. Stainless Steel: Type 304 with No. 4 brushed directional finish on exposed surfaces per
ASTM A167, as specified and indicated on the architectural drawings. Grain of belting
in direction of longest dimension or as indicated on the Engineers drawings.
C. Aluminum: Extrusions per ASTM B221; sheet and plate per ASTM B209.
D. Paint: All exposed metal work furnished under this section, except as otherwise noted,
shall be cleaned of oil, grease, scale and other foreign matter and factory painted 1
shop coat of Manufacturers standard rust-resistant primer. After erection, provide one
finish coat of industrial enamel paint. Galvanized metal exposed inside of the hoistway
or in the machine room need not be painted (except as noted). Field paint and touch up
any ferrous metal that is exposed or welded during construction or installation.
E. Prime Finish: Clean all surfaces receiving a baked enamel finish of oil, grease, scale,
etc. Apply one coat of rust-resistant mineral paint followed by a filler coat over uneven
surfaces. Sand smooth and apply final coat of mineral paint.
F. Baked Enamel: Prime per E above. Apply and bake three additional coats of enamel
in the solid color and finish as selected by the Engineer.
2.06
OPERATION
A. Operational Control: (The various systems specified hereafter shall be provided for
each elevator/group per the equipment summaries.)
1.
Microprocessor-Based, Single Automatic Pushbutton Specified Elevators:
Elevator shall operate without an attendant from buttons in the car and at each
landing. When the car is idle with the doors closed and with no call registered,
activating a hall button at another floor shall automatically call the car to that
floor. Registration on the hall call button at the landing where the car is standing
shall cause the doors to automatically open. Registration of any hall call shall
illuminate in use lights in each station and prevent registration of another call
until the elevator trip has been completed.
Provide an adjustable time interval after the doors have opened to allow
registration of a car call. If a car call has not been registered at the end of this
time interval, the system shall be free to accept another call.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/132/R4
2.
Microprocessor-Based, Simplex Selective Collective - Specified Elevators:

Elevator shall operate without an attendant from buttons located at each floor
and in the car. The registration of a hall call, when the car is idle, shall
automatically start the elevator and dispatch it to the corresponding floor. If a call
is registered at the floor where the car is idle, the doors shall automatically open.
Once the direction of travel has been established, the car will not reverse
direction until all car calls have been answered or until all hall calls, ahead of the
car and corresponding to the direction of car travel, have been answered.
The car shall slow down and stop automatically at floors corresponding to
registered calls, in the order in which they are approached in each direction of
travel. As slowdown is initiated for a hall call, that call shall be automatically
canceled and the hall button for that direction of travel remain ineffective until the
car leaves the floor. Car calls shall be similarly canceled. The car shall remain
at the arrival floor an adjustable time interval to permit passenger transfer.
The car shall only answer calls corresponding to the direction in which the car is
traveling except that it may answer a call in the opposite direction if that call is
the highest (or lowest) call registered.
Registration of a call shall cause the appropriate button to illuminate. When the
call is answered, the light shall go out.
3.
Microprocessor-Based, Duplex Selective Collective Specified Elevators:

Elevators shall operate without attendants from buttons in each car and at each
floor. With two cars in service and no calls registered, one car shall normally park
at the service level entry floor (home car). The other car shall park where last
used (free car). Registration of a hall call above the entry floor or a car call in
the free car shall cause that car to start and begin operation.
When a car has been started, it shall respond to calls registered for the direction
of its travel in the order in which the floors are reached. Once the direction of
travel has been established, the car will not reverse direction until all car calls
have been answered or until all hall calls, ahead of the car and corresponding to
the direction of car travel, have been answered.
Cars shall slow down and stop automatically at floors corresponding to registered
calls, in the order in which they are approached in each direction of travel. As
slowdown is initiated for a hall call, that call shall be automatically canceled and
the hall button for that direction of travel remain effective until the elevator leaves
the floor. Car calls shall be similarly canceled. The car shall remain at the arrival
floor an adjustable time interval to allow passenger transfer.
When the free car is clearing calls, the home car shall respond to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
A call registered on the home car buttons.

An up hall call registered below the free car while the free car is traveling
up.
An up or a down call registered above the free car while the free car is
traveling down.
A hall call registered and the free car is delayed in its normal operation for
a predetermined period.
14 2100/133/R4
When both cars are clearing calls, only one car shall stop in response to
any registered hall call. The first car to clear its calls shall return to the
main floor and become the home car. Should the last service required ring
both cars to the main floor, the car that arrived first shall become the free
car.
Registration of a call shall cause the appropriate button to illuminate.
When the call is answered, the light shall go out.
Lower basement or parking level calls shall be answered by the home
car unless the free car is parked at the floor where the call occurs. If no
car is parked at the main level, the first down traveling car shall answer
the lower parking level call. Stops shall not be made at the main floor by
cars traveling to or from lower parking level stops unless there are calls
registered for service at that floor.
4.
Group Supervisory Control System (3 or more group elevators) Specified

Elevators (Passenger Operation):
a.
Provide each passenger elevator group with a microprocessor-based
group dispatch, car control and motor control system per the equipment
summaries with the following minimum features hereafter described.
b.
System shall be adaptive and continually calculate the estimated time of
arrival for each car to each prospective car and hall call before they are
registered. The system shall operate to meet changing traffic conditions
on the basis of demand, but dispatch from the bottom terminal landing
may be used when traffic is predominantly in the up direction. As traffic
demands vary, the supervisory system shall automatically and continually
scan the status, direction, and location of each call, location and travel
direction of each car, assign the best car to the call and provide for any
changes in the method of dispatching to provide the most-effective means
of handling the building traffic conditions. System shall include means to
scan for coincidental or contiguous car and hall calls, to sense long wait
hall calls and preferentially serve them, accomplish direction reversal
without closing and reopening doors, and minimize the group average
system-response times. Only one car shall respond to a registered hall
call.
c.
Heavy-Up Traffic: An available car at the lower dispatch terminal shall be
selected and its up signal illuminated. Doors shall remain open an
adjustable time for loading. As the doors begin to close on this selected
car, its up signal shall be extinguished and the signal of the next car
illuminated. A car that becomes almost fully loaded shall be dispatched in
advance of its normal loading time. Dispatching interval may be
measured from the departure of the previous car. Cars shall not be
dispatched unless demand for service exists. Cars shall respond to up
calls on the up trip and automatically stop and reverse at the floors
corresponding to the highest car call or down hall call registered. Cars
shall stop for down hall calls when returning to the terminal, except that
provision shall be made to express a car to the lower dispatch terminal if
no car is available there for a predetermined time.
d.
Heavy-Down Traffic: Cars arriving at the lower dispatch terminal shall
illuminate their up signal and remain at the terminal for only the same
length of time as described for intermediate floors. Cars shall be
dispatched from the terminal without regard to sequence and without
interval between cars. Once started from the terminal, cars shall respond
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/134/R4
5.
to car calls and up hall calls, reverse at assigned high call and return to
the lower dispatching terminal, stopping for car calls and down hall calls
on the downward trip. Spacing of cars to equalize service shall be
accomplished by continually scanning and updating the system.
e.
Two-Way Traffic-Balanced or fluctuating Heavier in Either Direction:
Elevators shall respond on demand during balanced traffic. Cars may be
spaced by a priority system relating to various types of demand, which
may develop. Dispatching of cars shall take place from landings where
they become available without the necessity of traveling to the terminal.
Parked cars shall be capable of responding to assigned calls in either
direction of travel. Assignment of calls and dispatching of cars to meet
demands for service shall be done in a manner, which provides equitable
service to all floors and minimizes system-response times.
f.
Intermittent or Light Traffic: Dispatching shall be arranged so that any car
or cars may be used when traffic demands are light. Cars shall park at
random or at their last stop when no demand exists. Parked cars shall
have their doors closed and be available to respond to calls. As traffic
develops during an intermittent period, elevators shall operate and be
dispatched on demand. Only one car shall respond to any particular call.
During light traffic, it shall not be necessary for cars to travel to terminals
for spacing or dispatching.
g.
Auxiliary Dispatching: A backup dispatch system shall be provided should
the car selection or dispatching system fail. The cars shall leave the
dispatching terminals without regard to sequence or regular intervals and
proceed to answer registered calls in normal sequence and manner (not if
firefighters return features have been activated).
Other Items:
a.
Anti-Nuisance Feature-Passenger Elevators: In the event car loading or
operation is not commensurate with the number of car calls registered
(when the elevator is in automatic operation), all maliciously registered car
calls for that elevator or deck shall be automatically canceled.
b.
Load Weighing-Passenger Elevators: Provide under platform mounted
micro switches or strain gages or crosshead-mounted strain gages for
weighing the passenger load in each elevator when the are in automatic
operation. Design the control system to provide dispatching in advance of
normal intervals and to provide landing call bypass when the car is filled to
approximately 50% of full-capacity load. Settings shall be individually
adjustable from 50-70% of full load.
c.
Artificial Intelligence Systems: Include one or more of the following
artificial intelligence approaches to maximizing the interfloor traffic
performance and reducing the number of long wait calls for a given
group of elevators:
1)
A long term learning function that records traffic patterns in the
building on a hard disk over at least a week of operation. It shall
make use of this information by positioning cars at floors at certain
times of the day when heavy traffic is anticipated, by minimizing
stops by inferring likely traffic patterns and arrival/ departure rates
at different floors during different times of the day. The system
shall reduce the probability of long wait calls during heavy periods
of traffic, etc.
2)
Incorporates neutral network, fuzzy logic type rule sets in an expert
system rule base. Provide a short term learning function and a
knowledge base of predicted traffic patterns and car movements.
3)
A destination hall call registration system that anticipates traffic
demands before they occur.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/135/R4
4)
d.
e.
Contractor shall supply full details of his preferred approach to

these requirements with his bid response.
Stopping Accuracy: An automatic 2-way stopping and leveling device
shall be provided, designed to govern the stopping accuracy of the car to
within 6 mm above or below the landing sill. This operation shall be
effective to avoid overtravel, as well as undertravel, of the car and
maintain the stopping accuracy regardless of the load in the car, direction
of travel, rope slippage or stretch.
Remote Monitoring and Diagnostics: Equip each car controller and the
group dispatch logic controller with standard ports, interface boards, and
drivers to accept maintenance, data logging, and fault finding diagnostic
computers, keyboards, modems, and programming tools. The system
shall be capable of driving remote color LCD monitor(s) that continually
scan and display the status of each car and call. Provide each group with
a full, interactive elevator monitoring (EMS) system.
B. Independent Service: Provide controls for operation of each elevator from car buttons
only. Under this operation door closing shall be initiated by activating the desired
destination floor button or the door close button.
C. Attendant Service Feature:
1.
Provide controls so that Elevators, T1: EL06, T2: EL07, T3: EL08, T4: EL09, T5:
EL11, T6: EL13, T7: EL17, T8: EL13 AND T9: EL09 can be automatically
selected by the EMS system for simplex or duplex, selective collective
dispatching and sequencing with an attendant on board. Under this operation,
the attendant shall control the door closing and the car starting; he shall also be
capable of overriding, but not canceling, registered hall calls and the selected
travel direction. Door closing operation shall be controlled by the attendant by
applying constant pressure to the start button located in the car service panel.
Once the doors are closed, the car shall proceed to the assigned landing where
the doors shall automatically open. During attendant operation, the car door
protective devices (infrared light rays), door open button, nudging circuits, false
call canceling circuits and automatic bypass circuits shall be inoperative.
2.
A car shall become available in the up direction when it has its doors open and
there are no car calls or up hall calls registered ahead of it. The doors of an
available car shall remain open. When a car is available at a floor above the
ground floor, its hall lantern shall not be illuminated or both the up and down
lantern lights shall be continuously activated indicating that the car is available.
3.
When the car is to be assigned to a demand by the group supervisory control
system, the start signal (chime) and demand light (up or down) in the car station
shall be activated to notify the attendant that the car has been assigned to a
demand. When ready, he shall then initiate the car starting by pressing the start
button. The attendant may bypass registered hall calls by pressing the pass
button located in the car service panel. Once established, the by-pass operation
shall remain effective until the car makes its 1st stop. To continue by passing
registered hall calls, the attendant must press the pass button after each stop.
4.
The intended direction of car travel shall be automatically selected by the
supervisory control system. However, the attendant shall be able to reverse the
selected direction of travel by momentarily pressing either the up or down
buttons located in the car service panel and then activating the start button.
5.
When on attendant service, the hall lanterns and hall pushbuttons shall operate
in the normal manner.
D. Door Operation-Passenger Operations: Doors shall open automatically when the car
arrives at a floor to permit the transfer of passengers. When another car is at the lobby
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/136/R4
floor terminal and is loading for departure or upon expiration of a timed interval, the
doors shall close until the arriving car is designated for loading. In the event a
passenger has entered the elevator, before it is assigned for dispatching, the doors shall
reopen upon registration of a call on the car button or by pressing the door open button.
If no other car is at the terminal, an arriving car shall have its doors open until the car is
dispatched or expiration of a timed interval with no demand. Equip the car doors with
pre-opening circuits so that the doors are about 3/4 open when the elevator is level at
the landing.
E. Door Operation Service Elevators:
1.
Doors shall open automatically when the car arrives at a floor to permit egress of
passengers and carts. After the timed interval, the doors shall automatically
close. Equip the car doors with pre-opening circuits so that the doors are
approximately 1/2 open when the elevator is level at the landing.
2.
Provide selective door operations for elevators equipped with front and rear
openings.
3.
Include an extended door hold open button in the main car operating panel to
extend the door hold open time (10-20 seconds, time to be adjustable thru the
E.M.S. keyboard) to facilitate cart transfers when the elevator is on automatic
service. Registration or re-registration of a car call shall cancel the hold open
time.
F. Door Operation Freight Elevator: Open doors automatically when car arrives at a floor.
Control door closing by using constant-pressure buttons in car and at each floor.
Provide passenger sequence operation and selective, front and rear door operation on
doors and car gates.
G. Motor Control: The closed-loop, digital type, ACV3F motor feedback control system
shall be suitable for the operation specified. The microprocessor-based motor control
system shall continually calculate, or compare, the ideal speed curve based upon a
minimum acceleration/deceleration value of 1.0 meters per second and incorporate a
digital signal feedback reference pattern and a digital car position count so that the
ideal-speed curve is exactly duplicated regardless of the car load, machine room
temperature, or hoist rope stretch. The system shall be capable of providing smooth,
comfortable acceleration, retardation and dynamic braking and limiting the difference in
speed full load and no load to not more than 3% of the contract speed.
H. Emergency Features:
1.
Firefighters Service: Equip the elevators with control system to operate and
recall the cars during a fire or other emergency condition per ASME A17.1-2004,
Section 2.27.3. Provide terminals on the controller for connection of signal from
sensors provided in other sections of the work. Operation shall be similar on all
elevators and visual/audible signal shall operate until return is complete or
automatic operation restored. Provide the designated level and alternate return
level sequencing per the Local Fire Authority Requirements.
2.
Emergency Cab Lighting and Emergency Alarm Unit: Car-mounted or machine
room mounted battery unit including solid-state charger and testing means
enclosed in common metal container. Battery to be rechargeable nickel
cadmium, lead acid, or gel-cell type with a 10-year minimum life expectancy.
Mount the emergency call bell on each car top. Locate emergency bulbs (2
bulbs minimum) above the cab dropped ceiling so that the unit is not readily
visible from the cab interior but gives sufficient intensity to provide at least 50 lux
measured at a height of 1 meter above the cab floor. Alternately, if incandescent
cab interior lights are provided as a part of the cab design, illuminate two of these
bulbs during an emergency lighting condition. Locate an emergency lighting test
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/137/R4
3.
button in the car service panel. A main line power failure or pressing the test
button shall illuminate the emergency lighting bulbs.
Standby Power Transfer: In the event of normal power failure, adequate standby
power shall be supplied through normal feeders to start and run Elevators T1:
EL06, T2: EL07, T3: EL08, T4: EL09, T5: EL11, T6: EL12, T7: EL17, T8: EL12 &
T9: EL09, EC-EL-01 full time, plus additional power to run one passenger
elevator, per group, at rated speed. Provide controls to automatically start and
run the cars nonstop to the designated terminal, one car at a time. E.M.S.
selection controls shall also be provided in the command center panel so that
any alternate group elevator may be selected to run continually. Under either
mode of operation, only one elevator per group and the designated service
elevators T1: EL06, T2: EL07, T3: EL08, T4: EL09, T5: EL11, T6: EL12, T7:
EL17, T8: EL12 & T9: EL09 & EC-EL-01shall be running on standby power at a
time. Provide standby power to run the elevator E.M.S. system, the intercom
system and all cab lights, exhaust blowers and emergency call bells.
I. Car-to-Lobby Switches: Provide a switch or E.M.S. keyboard operations for each

elevator in the command center control panel to return the car to the lobby floor.
Activating the switch (control) shall cause the car to return to the lobby floor while
bypassing hall calls but answering registered car calls en route.
J. Security System: Provide means to limit elevator access to selected tower floors. The
security shall function as follows:
1.
Computer input commands may be entered into the interactive elevator
monitoring system (E.M.S.) keyboard located in the command center console to
prevent registration of car calls to any selected floor on the elevators, when they
are in normal operation.
2.
The Elevator Contractor shall install proximity type card readers (provided by
Other Trades) in the elevators as specified in Equipment Summary 2.1 cab main
operating panel and security system interface controllers in the machine room
car controllers listed. Hook up the readers and the interface controllers to enable
properly encoded cards accepted by the cab readers to override selected floor
blocks initiated in the E.M.S. system and permit car call registration. Provide all
required elevator interface boards, junction boxes wiring and installation to form a
complete system.
3.
Elevators will serve all floors when on independent service irrespective of floor
security status.
4.
System shall be arranged so that firefighters operation controls shall override
floor security blockouts.
5.
When on the security mode, the hall lantern for restricted floors shall operate
normally when the car arrives at a level and the elevator is in automatic
operation.
K. VIP/Priority Service Features: Provide passenger elevators T1: EL02 & EL05, T2: EL02
& EL05, T3: EL02 & EL06, T4: EL02 & EL06, T5: EL02 & EL04 and EL07 & EL09, T6:
EL08 & EL11 and EL02 & EL05, T7: EL02 & EL07 and T7: EL10 & EL15, T8: EL02 &
EL05 and EL08 & EL11 and T9: EL03 & EL07 with a VIP/Priority Service feature, to
operate as follows:
1.
The Elevator Contractor shall install proximity type card readers (provided by
Other Trades) in the elevator loading lobbies at levels.
2.
When an encoded proximity card is presented at a lobby reader, and authorized
by the VIP System software, the elevator group dispatcher shall select one of the
VIP/Priority elevators (the hall lantern lights for that floor shall repeatedly cycle)
to express directly to the hall call lobby and open its doors. Upon boarding the
designated elevator, the VIP person shall enter their floor destination on the car
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/138/R4
3.
4.
5.
6.
call pushbutton, which shall cause the elevator doors to immediately close, the
hall lantern shall extinguish, and the designated car to express directly to the
selected destination floor, while bypassing any registered, group hall calls
enroute. Upon arrival at the selected destination floor, the elevator doors shall
open, permitting the VIP person(s) to exit. After a timed interval, the elevator
doors shall close and the car shall then revert to normal, group automatic
operation.
If the selected VIP elevator is dispatched to a VIP hall call request, the doors
open and no car destination call is registered within a fixed time (adjustable
between 5-15 seconds) the elevator doors shall close, the hall lantern shall
extinguish, and the car shall revert back to normal group automatic operation.
The operating status (enabled/disabled) of each hall card reader shall be
activated thru the EMS computer. LED type status indicators, green for enabled
and red for disabled, shall be included in the card reader faceplate.
The proximity cards provided shall be encoded thru the building security system
and shall be capable of receiving up to 5 levels of VIP hierarchal information,
including express service to and from B1 only, express service to one floor only,
express service to all floors, multiple express service stops, etc.
The VIP/Priority service feature shall be rendered inoperative during firefighters
service activations.
L. Sound-Powered Telephone Jack: Install a sound-powered telephone jack (provided by

the Life Safety Contractor) and wiring in each elevator car. The system shall provide for
2-way communications between all of the stations with the wiring terminating at each
machine room car controllers junction box.
2.07
MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT
A. Arrange equipment in machine rooms. Provide identifying numbers on machine, powerconversion unit, controller, data concentrator and main line and auxiliary disconnect
switch.
B. Geared Traction Hoist Machine:
1.
Worm geared traction type with motor, brake, gear, drive shaft, deflector sheave,
rope guards, and gear case mounted in proper alignment on an isolated
bedplate. Provide blocking to elevate deflector sheave above machine room
floor.
2.
Provide a direct drive, digital, closed-loop velocity encoder on hoist machine.
3.
Provide hoist machine drip pans to collect lubricant seepage.
4.
Provide dual, double independently operated disc or drum brakes to meet the
up-fall elevator protection requirements.
5.
(MACHINE AT THE SIDE, if used) Provide machine bedplate mounted deflector
sheave A-frame and/or supporting steel beams, and fastenings to mount
deflector sheaves to building structure to take up and side pull actions associated
with this equipment. Provide minimum 16-gauge easily removable sheet metal
closures in wall opening around machine between the machine room and
hoistway.
C. Gearless Traction Machine:
1.
ACV3F induction or P.M.S.M. gearless traction type motor with brake (dual,
independently operated emergency brakes), drive sheave and deflector sheave
mounted in proper alignment on a common, isolated bedplate. Machine shall
have sealed ball or roller bearings and meet testing requirements without
external cooling appurtenances. Single-wrap, traction hoist machine drive
sheaves with V grooves shall be provided with friction reducing liners or be
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/139/R4
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
equipped with a minimum of 6 ea., 13mm diameter or larger hoist ropes. Provide
blocking to elevate secondary or deflector sheave above machine room floor.
Isolate the machine or bedplate and the deflector sheave from the building
structure in order to minimize noise vibration transmission into occupied area of
the building.
Provide ACV3F induction motors with thermostatically operated cooling blowers,
shrouds and mounting means.
Provide a direct drive, digital, closed-loop velocity encoder on hoist machine.
Provide dual, double independently operated disc or drum brakes to meet the
up-fall elevator protection requirements.
Hoist machine installations, which require blockouts through machine room, floor
for other than hoist ropes shall be provided with a 14-gage galvanized sheet
metal smoke closures over entire blockout on underside of floor slab.
D. Power Conversion and Regulation Units: Provide solid-state, alternating current

variable voltage, variable frequency (ACV3F) I.G.B.T. converter/inverter drives. The
units shall be designed to limit current, suppress noise and prevent transient voltage
feedback into the building power supply. Provide internal heat sink cooling fans for the
power drive portion of the converter panels. Isolate unit from the building structure to
minimize noise and vibration transmission. Provide each unit with isolation
transformers, line filters, noise filter networks, and choke inductors, as required. The
Elevator Contractor shall be responsible for all required corrections to suppress solidstate converter noises (audible and vibratory), radio frequency interference in unit, or
eliminate regenerative voltage transients induced into main line feeders or the standby
power generator. All gearless ACV3F drives shall be regenerative and utilize dynamic
braking during an overhauling condition. Supplement direct-current power for the
operation of the hoist machine brake, door operator, dispatch logic processors, and
signal fixtures, etc., shall be supplied from separate, static power supplies.
E. Encoder: Encoders shall be provided and mounted in the machine room. The encoders
shall be the solid-state, optical, digital-count type, mechanically coupled to the car via a
slotted tape with drive sheaves and a pit-tensioning sheave or driven from the car
governor. Optical, inductive pulse, or mechanical cam-type tape encoders or rail
friction encoders mounted in the hoistway shall not be used on the gearless elevators
(except M.R.L. units).
F. Controller: Cabinet type, with removable doors or drawers and adequate ventilation
fans to dissipate heat complying with NEC Code Article 110-16(a) working clearances,
shall be provided. Wire to identified terminal block studs. Identifying symbols or letters
identical to those on wiring diagrams permanently marked adjacent t each component
on the controller. Provide the proper ampere rating marked adjacent to all fuse holders.
Each car controller, the group dispatch controller and data concentrator panels (if
provided) shall be equipped with plug compatible diagnostic ports, system monitoring
ports, and remote LCD drivers and plugs. Provide the dispatch controller or data
concentrator panel with a 56k modem and data card for the remote monitoring
telephone line connections.
G. Security and VIP Service Interface Cabinet: Provide for all elevators equipped with hall
lobby VIP Service and on board security card readers. The cabinet shall contain all
interface terminals and the elevator interface computer boards, including:
1.
Card reader interface (6 shielded wiring pairs per card reader/elevator).
2.
Card reader control mode (1 shielded wiring pair per card reader/elevator).
3.
Floor select button enable (1 shielded pair per floor or multiplexed/zone per card
reader/elevator).
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/140/R4
4.
Emergency stop pushbutton monitoring, if provided (1 shielded pair per card

reader/elevator).
H. Templates, Forms, Sleeves and Guards: All templates, forms and sleeves for providing
necessary openings in the concrete slab over the hoistway shall be provided as part of
this work. Sleeves for conduit and other small holes shall project 25mm above the
concrete slab. Provide 25mm steel angle guards around hoist cables, governor ropes,
encoder tapes, or duct slots that penetrate the machine room slab. Provide approved
rope and smoke guards for sheaves and cable machine room slab penetrations.
I. Machine Beams: Provide structural steel beams required for support of the elevator
machine, secondary sheave, overhead sheaves, governors and dead-end hitches.
Provide bearing plates, anchors, shelf angles, blocking, etc., to support beams and
equipment. Elevator Contractors shall provide special slab support shelf angles welded
into the webs of their machine beams, if required, to support the machine room slab and
decking. Cope the machine beams and weld them to the building support steel, as
required by the Structural Engineer for proper load transfer.
J. Governor: Centrifugal type, car and counterweight driven, machine room mounted with
pull-through jaws. Provide 2 bi-directional electrical shutdown switches and any
overhead supports required which are additional to building structure.
K. Tie Down Bolts and Templates: Provide for securing the basement or offset mounted
geared hoist machine, if used, into the building monolithic, concrete tie down pad or
structure.
2.08
HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
A. Guide Rails: Steel T-section suitable for travel, car and counterweight weighs, seismic
accelerations and support locations at structural floors. Provide rail backing,
intermediate counterweight tie brackets, divider beams and hoistway inserts, if
necessary, to meet ASME A17.1 Code requirements and the specified ride qualities.
NOTE: Only those supports indicated on the structural drawings will be provided by
Other Trades. The Elevator Contractor shall be responsible for any additional divider
beams, rail supports, brackets or attachments.
B. Buffers: Oil type with any blocking, supports, and permanent inspection ladders and
platforms (required where the car and/or counterweight buffer oil inspection port is
located 2.0m or more above the pit floor). Provide reduced stroke buffers if required, to
meet the minimum code overhead requirements.
C. Sheaves: Machined grooves with ball or roller bearings. Provide mounting means to
machine beams, machine bedplate, car and counterweight structural members, etc.
Provide drip pans under 2:1, overhead, and defector sheaves, rope guards on drive,
compensation, 2:1 and all secondary sheaves. Provide car top and counterweight 2:1
sheaves with removable top metal dust covers and guards. Provide lock down
compensation pit embedment items and support channels.
D. Governor and Encoder Pit-Tensioning Sheaves: The sheaves shall be mounted to pit
support members or the rails and provided with guides or pivot points to enable free
vertical movement.
E. Compensation Gearless Elevators: Rope type (lock down type on elevators with speeds
greater than 3.5mps or with travels in excess of 100M) with pit-tensioning sheaves.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/141/R4
Provide electrical contacts on tension sheave to stop elevator on sheave over or under
travel.
F. Compensation Geared or MRL Elevators: Encapsulated whisperflex chain type, if
required, equipped with pit guide wheels. Pad hoistway/pit areas where compensation
may strike car or hoistway items.
G. Counterweight: Channel construction, steel channel frame with metal filler weights, and
two subweight retainer rods that pass through all subweights and the counterweight
crosshead, guided by four sets of roller guide shoes. Each roller guide shall have three
rollers of a diameter sufficient to limit the rotational speed to less than 1000 r.p.m.
1.
Provide bolted type seismic counterweight retainer plates on the top and bottom
of each counterweight frame.
H. Counterweight Safety: Per Code. Provide on all elevators with occupied spaces
below their pits or for upfall protection as indicated in the Equipment Summary 2.1.
I. Counterweight Guard: Metal guard around counterweight in pit, per code.
J. Hoist and Governor Ropes:
1.
8 x 19 or 8 x 25 seale construction traction steel type; use 13mm minimum
diameter for all hoist ropes.
2.
Governor rope to suit Manufacturers governor specification.
3.
Fasten with adjustable shackles.
4.
2:1 roping dead-end hitches shall be provided with dampening springs.
5.
Provide self contained hoist rope brakes for upfall/unintended car movement
protection, if required.
K. Normal and Final Terminal Stopping Devices: Per Code. Provide emergency terminal
slowdown devices, if required, to meet the minimum Code overhead and pit depth
requirements.
L. Electrical Wiring:
1.
Conductors: Solid or stranded copper throughout with individual wires coded and
all connections on identified studs or terminal blocks. Use no splices or similar
connections in wiring except at terminal blocks, control cabinets, junction boxes
or condulets. Provide 10% spare conductors throughout. Flexible conduit shall
not be used on flat portions of the car top.
2.
Conduit, Etc.: Painted or galvanized steel and duct. Conduit size shall be 13mm
minimum. Flexible conduit exceeding 45cm in length or mounted on flat portions
of the car top shall not be used. Flexible heavy-duty service cord, Type SO, may
be used between fixed car wiring and car door protection light matrix junction
boxes.
3.
Traveling Cables: Flame and moisture-resistant outer cover. Include 6 sets of
shielded communication wires and car lighting circuits from machine room to car
connection points. Prevent traveling cables from rubbing or chafing against
hoistway or car items. Traveling cables exceeding 30m in length shall be
supported with steel internal messenger wires. Provide a continuous vertical
strip of wire cloth between the cables and hoistway items. Provide each set of
traveling cables with 10% spare conductors and 4 spare sets of shielded pairs
and a coaxial or dedicated CCTV monitor cable(s).
M. Entrance Equipment, Horizontal Opening Doors:
1.
Door Hangers: 2-point suspension with upthrust adjustment. Hanger rollers
shall be equipped with polyurethane insert tires; no metal-to-metal contact
permitted.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/142/R4
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Door Tracks: Bar or formed, cold-drawn steel with smooth hanger contact
surface. Tracks shall be removable for replacement.
Interlocks: Type operable without retiring cam. Provide fire-resistant wiring,
NEC, Type SF-2 or equivalent.
Closers: Spring, spirator, or weighted type attached to the entrance struts (door
mounted weights not acceptable).
Relating Cables: Provide between door panels, include stainless steel aircraft
cord, swaged fasteners, sheaves and adjustment clips.
Provide the emergency hoistway access doors located in the express run
portions of the hoistways (where provided) with electrical contacts and closers
per ASME A17.1, Rule 110.1.
N. Entrance Equipment, Vertical Sliding Up or Bi-Parting Doors:

1.
Door Guide Tracks: Continuous steel angles or formed steel tracks fastened to
hoistway door jamb.
2.
Door Guide Shoes: Iron machined shoes. Four shoes per door panel, with not
less than 65mm lateral contact per shoe.
3.
Door Interlocks: Provide type operable with retiring cam.
4.
Access: Means to open doors manually from lobby side when interlock is in
locked position. Provide unlocking device with pull chain under lockable satin
finish stainless steel cover.
O. Pit Access Ladders and Stop Switch: Provide steel vertical pit access ladders down
from the bottom landing in all pits not provided with walk in doors. Provide pit with an
emergency stop switch per code.
P. Floor Numbers: Provide painted 10cm high fire floor numbers within the hoistway per
ASME A17.1 Code, Rule 2.29.2.
2.09
HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. Summary: Provide complete entrances with the clear dimensions and finishes indicated
bearing 1 hour 2.0 hour UL fire labels, per the equipment summaries.
B. Frames: No. 14 U.S. gage steel welded and mitered construction. (Note: All entrances
must be provided with steel frames).
C. Door Panels: No. 16 U.S. gage steel with 2 removable, fire type gibs located 300mm on
center per panel. Doors with heights greater that 2.10m shall be constructed with
interlocking stiffening ribs. Providing all door panels with top and bottom fire safety
retainer clips that mesh with the entrance jambs when in the closed position per ASME
A17.1 Code Rule 2.11.11.8.
D. Sight Guards: Same material and finish as door panels.
E. Transoms: Provide fire rated flush transoms and offset, sheet type transoms at
indicated openings.
F. Sill: Extruded or formed stainless steel at the ground floor lobbies. Extruded aluminum
sills at all other floors. Provide and install groutless steel sill support angles for all
entrance sills.
G. Fascia, Toe Guards, Dust and Hanger Covers: No. 14 U.S. gage furniture steel with
Manufacturers standard dark color enamel finish.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/143/R4
H. Struts and Headers: Provide for necessary support of entrances and related material.
Provide door open rubber bumpers on each entrance support strut.
I. Vertical Sliding Up or Bi-parting Freight Door Panels: 2.0mm formed steel plates welded
into frame angles. Provide with wire glass vision panels, a non crushing safety
astragal, and truckable sills. Provide telescoping upper section or pass type doors as
required.
J. Vertical Sliding Up or Bi-parting Cover Frames: Hollow metal, bolted, fabricated from not
less than 1.5mm stainless steel material to form a one-piece unit covering the steel
channel frames.
K. Provide hoistway blind (express run) fire rated access doors, frames, door locks,
closers, interlocks and wiring located on minimum 11.0m vertical centers, on specified
elevators.
L. Coordination: Provide information to Painting Subcontractor on prime finish used on
hoistway entrances and use of compatible products for final painting.
2.10
CAR EQUIPMENT
A. Car Frame: Welded or bolted steel channel construction.

B. Car Safety Device: Type B, flexible guide clamp type; type.
C. Platform: Isolated type, constructed entirely of steel; surface regularity classification
Class A freight loading.
D. Guide Shoes: Roller type with 3 or more sound-deadening rollers per shoe. Maximum
rotation speed, 350rpm up to speeds of 5.0mps.
E. Floor Covering:
1.
Passenger Elevators: 20mm thick inset Stone or granite set with thinset mortar,
on a 13 or 19mm, marine plywood base underlayment.
2.
Service Elevators: Rubber tile 3mm thick with 25mm diameter by 0.6mm thick,
raised circular pattern. Color as selected.
3.
Freight Elevator: 6.4mm thick aluminum or steel checkered plate.
F. Car Sill-Passenger and Service Elevators: Narrow type, extruded or formed stainless
steel; set at a height to be flush with the finished cab flooring.
G. Toe Guard: Per Code.
H. Car Door Hangers and Tracks: Conform to specification on hoistway entrance hangers
and tracks. Equip doors with polyurethane-tired hanger hollers.
I. Header: Constructed of 5mm thick steel shaped to provide stiffening flanges, securely
mounted and braced to the car top.
J. Car Door Clutches: Provide heavy-duty clutches, vanes, linkage arms, drive blocks and
pickup rollers or cams to provide positive, smooth, quiet door operations and up to
75-150mm of predoor opening. The clutches shall be designed with movable vanes to
permit the car doors to be closed while the hoistway doors remain open at the floor for
maintenance purposes. Provide car doors with restrictors per ASME A17.1 Code Rule
2.12.5.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/144/R4
K. Car Door Electrical Contact: Electrical contact to operate in conjunction with the car
doors so that elevator cannot operate unless doors are closed or within tolerance
allowed by Code.
L. Door Operator: High-speed, heavy-duty, ACV3F closed loop, door operator capable of
opening doors at no less than .75 to .9mps and accomplishing reversal in no more than
6.5 cm of door movement. Arrange operator so the car doors can be opened by hand
from inside the car in case of power failure, if it is within the hoistway door unlocking
zone.
M. Freight Door and Gate Operators: Power door and gate type. Provide means to open
doors from inside car in event of power failure.
1.
Constant Pressure Closing Speeds:
a.
Doors: Minimum of 0.24mps maximum of .30mps.
b.
Gates: Minimum of 0.48mps maximum of .60mps.
N. Car Gate: Power operated, vertical rise, single section 1830mm minimum height,
constructed of 2.75mm expanded metal welded into frame angles. Mount car gate lift
chains on outside surface of gate. Include reversing safety edge device, infrared light
ray protection and passenger sequence operation.
O. Door Reopening and Control Devices:
1.
Car Door Reversal Device: A solid-state electronically operated infrared door
reversal, proximity device shall be installed on the car doors. The device shall
contain specially designed electronic components enclosed in an insulated
chassis. The device will create a criss-cross matrix of invisible, infrared, light
beams, minimum 32 beams, which shall scan the car doorway and shall detect,
through the breaking of any light beam, any opaque object that may be placed in
its path. Provide service elevators with special 3D type units to respond to
entering cart traffic.
After a car stop is made, the door shall remain open for a predetermined interval
before closing. If, while the door is closing, the matrix of invisible light beams is
interrupted by a passenger or an object entering or leaving the car, the door shall
stop and reopen, after which the door shall again start to close.
2.
3.
4.
Door Open Timing Feature, Service and Passenger Elevators: Timing feature
shall operate in conjunction with door light ray matrix to provide adjustable,
reduced, hold-open time once rays are broken and reestablished. In the event
rays are broken beyond an adjustable time, a buzzer shall sound and doors try to
close at reduced speed.
Variable Timing Feature, Passenger Elevators: Provide separately adjustable
timers, to enable varying the time that the hoistway doors remain open after
stopping in response to a car call or a landing call. The dwell time for a car call
stop shall be adjustable between 1 and 4 seconds and the timing for a landing
call stop shall be adjustable between 3 and 8 seconds. If a stop is made in
response to both a landing call and a car call, the timing of the landing call shall
predominate. In the event that the light beam is interrupted while the doors are
opening or after the doors are fully open, the time that the doors remain open
after the light beam has been reestablished shall be reduced to an adjustable
time between 2 and 1 second, depending upon whether a landing call or a car
call predominated. This time shall also be a minimum time that the doors remain
open if the door protection beams are interrupted and reestablished before the
door is fully open.
Nudging Action: In the event, a door protection light beam is continually
obstructed, or the door hold open button is continually activated, for a
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/145/R4
predetermined time interval (20 seconds) after automatic door closing has been
initiated, a buzzer shall sound and the doors shall be closed at a gentle, reduced
speed and no more than 4J in closing force. Timers shall be individually
adjustable.
P. Car Control Stations:
1.
Two opposite-hand car control stations without faceplates, consisting of a metal
box containing the operating fixtures, and a lockable service panel shall be
mounted in the cab front return panels on the Passenger Elevators. A single car
operating panel with a brushed stainless steel faceplate, recess mounted with
tamper proof, stainless steel screws, shall be provided on the service elevators.
2.
The front return panels or faceplates shall be engraved and filled with the
identifying number of each elevator and its capacity in kg and number of
permitted persons. The floor call buttons, alarm button, door open button, and
emergency stop switch shall be suitably identified by permanently applied, tactile
symbols and markers per the Engineers drawings. All automatic operating
controls shall be located no higher than 135 cm above the car floor (90 cm for
stop switch and alarm button). Engrave and fill CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION
ON FILE IN THE BUILDING OFFICE and NO SMOKING at the top of the return
panels or faceplates in each cab. The operating panel shall contain the following
controls and buttons:
a.
Car floor buttons with 13 mm numbers corresponding to the floors served
for registration of car calls. Call registered lights, located within or behind
the buttons, shall illuminate the floor number corresponding to the call
registered.
b.
An illuminating alarm button shall be provided at the bottom of each car
station to ring a bell located in the hoistway near the main lobby and on
top of the car.
c.
Provide an illuminating intercom call button. Actuating the intercom call
button shall activate the control center panel intercom distress signal. The
call button light shall flash for 10-20 seconds once the intercom call is
answered (latching feature canceled).
d.
A red emergency stop switch shall be provided at the bottom of each car
station to interrupt the power supply independently of the regular
operating devices. The switch shall be so arranged that when operated, it
will sound the alarm bell as described above and activate the control
center panel intercom distress signal. The actuation of this switch shall
not cancel registered calls. Alternately, the stop switch may be installed in
the car service panel.
e.
A door open button, which shall stop the closing motion of the doors and
return them automatically to their fully open position. This button shall be
effective while the car is at a landing and until the car starts into motion,
regardless of any special operational features (except firefighters
service).
f.
Provide an extended time, door hold open button with an internal
registration light in the main car operating panel of the service elevators to
increase the normal door open time (automatic operation) to 10-20
seconds for cart transfer. Registration or re-registration of a car call shall
cancel this hold open time and the registration light.
g.
One Firefighters Phase II service key switch door close button, light jewel,
buzzer, and call cancel button.
h.
One sound-powered telephone jack.
i.
One security card reader in specified elevators (provided by others).
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/146/R4
j.
A service panel with a heavy-duty, vandal-resistant, hinged, lockable, door

matching the front return panel finishes or faceplates shall be mounted
below the main car operating station.
The service panel shall contain the following controls with each control
and its operating positions identified by engraved and black filled letters:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
A door protection light ray cutout switch to disconnect the light rays
from the door closing circuit.
An inspection (hand) service switch for disconnecting all automatic
operation, limiting the car speed, and making the appropriate
hoistway access switch operable, when the car is at the top or
bottom terminal, conforming to the ASME A17.1 Code.
A cab light on and off switch.
Cab lighting dimmer switch for the incandescent cab lights.
An emergency cab lighting test button to activate the cab
emergency lights.
A 4-position (off, low, medium, high speeds) cab exhaust blower
switch.
An independent service selection switch to permit the selection of
independent or automatic operation.
Attendant service operating lights, chimes and up, down, pass
and door control buttons for the service elevators.
A start button for closing the doors ad starting the elevator when
operating on independent service. Alternately, the car floor
pushbuttons may be used for this function.
A 220 volt, 1 phase, 50 hertz electrical duplex outlet.
Q. Car Top Control Station: Provide stations per Code.

R. Emergency Exits: Provide car top emergency access exits and cab side exits (if
required) and contacts per Code.
S. Work Light and Duplex Plug Receptacle: Provide on the top and the bottom of the
elevator car. Provide lights with an on/off switch and wire or plastic bulb guards.
2.11
CAR ENCLOSURES
A. Passenger Elevators: Elevator car enclosure shall be manufactured by an Approved

Company. The interior side and rear wall finishes, the cab ceiling, the car handrails and
lighting, and cab flooring finished materials are to be included in a cash allowance as
stipulated in Equipment Summary 2.02. The steel cab shells are to be included in the
base bid and shall have the following features:
1.
Shell: Reinforced U.S. 14 gage furniture steel side and rear walls with baked
enamel interior finish and side exits (if required). Shell base shall contain
concealed ventilation cutouts in the side and rear walls. Apply sound-deadening
mastic to car exterior.
2.
Top: Reinforced U.S. 12 gage furniture steel with hinged exit and baked enamel
finish.
3.
Front Return Panels and Integral Entrance Columns: Provide mirrored polished
stainless steel finish as shown on the Architects drawings. The entire units are to
swing on concealed hinges or pivots for access to integral car station wiring and
fixtures. Secure in closed position with concealed 3-point latch. Provide
cabinets with flush doors for service controls and cutouts for pushbuttons, etc.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/147/R4
4.
5.
6.
7.
Transom: U. S. 14 gage stainless steel with mirrored, polished finish as

indicated on the Architects drawings.
Car Door Panels: Same construction as hoistway door panels, interior finish
mirrored polished stainless steel as shown on the Architects drawings.
Ventilation: Car top mounted, 3-speed Morrison Products, Model AAA, exhaust
blower or equal, with a diffuser and exhaust and intake port screens. The blower
shall exhaust the cab air into the hoistway.
CCTV Security Cameras: Provide and install color CCTV security cameras
(compatible with the building security contractors monitoring system) concealed
in the elevator dropped ceilings and positioned to view the complete elevator cab
interiors and the car position indicator. Provide shielded wire pairs or coaxial
cables from each CCTV camera run to the lift machine room junction boxes.
B. Service Elevators: Elevator car enclosure shall be provided by the Elevator Contractor
and manufactured by an Approved Company. Provide the following features:
1.
Shell: Reinforced U.S. 14 gage furniture steel side and rear walls with baked
enamel interior finish and side exits (if required). The base shall contain
ventilation cutouts with covers mounted in the side and rear walls. Apply sounddeadening mastic to car exterior.
2.
Top: Reinforced U.S. 12 gage furniture steel with hinged exit and white baked
enamel interior finish.
3.
Front Return Panels: U.S. 14 gage, stainless steel, rigidized No. 4 finish, integral
with entrance columns with cutout for the operating panel and service cabinets.
4.
Entrance Columns and Transom: U.S. 14 gage, No. 4 stainless steel, rigidized
finish.
5.
Car Door Panels: Same construction as hoistway door panels, stainless steel,
rigidized No. 4 finish.
6.
Base: Rigidized stainless steel with protected ventilation cutouts.
7.
Ventilation: Car top mounted, two-speed exhaust blower, Morrison Products,
Model OE, Part No. 0601029-0 or equal, with a diffuser, exhaust and intake port
protective screens and a stainless steel grille mounted in the cab canopy. The
blower shall exhaust the cab air into the hoistway.
8.
Lighting: Multiple, 2-tube, 40-watt fluorescent recess-mounted fixtures with a
white-back refector, a hinged stainless steel wire mesh lockable access cover
with a translucent diffuser all flush mounted around the perimeter (side and rear
walls) in the cab canopy.
9.
Walls: Rigidized U.S. 14 gage, No. 4 stainless steel panels (no more than 45cm
wide) to form the compete side and rear cab walls.
10.
Bumpers: Mount two lines of Pauley Rubber Company bumpers or oak bumpers
on the side and rear walls at a height of 45cm and 90cm above the cab floor.
11.
Flooring: Aluminum checkered flooring mounted to the platform with mastic and
recessed, stainless steel fasteners to form a level surface.
12.
Pads: Three section removable, full-height quilted, fire-retardant protection pads
for each elevator to cover walls and front returns with cutouts for access to car
control station and service cabinet. The pads shall extend from the car canopy to
2.5cm above the floor. Stainless steel hanger buttons shall be installed around
the full cab perimeter within a minimum clearance from the ceiling.
13.
Attendant Seat: Provide a recessed mounted, fold down seat located in the cab
side wall adjacent to the car operating panel for use by the cab attendant. Seat to
be lockable in the storage and deployed positions.
14.
CCTV Security Cameras: Provide and install color CCTV security cameras
(compatible with the building security contractors monitoring system) concealed
in the elevator dropped ceilings and positioned to view the complete elevator cab
interiors and the car position indicator. Provide shielded wire pairs or coaxial
cables from each CCTV camera run to the lift machine room junction boxes.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/148/R4
C. Freight Elevator:
1.
Enclose sides full height with flush reinforced 3.5mm sheet steel panels so more
than 500mm wide with light-proof joints. Baked enamel finish as selected.
Provide recess in car wall panel for mounting of car operating panel. Reinforce
and brace panels to provide rigid structure and securely fasten to car sling and
platform.
2.
Car Top: 2.75m reinforced sheet steel panels no more than 500mm wide with
light-proof joints. Baked enamel finish as selected.
3.
Lighting: Three recessed 4-tube fluorescent fixtures with on/off switch in car
control station. Recess mount fixture flush with inside surface of car top. Provide
steel guard on car top over fixture.
4.
Provide double row of 50mm x 300mm oak bumpers on car sides. Mount bottom
row at 450mm and top row at 900mm above floor. Secure rails to side walls with
cadmium plated, recessed bolt and captive nuts on exterior of wall pan sections.
2.12
CONTROL AND SIGNAL FIXTURES
A. Pushbuttons: Provide the Passenger elevator group with pushbutton risers as specified
in Equipment Summary 2.02, flush mounted with special No. 8 polished steel faceplates
as indicated on the Architects drawings. Provide standard, No. 4 finished stainless
steel fixtures mounted with vandal-resistant screws at all other floors and for the service
elevators. Each fixture shall include pushbuttons for each direction of travel, which
illuminate to indicate call registration. The T5 building high rise passenger elevators
EL06-EL10 shall stop at transfer floor 15, T6 building high rise passenger elevators
EL01-EL06 shall stop at transfer floor 18 and T8 building high rise passenger elevators
EL07-El12 shall stop at transfer floor 17 in response to up hall calls and down car calls
only. The T7 building high rise passenger elevators EL09-EL16 shall stop at transfer
floor 23 in response to up hall calls and down car calls only.
Provide the ground lobby floor pushbutton fixtures on passenger elevators, with a
custom design as indicated on the Architects drawings.
B. Hoistway Access Switches: Mount without faceplates in entrance frame side jamb at all
top floors and bottom floors where walk-in pits are not provided.
C. Firefighters Switch and Box: Mount in central Fire Command Center and identify
purposes with permanent engraving. Provide flush-mounted box with lockable hinged
cover as directed by the local Fire Department to contain keys and instructions for
emergency use of elevators. Box faceplate material to be similar to fire command
console faceplate and contain engraved legend, EMERGENCY ONLY in 13 mm high
letters.
D. Interactive Elevator Monitoring System: Provide a microprocessor-based, interactive
elevator monitoring and control system E.M.S. that will permit elevator data acquisition
and control. Provide consoles, containing 40 cm color S.V.G.A. or LCD monitors (1 per
group), interactive keyboards, 800MHz central processing computers running Microsoft
XP or Vista Operating System, 20 giga byte hard disk storage device, a 1.44 M byte
C.D. disk drive, graphic cards, serial communication data links, laser printers, power
supplies, driver cards and complete wiring. The consoles shall be located in the BMS
command center control panel and shall be provided with a synchronous
communications to each elevator groups performance, elevator status, tabular display,
security features, elevator on-off functions, elevator control functions, elevator
parameter functions, performance monitoring, fault diagnostics, traffic analysis and
report generation. The interactive elevator parameter functions shall include the
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/149/R4
capability to change the elevator acceleration/deceleration values and jerk rates, the
elevator door dwell times, the hall lantern pre and post-call activation times, elevator
energy conservation, AI functions, security car and hall call lock offs, up peak, down
peak, bypass, attendant service selections, standby power applications, etc., from the
console keyboards. The E.M.S. keyboard shall be used to program or change
messages displayed on the car position indicators.
E. BMS Command Center Control and Lobby Control Indicator Panels (Include All
Elevators):
1.
Provide communication and E.M.S. control items such as a master intercom
station, car-to-lobby commands, floor lock-off/override commands, intercom
selection switches, bypass/loading lights, standby power selection features, car
on and off commands, attendant service selections, pilot lights, etc., located in a
flush-mounted panel with lockable, hinged door(s).
2.
Provide discrete car position and travel direction displays, and hall call group
waiting light displays, on color 40 cm SVGA or LCD monitors, standby power
status indicators, car operating light, etc., in an exposed faceplates of the same
material and as a component part of the control panels.
3.
Engrave and fill the panel faceplates with operating instructions for all controls.
Provide all conduits and wiring to the control panels.
4.
Provide and install the console to enclose all BMS Command Center control
panel items provided by the Elevator Contractor. Console to be of a type similar
to that provided by Security Contractor for the building equipment located in the
B.M.S. Command Center. Finish to be baked enamel on steel or plastic laminate
equipped with a stainless steel faceplate.
F. Central Fire Command Panels: Include all elevators.
1.
Provide discrete component car position and travel direction indicators, or EMS
color SVGA or LCD monitor displays, duplicate, interlocked Phase I firefighters
service key switches, and a power status indicator for each group in an exposed
faceplate. Locate the panel in the Ground lobby level central Fire Command
Room as required to satisfy the local Fire Department or other governing agency.
2.
Engrave and fill the panel stainless steel faceplate with operating instructions for
all controls. Provide all conduits and wiring to the control panel.
3.
Provide any other control or alarm features required at the local Fire Department
or other governing agency including a console, if required.
G. Car Position Indicators:
1.
Service Elevators: Provide multi-light type position indicator mounted in the car
entrance transoms with floor designations and travel direction arrows. Faceplate
to be stainless steel and fastened with tamperproof stainless steel screws.
2.
Passenger Elevators: Dual color, active dot matrix 250mm LCD or OLED display
screens mounted in each car swing front return panel. Display X or EX during
express zone travels. The position indicators shall display the travel direction
and floor position of the elevator in the hoistway at all times.
a.
The passenger elevator active matrix display system consisting of
screens, necessary control hardware, CCTV inputs, and links to the
Elevator Monitoring System (EMS), shall be provided for each car. The
screens shall be protected by clear plastic lenses and shall be readable
over a wide viewing angle.
b.
Car position and direction, operational messages, directory information
messages for each floor, and discretionary messages shall be displayed
on the screen. The upper part of the screen shall be reserved for car
position and direction, which shall be at all times. All messages shall be
displayed on the lower part of the screen, with space for four lines of
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/150/R4
c.
d.
approximately 18 characters per line; only one message shall be

displayed at a time.
Up to eight discretionary messages, created in the EMS, shall be
downloaded from it to the display at a one time. A duration shall be
assigned for each of the discretionary messages so that they are
displayed, one after another, for the time intervals specified. Up to 128
directory messages shall be similarly downloaded. When the car has
committed to stop at a floor, a directory message shall be displayed
overriding any discretionary message. While the car doors are open, the
directory message shall continue to be displayed and triangle indicating
the cars direction shall move up and down. When the car doors close,
the directory message shall disappear. The current time, date and
outside temperature and wind speed shall be displayed for a brief fixed
period if so commanded through EMS, then the interrupted discretionary
message shall be displayed again until its specified duration has been
completed. An operational message shall be displayed whenever
required, overriding both directory and discretionary messages.
Up to ten custom floor labels for position indication, to be displayed
instead of default values, shall be created and downloaded through the
E.M.S. Display of the discretionary and directory messages shall be
turned on and off from the E.M.S. Should the link to E.M.S. or the E.M.S.
itself fail, all information other than directory and discretionary messages
and time shall continue to be displayed in the normal manner. The
outside temperature shall be measured by means of a temperature probe
supplied and mounted by the Elevator Contractor or by a temperature
signal provided by the B.M.S. Contractor.
H. Hall Lanterns: Provide plug-in type direction signals illuminating white for up and red for
down, without faceplates located adjacent to each hoistway entrance at indicated
landings on the passenger elevators. Provide the typical floors and service elevators
with Manufacturers standard hall lanterns (special allowances at indicated floors)
equipped with No. 4 brushed stainless steel faceplates mounted with tamperproof
screws at all typical levels. Lantern shall illuminate indicating the direction of travel and
chime sound (once for up direction, twice for down direction). Provide the Elevators with
fixed-car assignment (prediction) type hall lanterns and car selections so that the
appropriate hall lantern is lighted and its chime sounded within two seconds of hall call
registration. As the responding car approaches the landing, the lantern shall signal the
elevators final arrival by pulsing the hall lantern and resounding the chime for the
departure direction.
I. Engineering Indicator Panel: Provide indicator panel, EMS, LCD or ports to accept
portable monitors in each elevator machine room as part of, or adjacent to, the group
supervisory control panel. As a minimum, the display shall be capable of providing the
following:
1.
Waiting passenger indicators for each floor.
2.
Position and direction indicators for each elevator.
3.
Control function indicators and keyboards normally provided to assist
maintenance and adjuster personnel to verify correct operation, program, and
trouble-shoot the system.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/151/R4
2.13
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
A. General: An Ducane, ITT or Aiphone intercommunication system for all Elevators shall
be provided as part of this work. Provide all wiring and conduits between elevator
hoistways and the intercom stations. The system shall contain the following stations:
STATION
TYPE
LOCATION
STATION SELECTION BUTTONS TO CALL
Each
Elevator Cabs In That Group, Fire Command
Elevator
Master
Panels, BMS Command Center Panel
Machine
Room
BMS
All Elevator Machine Rooms, All Elevator
Command
Master
Cabs, Fire Command Panels
Center Panel
Fire
All Elevator Machine Rooms, All Elevator
Command
Master
Cabs, BMS Command Center Panels
Panel
Elevator
Remote
BMS Command Center Panel
Cabs
1.
Basic Equipment: The system shall contain the following equipment:
a.
A solid-state amplifier shall provide static-free voice transmission with
adequate volume and a minimum of distortion at each station in the
system. Provide a preamplifier that is capable of receiving Muzak inputs.
b.
Master stations shall contain the following:
1)
Speaker-microphone combination and a handset for 2-way
communication.
2)
Selection buttons for completing the circuits to enable
communication with the master and remote stations as listed
above. When a selected button is depressed, continual reception
from that station shall be maintained.
3)
A 2-position talk-listen button: Press to talk, release to listen.
4)
An in use light to be illuminated when any master station is being
used.
5)
A reset button which when pushed shall reset the station selection
buttons and extinguish the in use light, making the system
available for use by any master station.
6)
A volume control knob to permit continual adjustment of incoming
volume.
7)
A button to establish communications with all other stations in the
elevator system simultaneously (fire command panels, BMS
command center panel).
8)
A distress light consisting of a separate light fixture for each
elevator, which shall be illuminated when the alarm button or
emergency stop switch in the elevator car is actuated. This light
shall be provided in the master station in the BMS command
center panel or the lobby panel (selection switchable) panels only.
A buzzer shall sound whenever a distress light is illuminated.
9)
Both the distress light and buzzer shall remain energized until the
intercom selection button for that car has been depressed at the
command center or the lobby panel master station to indicate
communication.
10)
Remote stations, one in each elevator car, shall consist of a
microphone and speaker or transceiver-speaker combination
located above the cab dropped ceiling. The cab remote speakers
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/152/R4
shall be mounted in the car canopy and be equipped with a

protective grille.
Provide an illuminating intercom call button in each car.
Provide a selection switch in the command center control panel for making
the lobby control master intercom station active or inactive.
2.
2.14
Station Housings:
a.
The master station in the machine rooms shall be housed in a metal
cabinet of baked enamel finish attached to the group elevator supervisory
control panel or wall mounted. Provide a handset with 7.5m long cord.
b.
The BMS command center, lobby control and fire command centers
master intercoms shall be provided with stainless steel faceplates with
engraved and filled operating instructions. Coordinate faceplates and
installation of units with the Console Manufacturer. Provide each master
station with a handset, equipped with a 3m long cord.
ELEVATOR SEISMIC DESIGNS AND EMERGENCY OPERATIONS

Seismic Designs: The Elevator Contractor shall prepare and submit all required
equipment seismic design calculations, reactions, and supporting information on the
shop drawing per ASME A17.1-2004. Provide all required seismic designs, restraints,
guards, tie downs and operations for Zone 2A.
Calculations shall indicate the vertical and horizontal seismic design loads, for all
operating and control equipment and the rail loads. Calculations shall bear the stamp of
a licensed Structural Engineer.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/153/R4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SITE CONDITIONS AND INSPECTION
A. Prior to beginning the installation of equipment, examine the hoistway and machine
room areas and verify that no irregularities exist that would affect quality of execution of
work as specified. Particularly, note:
1.
Hoistway size and plumbness.
2.
Sill supports and pockets.
3.
Support areas for brackets, beams, etc.
4.
Building and divider beams.
B. Notify the General Contractor if any discrepancies exist in the building work that will
prevent the installation of the elevator equipment.
3.02
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in Manufacturers original, unopened protective packaging.

B. Store materials in original protective packaging. Prevent soiling, physical damage or
wetting.
C. Protect equipment and exposed finishes during transportation, erection and construction
period against damage and stains.
D. Store early delivery elevator equipment offsite until it is needed for installation at the
jobsite.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install each equipment item in accordance with accepted Manufacturers direction,

referenced codes and specifications.
B. Install machine room equipment with clearances complying with referenced codes and
specifications.
C. Install items so that they may be removed by portable hoists or other means for
maintenance and/or repair.
D. Install items so that access for maintenance is safe and readily available.
E. Install equipment to afford maximum safety and continuity of operation after a seismic
acceleration.
F. Add equipment identification numerals
3.04
A. Work at the jobsite will be checked during the course of installation. Full cooperation
with these Inspectors is mandatory. Any corrective work they require shall be
accomplished prior to performing further installation dependent upon or related to the
required correction.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/154/R4
B. Have Code Authority acceptance inspection performed. Verification that such tests
have been completed, all corrective work accomplished and installation approved for
issuance of a permit to operate shall be required before acceptance of any unit.
3.05
ADJUSTMENTS
A. Align guide rails vertically within a tolerance of 1.6mm in 30 m. Secure joints without
gaps and file any irregularities to a smooth surface.
B. Balance cars after the final cab installations to equalize pressure of roller guide shoes
on rails.
C. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with Manufacturers instructions.
D. Adjust motors, power converters, brakes, controllers, leveling switches, limit switches,
stopping switches, door operators, interlocks and safety devices to achieve required
performance levels.
E. Fabricate and assemble the various parts in the shop insofar as practical to minimize
field assembly. Parts which cannot be shop assembled or require close field fit shall be
trial assembled in the shop and marked for field erection.
3.06
CLEANUP AND TOUCHUP
A. Keep work areas orderly and free from debris during progress of project.
B. Remove all loose materials and filings resulting from this work from hoistway surfaces.
C. Clean machine room equipment and floor of dirt, oil and grease.
D. Clean hoistway, car, car enclosures, entrances, operating and signal fixtures, and trim of
dirt, oil, grease and finger marks.
E. Touchup all minor scratches, dings or imperfections in finished materials and painted
surfaces that are exposed to public view.
3.07
ACCEPTANCE INSPECTIONS AND TEST
A. General: Final acceptance of the installation shall be made only after all field quality
control inspections and tests are complete, all submittals and certificates have been
received and the Employers Representative satisfied that the following have been
satisfactorily completed:
1.
Workmanship and equipment comply with specification.
2.
Contract speed, capacity and floor-to-floor performance comply with
specification.
3.
Performance of following are satisfactory:
a.
Starting, accelerating, running.
b.
Decelerating, leveling, stopping.
c.
Door operation and closing force.
B. Personnel, Equipment and Instruments: Furnish personnel, equipment and instruments
to perform required tests. The following instruments may be necessary to complete the
tests:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/155/R4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
25kg test weights (larger weights with dollies or wheels are acceptable if weight
is certified).
Multi meter.
500-volt Megger.
Alternating-current voltmeter and ammeter.
Stop watch.
Celsius-calibrated thermometers (4 minimum on traction elevator test).
Precision tachometer.
Spring scale for door-force test.
Decibel meter for noise test.
Three axis recording accelerometer for vibration, car sway and car ride test.
C. Traction Elevators:
1.
Insulation-Resistance Test: Test safety circuit, door lock circuit, loop circuit, and
motor and generator field circuits at 500 volts. Minimum resistance to ground
shall be one megohm.
2.
Running Test: With equipment within 5 of ambient machine room temperature,
the following shall be accomplished:
a.
Insert thermometers in hoist motor filed coil windings. (Shield with cotton
waste).
b.
Check floor-to-floor performance time, speed, stopping accuracy and
general ride of elevator with no load, balanced load and full load in car.
c.
Run fully loaded car continuously for a period of one hour with a minimum
of 150 starts, stopping at each floor in both directions for a period of 10
seconds.
d.
At the end of the test, again check floor-to-floor performance time,
stopping accuracy and general ride with full load, balanced load and no
load in car.
3.
Test Results:
a.
In all test conditions speed and performance times specified shall be met,
stopping accuracy shall be maintained without re-leveling and general
riding quality shall be acceptable to the Employers Representative.
b.
Temperature rise in windings shall not exceed 50 Celsius above ambient.
D. Performance Guarantee: Should these tests develop any defects or poor workmanship,
any variance or noncompliance with the requirements of the specified codes and/or
ordinances or any variance or noncompliance with the requirements of these
specifications, the following work and/or repairs shall be completed at no expense to the
Employer.
1.
Replace all equipment that does not meet Code or specification requirements.
2.
Perform all work and furnish all materials and equipment necessary to complete
the specified operation and/or performance.
3.
Perform all retesting required by the governing Code Authority and the Employer
to verify the specified operation and/or performance.
3.08
EMPLOYERS INFORMATION
A. Submittals: Provide written information and equipment necessary for proper

maintenance and adjustment of the equipment prior to final acceptance, as follows:
1.
Straight-line wiring diagram of as-installed elevator circuits with index of location
and function of all components. Mount installation diagrams on masonite panels
or hang bound sets in racks and leave on the job. Provide three final corrected
sets, one copy, one Mylar and one sepia copy within 90 days after job
acceptance for the Employers file.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/156/R4
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.09
Lubrication instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants.

Parts catalogs for all replaceable parts including ordering forms and instructions.
Complete operating and maintenance instructions for all controls and switches
provided.
Five sets of keys to operate each type of key switch provided.
Any special maintenance or trouble shooting tools or devices required for
maintenance on all elevators.
EMPLOYERS PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. Assist the designated Employers elevator operating, safety and security personnel in
understanding and training to operate the elevator intercoms, card readers, E.M.S.
Systems, security keyboards, elevator operations, emergency systems and car
operating panel controls.
B. Provide all required training information, videos, CD ROMs, manuals, training classes,
and training personnel to the Employers personnel with training knowledge, and
information on how to operate all of the elevator interface functions and controls.
3.10
WARRANTY INSPECTION
A. At least 30 days prior to warranty expiration, schedule final inspection and retest with
Employers Representative. Requirements shall include close examination of all
equipment.
B. Replace, repair or adjust any equipment found defective and covered by warranty prior
to expiration of warranty period.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 2100/157/R4
SECTION 14 3100
ESCALATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A. General: This specification Section shall be read in conjunction with the

Conditions of Contract, General Requirements of the specifications, drawings
and other parts of the Contract Documents, in cases where discrepancies arise
between any parts of the contract documents, refer to the priority of Contract
documents listed in the conditions of the Contract.
B. Work Included: The specification included in this Section is intended to cover the
complete provision and installation of ten (10) escalators, as summarized in Part
2 of this Section. All work and material necessary to accomplish this installation
in a complete and workmanlike manner shall be provided. This work shall be
done in accordance with the requirements of local codes, which may govern the
requirements of the installation. All terms in these specifications have the
definition given in the latest edition (2007) of the American National Standard
Safety Code for Escalators (referred to as ASME A17.1 Code), including
revisions and authorized changes in effect on the date of these specifications. In
all cases where a device or part of the equipment is referred to in the singular
number, it is intended that such reference should apply to as many devices as
are required to complete the installation.
C. Related Work in other Sections:
1.
Legal Wellway:
a.
Floor openings as shown on the drawings properly framed and
finished together with any legal enclosures or railings which may
be required under the escalator wellway. Permanent railings or
enclosures around floor openings.
b.
Vent grille in upper machine room soffit (optional).
c.
All patching and finishing around the truss, including material in
floor pans of machine room and pit access doors (if provided).
d.
Fireproof coverings for exterior of escalator truss and soffit and
stainless steel Nondirectional Grain Finish: VIB OA2/2B BASE a
vibration polish to multi-directional overlapping curve hairline #180
trim pieces. Provide furring channels or strips on truss to receive
the covering materials.
e.
Fire protection of escalator openings in accordance with the Life
Safety Code NFPA No. 101-1981 (6-2.2.3.4.).
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/1/R1
Escalators
f.
2.
3.
4.
Provide escalator step treads and each landing with a minimum of

15 lux of building lighting illumination.
Supports: Supports for equipment reactions, as shown on the drawings.
NOTE: Only those structural supports indicated on the structural
drawings will be provided by Other Trades. The Contractor is responsible
for providing truss extensions and installing any other required structural
supports or inserts to accommodate and support his equipment.
Guards:
Protective enclosure around hoistway openings during
construction.
Electrical:
a.
Electrical feeders for normal, mainline power through circuit
breaker devices. NOTE: The Contractor shall provide and install
all main line wiring and conduits to run from the machine room
disconnect switches to the escalator controllers/power conversion
panels. The Contractor shall provide and install all required
auxiliary disconnect switches or manually operated switches,
connected in the control circuits to prevent escalator starting, if the
main line disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not within
sight of the or motor per NEC, Rule 620-51(b).
b.
Power for construction and testing and temporary power for
escalator construction hoists.
c.
Machine room/pit lighting and convenience outlets.
d.
Remote Conduits, Wiring or Duct: The Contractor shall provide
and install all remote wiring, ducts and conduit for connecting the
escalator wellways to the escalator, indicator, intercom and control
panels to be located in the building Security Room , and the lobby
control panel(s).
e.
A telephone/data link/modem/ethernet line to each escalator
machine space for use in the remote escalator monitoring system.
D. Work or Items Installed/Furnished By the Contractor:

1.
One electronic drawing original (CD) and 3 copies of escalator
maintenance manuals, operating instructions, wiring diagrams and parts
ordering manuals, and lubrication charts.
2.
Provide duplicate 1.05 maintenance items in draft form to Engineer for
review, comment and correction prior to final submittal to Employer.
3.
Escalator operating keys (5 sets of each key).
E. No Escalator Company nameplates or logos shall be exposed to public view.
1.02
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Comply with the most stringent requirements of the following:

1.
Qatar Building Laws and Codes.
2.
Applicable Local Building Laws.
3.
Local Codes, Ordinances and Laws.
4.
ASME A17.1-2007 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
5.
Elevator Inspectors' Manual, ASME A17.2-2006.
6.
National Electrical Code No. NFPA 70-2005.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/2/R1
Escalators
B. Permits: Obtain and pay for all local construction permits and the first years
escalator operating permits.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
Escalator(s): KONE (Finland), Otis (USA), Schindler (Switzerland),
Thyssen Krupp (Germany), Fujitec (Japan), Mitsubishi (Japan), Hitachi
(Japan) and Toshiba (Japan).
B. Escalators:
1.
Escalator supplier shall be capable of providing maintenance service,
including adequate local parts inventory located within 10 kilometers of
the installation.
2.
Supplier shall be capable of providing 24-hour-a-day emergency service
and respond to trouble calls within 1-1/2 to 2 hours of notification.
3.
Supplier shall employ competent personnel, experienced in escalator
maintenance.
4.
Suppler shall perform all maintenance during specified maintenance
period and shall offer contract maintenance service to Employer.
Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred.
C. Guarantee:
1.
The materials and workmanship of the escalator apparatus installed shall
comply in every respect with these specifications and any defects not due
to ordinary wear and tear, or improper use or care which may develop
within 1 year from date of Issue of Taking-Over Certificate shall be
corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost.
2.
The Contractor shall make any and all modifications, adjustments and
improvements to the escalator systems necessary to meet the
performance requirements specified in Part 2.02 of these specifications.
1.04
SUBMITTALS AND SAMPLES

In conjunction with the requirements stipulated in Section 01330 the Contractor
shall submit escalator equipment details, brochures, and finish samples
proposed along with a full technical specification for the equipment to be
provided and highlighting any deviations from this specification.
Within 60 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit a sepia and 3 copies of
the shop drawings and required material for review.
In general, the following are required:
A. Scaled Layouts: Equipment arrangement, enclosures, guards, etc. Provide

drawings at the following scale: wellway sections 1:50; wellway details 1:33-1/3;
wellway and machine room plans 1:20; fixtures 1:10.
B. Design Information: Indicate control and operating system descriptions,
sequence of operations, equipment lists, reactions, heat emissions, and design
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/3/R1
Escalators
information on layouts. Provide details of areas where escalator equipment joins

other finish work.
C. Type Test: Submit Escalator Loading Type Test and step test certificates with
the escalator shop drawings.
D. Power Confirmation Sheets: Include hp (kW), code letter, starting current, full
load running current, demand factor and regenerative loads for applicable motors
and power conversion units.
E. Finish Material: Submit samples per the following requirements. Submit 3
samples of the following: 30 cm x 30 cm materials and finishes exposed to view.
F. Fixtures: Submit Technical Sheets and shop drawings and samples of all
fixtures.
G. Taking Over Certificates: Submit Certificate of Escalator Performance with
contract closeout documents. After adjustments, test, and inspections are
performed, forward certificate signed by Escalator Manufacturer stating that the
equipment and controls provide the level of escalator service specified.
1.05
MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall furnish:

1.
Preventative maintenance on all equipment described herein for a period
of 24 months commencing on date of issuance of a taking-over certificate
for the completed works, including unlimited 24-hour emergency call
backs. The maintenance shall include systematic examinations,
adjustment, cleaning and lubrication of all equipment. The Contractor
shall also repair or replace electrical and mechanical parts whenever
required and shall use only genuine, standard parts produced by the
Manufacturer of the equipment installed. Maintain escalator machine
rooms, wellways, and pits in clean condition.
2.
All maintenance work shall be performed by competent personnel under
the supervision and in the direct employ of the Contractor. The
equipment shall be annually inspected by an independent escalator
consultant approved by the Engineer and Contractor.
3.
The Employer, at his option, may choose to delete this maintenance from
the Contract and award the contract maintenance to others during the
period in which the work is being accomplished.
4.
Indicate the amount included for this maintenance in the Tender
submission.
B. Contract:
1.
Quote the monthly cost for a 5-year continuing maintenance agreement to
commence on completion of the 24 month period above. This quotation
shall be submitted with the Contractors Tender Submission on the Employers
own executed standard maintenance form (VTMA) furnished with these
specifications in Section 14000 . Under this agreement, the equipment
performance requirements, as specified, shall be provided at all times.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/4/R1
Escalators
2.
1.06
If this contract is accepted, the contract price may be adjusted at the

expiration of the new installation service period and, thereafter, as
provided in the contract.
MATERIALS
A. Steel: Low carbon, cold rolled to stretcher leveled standard flatness per ASTM
A366 for sheet, ASTM A36 for structural.
B. Stainless Steel: Type 316 for External use and Type 304 for Internal use with
Nondirectional Grain Finish: VIB OA2/2B BASE a vibration polish to multidirectional overlapping curve hairline #180
C. Aluminum: Extrusions per ASTM B221; sheet and plate per ASTM B209.
D. Paint: All exposed metal work furnished under this section, except as otherwise
noted, shall be cleaned of oil, grease, scale and other foreign matter and factory
painted 1 shop coat of Manufacturer's standard rust resistant primer. After
erection, provide 1 finish coat of industrial enamel paint. Galvanized metal
exposed inside of the wellway or in the machine room need not be painted
(except as noted). Field paint and touch up any ferrous metal that is exposed or
welded during construction or installation.
E. Prime Finish: Clean all surfaces receiving a baked enamel finish of oil, grease,
scale, etc. Apply 1 coat of rust resistant mineral paint followed by a filler coat
over uneven surfaces. Sand smooth and apply final coat of mineral paint.
F. Baked Enamel: Prime per "E" above. Apply and bake 3 additional coats of
enamel in the solid color and finish as selected by the Engineer.
1.07
KEYS
Five sets of keys to operate all keyed switches and locks shall be furnished upon
completion. Keys shall be properly tagged. All keying shall be master suited as
arranged with the Employer.
1.08
HOISTING
All required hoisting and movement of escalator equipment, shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Ceiling mounted hoisting hooks or beams of
suitable capacity for lifting and positioning of the escalator trusses shall be
provided by the Contractor, if required.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/5/R1
Escalators
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Manufacturers
1.
Otis
USA.
2.
Hitachi
Japan
3.
Schindler
Switzerland
4.
Mitsubishi
Japan
5.
Kone
Finland
6.
Fujitec
Japan
7.
Toshiba
Japan
8.
Thyssen Krupp
Germany
9.
Or Approved Equal
2.02
SUMMARY ESCALATORS
A.
PODIUM ESCALATORS Provide units per the following schedule:

Number
Floors
Served
Size
(mm)
Rise
(m)
Normal
Travel
Direction
E1 & E2
G&P
1200
6.75m
Up & down
E7 & E8
P&M
1200
5.75m
Up & down
E3 & E4
G&P
1200
6.75m
Up & down
E5 & E6
G&P
1200
6.75m+
Up & down
E9 & E10
P&M
1200
5.75m
Up & down
Type:
Heavy duty, office application, ISO 9001

certified quality
Size (Nominal Width:
1200 wide, (1000 step width)
Landing, # of Flat Steps

E1 & E2:
3 flat steps at each landing (top & bottom)
E3 & E4:
E5 & E6:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/6/R1
Escalators
E7 & E8:
E9 & E10:
Speed:
30mpm (.5mps)
Angle of Inclination:
30 from the horizontal
Arrangement:
Parallel separate, parallel adjacent and

criss-cross
Operation:
Reversible, travel up or down
Duty:
12 hour/day office/commercial/retail
operation
Control:
Wye-Delta/Soft Start (AC induction motor),

ACV3F induction motor or ACV3F
permanent magnet synchronous motor
(P.M.S.M.)
Drive Gear Box:
Worm and gear or helical gears
Balustrades
Type:
Clear 13mm thick tempered safety glass

without mullions
Panel Shape:
Rectangular shaped glass panels
Height (above deckboards):
1000mm
Deck Configuration:
Low type
Deck Boards:
Curved transition type, No. 4 brushed

stainless steel
Molding and Trim:
No. 4 brushed stainless steel or anodized

aluminum
Skirt Panels:
Low-friction type stainless steel, black

vitreous porcelain enamel or Teflon coated
plyboard
Handrail Color:
Black
Step Riser:
Cleated type with painted black slots; step

treads to mesh with adjacent risers
Step Chains:
Heavy duty roller type with hardened pins

the chain & gear to be non greasy type
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/7/R1
Escalators
Truss:
Welded steel angles or tubes with steel, full

interior width and length drip pans
*Truss Exterior Cladding:
No. 4 brushed stainless steel type 304
Power Supply:
ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT:
Soft Start (Y-Delta) motor starter and power

savings (motoring) controller
Narrow contrasting color/texture combplates
Lift out aluminum floor pans or hinged
top/bottom machine space access doors
Colored, non-slop, 50mm wide step nose
demarcation strips
Intermediate truss supports, if required
(hidden in bottom landing floor intersection
and at each floor landing)
Deck board anti-slide knobs, between unit
guards, floor intersection barriers and
guards
Caution signs at each landing
High deck emergency stop buttons with
alarm covers at each landing
ADDITIONAL FEATURES:
Understep demarcation lighting (green

fluorescent) at landings
Combplate displacement switches
Handrail entry displacement switches
Full-length skirt protection assembly
brushes
Controlled descent devices and controls
Remote monitoring and control capabilities
(BMS control panel)
Oil less step chains
12-month maintenance with 24-hour call
back service
As built wiring diagrams, parts ordering
information, maintenance instructions,
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/8/R1
Escalators
operating instructions, and a lubrication

chart
Alternates
1. Provide the escalators with 10mm glass

balustrades in lieu of the 13mm glass
specified
2. Provide the escalators with rhomboidal
shaped balustrade glass in lieu of the
rectangular glass panels specified.
2.03
PERFORMANCE
A. Each unit shall be capable of continuously operating at full speed with full load in
either direction of travel.
B. Each escalator shall be capable of heavy-duty, continuous, 12 hour-per-day, 7
day/week operation without stress or undue wear to the equipment.
2.04
OPERATION
A. Each unit shall be capable of operating in either direction of travel from key
controls. Angle of inclination shall be 30 from the horizontal.
2.05
MACHINE ROOM EQUIPMENT
A. Driving Machine: Worm geared, helical or planetary geared unit directly

connected to the A.C. induction or P.M.S.M. drive motor. Brake to be spring
applied, electrically released and capable of slowing, stopping and holding
escalator travelling in the down direction at a deceleration rate, no greater than 1
m/sec squared, regardless of the escalator load.
B. Controller: The controller shall contain logic motor control circuits, safety and
controlled stop circuits for operation of the escalator. Wire to identified terminal
block studs. Identifying symbols or letters identical to those on wiring diagrams
permanently marked adjacent to each component on the controller. Enclose all
components in portable steel cabinet removable from top machine room for easy
access to switches and wiring. Provide main line circuit breaker, power wiring
and conduit, and means to protect motor against overload and single phasing.
C. Motor Starter: Provide each escalator with an electronic solid state, soft start.
The soft start, WYE Delta circuits shall reduce the starting inrush current.
D. Driving Sprocket: Machined sprockets at each truss side over which step chains
or step chain rollers shall pass and transmit motion from the drive machine to the
steps. If chain drive is used between machine and drive sprocket, provide
emergency brake on drive assembly to automatically function if drive chain fails.
Provide roller-type sealed bearings with means for lubrication and adjustment for
wear.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/9/R1
Escalators
E. Idler Sprocket: Spring or weight-tensioning device to take up slack in step chains

and maintain constant tension on chains. Provide roller-type sealed bearings
with means for lubrication and adjustment for wear.
F. Vents: Provide required escalator truss side vents and grilles for expelling heat
from the machine room spaces or escalator truss.
G. Stop Switches: Provide at top and bottom of each escalator per the ASME A17.1
Code.
H. Automatic Lubricators: Provide automatic chain lubrication and oil reservoirs at
the top of each escalator located in the machine room. Automatic lubricators not
required if permanently lubricated step chains are provided.
I. Automatic remote starting and shut down timers: Provide all escalators with
automatic shutdown circuits that will stop each escalator when there is no riding
traffic for 5 minutes (timers to be adjustable between 2-5 minutes). Provide each
unit with top and bottom, remotely located stancheon or skirt mounted infrared
light beam or sonic sensors that will give a "start" signal to a stopped escalator
when activated by an approaching rider. The sensors may also be used to
monitor the escalator traffic in order to activate the "lack-of-use" shutdowns.
2.06
WELLWAY EQUIPMENT
*A. Truss: Steel truss to safely carry entire load of escalator, including all parts of
same, full-capacity load and weight of exterior truss covering material specified.
Provide factor of safety per Code. Provide steel bearing plates, shims and
fastenings as required for truss support and attachment. Provide truss
attachment as required to attach the escalator trusses to the stainless steel
cladding type 304, brushed finish No.4.
B. Drip Pans: Oil-tight, steel drip pans with sufficient strength to withstand weight of
workmen to be located beneath the escalator truss for its entire width and length.
C. Tracks: Construct from steel to ensure perfect alignment and smooth operation
of running gear and step and chain rollers under all conditions.
D. Electrical Wiring:
1.
Conductors: Copper wires throughout with individual wires coded and all
connections on identified studs or terminal boards.
2.
Conduit, Etc: Painted or galvanized steel conduit or duct. Conduit size
shall be 13 mm minimum except that 9.5 mm can be used for runs
containing only 2 wires. Flexible conduit exceeding 45 cm in length shall
not be used.
E. Step Chains: Steel links with hardened pins connecting adjacent steps and
engaging drive sprockets. Provide synthetic composition or rubber-tired rollers
with sealed ball bearings at each step to support the chain and leading edge of
the step. Continuous chain design shall permit inspection and operation while
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/10/R1
Escalators
running without the steps in place. Install a broken step chain safety device in
accordance with Code.
F. Step Assembly: Single piece die cast aluminum, or formed fluted stainless steel
units, fastened to the drive chain or link axles. Step rollers shall have sealed ball
bearings and be tired with synthetic composition material. Treads shall be
cleated die cast aluminum or corrugated stainless steel. Grooved risers shall be
painted black and constantly mesh with adjacent steps. Steps shall be covered
on the underside with sound-deadening material and shall be removable from
unit without disturbance of balustrade or step chains. Step demarcation strips
may be provided.
G. Safety Devices: A minimum of 2 safety devices shall be installed at each end of
the escalator where the steps begin leveling off and before they pass under the
combplate. Devices shall be of the self-resetting type with electrical contacts and
when actuated shall stop the escalator. One device shall stop the unit when an
article becomes wedged between the steps and the skirt guard, and the other
device shall stop the unit when an article becomes wedged between the steps or
a step roller is prevented from following the normal track curvature. An escalator
stopped by action of these switches shall be capable of moving in the up
direction by use of the manual starting switch to clear the obstruction. The
switches shall automatically reset once the obstruction has been manually
cleared.
H. Undercomb Step Demarcation Lights: Per Code with 2 or 3 green fluorescent
strip lights equipped with clear plastic light tube guards located at each escalator
landing.
2.07
HANDRAILS
A. Black handrails constructed of laminated canvas and rubber running on brass,

bronze, or steel guides fastened to and of same curvature as the balustrade.
Laminated type handrails shall be spliced and vulcanized with a smooth joint.
Each escalator handrail shall be driven at the same speed as the steps. Provide
standard newels, tensioning device and slack tension and lack of motion
shutdown switch on each handrail.
2.08
BALUSTRADE
A. Interior Panels: 13 mm thick structural, tempered safety-glass construction with

rectangular shapes without vertical support mullions.
B. Skirt Panels: Low-friction type to meet ASME A17.1, Rule 802.3f, Item 3, with
fire resistant, sound deadening. Install to provide a clearance of step treads of
not more than 4 mm. Extend beyond combplates and wrap around base of
newel. Provide full exposed length, skirt to step removable, protection brush
assemblies.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/11/R1
Escalators
C. Deck Boards: U.S. No. 14 gauge, No. 4 brushed stainless steel reinforced to
provide rigid panels with a smooth, flat upper surface. All horizontal joints shall
be butted to provide smooth surfaces. All deck board angular transitions shall be
accomplished with curved, gradual deck board sections; straight deck board,
butted construction shall not be permitted.
D. Trim and Mouldings: No. 4 brushed stainless steel, Nondirectional Grain Finish:
VIB OA2/2B
2.09
LANDINGS
A. Combplates: Textolight, aluminum or other alloy provided with nonslip surface

and removable, contrasting color tooth sections (color as selected) at intersection
of steps and combplates.
B. Landing Plates: Aluminum with nonslip surface. Plate shall extend from
combplates to end of truss at lower end and from combplate to machine room
access panel at upper end. Floor plates shall extend full width of truss where
they extend beyond the newels.
C. Access Door: Provide hinged and counterbalanced or removable access door in
the floor at the upper and lower landings of each escalator for entry into the
machine room and pit. The floor pans shall be filled with nonslip aluminum floor
plates.
2.10
SIGNAL AND CONTROL FIXTURES
A. Provide in upper and lower right-hand newels or stanchion mounted with

flush-mounted faceplates matching deck finish. Function and operating positions
of switches and buttons shall be identified with engraved characters which are
readily visible from a standing position. Each station shall contain the following:
1.
Red "emergency stop" buttons, which when actuated shall disconnect
power supply to motor, automatically set brake, and bring unit to smooth
stop. Cover stop buttons with a spring-loaded, clear safety shield that
when lifted will ring an alarm bell located within the unit.
2.
Key switch to "start" unit.
3.
Key-controlled directional control and hold switch (up and down
operation).
B. Provide passenger "Caution and Warning Signs" and pictographs at the top and
bottom of each escalator.
C. Provide all escalators with remote, stancheon mounted, infrared sensors or skirt
mounted sonic detectors to automatically start the escalator if it is inoperative
due to lack of traffic. The stanchions or sensor beams shall be located
sufficiently back from the escalator landing plates so that when a boarding
escalator rider momentarily breaks the sensor or activation beam, the escalator
shall start and be operating at its rated speed before the rider boards the first
escalator step.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/12/R1
Escalators
2.11
B.M.S. COMMAND CENTER CONTROL MONITORING PANEL
A. B.M.S. Command Centre Control Monitoring Panel: Provide monitoring panel(s)

and color SVGA monitor display panel(s) and keyboards in the B1 level, B.M.S.
Command Centre control room to display the operating status of all escalators
included in this Section:
1.
A 430mm color SVGA Monitor(s) for displaying the following escalator
status information:
Escalator ready to run (safety circuits ok).
Escalator running/direction - up or down.
Emergency stop activated.
Emergency alarm activated.
Emergency stop switch activated.
Escalator power consumption condition.
2.
3.
4.
Emergency stop, emergency alarm activated or emergency stop switch

activated shall activate an audible and visual signal on the display panel.
The alarm shall continue to display until manually reset by the B.M.S.
Command Centre attendant.
Provide the escalator units with low-voltage wiring, modems,
communications and interface boards or networks to connect the units
into the escalator monitoring system. Provide all required menu-driven
software, windows and operating instructions to form a complete system.
The panel(s) shall be wall or desk mounted in a suitable electrical box and
be equipped with a stainless steel Nondirectional Grain Finish: VIB
OA2/2B faceplate. Provide all required wiring and conduits from each
escalator machine room to the B.M.S. Command Centre control panel.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/13/R1
Escalators
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
SITE CONDITIONS AND INSPECTION
A. Prior to beginning the installation of equipment, examine the wellway and

machine room areas and verify that no irregularities exist that would affect quality
of execution of work as specified. Particularly, note:
1.
Wellway size, plumbness and wellway lengths.
2.
Truss supports and pockets.
3.
Support areas for brackets, beams, etc.
B. The Contractor shall be held fully responsible for any discrepancies in the
building work that may prevent the installation of the escalator equipment.
C. Provide truss bearing plates on a timely basis so that they can be incorporated
into the building concrete work.
D. The Contractors superintendent shall inspect the works on a regular basis to
check the work progress and to answer/report any discrepancies that may impact
the permanent escalator installation to the Engineer.
3.02
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in Manufacturer's original, unopened protective packaging.

B. Store materials in original protective packaging.
damage or wetting.
Prevent soiling, physical
C. Protect equipment and exposed finishes during transportation, erection and

construction period against damage and stains.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install each equipment item in accordance with accepted work practices,

referenced codes and specifications.
B. Install machine room equipment with clearances complying with referenced
codes and specifications.
C. Install items so that they may be removed by portable hoists or other means for
maintenance and/or repair.
D. Install items so that access for maintenance is safe and readily available.
E. Install equipment to afford maximum safety and continuity of operation.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/14/R1
Escalators
3.04
A. Work at the jobsite will be checked during the course of installation. Any
corrective work the Engineer requires shall be accomplished prior to performing
further installation dependent upon or related to the required correction.
B. Have Code Authority acceptance inspection performed. Verification that such
tests have been completed, all corrective work accomplished and installation
approved for issuance of a permit to operate shall be required before acceptance
of any unit.
3.05
ADJUSTMENTS
A. Align tracks to ensure continuous 4-point contact with step and chain rollers.
Secure joints without gaps and file any irregularities to a smooth surface.
B. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
C. Adjust brakes and controlled descent devices for stopping any escalator load
without toppling the riding passengers.
3.06
CLEANUP AND TOUCHUP
A. Keep work areas orderly and free from debris during progress of project.
B. Remove all loose materials and filings resulting from this work from the truss
interiors.
C. Clean machine room equipment and floor of dirt, oil and grease.
D. Clean wellway, operating and signal fixtures, escalator balustrades, handrails,
and trim of dirt, oil, grease and finger marks.
3.07
ACCEPTANCE INSPECTIONS AND TEST
A. General: Acceptance of the installation shall be made only after all field quality
control inspections and tests by the Engineer are complete, all submittals and
certificates have been received and the Engineer is satisfied that the following
have been satisfactorily completed:
1.
Workmanship and equipment comply with specification.
2.
Contract speed complies with specification.
3.
Performance of following are satisfactory:
a.
Starting, running.
b.
Controlled descent.
c.
Slide distances and stopping.
B. Personnel, Equipment and Instruments: Furnish personnel, equipment and
instruments to perform required tests. The following instruments may be
necessary to complete the tests:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/15/R1
Escalators
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
25 kg test weights (larger weights with dollies or wheels are acceptable if

weight is certified).
Multi meter.
500-volt Megger.
Alternating-current voltmeter and ammeter.
Celsius-calibrated thermometers (2 minimum on escalator test).
Precision tachometer.
Laptop computer, software and friction measurement devices for skirt
friction test.
Spring scale for combplate impact test.
Decibel meter for noise test.
Light meter for illumination test.
C. Escalators:
1.
Insulation-Resistance Test: Test safety circuit, and motor winding circuits
at 500 volts. Minimum resistance to ground shall be 1 megohm.
2.
Running Test: With equipment within 5 of ambient machine room
temperature, the following shall be accomplished:
a.
Insert thermometers in hoist motor windings. (Shield with cotton
waste.)
b.
Submit certified copy of type test based on Item 320.6 of ASME
A17.2b 2003 Inspectors Manual.
c.
Run unit with no load continuously for a period designated by
Inspector to verify adequacy (period shall not exceed 2 hours).
3.
Test Results:
a.
In all test conditions speed and performance specified shall be
met, stopping distance shall be maintained, and general riding
quality shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
b.
Temperature rise in windings shall not exceed 50 Celsius above
ambient.
D. Performance Guarantee: Should these tests develop any defects or poor
workmanship, any variance or non-compliance with the requirements of the
specified codes and/or ordinances or any variance or non-compliance with the
requirements of these specifications, the following work and/or repairs shall be
completed at no expense to the Employer.
1.
Replace all equipment that does not meet ASME A17.1 Code or
specification requirements.
2.
Perform all work and furnish all materials and equipment necessary to
complete the specified operation and/or performance.
3.
Perform all retesting required by the Engineer to verify the specified
operation and/or performance.
3.08
EMPLOYERS INFORMATION
A. Submittals: Provide written information and equipment necessary for proper

maintenance and adjustment of the equipment prior to issue of Taking-Over
Certificate, as follows:
1.
Straight-line wiring diagram of as-installed escalator circuits with index of
location and function of all components. Mount installation diagrams on
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/16/R1
Escalators
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.09
masonite panels or hang bound sets in racks and leave within the
applicable motor room. Provide three final corrected sets, one copy, one
CD ROM and one sepia copy within 90 days after issue of Taking-Over
Certificate for the Employer's file.
Lubrication instructions, including recommended grade of lubricants.
Parts catalogues for all replaceable parts including ordering forms and
instructions.
Complete operating and maintenance instructions for all controls and
switches provided.
Five sets of keys to operate each type of key switch provided.
Any special maintenance or trouble shooting tools or devices required for
maintenance on all escalators.
PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. Provide 4 training sessions at the jobsite for the designated Employers Escalator
operating, safety and security personnel. Train them to operate the escalators,
E.M.S. Systems, and emergency systems.
B. Provide all required training information, videos, CD-ROMS, manuals, training
classes, and training personnel to the provide Employers personnel with training
knowledge, and information on how to operate all of the escalator interface
functions and controls.
3.10
WARRANTY INSPECTION
A. At least 15 days prior to expiration of defect notification period, schedule final

inspection and retest with the Engineer. Requirement shall include close
examination of all equipment.
B. Replace, repair or adjust any equipment found defective and covered by
warranty prior to expiration of defect notification period.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 3100/17/R1
Escalators
SECTION 14 9182
GARBAGE CHUTES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
operations necessary for the complete supply and installation of garbage chutes.
The work of this Section shall be included within the Automatic solid Waste
Collection System.
1.
Section 14 9200
Automated Solid Waste Collection System
C.
1.02
References:
1.
National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) National Fire Code No. 82,
Incinerators, Waste and Linen Handling Systems and Equipment.
2.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) Chute Type Fire Door (GSPR), U.L.
10B, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3.
British Standards 1703
SUBMITTALS
A. Complete layout drawings of system, including detail drawings of garbage

chutes.
B. Shop Drawings of fabricated equipment and manufacturer's literature and data,
submit as one package:
1.
Garbage Chute.
2.
Hopper Doors
3.
Automatic Fire Dampers.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Criteria:
1.
Installer, or supplier of a service, has technical qualifications, experience,
and trained personnel and facilities to perform the specified work.
B. Product Criteria:
1.
Multiple Units: When 2 or more units of the same type or class of
materials or equipment are required, these units are products of 1
manufacturer.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9182/1
Garbage Chutes
2.
3.
Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use

components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final
assembled product.
a.
All components of an assembled unit need not be products of the
same manufacturer, but component parts which are alike are the
products of a single manufacturer.
b.
Components are compatible with each other and with the total
assembly for the intended service.
Nameplates: Nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name or identifiable
trademark securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment or name
or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise
permanently marked on each item of equipment.
C. Transport garbage in plastic bags.

D. Space Conditions: The Contractor shall check and review dimensions and
details of the space of the space allocated for garbage chutes in early phases of
construction. Any inconvenience shall for his considerations promptly submitted
to the Engineer.
E. Employee Instructions: Provide a qualified representative possessing complete
knowledge of system and equipment to train the employees in operation and
maintenance of system. Training period shall be as follows:
1.
4 hours instructing maintenance personnel on the operation and
maintenance of the system.
1.04
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish inspection and maintenance service on all equipment for a period of 1

year after Date of Substantial Completion that the system is to be put into daily
operation. This service shall consist of examination by competent and qualified
mechanics; cleaning, oiling, greasing, adjustments and replacement of any parts
required to place equipment in proper working order, (except parts made
necessary by improper use, accident or negligence). Maintenance to be
preformed monthly.
1.05
A. Protect chutes and accessories to prevent physical damage and deterioration

from other construction and from weather.
B. Provide covers for intake doors.
1.06
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to

repair or replace components of the garbage chutes that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not
limited to, the following:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9182/2
Garbage Chutes
1.
2.
Faulty operation of devices or components.

Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
B. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion or from date of
replacement of faulty components.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9182/3
Garbage Chutes
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CHUTE
A. Risers:
1.
Prefabricated refuse chute of 500 mm internal diameter, manufactured
from 1.5 mm thick, laser welded, stainless steel grade 304 L sheets. The
chute shall be supplied to site after complete factory fabrication. No
further fabrication works or welding shall be allowed on site.
2.
Provide slip type expansion joints in chute risers between floors, upper
section telescoping into section below.
3.
Support chutes by frames and fasteners at each floor to prevent sound
transmission to the floor slab as recommended by the manufacturer. Weld
and dress smooth connection joints between vertical shafts and horizontal
intakes with no projections that may catch or tear waste.
4.
Provide factory applied sound insulation with sprayed on sound
deadening material.
5.
Chute shall meet the NFPA 82 requirements.
B. Chute Vent: Full diameter aluminum vent extending 1200 mm above the roof
consisting a flashing, vent body, solid top cap with bird screen and roof curb 1.10
m x 1.10 m x minimum of 0.2 m high. The safety vent shall be designed to
normally exhaust the chute riser of odor, keep inclement elements out and (in the
event of rapid combustion or sudden explosion) provide complete relief within the
chute riser, so the intake doors below will not be blown open.
C. Provide Chute Fire Dampers as indicated on the Drawings.
1.
The base of the chute shall terminate with sliding gate type fire dampers
that carry the UL (1 hour 121 deg. C (250 deg. F)) "B" label, covering
size, design and construction of gate, frame and closing mechanism.
Dampers shall conform to UL 555.
2.
Provide chute fire dampers with an electric interlocking mechanism so that
no intake doors can be opened in the risers when the chute fire damper
has been activated.
D. Provide chute disinfecting and sanitizing device as indicated on the Drawings.
1.
Equip chute at top with copper flushing rings containing 1.5 mm diameter
spray holes, 65 mm on centers with extra holes which shall completely
drain ring when water is shut off. In lieu of flushing rings, chute may be
equipped with spray heads designed to flush inside of chute.
2.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary fittings to water supply piping
to connect the disinfecting and sanitizing device to the plumbing system.
3.
Equip bottom of chute with hinged access for cleaning and water removal.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9182/4
Garbage Chutes
2.02
CHUTE LOADING STATIONS
A. Fabricate loading station of minimum 16 guage (1.5mmthk). Station shall consist

of the intake door mounted in a single face plate. The intake door shall have pivot
type hinges, and be located as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Intake doors shall carry the UL (1 hour 121 deg. C (250 deg. F)) "B" label,
covering size, design and construction of the door, frame, latching, and closing
mechanism. Fabricate door of steel sheet and provide self-closing and selflatching devices. Door size shall be a minimum of 450mm x 350mm bottom
hinged for residential use and 450mm x 450mm side hinged for commercial use
with electro magnetic lock. Install door frame flush with finished wall.
1.
Provide electro magnetic lock.
2.
Provide a 37 x 45 cm access panel with an UL (1 hour 121 deg. C (250
deg. F)) "B" label, covering size, design and construction of the door,
frame latching and closing mechanism. Locate where indicated on the
Drawings.
3.
Surfaces of door and frames to be unmarred by lapped joints, bolted
frame, screws or rivets. Frame trim is to be of minimum 18 gauge type
aluminum-coated, cold-rolled, commercial steel sheet with the door.
4.
Door and frame are mounted into intake throat with sheet metal screws
into anchor plate and straps welded to intake throat making door and
frame readily removable without marring the finished wall.
5.
Door to be equipped with single-motion T-handle and keyed lock.
C. Provide intake doors, shroud door(s) and connector door, with electric
interlocking mechanism. The electric interlocking shall be of the fail-safe system
designed to allow only one chute door in a riser to be opened at a time. At all
times, the doors shall be positively locked until the attendant presses the push
button release for the door to be used. When this door is opened, the other doors
shall be electronically locked out while the chute is in use. The system shall be
UL tested.
1.
Each intake door shall have a pilot light showing when the door is locked.
2.
The shroud shall be no less than 45 degree angle, but shall be 60 degree
when possible.
3.
Provide switch at the bottom of the chute to lock out all the doors during a
cleaning period or maintenance.
D. Clearly letter on the intake door in letters approximately one inch high, the word
"GARBAGE". Raise or incise letters in door face in permanent manner. Raised
lettering shall be metal or plastic with metal attachment.
E. Outlets/Discharge: Chute to have stainless steel open end chute discharge
fireproof rolling steel door with 165F. fusible link hold open on an inclined steel
track at the bottom of the chute to close automatically when the ambient
temperature reaches 165F.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9182/5
Garbage Chutes
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A. Provide 19mm IPS flushing spray head and 13 mm sprinkler head above highest
intake. Provide additional 13mm sprinkler heads at every second intake counting
from the top.
B. Provide Disinfecting & Sanitizing unit for installation in line to the flushing spray
head complete with back flow prevention valve and electric control switch.
C. Offsets (bends) in the chute, if required, shall be made the same diameter as the
chute and have an additional layer of # 13 US gauge aluminized steel reinforcing
the impact area. Offsets are not to deviate more than 15o off the vertical axis of
the chute.
D. Sprinkler System: Chute shall be protected internally by automatic sprinklers.
This requires a sprinkler at or above the top intake door of the chute, and in
addition, a sprinkler shall be installed within the chute at alternate floor levels in
building over two stories in height with mandatory sprinkler located at the lowest
service level.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9182/6
Garbage Chutes
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
FABRICATION
A. Factory assemble chute with all joints welded and expansion joints at each floor.
Lock-seamed spiral pipe is acceptable.
B. Bolt intake doors in place on throats formed into chute tubes.
C. Flash chute sections inside the sections below with no bolts, clips or other
projections inside chute to snag the flow of material.
D. Preposition support frames to ensure proper intake levels and plumbness.
Reinforce and support separately discharge doors and offsets at impact area.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Chute Loading Stations:

1.
Set station flush with adjacent surface.
2.
Attach face plate to supports with stainless steel screws.
B. Hangers:
1.
Conveyance lines and air intake and exhaust ducts: When proper hanger
spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, structural steel
channels may be attached to joists or ribs and tubing suspended there
from.
2.
Vertical Runs: Support at each floor line and at the roof line.
C. Automatic Fire Dampers: Shall conform to NFPA 82.
D. Protection: Protect all finish parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearing
where accessible, from rust prior to operation by means of protective grease
coating and wrapping. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation.
Cover and protect equipment against dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical
injury. Clean exposed materials and equipment at completion of all work.
E. Assemble the chute and chute accessories in place; align and anchor in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
F. Run water supplies to the flushing and sprinkler heads.
G. Erect walls around chute after all other work is completed. Chute intake door
frames shall be set square and flush with the finish wall line before the walls are
erected.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9182/7
Garbage Chutes
3.03
TESTS
A. Demonstrate entire system will operate as specified. Test all lines in sequence by
the passage of five test runs of material from each station.
B. Demonstrate operation of station controls by a minimum of five test runs when
dispatch buttons are operated simultaneously at 2 or more separate stations.
C. Test chute components after installation. Operate doors, locks and interlock
systems to demonstrate that hardware is adjusted and electrical wiring is
connected correctly.
D. Test fire sprinklers and heat-and smoke-sensing devices for proper operation.
E. Operate sanitizing unit through one each complete cycle of chute use and
cleanup, and replenish chemicals or cleaning fluids in unit containers.
F. Complete test operations before installing enclosure.
G. The Engineer shall witness test.
H. After acceptance of testing by Engineer and installation of enclosure, the
Engineer shall perform final inspection.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9182/8
Garbage Chutes
SECTION 14 9200
AUTOMATED SOLID WASTE COLLECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. General: This section specifies materials and methods required for providing and
installing the automated solid waste collection system for the commercial office
buildings, hotel, and retail areas of the Barwa Financial District, Doha. The work
is to be performed shall include all materials and equipment required for a
complete operating installation by the specialist contractor. The main contractor
is responsible also to provide, in addition to the system itself, all required
excavation, civil and mechanical works, louvers, lighting, power socket outlets,
drainage, water, foundations, footings, embedded steel material, trenches, holes,
drains, etc for a complete and integrated system.
B. The work shall include design, engineer, supply and install all materials and
equipment required for a complete operation of the automated waste collection
including but not limited to;
1.
Gravity chute system with loading doors (Refer Section 14 9182)
2.
Waste storage section with discharge valves
3.
Air inlet valves
4.
Transport pipe and fittings
5.
Waste separators system with rotating screen.
6.
Dust filter and silencer
7.
Deodorization equipment
8.
Diverter valves for segregation
9.
Exhausters with non-return valve
10.
Waste compactors
11.
Containers and container conveyor system
12.
Compressed air system
13.
Electrical equipment complete with switchboards, starter, cabling material
14.
Supervisory and Control System
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Technical

Specification Sections.
B. Product data including rated capacities and duties of selected models, weights
(shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/1
Indicate dimensions, required clearances, noise generations, methods of

assembly of components and wiring connections.
C. Wiring diagrams for each item of equipment with electric power supply. Include
ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final
installation. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and
field-installed.
D. When reference to specifications, standards or methods of the respective
national or international associations and it implies that other national standards
or internationally accepted standards, which ensure an equal, or higher quality
than the standards mentioned will be accepted. The Contractor shall submit any
explanatory material upon request of the Engineer concerning the standards in
conformity of which his goods will be manufactured.
E. Shop Drawings including dimensioned drawings showing plans, elevations,
sections and large-scale details and co-ordination with building structure and
relationships with other construction. The drawings shall include system
diagrams to indicate whole waste collection system.
1.
Submit shop drawings for each item showing the following;
a.
Product identification, thicknesses, gauges, finishes.
b.
Dimensions and jointing details.
c.
Anchorage and securement systems.
d.
Interfaces with Works of other Sections.
F. Contractor's engineer shall stamp and sign each shop drawing ensuring that the
assemblies specified herein are provided in accordance with the Suppliers
design.
G. It is imperative that the Contractor's engineer review and coordinate shop
drawings with interfacing Works of other Sections specified to ensure proper
interface with the Works of this Section.
H. Safety data sheets:
1.
Submit safety data sheets in accordance with the Conditions of the
Contract.
2.
Submit safety data sheets for inclusion with project record documents.
Keep one (1) copy of safety data sheets on Site for reference by the
workers.
I. Operating and maintenance instructions:
1.
Submit operating and maintenance instructions for inclusion in the
Operating and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract. Operating and maintenance instructions shall include, but shall
not be limited to the following;
a.
Operating and maintenance instructions for all components of the
Works of this Section.
b.
Include list of products that may cause damage or be detrimental
to the performance of the Works of this Section and corresponding
repair or correction methods in the operating and maintenance
instructions.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/2
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to

specified standards.
B. Supplier Qualifications:
1.
The Automated Waste Collection System contractor must have completed
equipment installations similar in material, design and extent to that
indicated for the Project which have resulted in installations with a record
of successful in-service performance.
2.
The design shall take into consideration the waste generated by all
tenants and tenements in the development from the offices, hotel,
commercial, retail and restaurants. The waste shall not include for
cardboards, and used furniture since these will be moved separately
manually
C. Installers Qualifications:
1.
Specialist Contractor shall be thoroughly conversant with referenced
standards, laws, by-laws and regulations which govern, and capable of
workmanship of best grade of modern shop and field practice known to
recognized manufacturer's specializing in the type of Works of this
Section.
2.
Works of this Section shall be performed by workers especially trained
and experienced in this type of Works. Have a full time, senior, qualified
representative at the site to direct the Works of this Section.
D. Quality control benchmarks:
1.
Provide quality control benchmarks in accordance with the Conditions of
the Contract and relevant Section.
2.
Co-ordinate Works required for quality control benchmark with all Works
of other Sections. Make all adjustments as directed by the Engineer.
3.
Do not proceed with the Works of this Section until the quality control
benchmarks have been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. The
reviewed and accepted quality control benchmarks shall be retained and
shall serve as the minimum acceptable standard for the Works of this
Section. The quality control benchmarks shall be incorporated into the
finished Works of this Section if so accepted by the Engineer.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE CERTIFICATES:
A. Submit quality assurance certificates in accordance with the Conditions of

Contract.
1.05
MAINTENANCE
service for the system and components shall be provided for a period of 2 years
from the Date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/3
B. This service shall include

1.
components.
2.
Examining every fortnight, clean, adjust and lubricate all equipment as per
3.
the manufacturer of the original equipment. .
4.
loss of time.
5.
6.
Include 24-hours-per-day, 7-days-per-week emergency callback service.
7.
1.06
SPARE PARTS, TOOLS AND MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT
A. Supply two new complete sets of tools complete with lockable tool boxes for the
proper operation, routine maintenance and adjustments of all components and
equipment.
B. All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be provided in original
packing, clearly labeled and referenced. Provide complete schedules of spare
parts and maintenance equipment clearly cross-referenced with the as-built
record drawings and with operation and maintenance instruction manuals.
C. All spare parts, tools and maintenance equipment shall be as recommended by
the equipment manufacturer and shall be subject to the final approval of the
Engineer.
1.07
WARRANTY

warranty period. This warranty shall cover the systems, operating equipment and
other related devices.
B. Any fault or failure due to defective or improper material, equipment,
workmanship or Contractors design which may develop shall be made good
forthwith, by and at the expense of the Contractor, including all other damage
done to areas, materials and other systems resulting such fault or failure.
C. Warranty Period: 5 years from Date of Substantial Completion.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/4
1.08
A. Deliver and store equipment and large accessories on factory-installed shipping

skids and small accessories in safe condition till installation.
B. Coordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead
for strategic off the ground, under cover storage locations.
C. Do not load any area beyond the design limits.
D. Adequately protect and crate all components against damage, dirt, disfigurement
and weather during delivery and storage. Replace products damaged during
delivery, storage and handling.
E. Protect products from damage and moisture. Provide non-staining blocking and
protective covers. Protect holes and reglets from water and dew accumulation.
F. Cover and protect the Works of other Sections in the area of the Works of this
Section from damage.
G. Protect the installed Works of this Section and on completion the Works of other
Sections shall be examined and damage shall be remedied to the complete
satisfaction of the Engineer.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A. Envac Centralsug AB
Sweden, Branch offices in Dubai, Doha
www.envac.net, info@envac.ae,
B. Recogida Neumtica de Residuos
Spain
E-Mail: neumatica@rosroca.com
www.rosroca.com
C. Nexaldes Sdn Bhd (Stream)
Malaysia
www.nexaldes.com
D. TransVac Systems
U.S.A.
www.transvacsys.com
2.02
GENERAL
A. Definitions
1.
The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilized in
this section:
a.
VWDS acronym for Vacuum Waste Disposal System.
b.
Pipe net means mild steel pipes used to transport the waste from
the inlet stations and discharge valves to the collection station.
c.
MS shall mean Mild Steel Pipes.
d.
Chute means garbage chute in the building installed by others or
main contractors.
e.
Hopper Door means volumetric controlled inlet door to allow
customers to dispose waste into the garbage chute (installed by
others).
f.
Storage Section means temporary storage section below the
garbage chute used to collect the waste prior to emptying into the
pipe net for transportation to the collection station. The storage
section is connected to the discharge valve.
g.
Level Sensor means analog level indicator in storage section to
indicate the collection station that waste has reached maximum
storage capacity in the storage section. The analog sensor
monitors the rising level of the Waste in the storage section to
provide data to the collection system through the SCADA network
interface so that the collection cycle can be monitored and updated
for optimal cycle times.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/6
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
DV means Discharge valve which prevents waste or Waste from

entering into the pipe net and normally is closed. Disposed waste
is temporarily stored on the valve. The valve is opened when the
waste is collected.
AV means Air Inlet Valve which is opened before the emptying
sequence and this valve opens allowing air to be sucked into the
pipe net from the atmosphere creating the negative pressure and
required air speed in the pipe.
Transport Air means the air flow that moves the waste through
the pipe net.
Collection Cycle means the collection pattern for the installation.
Collection Station (CS) shall mean the receiving station for the
waste delivered through the pipe system.
Cyclone / Waste Separator means a type of separator for
removal of material / particles from the air stream. The air laden
waste entering the cyclone from the pipe net is directed to flow in a
spiral causing the particles to fall out and collect at the bottom and
the air exits from the top of the separator.
Rotating Screen means a part of a standard separator which
prevents coarse and solid particles from the waste stream from
reaching the exhausters.
Compactor means a device which compact the waste into a
container.
Trolley means a transport wagon for container shifting and
movement.
Control System mean all electrical and electronic equipment units
in the collection station. Control cabinets, control boxes, software,
cables and junction boxes are considered part of the control
system.
Dust Filter means a two stage dust filter which removes the fine
dust particles from the exhaust air.
Deo filter means a two stage active carbon filter which removes
odour from the exhausted air.
Silencer reduces noise from the exhausted air before being let
out into the atmosphere.
System Cycle Time means the optimum cycle time required to
empty all the inlets with Waste during one whole working day
period eg. 24 hours.
Downtime means the time period when the collection process is
stopped by an alarm situation or regular preventive maintenance.
ECC means Electrical Control Centre cabinet with PLC, operator
panel and instruments.
EPC means cabinet with main circuit breakers and other circuit
breakers.
Exhauster means transport radial fan used for the transport
suction.
B. Products specified are to establish performance and quality required. These

requirements are not intended to restrict submission for substitutions in
accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/7
C. Acceptance of products from other manufacturers will be subject to review by the

Engineer, for conformity with the specifications and meeting the physical
characteristics of the specified products. During this review of alternate products
the Engineer will require submission of technical data verifying that all specified
standards and products are met, submission of alternative profile samples similar
to that detailed, and a list of references of successfully completed projects of
similar size in the last five (5) years. Include compliance with referenced
standards. Submittals which do not include adequate data for the product
evaluation will not be considered.
D. The compliant Tender shall not include any alternatives and shall conform to the
requirements of the specification Section. Substitutions shall be clearly identified
in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract.
2.03
FEEDING SYSTEM GARBAGE CHUTES
A. Refer to section 14 9182

B. Inlet Hopper Doors
1.
Waste can be disposed into loading doors any time. An interlock control
for the loading doors is generally provided. With this control, loading doors
of the same waste chute are locked by electro-mechanical device when
the discharge valve at the bottom is opened. Upon completion of Waste
discharge after a few seconds, electro-mechanical locks of all the
concerned loading doors will be released for normal operation.
2.
The waste collected from commercial areas including retail areas,
restaurants and hotels are disposed in side-hinged loading doors through
separate chutes located in individual areas. In case outdoor inlets are
provided which also house a storage section which connects into the
transport pipe. The indoor inlet doors for the towers are bottom hinged
and have a maximum opening size of 380 x 440mm when in open position
and the outdoor inlet doors for retail are side hung with a maximum
opening size of 350 x 350mm when opened. This is to control the size of
the deposited waste. The inlet doors are interlocked with the discharge
valve which prevents the valve from opening when an inlet door is open.
2.04
FEEDER & PIPING SYSTEM
A. Storage Section Below Garbage Chute

1.
Made from Mild Steel and shall be 500mm diameter with auxiliary air
intake levels
2.
The storage section is a connection pipe between the garbage chute
located in each building and the discharge inlet valve located in the
ground floor.
3.
It is the temporary storage location prior to discharge of waste into the
transport pipe.
4.
Stored refuse is disposed to transport pipeline from the chute by
automatic control.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/8
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
A gravity chute shall be installed vertically and connected to the discharge

valve. If any bent installation is needed between ceiling of valve room and
discharge valve, only two bends each of maximum 15 degrees is allowed.
Refuse storage capacity per chute shall be not more than 30 deg in slope
and 0.9m3
All refuse shall be transported to transport pipe via a discharge valve. The
discharge valve is air-tight type when closed to prevent air flow into the
pipe.
The discharge valve shall be of flap valve type.
A level indicator shall be installed in the storage section above the
discharge valve
B. The Pipe system contains

1.
One common pipe transports the waste from all the inlet points to the
central collection station. The pipe length and routing is to be coordinated
from the individual buildings to the centralised collection plant room as
shown on drawings.
2.
The pipe transport system is installed at ceiling level in the technical
gallery / underground as the case maybe. The pipe size has a diameter
of minimum 500 millimetres. All pipe sizes shall be confirmed by the
supplier and by the Contractor who shall be held responsible for the
proper operation of the system.
a.
The transport pipe shall be as straight as possible considering
initial cost, minimizing friction loss of the pipe and preventing
clogging with the refuse.
b.
Bends shall be mild steel, hardened boron steel or ni-hard steel
and factory manufactured and not mitr welded at site
c.
Material and thickness of the pipe shall be designed by the
Specialist contractor and taking into account of wear and
corrosion.
C. Discharge Valve and Air Intake Valve
1.
The system contains:
a.
Air inlet valves (AV) to create an air flow in the pipe system
b.
Discharge valves (DV) for controlling the input of waste into the
pipe system
1)
The discharge valve separates the intermediate waste
storage section from the transport pipe network. The valve
remains closed in between the pre-set 7-10 sec discharge
cycles that release the waste into the transport pipe.
2)
The air inlet valve, located at the end of each transport pipe
branch, is normally installed at basement level in buildings,
in close proximity to the last discharge valve of the branch
or in each discharge valve inlet for individual residential
towers as the case may be. The valve remains closed in
between the waste discharge cycles.
3)
The sound level caused by the air entering the valve at high
speed, is considerable and therefore the valve is equipped
with a silencer. The transport air enters the valve via the
1m free area air intake louver (connected to the free
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/9
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
atmosphere). These rooms are designed for a negative

pressure of 2 kPa and made of concrete cast in situ and not
block walls.
All valves are heavy duty to remain air tight during the
lifetime of the installation. Discharge valves (DV) are
dimensioned to withstand the impact from falling waste in
high rise buildings.
A central control panel at the collection station controls the
operation of the valves. The electronic control panel in the
respective valve room verifies and executes the orders
transmitted from the central control panel.
The respective valve is actuated by pneumatic cylinder.
Electric cables for transmission of electronic signals
between the collection station and the valves are extended
along the transport pipe network.
Tubes for compressed air connect the compressor in the
collection station with all discharge valves and air inlet
valves, and are extended along the waste pipe network.
D. Control Unit - Air Inlet Valve and Discharge Valve

1.
This Unit shall be installed adjacent to the discharge valve and shall
monitor and control:
a.
The air inlet valve
b.
The discharge valve
c.
The Waste loading doors.
2.
The control unit sends messages to the control panel of the garbage
chute supplier and sends and receives signals with the following
commands.
a.
lock all Waste inlet doors at upper levels when the emptying cycle
is in operation or the DV/ AV is under maintenance
b.
lock the DV and AV valve from operation when the garbage chute
is under maintenance or if there is fire and smoke in the building
E. Conduit PEL 50/44
1.
A HDPE tube to protect the control and distribution cables that is placed
along the pipe system between the control boxes of the valves. The
cables to control the system and the compressed air tubing will be inside
this protecting tube. The tube is made of plastics. Electrical cables for
transmitting signals between the collection station and all valve control
boxes will be laid in 50 mm thick plastic conduits along the pipe net.
2.
Control cables: The network has the control communication mode of
LONWORK. The control cables are connected to collection station control
equipment. Control cable that will be inside the protecting tubing, along
the pipe system is used to connect the control unit for the valves with the
electrical control centre in the terminal.
3.
Pneumatic pipes: Plastic PEL tube will be inside the protecting tubing,
along the pipe system. The compressed air tube is used to connect the
control unit for the valves with the compressed air unit in the terminal. On
the tube there are needed couplings and points for control, for troubleshooting and control of the compressed air distribution.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/10
2.05
COLLECTION STATION
A. The collection station is situated as shown on drawings. Inside the collection

station, waste is separated from air by means of waste separator. Waste will fall
down into a compactor for compaction in order to reduce the volume and then be
pushed into a totally-sealed waste container for temporary storage prior to
collection by arm-lift truck from time to time. Big particles that may still be carried
by the separated air is screened at the air outlet of the waste separator. The air
is then filtered and cleaned by dust filters and deodorizers to remove dust
particles and smell before final discharge into the open air. Appropriate silencers
shall be provided along the air pipe line to eliminate the noise generated by
exhausters. Therefore, high quality filtration, odour control and silencing systems
are required to have better environment of the neighbourhood.
B. In the collection station there is equipment for:
1.
Generating compressed air Air Compressor
2.
Creating air flow and negative pressure - Exhausters
3.
Separating air and waste Refuse Separator & Rotating Screen
4.
Diverter valve for diversion of waste fraction into separate containers
5.
Compacting waste Refuse Compactor
6.
Receiving and storing waste - Container
7.
Filtering the exhaust air & Reducing unwanted odors Dust and Deo
Filters
8.
Controlling the collection process Control System
C. Compressed Air System
1.
All automatically operated valves such as air inlet valves, discharge
valves and sectioning valves shall be operated by compressed air
cylinders. Air compressor for central supply of compressed air to operate
the valves. The installation shall include air dryer, after cooler, filters, etc
for a complete compressor installation. Pipe system for compressed air to
all valves operated by compressed air.
D. Exhausters
1.
The exhauster shall be provided to generate air flow for transporting the
waste from the individual buildings to the centralized collection plant.
Exhausters of centrifugal type including motors, mounted on steel frames
vibro-isolated from the floor.
a.
Data for airflow, pressure (vacuum), motor/fan speed and required
power shall be included in the tender.
b.
The exhausters shall be connected to obtain the required airflow
and vacuum for the transportation of refuse.
c.
In addition to the exhausters in operation one stand-by exhauster
shall be installed. The exhausters shall be installed so that anyone
of the exhausters can be used as stand-by and automatically
replace anyone of the exhausters in operation.
d.
The exhauster housing shall have a wall thickness of not less than
8 mm and be provided with inspection openings.
e.
The exhauster impeller shall be electro-dynamically balanced.
f.
Electric power supply for the exhauster motor is AC 415 V, 3
phase, 50 Hz.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/11
2.
The exhausters are installed in series with variable speed drive and shall
be lodged in the central collection station to induce the necessary air flow
and cater for changes in pressure requirements due to differences in the
length of waste conveyance Pipenet. Two exhausters will normally be in
operation with one standby.
E. Refuse Separator and Rotating Screen

1.
Refuse and air transported in the transport pipe are separated by the
refuse separator in the collection station. The rotating screen shall
separate small particles from the air separated by the separator.
2.
The waste separator is used for the primary separation of the waste from
the transport air. It is constructed of steel and equipped with waste level
sensors.
3.
The rotating separator, driven by an electric motor, is situated on top of
the waste separator, and separates light waste particles and coarse dust
from the transport air.
4.
The Waste separator is used to separate the waste and air. It will have a
Waste treatment capacity 150 cubic meters / hour, and is installed on the
upper level of the central collection station.
5.
Waste and air transported in the transport pipe are separated by the
Waste separator in the collection station. The cyclone Waste separator is
used for the primary separation of waste from transport air. Bolted on top
of the cyclone a rotating separator helps separating light particles from the
outgoing air and to prevent Waste build-up at the air outlet. Dust
concentration of air discharged after the rotating screen is approx 0.1 g/
m3.
a.
The Waste separator is of cyclone-type with a rotating screen, in
order to maximise separation efficiency.
b.
The separator casing is fabricated of mild steel.
c.
The separator is equipped with anti vibration mountings for noise
reduction.
d.
The separator is equipped with inspection opening and level
indicators.
6.
It is equipped with waste level sensors, inspection opening and when
mounted on floor structure, vibration dampers. Its lower part is vacuum
tight connected to the waste compactor.
F. Refuse Compactor,
1.
Collected waste shall be compacted by a compactor, which is operated by
a hydraulic unit. Compactor shall be operated under negative pressure
and be equipped with automatic system for cleaning behind the packer
plate.
2.
Compaction ratio shall be designed between two and three. Completion of
compaction shall be detected by cylinder pressure.
3.
Container shall be made of mild steel. Dimensions 5.7m x 2.5m Diameter
4.
No of containers shall be determined so as to store total daily amount of
refuse per collection station
5.
Volume of one container shall be not less than 23m3
6.
A container carrier shall be provided to move the container position in
front of the compactor, if more than one container is required.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/12
7.
8.
9.
A container carrier shall be made of mild steel

The waste compactor is situated below the cyclone separator and
compact the waste into the container. Its upper part is connected to the
cyclone separator, and one of its lateral parts to the waste container, all
vacuum tight. The opening at the top of the compactor is directly
connected to the separator so as to ensure airproof system and negative
pressure. There is a hydraulically operated attachment and locking device
at the compactor outlet to lock the Waste container to the compactor so
as to keep airproof system and negative pressure during operation. The
compactor is made mainly of mild steel and is primed and painted.
Compactor Control Box, CB3
a.
The CB3 shall monitor and control the compactor including the
container door. The control panel shall be utilised by a PLC
installed inside the CB3. At the front panel, switches and indication
lamps shall be provided to be used for container shifting.
G. Container, Carrier
1.
The airtight container works as both a storage and transport unit. It has a
vacuum tight connection to a compactor that pushes and compacts the
waste into the container. It has a frame made to fit on a truck with a hook
lift device. Design of the containers shall be suitable for handling by a 24tonne GVW vehicle equipped with "Ampliroll arm" or equivalent for roll-on
and roll-off operation and for transportation by the vehicle without violating
any Road Traffic Regulations.
2.
The containers are made of steel and provided with frames at the base for
roll on-roll off loading and unloading onto hook-lift trucks.
3.
The connection between the compactor and container is hermetically
sealed, thereby eliminating contact with the atmosphere inside the station.
4.
Full waste containers, which are stored for transport to the final waste
disposal site, remain closed. The only time that the waste in the container
is in contact with the air in the collection station is when the container is
disconnected from the compactor docking unit and until the container
opening has been closed, i.e. during approximately 5 min.
H. Dust Filter & Deodorization Equipment
1.
Before the transport air used during the collection process is released
back into the atmosphere the air undergoes the following treatment:
a.
Step 1 separation of large particles
b.
Step 2 sound damping
c.
Step 3 separation of fine dust
d.
Step 4 odour removals via active carbon filter
2.
Two step dust filters are installed to clean the transport air from dust and
to protect the carbon filter. Resulting in dust content below 0.1 mg /
Normal m, i.e. less than the dust content in the free atmosphere normally
registered in European residential areas.
3.
A two bank carbon filter is installed downstream of the dust filters to
eliminate odours. The total amount of carbon is approx 2000 kg (1000 kg
in each bank).The active carbon filter reduces the content of gases and
aromatic aerosols (and odours) by 95-97%. The active carbon filters is
normally replaced every 9 months to year.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/13
4.
5.
2.06
The Dust filter is installed downstream of the exhausters. The dust filter
and active carbon filter shall be enclosed in an air-tight chamber including
acoustic lined fire doors. The complete dust filter installation consists of
cassette bag type filters for dry filtration, which is installed on the pressure
side of the exhausters. The filter is installed in a concrete room. There are
filters for installation in walls made of concrete. The filters are high
efficiency extended surface filters. This gives a low air flow through the
filter media, which ensures low pressure drop, high dust holding capacity,
long lifetime for the filters. The filter consists of a holding frame and an
easily handled cartridge. The holding frame of galvanised sheet-metal is
supplied with internal and external gaskets and retaining clips to hold the
cartridge in place.
a.
Air velocity shall be less than 0.5 m/sec.
b.
Deodorization material shall be a granular activated carbon.
c.
Deodorization equipment casing shall be made of mild steel.
The active carbon filter is designed to remove odour from the exhaust air.
The active carbon filter absorbs all the odorous compounds. The
mechanism is by physical absorption i.e. odorous compounds are
attached to the pores of the carbon material in the filters. The exhaust air
after going through the process of passing through the two stage dust
filter process stated above and will pass through two identical banks of
active carbon filters in series. Each bank will be made up of four identical
modules assembled side by side. Each module holds 12 identical filter
cells.
OPERATION
A. Emptying the system: First the correct numbers of exhausters are started
depending on which inlets to collect waste from. Air inlet valves open to create an
air stream to the collection station. When the minimum required air speed in the
collection station is reached the discharge valve that is connected to a chute
opens and the waste falls down into the air stream. After a preset time the
discharge valve closes and the system waits another preset time before the
waste from the next chute is collected. Normally, the system starts to collect the
waste from the chute closest to the collection station and then works its way
further out in the system.
B. Collection cycle: The system will be started with different methods. These are:
1.
Time-based: The collection cycle starts at preset times independent on
the amount of waste actually in the system. The collection cycle is
controlled by start times for the different branches. Should have a
minimum of thrice a day collection cycles.
2.
Level based: The collection cycle starts when the volume of waste in one
or more specific gravity chutes triggers a level switch. The collection cycle
then either collects the waste from all chutes, from chutes specified in a
program or only chutes with a level indication.
3.
Combination: These two different collection modes can be combined and
the system may then, for example, start at a predefined time and collect
the waste only from the chutes with a level indication.
One or more levels indicators may also interrupt a predefined collection
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/14
cycle in another part of the system. When the wastes from these chutes
have been collected, the system resumes the interrupted collection cycle.
C. Changing containers: Shifting between full and empty container(s) can be done
by fixed time periods or when a container(s) is full. Information (alarm) can be
sent to the container collecting company.
D. The Automated Refuse Collection System (ARCS) to be installed in the Barwa
Financial Centre Project is a single collection terminal system, with many
discharge valves connected and a substantial amount of refuse to be collected
each day. The refuse output from each and every discharge valve will vary
depending upon the type of use of the building since most are commercial highrise buildings, with retail commercial inlets connected to the system.
E. The refuse output can also vary from day to day in each discharge valve. Thus
the operation control of the ARCS must be advanced and efficient in order to
maintain a reliable and problem free collection process. In addition to a reliable
operation, special measures shall be implemented in order to reduce the energy
consumption and to minimize the maintenance of the system.
F. The mode of emptying the inlets shall be flexible and include at least the
following options:
1.
Cycle the valves in a pre-determined sequence
2.
Cycle the valve based on actual amount of refuse stored on top of each
discharge valve
3.
Possibilities program priority any discharge valve
4.
Possibilities to operate the discharge valves manually, with push buttons
at the control cabinet in the collection station. This is to be used in
emergency situations only.
5.
As far as the Cycle based on actual amount of refuse stored is concerned,
level sensors shall be installed in the storage section of each discharge
valve and in the storage tanks. Such level sensors shall measure the
amount of refuse temporary stored on top of the discharge valve and
transmit the information to the control system.
6.
The readings from the level sensors shall be analyzed by the computer
and the emptying pattern shall be adapted to such readings.
G. The Tenderer shall submit a comprehensive description the emptying process
including available facilities and options and a substantiation that the Operation
control is able to cope with such a large system.
2.07
WASTE DATA
A. The project will be served by one centralised system terminal handling about 13
T of waste per day from its 9 towers, hotel and retail units along the podium.
B. Waste contents: The waste collection system shall be capable to collect and
deliver waste of two types an organic fraction and a recyclable fraction in an
automatic, safe and effective way. The recyclable mixed waste includes
newspapers, magazines, clothes, plastics, cans, glass bottles etc. The other
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/15
fraction will be organic and bio-degradable waste like food waste etc.
Nevertheless, the following exceptions should always be avoided in the systems
and handled in a separate way:
1.
Bulky waste
a.
Furniture, refrigerators etc should be collected separately.
2.
Hard articles
a.
Stones, lumps of metal scraps such scrap iron.
3.
Combustible and inflammable substances likely to cause fire or
explosions
a.
Charcoals, burning cigarette butts, oil such as gasoline, kerosene,
cooking oil, portable and disposable spray cans, matches and
lighters.
4.
Viscous articles
a.
Binders and adhesives such as paste and rapid binding adhesives.
5.
Spongy articles
a.
Sponges, cushions that tend to expand and block the chute and/or
transport pipe.
6.
Articles emitting an offensive odor
a.
Animal faces and urine, bodies of house pets and rats.
7.
Dangerous chemicals
a.
Corrosive and poisonous substances such as acidic and alkaline
solutions.
C. Besides, liquid such as soup, juice and drinks should be mixed with other type of
waste prior to their disposal into the waste collection system.
D. Waste density and air speed: The system shall be designed for the following
waste density and air speed.
Fraction Type
Density [kg/m3]
Air speed [m/s]
2.08
Residential
150
21
Commercial
100
21
PLANNING AND EXECUTION
A. The towers shall be equipped with waste chutes in accordance with the
provisions indicated on the architectural layout plans. There would be one
loading door on each floor which is to be supplied by the specialist garbage chute
contractor as per Section 14 9182 and the Architectural and Supplier
requirements
B. When waste bags are disposed into the loading door of waste chute, they will fall
by gravity into the storage section at the bottom of the chute. The level sensors
and discharge valve at the bottom regulate storage evacuation cycles with
reference to the level of refuse inside storage section and/or pre-set time
schedule. This temporary storage process has the advantage of maintaining
sufficient waste volume for subsequent waste evacuation process. Below each
discharge valve, the waste chute merges into the transportation pipe in the
basements.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/16
C. Collection station
1.
The Automated Waste Collection station is located in the areas as
demarcated in the drawings. The station shall house the compactor and
the waste container.
2.
Along the frontage of the central waste collection station, an obstruct-free
loading area of 15m long is required for parking and manipulation of the
waste truck when collecting waste container from the plant.
3.
The construction of the container hall shall require good leveling of the
base on even terrain, where waste truck can successfully load the filled
container and unload the empty one as well.
4.
The control room, sanitary utilities, exhauster fans, compressors and high
voltage panel boards are located in the collection station.
D. Waste Transportation
1.
According to our estimates, about 2 no of waste containers are required
daily to transport all the collected waste.
2.
In order to ensure effective waste transportation, particular attention
should be paid to the traveling time required for each round trip to and
from the landfill during normal and busy hours. Thereafter, sufficient
number of hook-lift waste trucks must be available to support the
operation.
2.09
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
A. Inlet net: The inlet points of the system will be placed indoors or outdoors...
B. The requirements of disposal inlets shall be as follows:
Inlet location user No. of inlets
Maximum bag
size (litre)
Offices
As required
30
Commercial
As required
60
Inlet door type

clear opening
(mm)
Hopper type 450 x
350 mm
Hopper size 450 x
450 mm
C. At the bottom of each chute, there is a discharge valve completed with storage
section to temporarily store the refuse and discharge refuse to the central refuse
collection system according to the system control.
D. Pipe system: The dimension of the pipes in the pipe system is DN 400 [mm]
E. Electrical and control system. The control system consists of:
1.
Electrical and control equipment controlling the collection station
equipment
2.
A communication system communicating with the valve control units
3.
Valve control units controlling the valves and inlets
4.
An operator panel for showing status, setting parameters, manual control
and logging relevant events in the system.
5.
BMS visualization system
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/17
F. The electrical system is dimensioned for:

1.
Voltage and frequency: 230/400 VAC, 50 Hz.
2.
Motor starting equipment: Soft start / Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/18
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Test equipment at site but do no proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
B. Test of system performance and function: The final test of the system shall be
done in three stages such as Visual Inspection, Manual Function Test and
Automatic Function Test. Tests can be made separately or at the same time. All
tests will be performed according to the suppliers procedures.
1.
Visual Inspection: The visual inspection includes a check of all system

parts according to this specification, as for:
a.
Design
b.
Completeness of mechanical, electrical and PLC elements
c.
Correct installation
d.
Material, finish, and surface
e.
Tolerance, anchoring and fixing
f.
Accessibility and serviceability
g.
A detailed acceptance report is produced.
2.
Manual Function Test: The manual function test includes:

a.
Check of all mechanical functions
b.
Test of main components individually
c.
Test run of the system in manual mode
d.
Automatic Function Test: The automatic function test includes:
a.
Check of all automatic functions
b.
System test run in automatic mode
c.
System test run in emergency mode
d.
3.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions.

B. The chamber should be designed for a positive pressure of 2,0 kPa (200 mm wg)
C. Generally, all walls and ceilings in the exhauster room should be covered with
acoustic panels 100 mm thick made of rock-wool 70kg/m3 density.
D. In the container hall, the panels should start 0, 5 - 1 m above the floor level (to
allow cleaning with water).
E. Typical noise levels when the system is in operation:
1.
Exhauster room: 105 dB(A)
2.
Container/separator hall: 65 dB(A)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/19
F. The sound level in the control room should not exceed 40 dB (A).
G. Doors. All doors should be made of steel and have a sound reduction of 35 dB or
more. Doors to the filter chamber and control room should be airtight.
H. Container/separator hall: The air should be changed at least twice every hour.
I. Exhauster room: The air should be changed at least once an hour.
J. When the exhausters are in operation, the ventilation should be increased and
the excess heat should be ventilated away.
K. The heat emission can be estimated at 7% of the power rating for the exhauster
motors in operation.
L. Heat emission from the compressor unit in the exhauster room is usually
negligible.
M. Control room: The temperature should be kept between 18oC and 26oC. Air
conditioning should be provided. The room should be dust free (computer
equipment).
N. Air conditioning shall be provided in the container / exhauster room / separator
hall.
O. Container hall: Drainage on each side of the compactor near the ram opening, in
the pit for the container trolley and at the container doors. One additional drain
with one water tap for general cleaning.
P. Exhauster room: Drainage for the compressor unit.
Q. Separate power supply for the refuse collection equipment terminating at the
isolator in the exhauster room .
R. Container/separator hall floors:
1.
Steel toweling and dust binding surface treatment.
2.
Sloped floor around drains.
3.
Rounded corners between floor and walls.
S. The Control room should be provided with:
1.
One computer table.
2.
One desk with drawers.
3.
Two office chairs and bookshelf.
4.
Two telephone lines for remote control and communication.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/20
3.03
DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide services of manufacturers authorized service representatives to instruct

and train owners personnel in operation and maintenance.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
14 9200/21
SECTION 21 0500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes the following:

1.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping
systems.
2.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
3.
Sleeves.
4.
Escutcheons.
5.
Grout.
6.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
7.
Painting and finishing.
8.
Concrete bases.
9.
Supports and anchorages.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment

rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof,
spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include
finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop
locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from
physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in
chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from
weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to
outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated
shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/1
Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
2.
1.03
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
SUBMITTALS

1.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
2.
Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to

AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2.
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher
electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is
approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and
conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or
efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.05
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps
through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to
prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging
and bending.
1.06
COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in pouredin-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items
requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels
and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/2
1.07
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Water Storage
1.
Fire reserve, shall be maintained as raw fresh water for the internal fire
suppression systems and for minimum one hour.
2.
Water Reserve Calculation
a.
Buildings areas are classified according to NFPA code as light and
ordinary hazard group 1 & 2.
b.
Sprinkler head coverage area: 12m2.
c.
Operation area 232m2.
d.
Design Density:
1)
Light Hazard: 0.1 U.S gpm/sq ft. (4.1 L/m2)
2)
Ordinary Hazard Group 1: 0.13 U.S. gpm/sq ft. (5.3
L/min/m2)
3)
Ordinary Hazard Group 2: 0.18 U.S. gpm/sq ft. (7.3
L/min/m2)
e.
Duration of operation 60 minutes.
f.
Minimum residual pressure at the most remote sprinkler: 15 Psi
(1bar).
g.
Maximum area covered per control station: 4800m2.
h.
Residual pressure for landing valves and fire hydrants is 7 bas P
12 bars.
i.
Hydraulically designed Standpipes and Automatic sprinkler
systems shall be designed to provide the required minimum water
flow and residual pressure at the most remote areas using Elite
software for fire systems.
HAZARD CLASSIFICATION
Residential
Light Hazard Occupancy
Offices
Amenities
Retail
Ordinary Hazard Occupancy (Group 2)
Parking
Ordinary Hazard Occupancy (Group 1)
3.
4.
5.
Hourly Water Consumption of Fire Suppression Systems

a.
Sprinklers: 500 U.S gpm.
b.
Wet risers (3 risers): 1000 U.S. gpm (maximum).
c.
External Fire Hydrant (3 fire hydrants each 250 gpm): 750 U.S.
gpm.
d.
Total: 2250 U.S. gpm, for one hour, approximately 511m3/hr.
Combined Central underground reservoirs, divided into compartments at
central, internal plant room at the lower basement level to hold the water
required for plumbing, fire suppression as follows:
a.
Fire Water: One hour raw water demand for fire systems (511
cu.meters).
b.
25% of the daily domestic water demand for all towers, and one
day demand for the parking levels, retail podium floors and
mosque.
City mains/tankers filling points will be provided to fill this reservoir.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/3
6.
7.
8.
9.
Beside the central domestic and fire storage reservoirs, four fire reservoirs
at the podium roof each of 300 cu. Meters capacity will be used to serve
the following towers:
a.
Tower 1, 2 and 7 will be served with one tank.
b.
Tower 3, 4, and 8 will be served with one tank.
c.
Tower 5, 6 and 9 will be served with one tank.
d.
Hotel Tower will be served with one tank.
High rise towers (above 26 floors, 5, 6, 7 & 8), will be served with fire and
domestic tanks at the intermediate mechanical floor levels.
The Intermediate will hold minimum 50% of the hourly fire demand (150
cu. Meters capacity).
These tanks will receive inflow from the central water reservoirs.
B. Fire Pumps and Pumping Scheme

1.
Central Transfer pump set with a capacity equals 100% of the main fire
pumps capacity will be used to draw water from the raw, central tank and
transfer it to the podium level fire tanks (four tanks).
2.
Fire pump sets (electric, diesel and jockey pump) will be provided to feed
all the fire suppression systems as follows:
a.
One fire pump set will draw water from the central tank and feed
the podium areas, car parking levels and building.
b.
Towers up to 26 floors: Four sets will draw water from the podium,
mechanical floor tank and feed the tower floors as follows:
1)
One Fire Set for Towers 1 & 2.
2)
One Fire Set for Towers 3 & 4.
3)
One Fire Set for Tower 9.
4)
One Fire Set of Hotel Tower.
c.
Towers above 26 floors: Three, transfer pump sets each 75% of
the main fire pump capacity will be used to transfer water from the
podium mechanical floors fire tanks to the intermediate mechanical
floors tanks, complete with fire pump set at the intermediate
mechanical floor level as follows:
1)
One transfer set to serve Towers 5 & 6 from tank serving
Tower 9, and fire pump set at level 19th of Tower 5 and at
and at level 22nd of Tower 6.
2)
One transfer set of serve Tower 7 from the tank serving
Tower 1 & 2, and fire pump set at level 36th of Tower 7.
3)
One transfer set to serve tower 8 from the tank serving
towers 3 & 4, and fire pump set at level 19th of Tower 8.
3.
Gravity feed lines will be extended from the intermediate tanks to serve
the gravity zone (Static head is enough to cover the minimum required
pressure).
4.
A jockey pumps shall be used to maintain the pressure in the fire systems
at all times.
5.
Quadruple fire brigade breeching inlets shall be provided at the boundary
walls of each building to allow the fire department to supplement the fire
protection water reserve supply.
6.
Pressure reducing stations shall be introduced where the pressure
exceeds the allowable limits.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/4
C. Automatic Sprinkler System

1.
The Tower, Parking Garages and Podium levels will be fully sprinkled
according to NFPA-13.
2.
The sprinkler system will be fed from a combined wet riser system.
3.
Floor control assemblies will be provided to control the architectural fire
zones.
4.
Quick response sprinklers will be provided to isolate the fire zones.
5.
Sprinklers will protect suspended ceilings and closed plenums with a void
greater than 800 mm high.
D. Wet Riser System
1.
Combined, wet risers installed in the stairways will be serve the sprinkler
system equipped with 65 mm landing valves and 40 mm hose reels.
E. Hose Reel System and Fire Extinguishers
1.
Indoor fire hose-reel stations shall be installed in the buildings in
compliance with the relevant NFPA codes. Each indoor fire hose reel
station should be equipped with:
a.
Red lacquered steel cabinet.
b.
65 mm landing valve.
c.
40 mm, 30 long hose reel.
d.
10 lbs Co2, portable fire extinguisher.
e.
2 gal. pressure water fire extinguisher.
2.
Trolley mounted carbon dioxide fire extinguisher shall be provided to
protect the electrical substations.
F. Foam Deluge System
1.
Foam deluge system with open type sprinklers shall be used to protect
the emergency generator room.
G. Clean Agent Systems
1.
Clean agent systems shall be provided to protect the LT, HT and
computer rooms.
H. External Fire Hydrant System
1.
Outdoor fire hydrants, supplied from the infrastructure mains, shall be
positioned at 100 m centers throughout the site.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the
following requirements apply for product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by the manufacturers specified.
2.02
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials
and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.03
JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not
listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of
piping system contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm)
maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze
flanges.
b.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel
flanges.
2.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise
indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
according to ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver
alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/6
2.04
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill
annular space between pipe and sleeve.
1.
a.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
c.
Metraflex Co.
d.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e.
Approved alternative/substitution under provision of the general
condition of contract.
2.
Sealing Elements: EPDM/NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of
pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating
of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include
one for each sealing element.
2.05
SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube

closed with welded longitudinal joint.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping
flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.06
ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an
ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD
that completely covers opening.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished
chrome-plated finish.
C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/7
D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1.
E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chromeplated finish.
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed/exposed-rivet hinge, set screw
or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.
G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.07
GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydrauliccement grout.
1.
Characteristics:
Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
3.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections

specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and
arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were
used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other
design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited
unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the
following:
1.
New Piping:
a.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece,
deep-pattern type.
b.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished
chrome-plated finish.
c.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces:
One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces:
One-piece, stamped-steel type.
f.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece
or split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/9
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Onepiece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with
concealed hinge and set screw.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stampedsteel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or
spring clips.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type
with set screw or spring clips.
Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Onepiece, floor-plate type.
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsumboard partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical
equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above
finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab
as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are
constructed.
3.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following
sleeve materials:
a.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).
b.
Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger,
penetrating gypsum-board partitions.
c.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install
section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm)
above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1)
Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for
size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants" for materials and installation.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves
and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm)
annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/10
1.
2.
3.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.
Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in
diameter.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of
sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space
between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for

sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve
size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of
sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space
between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,
ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop
materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for
roughing-in requirements.
3.02
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21
Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise
indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's
"Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with
ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe
and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with
AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to
ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded
pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as
follows:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/11
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads

unless dry seal threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or
open welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:
1.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers,
and solvent cements.
2.
CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
3.03
PAINTING
A. Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in

Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes
with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.04
CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4
inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.
2.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers
around the full perimeter of the base.
3.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend
through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment
manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
6.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/12
7.
3.05
Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and

reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "[Cast-in-Place
Concrete] [Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete]."
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and
equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.06
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support,
and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be
exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.07
GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump
and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for
equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0500/13
SECTION 21 0513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, generalpurpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on
ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory
or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
1.02
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be

compatible with the following:
1.
Motor controllers.
2.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control
sequence.
4.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0513/1
Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are
specified in fire suppression equipment schedules or Sections.
B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.02
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 50 deg C and at altitude of

3300 feet (1000 m) above sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate
connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or
considering service factor.
C. All motors shall have a minimum power factor of 0.85 from 75 % to full load.
2.03
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1.
For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2.
For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each
speed.
E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I. Insulation: Class F.
J. Code Letter Designation:
1.
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0513/2
2.
Motors Smaller than 15 HP:

characteristic.
Manufacturer's standard starting
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel
for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.04
POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring

connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide
terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and
features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.
Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish,
designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short
time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.
2.
Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F
insulation.
3.
Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4.
Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally
protected motors.
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
2.05
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque
and requirements of specific motor application:
1.
Permanent-split capacitor.
2.
Split phase.
3.
Capacitor start, inductor run.
4.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for
radial and thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply
circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to
temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall
automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0513/3
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0513/4
SECTION 21 0548
VIBRATION AND NOISE CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Inertia bases.
B. Vibration isolation.
1.02
REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE HAND BOOK 1999, HVAC Applications.

1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to ASHRAE average noise criteria curves.

B. Ensure structural integrity by avoiding resonance and by restricting vibration.
C. Do not exceed the allowable noise level, 70 dBA measured at a distance of 1200
mm (4 feet) from source, by proper engineering of equipment assemblies.
1.04
SPEED AND BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ROTATING EQUIPMENT
A. Fans and other rotating mechanical equipment shall not operate at speeds in
excess of 80 % of their true critical speed.
B. Vertical vibration of rotating equipment shall not be greater than the levels
indicated. The vibration shall be measured on the equipment or steel frame
equipment base when the equipment is mounted on its vibration isolation
mounts. If the equipment has an inertia base, the allowable vibration level is
reduced by the ratio of the equipment weight alone to the equipment weight plus
the inertia base weight.
Equipment Speed
under 600 rpm
600 to 1000 rpm
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0548/1
Vibration Displacement
(MILS peak-to-peak)
4
3
Vibration and Noise Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment
1000 to 2000 rpm

over 2000 rpm
1.05
2
1
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings, product data, samples and manufacturer's installation

instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Include data for each equipment and size of unit showing isolation type,
efficiency, stiffness, natural frequency, and transmissibility at lowest operating
speed of equipment, actual load, static deflection under actual load etc.
C. Submit manufacturer's certificates in respect of static and dynamic loading,
fundamental frequency, average noise level at full load conditions etc. of all
equipment.
D. Indicate vibration isolator locations, on general layout and plant room detail
drawings.
E. Flexible pipe connector shop drawings data to include maximum allowable
temperature and pressure rating, overall face to face length, live length, hose
wall thickness, and fundamental frequency of assembly.
F. Submit manufacturer's certificates under provisions of Section 01440 that the
vibration isolators are properly selected and installed in equipment assemblies, to
meet with, or to exceed the Contract requirements.
1.06
A. Deliver products to site, store and protect under provisions of Section 01 6000.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0548/2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
C. Approved Manufacturer
1.
Metraflex.
2.
Mason Industries.
3.
Vibration Mounting and Controls, Inc.
4.
Approved Alternatives/Substitution under Provision of General Conditions
of Contract.
D. All metal parts of vibration isolation units installed out of doors shall be hot dip
galvanised, cadmium plated, or neoprene coated after fabrication. Galvanising
shall meet ASTM salt spray test standards and Federal test standard No. 14.
E. Isolators types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. At the
Contractor's option, labour saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators
supplied to provide initial lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed
elevations during installation and initial system filling operations, and similar
installation advantages. Accessories must not degrade the vibration isolation
system.
F. Static deflection of isolators shall be as shown on the schedule. All static
deflections stated are the minimum acceptable deflection for the mounts under
actual load. Isolators selected on the basis of rated deflection are not acceptable.
2.02
BASES
A. Type "A" - INTEGRAL BASES: This type is generally applicable for packaged
chillers, pumps, Air Handling Units, Air conditioning Units etc. which are supplied
with factory fabricated rigid base which can be mounted directly on vibration
isolators. Equipment manufacturer's recommendations should be sought for the
number, locations and weight distribution to select and install vibration isolators.
B. Type "B" - STEEL STRUCTURAL BASES: This type is generally subdivided into
closed frame type (Type B1) and rails type (Type B2). These are steel bases
fabricated either as per the approved shop drawing or as per the equipment
manufacturer's recommendation. These are used for equipment not having a
rigid base. The type B1 shall be used where the vibration isolators are located
within the equipment base and type B2 shall be used when the vibration isolators
are outside the equipment and the type B2 base acts as a cradle. The minimum
depth shall be 4 inches.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0548/3
C. TYPE "C" CONCRETE INTERTIAL BASES: This type generally consists of

structural steel, fabricated pouring form with reinforcing bars. The concrete shall
be poured on site. The minimum depth shall be 6 inches.
D. TYPE "D" - ROOF CURBS: This type is generally used for Roof top Air Handling
Units with direct cutting through roof slab under the units. These roof curbs shall
be supplied by the unit manufacturer. The manufacturer's recommendations
should be sought for the number, locations and weight distribution to select and
install vibration isolators.
E. TYPE "E" - HOUSE KEEPING PADS: These are concrete bases used for all
equipment with or without moving parts and shall be suitable for taking up the
static and dynamic loads (if any). Size base to extend 10 cms beyond equipment
base in all directions and minimum10 cms above finished floor level. Roughen
floor slab beneath base for bond and or provide rebar dowels in floor slab. Locate
anchor bolts (welded on to a rebar framework to maintain spacing) with
templates supplied by the equipment manufacturer. Provide steel angle frame
with anchorage lugs at the corners. Also see table 3.03 for exact heights.
F. TYPE "F" - FLOATING CONCRETE BASE: This is similar to Type "E" (House
keeping pads) but isolated at the bottom and all the side by either precompressed glass fiber pads or Heavy density seasoned cork. The thickness of
isolating pads vary from 25 to 100 mm (1 to 4 inch) depending on the application.
G. TYPE "G" - STRUCTURAL STEEL STANDS: These shall be provided to support
equipment, which are not floor mounted or hung from structure. Construct with
structural steel members and attach to wall or floor as appropriate. Provide
factory fabricated saddles or mounts for equipment as required.
2.03
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. TYPE "1" - ISOLATING PADS: This type of vibration isolators shall be generally
used where the vibrating force is transmitted directly to ground or the vibrating
force is very small compared to the absorption capacity of the structural slab at
higher levels.
B. TYPE "1A" - NEOPRENE RUBBER PADS: These shall be cross-ribbed, in
multiple layers or of sandwich type to achieve the required deflection. The
adhesive used in fabricating the pads shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer.
C. TYPE "1B" - GLASS FIBER PADS: These shall be of pre-compressed fiberglass
construction and suitable to take upto 34 kg/sq.cm. (500 psi) load. The pads shall
be coated with elastometric neoprene rubber spray to protect the glass fiber and
increase the damping effect.
D. TYPE "1C" - CORK PADS: The cork pads shall be constructed from natural cork
granules compressed and steam baked to form slabs and shall have a density of
96 to 106 kg/cu.M (6 to 6.6 lbs/cu.ft). The cork pads shall be treated with hot
Bitumen Asphalt coating for protection of cork.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0548/4
E. TYPE "2" - MOLDED NEOPRENE RUBBER MOUNTS: These shall be used

where a greater deflection is required than that for pads. The maximum
deflection allowable is 12 mm (0.5 inch) on these rubber mounts. The normal
shape of mount is conical with a captive insert for attaching to equipment base.
F. TYPE "3" - FREE STANDING SPRING ISOLATORS: These shall be constructed
with open type stable spring and load plates at top and bottom with an adjustable
bolt for levelling. Neoprene rubber acoustical treatment shall be provided to
prevent transmission of very high frequency vibration and noise. The spring shall
be so designed that the horizontal stiffness is more than 75 % of vertical
stiffness. The rated loads and deflections for these springs shall allow additional
50 % travel to that of the rated deflection before the springs are compressed
solid, to accommodate any errors in actual load distribution.
G. TYPE "4" - RESTRAINED SPRING ISOLATORS: These are similar to type "3",
but with additional restraints in the vertical direction. These isolators shall have
hold down bolts to limit vertical movement. The restraints should have adequate
clearance so that they are activated only when a temporary restraint is needed.
H. TYPE "5" - HOUSED SPRING ISOLATORS: These isolators are similar to type
"4" except that they consist of two telescoping houses. The contact surfaces of
houses are separated by resilient inserts such as Neoprene Sponge or
equivalent material.
I. TYPE "6" - RUBBER HANGERS: These are similar to type "2" except that the
conical rubber mold is housed in a steel casing and have a through hole for the
hanger rod. The assembly should allow for 20 to 35 degrees angular movement
for the hanging rod without metal to metal contact.
J. TYPE "7" - SPRING HANGERS: These are similar to type "3" except that the
spring is mounted in a steel casing and used for suspension only. The assembly
shall allow for 20 to 25 degrees angular movement for the hanging rod without
metal to metal contact.
K. TYPE "8" - COMBINATION RUBBER & SPRING HANGER: This is a
combination of type "6" and "7" having all the specified characteristics therein.
L. TYPE "9" - THRUST RESTRAINTS: These are similar to type "7", but installed in
pairs to counteract the thrust caused by air pressure.
M. TYPE "10" - AIR SPRINGS: These shall consist of constant dry air supplying
equipment and air bellows. These shall be used where 150 mm (6 inch) or
greater deflection is required and natural frequencies do not exceed 80 Hz.
2.04
RESILIENT PENETRATION SLEEVE
A. This shall consist of a sleeve 25 mm (1-inch) larger all round than that of the
penetrating element and fabricated out of steel pipe or sheet metal as the
condition warrants. The sleeve length shall be 25 mm (1 inch) extra on both sides
of the penetrated construction. The annular space is filled with resilient material
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0548/5
such as Neoprene sponge or type 1B material and ends sealed with approved
sealant compatible with the resilient material.
2.05
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible pipe connections shall be fabricated of multiple plies of nylon cord,

fabric, and neoprene, vulcanised so as to become inseparable and
homogeneous. Straight connections shall be formed in a double sphere shape.
Elbow connections shall have a single sphere shape at the curve of the unit.
Flexible connections shall be able to accept compressive, elongative, transverse,
and angular movements.
B. The flexible connections shall be selected and specially fitted, if necessary, to
suit the system temperature, pressure, and fluid type.
C. Use bellow type metal flexible connectors with braided steel wire armour when
they are located in outdoor areas where the type described above will be
damaged due to sun radiation.
D. Connectors for pipe sizes 50 mm (2 inch) nom. dia. or smaller shall have
threaded female union couplings, made up of compatible material like cast iron
for steel and bronze for copper piping, on each end. Larger sizes shall be fitted
with metallic flange couplings.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0548/6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
APPLICATION
A. GENERAL
1.
Refer to PART 2 - PRODUCTS of this specification for vibration isolation
devices identified on the schedule or specified herein.
B. MAJOR EQUIPMENT
1.
Unless otherwise shown or specified, all floor mounted major equipment
shall be set on concrete housekeeping pads as per recommendations of
the manufacturer. See schedule of mounting pads in this section.
2.
Types and minimum static deflections of vibration isolation devices for
major equipment items shall be as scheduled on the drawings or specified
here under.
3.
Flexible duct connections shall be installed at all fan unit intakes, fan unit
discharges, and wherever else shown on the drawings.
4.
Flexible pipe connections shall be installed at all pipe connections to
vibration isolated equipment in the positions shown on the drawings.
5.
Electrical connections to vibration isolated equipment shall be flexible, as
called for in the electrical portion of the specification.
6.
Snubbers or thrust restraints shall be installed on equipment as called for
in the schedule on the drawings or specified here under.
C. MISCELLANEOUS MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
1.
Miscellaneous pieces of mechanical equipment such as domestic hot
water circulation pumps, hot water heat exchangers, storage tanks, and
expansion tanks shall be vibration isolated from the building structure by
Type 2 or type 6 isolators unless their position in the piping system
requires higher degrees of isolation as called for under Pipe Isolation.
D. PIPING
1.
Provide flexible pipe connections in piping connected to vibration isolated
equipment, as called for and shown on drawings.
2.
Anchor piping at the system side of the flexible connector.
3.
Inlet and outlet piping of all pumps should have flexible connections.
4.
All piping within mechanical rooms should be supported with spring
isolated hangers. Piping should not rigidly contact structural elements.
5.
All pipe/conduit penetrations of portions, floors/ceiling slabs must be
sealed airtight with acoustic sealant or mineral fiber and fire code
compound.
E. DUCT WORK
1.
Ducts within the specified limits which penetrate the building construction
shall be isolated from the building by using resilient penetration sleeve /
seals.
2.
Resilient lateral guides shall be used wherever lateral support of vertical
duct runs is required within the specified limits.
3.
Provide flexible duct connections as called for above, under major
equipment and wherever shown on the drawings.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0548/7
3.02
INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT
A. General
1.
Locations of all vibration isolation equipment shall be selected for ease of
inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation.
2.
Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Isolation Mounts
1.
All vibration isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting
points of the supported equipment.
2.
Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the
bases, which are parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible
because of physical constraints.
3.
If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the
housekeeping pad and the isolator base plate shall rest entirely on the
pad.
4.
Hanger rods for vibration isolated support shall be connected to structural
beams or joists, not from the floor slab between beams and joists. Provide
intermediate support members as necessary.
5.
Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as
possible in the hanger rod assembly, but not in contact with the building
structure, and so that the hanger housing may rotate a full 360 degrees
about the rod axis without contacting any object.
6.
Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze, which is
isolated from the building. Isolator deflections must be the largest
determined by the provisions for pipe isolation. Do not mix isolated and
non-isolated pipes on the same trapeze.
7.
No pipes or equipment shall be supported from other pipes or equipment.
8.
Resiliently isolated pipes shall not contact the building construction or
other equipment.
9.
The installed and operating heights of vibration isolators supporting any
equipment shall be identical. Limit stops shall be out of contact during
normal operation.
10.
Adjust all levelling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated
equipment is level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes.
C. Bases
1.
No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own
frame is suitably rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is
approved by the equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply
whether or not a base frame is called for on the schedule. In the case that
a base frame is required for the unit because of the equipment
manufacturer's requirements and is not specifically called for on the
equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by the equipment
manufacturer shall be provided.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance
of 38-mm (1 1/2 inch) between inertia bases or steel frame bases and the
floor beneath the equipment. Position isolator mounting brackets and
adjust isolators so that the required clearance is maintained. The
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0548/8
clearance space shall be checked by the Contractor to ensure that no

construction debris has been left to short circuit or restrict the proper
operation of the vibration isolation system.
D. Flexible Duct Connections
1.
Sheet metal ducts or plenum openings shall be squarely aligned with the
fan discharge, fan intake, or adjacent duct section prior to installation of
the flexible connection, so that the clear length is approximately equal all
the way around the perimeter. Flexible duct connections shall not be
installed until this provision is met. The fan unit or adjacent duct section
shall be able to move 25 mm (1 inch) in any direction without causing
metal to metal contact or stretching taut the flexible connection.
E. Flexible Pipe Connections
1.
Select flexible connections with axial and transverse movements, more
than that of the connected equipment. Use control cables where there is a
chance of exceeding the allowable axial movement.
2.
Provide bronze union ends for flexible connections of 50-mm (2-inch)
nom. dia. and less, when used with copper piping.
F. Thrust Restraints
1.
Snubbers shall be adjusted to clear the equipment base and to provide
lateral restraint during on / off cycling, but be out of contact during normal
operation of the equipment.
2.
Thrust restraints shall be attached at the center line of thrust and
symmetrically on each of the units. Adjust the restraints to limit equipment
movement to the specified limit.
G. Resilient Penetration Sleeves / Seals
1.
Penetration seals shall maintain an air tight seal around the penetrating
element and shall prevent rigid contact between the penetrating element
and the building structure. Fit the sleeve tightly to the building construction
and seal airtight on both sides of the construction penetrated with
acoustical sealant.
3.03
SCHEDULE OF MOUNTING FOR FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
No.
EQUIPMENT
BASE
Type
1.
2.
Fire Pumps
Control Panels
Type F
Type E
1C
None
ISOLATOR
Deflection,
mm (inches)
12(0.50)
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0548/9
SECTION 21 0700
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Section Includes:
1.
Insulation Materials:
a.
Calcium silicate.
b.
Cellular glass.
c.
Flexible elastomeric.
d.
Mineral fiber.
e.
Phenolic.
f.
Polyisocyanurate.
g.
Polyolefin.
h.
Polystyrene.
2.
Insulating cements.
3.
Adhesives.
4.
Mastics.
5.
Lagging adhesives.
6.
Sealants.
7.
Factory-applied jackets.
8.
Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
9.
Field-applied cloths.
10.
Field-applied jackets.
11.
Tapes.
12.
Securements.
13.
Corner angles.
1.
Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation."
2.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity,
thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B. Shop Drawings:
1.
Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for
each type of insulation and hanger.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/1
Fire Suppression System Insulation
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of

insulation.
Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and
specialties for each type of insulation.
Detail removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment
connections.
Detail application of field-applied jackets.
Detail application at linkages of control devices.
Detail field application for fire-suppression water storage tanks.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each
Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:
1.
Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2
(DN 50).
2.
Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
3.
Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).
4.
Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.
5.
Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show
the full range of colors available for each type of finish material.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer
E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for
compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets,
with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
F. Field quality-control reports.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have
fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical
products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of
applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and
smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
2.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and
smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation
and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and
finishes. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed
by Architect. Use materials indicated for the completed Work.
1.
Piping Mockups:
a.
One 10-foot (3-m) section of NPS 2 (DN 50) straight pipe.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/2
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.04
One each of a 90-degree threaded, welded, and flanged elbow.

One each of a threaded, welded, and flanged tee fitting.
One NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller valve, and one NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)
or larger valve.
e.
Four support hangers including hanger shield and insert.
f.
One threaded strainer and one flanged strainer with removable
portion of insulation.
g.
One threaded reducer and one welded reducer.
h.
One pressure temperature tap.
i.
One mechanical coupling.
Equipment Mockups:
a.
One tank or vessel.
For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of
application details for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics,
attachments, and jackets.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups
will be constructed.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation
application.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.
1.05
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields.

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation
application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before
preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements
for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space
required for maintenance.
1.06
SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where

required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may
begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/3
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible

in each area of construction.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating

materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as
acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
F. Calcium Silicate:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold.
2.
Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of
noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos
fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
3.
Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585
for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows,
tees, and flanges.
G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with
annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements
are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
following:
a.
Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF.
b.
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.
2.
Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.
3.
Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
4.
Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.
5.
Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552,
Type II, Class 1.
6.
Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ, ASJ-SSL: Comply
with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2.
7.
Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.
Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet
materials.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/5
1.

following:
a.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
b.
Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
c.
RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.
I. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290,
Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
1.
following:
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
b.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
c.
Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e.
Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
J. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For
equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket.
Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
1.
following:
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
b.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
c.
Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
d.
Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
e.
Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
f.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
K. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
following:
a.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c.
Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation).
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
e.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2.
Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded
with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A,
with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are
specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
3.
Type II, 1200 deg F (649 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded
with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A,
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/6
with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are

specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
L. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a
thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ, FSK
jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with
properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40
kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is
0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
following:
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.
b.
Johns Manville; MicroFlex.
c.
Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.
e.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
M. Phenolic:
1.
following:
a.
Kingspan Corp.; Koolphen K.
2.
Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure.
Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1.
3.
Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with
ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1.
4.
Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
5.
Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied
Jackets" Article.
a.
Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASJ.
b.
Board for Equipment Applications: ASJ.
N. Polyisocyanurate: Unfaced, preformed, rigid cellular polyisocyanurate material
intended for use as thermal insulation.
1.
following:
a.
Apache Products Company; ISO-25.
b.
Dow Chemical Company (The); Trymer.
c.
Duna USA Inc.; Corafoam.
d.
Elliott Company; Elfoam.
2.
Comply with ASTM C 591, Type I or Type IV, except thermal conductivity
(k-value) shall not exceed 0.19 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.027 W/m x
K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) after 180 days of aging.
3.
Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall
be 50 or less for thickness up to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) as tested by
ASTM E 84.
4.
Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/7
5.
Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied

Jackets" Article.
a.
Pipe Applications: [None] [ASJ] [ASJ-SSL] [PVDC] [PVDC-SSL].
b.
Equipment Applications: [None] [ASJ] [ASJ-SSL] [PVDC] [PVDCSSL].
O. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with

ASTM C 534 or ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II,
Grade 1 for sheet materials.
1.
following:
a.
Armacell LLC; Tubolit.
b.
Nomaco Inc.; IMCOLOCK, IMCOSHEET, NOMALOCK, and
NOMAPLY.
c.
RBX Corporation; Therma-cell.
P. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal
insulation. Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal
conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.038
W/m x K) after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450
and ASTM C 585.
1.
following:
a.
Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam.
b.
Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene.
2.02
INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

1.
following:
a.
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.
b.
P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.
B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement:
Comply with
ASTM C 196.
1.
following:
a.
P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote.
C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
1.
following:
a.
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/8
b.
c.
2.03
P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.

Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates

and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless
B. Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a
service temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F (10 to 427 deg C).
1.
following:
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-97.
b.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27/81-93.
c.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290.
d.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-30.
e.
Vimasco Corporation; 760.
C. Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solventbased resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300
deg F (minus 59 to plus 149 deg C).
1.
following:
a.
b.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.
D. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A,
Type II, Class I.
1.
following:
a.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
b.
Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
c.
d.
RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
E. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
d.
e.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/9
F. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a

service temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F (29 to plus 60 deg C).
1.
following:
a.
b.
2.04
MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates;

comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below
ambient services.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009
metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
3.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to
plus 82 deg C).
4.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by
weight.
5.
Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient
services.
1.
following:
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.033 metric perm)
at 30-mil (0.8-mm) dry film thickness.
3.
plus 104 deg C).
4.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by
weight.
5.
Color: White.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/10
D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above
ambient services.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.
d.
e.
f.
Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms (2 metric perms) at
0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) dry film thickness.
3.
plus 93 deg C).
4.
Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
5.
Color: White.
2.05
LAGGING ADHESIVES
A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible

with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors
to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over equipment and pipe insulation.
3.
plus 82 deg C).
4.
Color: White.
2.06
SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1.
Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, and Polyisocyanurate
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
f.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/11
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: Subject to compliance with

requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and
substrates.
Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
plus 149 deg C).
Color: White or gray.
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products
following:
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
substrates.
3.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4.
plus 121 deg C).
5.
Color: Aluminum.
C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
following:
a.
2.
substrates.
3.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4.
plus 121 deg C).
5.
Color: White.
2.07
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various

applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the
following:
1.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/12
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.08
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based

adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with
ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper
backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, white
PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms
(0.013 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a
flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested
according to ASTM E 84.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1)
Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder
Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick, white
PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms
(0.007 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a
flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested
according to ASTM E 84.
a.
1)
PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive,
acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.
a.
1)
FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd.

(68 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands
by 4 strands/sq. mm) for covering pipe and pipe fittings.
1.
following:
a.
Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
B. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd.
(203 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch (2 strands by
2 strands/sq. mm) for covering equipment.
1.
following:
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; Chil-Glas No. 5.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/13
C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. (34 g/sq. m) with a thread
count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm), in a
Leno weave.
1.
following:
a.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.
b.
Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.
2.09
FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS
A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave,

and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. (271 g/sq. m).
1.
following:
a.
Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW,
Luben 59.
2.10
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. PVC Jacket:
High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with
ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop
or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket
schedules.
1.
following:
a.
Johns Manville; Zeston.
b.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
c.
Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
d.
Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
2.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
3.
Color: Color-code jackets based on system.
4.
Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise,
field fabricate.
a.
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees,
valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps,
mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.
5.
Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
C. Metal Jacket:
1.
following:
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/14
2.
3.
2.11
b.
PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.
c.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003,
3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.
a.
Factory cut and rolled to size.
b.
Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
c.
Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick,
heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
d.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-)
thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
e.
Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1)
Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2)
Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and
long-radius elbows.
3)
Tee covers.
4)
Flange and union covers.
5)
End caps.
6)
Beveled collars.
7)
Valve covers.
8)
Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting
covers are not available.
Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.
a.
Factory cut and rolled to size.
b.
Material, finish, and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket
schedules.
c.
Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick,
heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
d.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-)
thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
e.
Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
1)
Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
2)
Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and
long-radius elbows.
3)
Tee covers.
4)
Flange and union covers.
5)
End caps.
6)
Beveled collars.
7)
Valve covers.
8)
Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting
covers are not available.
TAPES
A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
following:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/15
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division;

Fasson 0835.
b.
Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
c.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
d.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW
Plus/SQ.
Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm).
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with

acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
following:
a.
Fasson 0827.
b.
Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
c.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF
FSK.
d.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with
acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1.
following:
a.
Fasson 0555.
b.
Compac Corp.; 130.
c.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White
PVC tape.
d.
Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
2.
3.
Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm).
4.
5.
6.
D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/16
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

following:
a.
Fasson 0800.
b.
Compac Corp.; 120.
c.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.
d.
Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with
acrylic adhesive.
1.
following:
a.
Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape.
2.
3.
Film Thickness: 4 mils (0.10 mm).
4.
Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
5.
Elongation at Break: 145 percent.
6.
F. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with
acrylic adhesive.
1.
following:
a.
Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape.
2.
3.
Film Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm).
4.
Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
5.
Elongation at Break: 145 percent.
6.
2.12
SECUREMENTS
A. Bands:
1.
following:
a.
Childers Products; Bands.
b.
PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
c.
RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
2.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 316; 0.015
inch (0.38 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide with wing or closed seal.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/17
3.
4.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or

5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide
with wing or closed seal.
Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and
slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer
for application.
B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers:
Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding
insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when selflocking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T.
2)
GEMCO; Perforated Base.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
b.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch
(0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.
c.
Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-)
diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and
substrates.
2.
Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting
spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated,
securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
Comply with the following requirements:
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA.
2)
GEMCO; Press and Peel.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.
b.
Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm)
thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.
c.
Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-)
diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d.
Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
3.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016inch- (0.41-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as
required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) in diameter.
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
2)
GEMCO; R-150.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/18
b.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4)
Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a
spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed
locations.
C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide,

stainless steel or Monel.
D. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
a.
C & F Wire.
b.
Childers Products.
c.
PABCO Metals Corporation.
d.
RPR Products, Inc.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/19
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and
are free of defects.
2.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
3.
corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove

materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before
insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1.
Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5
mils (0.127 mm) thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick if
operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F (60 and
149 deg C). Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating
materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
2.
Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature
between 32 and 300 deg F (0 and 149 deg C) with an epoxy coating 5
mils (0.127mm ) thick. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate
coating materials and application methods for operating temperature
range.
C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply
with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be
in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.03
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and
even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping
including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and
thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in
insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the
service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack
insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/20
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in
insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier
mastic.
1.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor
attachments.
2.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend
insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to
point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to
structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation.
Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture
by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended
coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same
material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward
clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.
3.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install
insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry
surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching
staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm).
a.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over
staples.
4.
Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
5.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent
of its nominal thickness.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/21
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations

and cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over
damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged
areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
Vibration-control devices.
2.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
3.
Nameplates and data plates.
4.
Manholes.
5.
Handholes.
6.
Cleanouts.
3.04
PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously

through roof penetrations.
1.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation
above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring
indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications
tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches
(50 mm) below top of roof flashing.
4.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Below-Grade Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate
insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install
insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation
inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring
indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications
tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall
flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm).
4.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not
Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install
insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/22
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Comply with
requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.05
EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage
rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2.
Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to
equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical
surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.
3.
Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4.
Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed
washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows:
a.
Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
b.
Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with
service temperature and with substrate.
c.
On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches
(75 mm) from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. in
both directions.
d.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e.
Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed
heads of tanks and vessels.
f.
Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or
bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and
washers with tape matching insulation facing.
5.
Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands.
Select band material compatible with insulation materials.
6.
Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or
practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a
girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable
around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or
breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment
approximately 6 inches (150 mm) from each end. Install wire or cable
between two circumferential girdles 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Install a wire
ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and
stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest
circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the
body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches (1200 mm)
o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7.
Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm).
8.
Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors,
manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal
for service and inspection.
9.
Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME
stamps, and nameplates.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/23
10.
For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to

open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels:

Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.
1.
Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
2.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
3.06
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except

where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation
material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other
specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless
2.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings
made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each
piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with
adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform
with adjoining pipe insulation.
3.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut
sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and
hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent
pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box
studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent
pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate
strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a
removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide
a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times
the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is
thicker.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/24
7.
8.
9.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and

coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services
and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic
with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and wellshaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for
flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows,
tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC
end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC
tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word
"UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure

temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and
transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at
these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall
conform to the following:
1.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation
of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket
as adjoining pipe insulation.
2.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation,
extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the
insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or
union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum
bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for
flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of
valve body.
4.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each
consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this
wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend
insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each
side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating
cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel
second coat to a smooth finish.
5.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish
exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.07
CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1.
Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300mm) intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2.
Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3
inches (75 mm). Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/25
3.
intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300mm) intervals.
Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to insulation
surface. When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and
press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch
(25 mm). Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape.
Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of
block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation.
4.
Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
2.
When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install
mitered sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials
with wire or bands.
3.
Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve
operation without disturbing insulation.
2.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.
Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation.
3.08
CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION

1.
Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints,
and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and applicable insulation joint
sealant.
3.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services,
secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do
not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vaporbarrier mastic and flashing sealant.
1.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/26
2.
3.
4.
cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing
sealant.

1.
2.
When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered
sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire
or bands.
1.
Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.
2.
3.
3.09
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
1.
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2.
3.
sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturers
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow
passage of air to surface being insulated.
1.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's
1.
Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/27
2.
3.
4.
3.10
When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe
and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to
packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation
that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

1.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands
and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2.
sealant.
3.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces,
4.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do
not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vaporbarrier mastic and flashing sealant.
1.
2.
3.
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber
blanket insulation.
4.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing
sealant.
1.
2.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install
mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
1.
2.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of
pipe insulation to valve body.
3.
4.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/28
3.11
PHENOLIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:

1.
Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300mm) intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
2.
Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3
inches (75 mm). Secure inner layer with 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) wire spaced
at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel
bands at 12-inch (300-mm) intervals.
B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2.
sealant.
3.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services,
4.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders on below
ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with
additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer
and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
block insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation.
D. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight
segments of pipe insulation.
E. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
3.12
POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION INSTALLATION

1.
Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with tape or bands and tighten
without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between
half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.
2.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not
staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/29
3.
as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vaporbarrier mastic.

All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints.
Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install
vapor-barrier system.

1.
2.
same thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch (38mm) thickness.
3.
polyisocyanurate block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
C. Insulation Installation on Fittings and Elbows:
1.
insulation.
1.
Install preformed sections of polyisocyanurate insulation to valve body.
2.
3.
3.13
POLYOLEFIN INSULATION INSTALLATION

1.
Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturers
1.
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2.
3.
polyolefin sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturers
1.
Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation.
2.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/30
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.14
Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation
that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
POLYSTYRENE INSULATION INSTALLATION

1.
Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands
without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between
half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.
2.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not
staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape
as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vaporbarrier mastic.
3.
All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints.
Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install
vapor-barrier system.
1.
2.
same thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch (38mm) thickness.
3.
polystyrene block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
1.
1.
Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body.
2.
3.
3.15
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or
insulation with factory-applied jackets.
1.
Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at
seams and joints.
2.
Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of
lagging adhesive.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/31
3.
Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed

insulation.
B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1.
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
3.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4.
Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3inch- (75-mm-) wide joint strips at end joints.
5.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and
exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at
longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturers recommended
adhesive.
1.
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead
under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at
longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed
water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation
manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
and at end joints.
E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1.
Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to
secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.
2.
Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections
with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized
jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches (50 mm) over
the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then
apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped
butt joint.
3.
Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe
insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge.
When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written
instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain
a permanent bond.
4.
Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for
insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm)
or less. The 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-) circumference limit allows for 2-inch(50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections
of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal.
Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap
seal to secure joint.
5.
Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole
or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage
to tape edges.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/32
3.16
FINISHES
A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket
Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in
Division 09 painting Sections.
1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with
jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric
mildew proof.
a.
Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply
two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work.
D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.17
A. Testing Agency:
inspections.
Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:
1.
Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by
removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of
their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for
each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule"
Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to
determine compliance.
2.
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by
Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in
reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to
three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three
locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two
locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and
three] locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the
"Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection
reveals noncompliance with requirements.
3.18
EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one
material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is
Contractor's option.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/33
B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory
insulated.
C. Fire-suppression water storage tank insulation shall be[ one of] the following:
1.
Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
2.
Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
3.
Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch (25 mm) thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. (32-kg/cu. m)
nominal density.
4.
Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
5.
Phenolic: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
6.
Polyisocyanurate: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
7.
Polyolefin: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.
3.19
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are
identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material
is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the
following:
1.
Indoor fire-suppression piping.
2.
Underground piping.
3.20
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Indoor Engine Coolant Piping for Remote Radiator of Engine-Driven Fire Pump:
1.
All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a.
Calcium Silicate: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
b.
Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
c.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.
B. Indoor Engine Exhaust Piping and Silencer, All Pipe Sizes: Calcium silicate, 4
inches (100 mm) thick.
3.21
INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket,
install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's
option.
C. Piping, Concealed:
1.
None.
2.
Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
3.
Painted Aluminum, Smooth0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
4.
Stainless Steel, 304 or 316, Smooth 2B Finish: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm)
thick.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/34
D. Piping, Exposed:
1.
None.
2.
PVC, Color-Coded by System: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick.
3.
Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
4.
Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick.
5.
Stainless Steel, 304 or 316, Smooth 2B Finish thick.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 0700/35
SECTION 21 1000
WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression systems inside the building:
1.
Automatic wet-type, Class I standpipe systems.
2.
Wet-pipe sprinkler systems.
3.
Portable Fire Extinguishers.
4.
Fire Hose Reel System.
5.
Wheeled Fire Extinguisher.
6.
External Fire Hydrant System.
1.
Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets" and "Fire Extinguishers"
for cabinets and fire extinguishers.
2.
Division 21 Section [Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps] [Diesel-Drive,
Centrifugal Fire Pumps] for fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps,
and pump controllers.
3.
Division 21 Section "[Foam-Water Systems] [Clean-Agent Fire
Extinguishing Systems]" for extinguishing systems.
4.
Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for piping outside
the building.
5.
Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for alarm devices not
specified in this Section.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

B. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
C. High-Pressure Piping System: Fire-suppression piping system designed to
operate at working pressure higher than standard 175 psig (1200 kPa).
D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
E. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Underground service piping below the
building.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/1
Water Based Fire Suppression Systems
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Combined Standpipe and Sprinkler System: Fire-suppression system with both

standpipe and sprinkler systems. Sprinkler system is supplied from standpipe
system.
B. Automatic Wet-Type, Class I Standpipe System: Includes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)
hose connections. Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is
capable of supplying water demand.
C. Automatic Wet-Type, Class II Standpipe System: Includes NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)
hose stations. Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is
capable of supplying water demand.
D. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping
containing water and that is connected to water supply. Water discharges
immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat
melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if
indicated.
1.04
A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175
psig (1200 kPa).
B. High-Pressure Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for 300 psig
(2070 kPa).
C. Fire-suppression standpipe system design shall be approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.
Minimum residual pressure at each hose-connection outlet is the
following:
a.
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) Hose Connections: [65 psig (450 kPa)].
b.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, the following is maximum residual pressure at
required flow at each hose-connection outlet:
a.
b.
D. Fire-suppression sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent,
including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow
preventers.
2.
Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:
a.
Automobile Parking Areas: [Ordinary Hazard, Group 1].
b.
Building Service Areas: [Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.
c.
Mosques: [Light Hazard].
d.
Electrical Equipment Rooms: [Ordinary Hazard, Group 1].
e.
General Storage Areas: [Ordinary Hazard, Group 1].
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.05
f.
Laundries: [Ordinary Hazard, Group 1].
g.
Mechanical Equipment Rooms: [Ordinary Hazard, Group 1].
h.
Office and Public Areas: [Light Hazard].
i.
Residential Living Areas: [Light Hazard].
j.
Restaurant Service Areas: [Ordinary Hazard, Group 1].
k.
Retails: (Ordinary Hazard Grpi[ 2).
Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a.
Light-Hazard Occupancy: [0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. (6.3 mL/s
over 139-sq. m)] <Insert other> area.
b.
Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: [0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.
(9.5 mL/s over 139-sq. m)] <Insert other> area.
c.
Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: [0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft.
(12.6 mL/s over 139-sq. m)] <Insert other> area.
d.
Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Minimum Density for Deluge-Sprinkler Piping Design:
a.
Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: [0.15 gpm (9.5 mL/s)]
<Insert other> over entire area.
b.
Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: [0.20 gpm (12.6 mL/s)]
<Insert other> over entire area.
Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.
Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:
a.
Office Spaces: [120 sq. ft. (11.1 sq. m)] [225 sq. ft. (20.9 sq. m)].
b.
Storage Areas: [130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m)].
c.
Mechanical Equipment Rooms: [130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m)].
d.
Electrical Equipment Rooms: [130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m)].
e.
Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations, unless
Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to
NFPA 13, unless otherwise indicated:
a.
Light-Hazard Occupancies: [100 gpm (6.3 L/s) for 30 minutes].
b.
Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: [250 gpm (15.75 L/s) for 60 to 90
minutes].
SUBMITTALS

1.
Piping materials, including dielectric fittings, flexible connections, and
sprinkler specialty fittings.
2.
Pipe hangers and supports.
3.
Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves,
and specialty valves and trim.
4.
Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards.
Include sprinkler flow
characteristics, mounting, finish, and other pertinent data.
5.
Hose connections, including size, type, and finish.
6.
Hose stations, including size, type, and finish of hose connections; type
and length of fire hoses; finish of fire hose couplings; type, material, and
finish of nozzles; and finish of rack.
7.
Roof hose cabinets.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/3
8.
9.
10.
Fire hydrants.
Fire department connections, including type; number, size, and
arrangement of inlets; caps and chains; size and direction of outlet;
escutcheon and marking; and finish.
Alarm devices, including electrical data.
B. Manufacturer's printed brochures and catalogs (one original and three copies)
with relevant information high lighted (or irrelevant information struck out), along
with write up of selection criteria.
C. General piping layout drawings to a scale not smaller than 1:100.
D. Equipment installation and piping layout double line drawings of plant rooms,
water storage tanks, etc. clearly indicating all fittings, supports, valves and
control gear to a scale of 1:20. Submit sections and elevations as required by the
Construction Engineer.
E. Typical floor plans indicating shafts, riser locations etc. to a scale of 1:50.
F. Builders work layout plans to a scale of 1:100/1 :50 as above, along with shaft
detail plans to 1:10.
G. Installation details of:
1.
Assemblies like fire cabinets, installation control valves (ICVs), fire
brigade breaching inlets, flow measuring stations, roof manifold and items
of similar nature to a scale of 1:10.
2.
Sprinklers, vacuum relief valves, air release valves and items of similar
nature to a scale of 1:1.
3.
Sleeves and penetrations, equipment foundations etc. to a scale of 1:5.
H. Electrical wiring diagrams (NTS) and panel installation details (1:20).
I. Calculations / details to substantiate the shop drawings.
J. Test and performance certificates of equipment, where required.
K. Printout of hydraulic calculations of sprinkler system piping executed by an NFPA
approved computer program, along with shop drawings.
L. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
M. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
N. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to
NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including
hydraulic calculations, if applicable.
O. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements and as described in [NFPA 13]
[NFPA 13 and NFPA 14] [NFPA 14]. Include "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test
Certificate for Underground Piping."
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/4
P. Retain first paragraph below if procedures for welder certification are retained in
"Quality Assurance" Article.
Q. Welding certificates.
R. Field quality-control test reports.
S. Operation and Maintenance Data: For [standpipe] [standpipe and sprinkler]
[sprinkler] specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals.
T. Submit three (3) hard bound copies of "operation and maintenance manual", with
complete data for each piece of equipment installed, as detailed below:
1.
The cover shall contain:
a.
The title - Fire protection system operation and maintenance
manual.
b.
Names:
1)
The Owner.
2)
The Engineer.
3)
The Contractor.
2.
The Manual shall contain:
a.
Table of contents.
b.
Fire protection materials submittal with the Engineers approval.
c.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d.
Manufacturer's internal wiring diagrams.
e.
Manufacturer's assembly details.
f.
Replacements parts / materials, number listing and description.
g.
Preventive maintenance schedules listing frequency of service and
or replacement
h.
Lubricants, commercial equivalents and schedules of use.
i.
Name and address of manufacturer's sales and service agencies
and local representative / distributor including telephone and telex
numbers.
j.
Name and address of Contractor's maintenance department
including emergency contact telephone number.
3.
Arrange the contents of the manual in sections with tags, grouping each
class of equipment as pumps; pump control panels; fire extinguishers; fire
cabinets; ICVs; valves; fire protection specialities; monitoring and alarm
systems etc.
4.
Arrange contents of each section in sequence as listed above.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1.
Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing firesuppression systems and providing professional engineering services
needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on
results of fire-hydrant flow test.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/5
a.
Engineering Responsibility:
Preparation of working plans,
calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional
engineer.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
C. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories,
installation, and testing shall comply with the following:
1.
NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
2.
NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies
up to and Including Four Stories in Height."
3.
NFPA 14, "Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrant, and Hose Systems."
4.
NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances."
5.
NFPA 230, "Fire Protection of Storage."
6.
EN 671-1 First Aid Fire Hose.
7.
NFPA 88 A Standard for Parking Structures.
8.
NFPA 72 Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors.
D. Conform to the requirements of Qatar Civil Defence Department.
E. The works covered by this Section shall be executed by contractors, engaged in
the installation of fire protection systems as primary business for at least five (5)
immediately preceding years and having Class I registration as Fire Protection
contractors with the Civil Defence Department (Qatar). Employ specialist
subcontractors, with local representation, for the execution of the special fire
protection systems.
F. The contractor should submit and obtain approval of all materials and shop
drawings used for the works covered by this Section, from the Civil Defence
Department (Qatar). Do not place any order or proceed with any installation, prior
to the receipt of the approval by the Engineer.
G. Use only those products specifically listed / approved for Fire protection services
by Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated USA, Factory Mutual Testing
Laboratories USA, Fire Offices Committee of UK or other approved agencies of
international repute, where stipulated.
H. Materials incorporated in the work covered by this Section shall be unused, new
products in good condition. Materials spoiled due to improper storage or
mishandling shall be rejected.
I. Materials of similar nature shall be products of the same manufacturer. Mixing up
products of different standards or those of different manufactures shall not be
permitted for the same service.
J. Materials to equivalent British (BS), German (DIN), or Japanese (JIS) or other
international standards are acceptable, provided that the Contractor
substantiates their equivalence and ensures their compatibility with other
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/6
components of the system. Furnish copies of the current version of the reference
standards for comparison, if so required by the Engineer.
K. All copper alloys used in the construction of valves, pipe fittings, fire protection
specialities etc, which comes in contact with water, shall be dezincification
resistant type.
L. Conform to AWS code in respect of welding materials and procedures and
employ welders certified in accordance with ASME Section 9.
M. Test certificates for materials used in the work covered by this Section, from
approved independent laboratories or testing agencies, shall be furnished at no
extra cost if required by the Engineer.
1.07
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that

penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition
assemblies.
1.08
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1.
Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged
cover, with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler
wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler
wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each
type of sprinkler on Project.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:
1.
include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
2.
products by one of the manufacturers specified.
2.02
DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell end

and plain end.
1.
Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron
standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
2.
Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron gland,
rubber gasket, and steel bolts and nuts.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell end and
plain end.
1.
Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron
standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
2.
Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
C. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with factory- or field-formed,
radius-cut-grooved ends according to AWWA C606.
1.
Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a.
1)
Victaulic Co. of America.
2)
Approved alternatives/substitutions under provision of
general conditions of contract.
b.
Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD
matching ductile-iron-pipe OD and cement lining.
c.
Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: AWWA C606, gasketed fitting
matching ductile-iron-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with
keys matching ductile-iron-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated
rubber gasket with center leg, and steel bolts and nuts.
d.
Grooved-End-Pipe Transition Coupling: UL 213 and AWWA C606,
gasketed fitting with end matching ductile-iron-pipe OD and end
matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with key
matching ductile-iron-pipe groove and key matching steel-pipe
groove, prelubricated rubber gasket listed for use with housing,
and steel bolts and nuts.
e.
Grooved-End Transition Flange: UL 213, gasketed fitting with key
for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include flange-type, ductile-iron
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/8
housing with rubber gasket listed for use with housing and steel
bolts and nuts.
2.03
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135,

or ASTM A 795, hot-dip galvanized where indicated and with factory- or fieldformed threaded ends.
1.
Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1.
2.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3.
3.
Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4.
4.
Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M
or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe hot-dip galvanized
where indicated. Include ends matching joining method.
5.
Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865[ hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe
where indicated].
B. Plain-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795 hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated.
1.
Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with retainer lugs that
require one-quarter turn to secure pipe in fitting.
a.
1)
Anvil International, Inc.
2)
3)
Ward Manufacturing.
4)
C. Plain-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795 hot-dip galvanized-steel pipe where indicated.
1.
Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, and ASME B16.9 or
ASME B16.11.
2.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
D. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or
ASTM A 795, seamless with factory- or field-formed, square-cut- or roll-grooved
ends.
1.
Grooved-Joint Piping Systems:
a.
1)
2)
Central Sprinkler Corp.
3)
Ductilic, Inc.
4)
JDH Pacific, Inc.
5)
National Fittings, Inc.
6)
Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc.
7)
Southwestern Pipe, Inc.
8)
Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
9)
10)
Ward Manufacturing.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/9
11)
b.
c.
2.04

Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting
with OD matching steel-pipe OD.
Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid
pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching
steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching
steel-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated rubber gasket listed for
use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Soft Copper Tube: [ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A)], water tube,
annealed temper; with plain ends.
1.
Copper fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,
wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper
fittings if indicated.
2.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP-3 or BCuP-4.
B. Plain-End, Hard Copper Tube: [ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A)],
water tube, drawn temper.
1.
Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22,
wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure type. Furnish only wrought-copper
fittings if indicated.
2.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish
Class 300 flanges if required to match tubing system.
3.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body
with ball-and-socket metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or
threaded ends.
4.
Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on
copper water tube.
a.
1)
T-Drill Industries, Inc.
2)
5.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP-3 or BCuP-4.
C. Grooved-End, Hard Copper Tube: [ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A)],
water tube, drawn temper; with factory- or field-formed, roll-grooved ends.
1.
Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on
copper water tube.
a.
1)
T-Drill Industries, Inc.
2)
2.
Grooved-Joint Systems:
a.
1)
2)
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/10
3)
b.
c.
2.05

Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M), copper
tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting. Fittings may have ends
factory or field expanded to steel-pipe OD if required for copper
tube systems using grooved-end-pipe couplings.
Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: UL 213, rigid pattern, unless
otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting equivalent to AWWA C606,
but made to match copper-tube OD. Include ductile-iron housing
with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves,[ prelubricated]
rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
Use grooved-end-pipe couplings for tube and fitting that have
expanded ends.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Assembly shall be copper alloy, ferrous, and insulating materials with ends
matching piping system.
B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated assembly, designed for 250-psig (1725kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). Include insulating
material that isolates dissimilar materials and ends with inside threads according
to ASME B1.20.1.
1.
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b.
Central Plastics Company.
c.
Epco Sales, Inc.
d.
Hart Industries International, Inc.
e.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
f.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
g.
Approved alternatives/substitutions under provision of general
conditions of contract.
C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 175-psig
(1200-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating as required for piping system.
1.
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b.
c.
Epco Sales, Inc.
d.
e.
D. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: Components for field assembly shall include
CR or phenolic gasket, PE or phenolic bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel
backing washers.
1.
a.
Advance Products and Systems, Inc.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
c.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/11
d.
e.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic

lining and threaded ends and 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure rating at
225 deg F (107 deg C).
1.
a.
Calpico, Inc.
b.
Lochinvar Corp.
c.
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic
lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved ends and 300-psig (2070kPa) working-pressure rating at 225 deg F (107 deg C).
1.
a.
Perfection Corporation.
b.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c.
d.
2.06
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Flexible connectors shall have materials suitable for system fluid. Include 250psig (1725-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating and ends according to the
following:
1.
NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.
2.
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
3.
Option for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Grooved for use with groovedend-pipe couplings.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1.
Anamet Inc.
2.
Flex-Hose Co., Inc.
3.
Flexicraft Industries.
4.
Flex-Pression, Ltd.
5.
Flex-Weld, Inc.
6.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
7.
Mercer Rubber Co.
8.
Metraflex, Inc.
9.
Proco Products, Inc.
10.
Unaflex Inc.
11.
Approved alternatives/substitutions under provision of general conditions
of contract.
C. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered
with bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze
welded to hose.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/12
D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainlesssteel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples
or flanges, welded to hose.
E. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated,
stainless-steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include
stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose.
2.07
CORROSION-PROTECTIVE ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING
A. Encasement for Underground Metal Piping: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, PE

film, 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness, tube or sheet.
2.08
SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig

(1200-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating, and made of materials compatible
with piping. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall have [250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum]
[300-psig (2070-kPa)] working-pressure rating if fittings are components of highpressure piping system.
B. Outlet Specialty Fittings:
1.
a.
b.
Southwestern Pipe, Inc.
c.
Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div.
d.
e.
Ward Manufacturing.
f.
2.
Mechanical-T and -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with
gaskets, bolts and nuts, and threaded, locking-lug, or grooved outlets.
3.
Snap-On and Strapless Outlet Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing or
casting with gasket and threaded outlet.
C. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast- or ductile-iron body; with threaded
or locking-lug inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass.
1.
a.
b.
Fire-End and Croker Corp.
c.
Viking Corp.
d.
e.
D. Sprinkler Branch-Line Test Fittings: Brass body with threaded inlet, capped drain
outlet, and threaded outlet for sprinkler.
1.
a.
Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/13
b.
c.
d.

Potter-Roemer; Fire-Protection Div.
E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with threaded

inlet and drain outlet and sight glass.
1.
a.
AGF Manufacturing Co.
b.
c.
G/J Innovations, Inc.
d.
Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc.
e.
F. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet, and
seals.
1.
a.
CECA, LLC.
b.
Merit.
c.
G. Dry-Pipe-System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.
2.09
LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig (1200 kPa) minimum
pressure rating. Valves shall have 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum pressure rating
if valves are components of high-pressure piping system.
1.
Grinnell Fire Protection.
2.
McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
3.
NIBCO.
4.
Victulic
5.
of contract.
C. Gate Valves with Wall Indicator Posts:
1.
Gate Valves: UL 262, cast-iron body, bronze mounted, with solid disc,
nonrising stem, operating nut, and flanged ends.
2.
Indicator Posts: UL 789, horizontal-wall type, cast-iron body, with
operating wrench/ hand wheel, extension rod, locking device, and castiron barrel.
D. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc.
1.
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2.
NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 50 and DN 65): Bronze body with threaded
ends or ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/14
3.
NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
E. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091.

1.
NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2.
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body;
wafer type or with flanged or grooved ends.
F. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body
with flanged or grooved ends.
G. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type.
1.
NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2.
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends.
H. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching
connecting piping.
1.
Indicator: Electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, single-circuit, supervisory switch.
2.
NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball or butterfly valve with bronze body and
threaded ends.
3.
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron
body; wafer type or with flanged or grooved ends.
2.10
UNLISTED GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. Ball Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, 2-piece copper-alloy
body with chrome-plated brass ball, 600-psig (4140-kPa) minimum CWP rating,
blowout-proof stem, and threaded ends.
B. Check Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 4, Class 125
minimum, swing type with bronze body, nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends.
C. Gate Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125
minimum, with bronze body, solid wedge, and threaded ends.
D. Globe Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type 2, Class 125
minimum, with bronze body, nonmetallic disc, and threaded ends.
2.11
SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductileiron body with flanged or grooved ends, and 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum
pressure rating. Control valves shall have 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum
pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system.
1.
a.
AFAC Inc.
b.
c.
Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
d.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
e.
f.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/15
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
3.
Star Sprinkler Inc.

Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.
Viking Corp.
Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical
installation, with bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin,
and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler
alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment
with strainer.
a.
Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from
main drain piping.
b.
Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain
piping.
Deluge Valves:
UL 260, cast-iron body, hydraulically operated,
differential-pressure type. Include bronze seat with O-ring seals, trim sets
for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, drip
cup assembly piped without valves and separate from main drain line, fillline attachment with strainer, and push-rod chamber supply connection.
a.
Wet, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include gage to read push-rod chamber
pressure, globe valve for manual operation of deluge valve, and
connection for actuation device.
b.
Dry, Pilot-Line Trim Set: Include dry, pilot-line actuator; air- and
water-pressure gages; low-air-pressure warning switch; air relief
valve; and actuation device. Dry, pilot-line actuator includes castiron, operated, diaphragm-type valve with resilient facing plate,
resilient diaphragm, and replaceable bronze seat. Valve includes
threaded water and air inlets and water outlet. Loss of air pressure
on dry, pilot-line side allows pilot-line actuator to open and causes
deluge valve to open immediately.
B. Pressure-Regulating Valves: UL 1468, brass or bronze, NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 21/2 (DN 40 and DN 65), 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum rating. Include female
NPS inlet and outlet, adjustable setting feature, and straight or 90-degree-angle
pattern design as indicated.
1.
Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
2.
a.
AFAC Inc.
b.
c.
d.
GMR International Equipment Corporation.
e.
f.
Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div.
g.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
h.
C. Automatic Drain Valves: UL 1726, NPS 3/4 (DN 20), ball-check device with
threaded ends.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/16
1.
2.12
a.
AFAC Inc.
b.
c.
MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS
A. Manual Control Stations: UL listed or FMG approved, hydraulic operation, with

union, NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal
enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions
and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
2.13
CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type control panel

as indicated, including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and
solenoid-valve circuitry for operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power
supply; battery charger; standby batteries; field-wiring terminal strip; electrically
supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire alarm bell; lamp test facility; singlepole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.
1.
Panels: UL listed and FMG approved when used with thermal detectors
and Class A detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V
ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.
2.
Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled
"MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and a cover
held closed by breakable strut.
3.
Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2
(DN 15) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure
labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and
cover held closed by breakable strut.
2.14
SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig (1200-kPa)

minimum pressure rating. Sprinklers shall have 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum
pressure rating if sprinklers are components of high-pressure piping system.
1.
2.
3.
Star Sprinkler Inc.
4.
Venus Fire Protection, Ltd.
5.
6.
Viking Corp.
7.
of contract.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/17
C. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the

following:
1.
UL 199, for nonresidential applications.
2.
UL 1626, for residential applications.
3.
UL 1767, for early-suppression, fast-response applications.
D. Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice for
"Ordinary" temperature classification rating, unless otherwise indicated or
required by application.
1.
Open Sprinklers: UL 199, without heat-responsive element.
a.
Orifice: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), with discharge coefficient K between
5.3 and 5.8.
b.
Orifice: 17/32 inch (13.5 mm), with discharge coefficient K
between 7.4 and 8.2.
E. Sprinkler types, features, and options as follows:
1.
Concealed ceiling sprinklers, including cover plate.
2.
Extended-coverage sprinklers.
3.
Flow-control sprinklers, with automatic open and shutoff feature.
4.
Flush ceiling sprinklers, including escutcheon.
5.
High-pressure sprinklers.
6.
Institution sprinklers, made with a small, breakaway projection.
7.
Open sprinklers.
8.
Pendent sprinklers.
9.
Quick-response sprinklers.
10.
Recessed sprinklers, including escutcheon.
11.
Sidewall sprinklers.
12.
Upright sprinklers.
13.
of contract.
F. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated, bronze, and painted.
G. Special Coatings: Wax, lead, and corrosion-resistant paint.
H. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler
mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type
sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.
1.
Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat or Chrome-plated
steel, 2 piece, with 1-inch (25-mm) vertical adjustment or Plastic, white
finish, one piece, flat.
2.
Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel or Plastic, white finish, one
piece, flat.
I. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to
sprinkler.
2.15
HOSE CONNECTIONS
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/18
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Fire Protection Products, Inc.
Guardian Fire Equipment Incorporated.
of contract.
B. Description: UL 668, brass or bronze, 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum pressure

rating, hose valve for connecting fire hose. Include angle or gate pattern design;
female NPS inlet and male hose outlet; and lugged cap, gasket, and chain.
Include NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2 (DN 40 or DN 65) as indicated, and hose valve
threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department threads.
1.
Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.
2.
Finish: Rough metal or chrome-plated.
2.16
HOSE STATIONS
1.
American Fire Hose Cabinet Co.
2.
Angus Fire, Inc.
3.
Brooks Equipment Co., Inc.
4.
5.
6.
of contract.
B. Description: UL 47, semiautomatic hose stations. Include brass rack nipple,
hose rack, and the following:
1.
Valve: UL 668, brass or bronze, 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum pressure
rating, 90-degree-angle-pattern hose valve with female NPS inlet and
outlet, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Valve Operation: Pressure-regulating type.
2.
Threads and Gaskets: NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department
threads.
3.
Flow-Restricting Devices: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), brass, adjustable for
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) fire hose inlet.
4.
Fire Hose: NFPA 1961 and UL 219, lined fire hose with couplings,
gaskets, and nozzle. Include the following fire hose materials:
a.
Jacket: Natural, synthetic, or combination of natural and synthetic
threads.
b.
Lining: Rubber, plastic, or combination of rubber and plastic
compounds.
c.
Cover: Rubber, plastic, or combination of rubber and plastic
compounds.
5.
Nozzles: UL 401.
6.
Drain Valves: UL 1726.
7.
Mountings: Pipe escutcheon for cabinet-mounted units.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/19
C. NPS 2-1/2 by NPS 1-1/2 (DN 65 by DN 40) Hose Station: NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)
hose valve; NPS 2-1/2 by NPS 1-1/2 (DN 65 by DN 40) reducer adapter; hose
rack with water-retention device and pins for folded, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) lined
hose; NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle; and
reducer-adapter spanner wrench.
1.
Hose-Rack Finish: Red enamel.
2.
Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
3.
Fire Hose: Lined, 100-foot (30-m) length.
4.
Nozzle: Brass, adjustable from shutoff to fog spray or straight stream.
D. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) Hose Station: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose valve; hose rack with
water-retention device and pins for folded, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) lined hose; and
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
1.
Hose-Rack Finish: Red enamel.
2.
Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
3.
4.
E. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) Hose-Reel Hose Station: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose valve;
hose reel with water-retention device and pins for NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) lined hose;
and NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) lined hose with swivel inlet coupling and nozzle.
1.
Hose-Reel Finish: Red enamel.
2.
Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Rough chrome-plated.
3.
4.
2.17
ROOF HOSE CABINETS
1.
2.
3.
Metal Cabinet Co.
4.
5.
Van Loon Industries, Inc.
6.
of contract.
B. Description: FMG-approved, low-profile-type cabinet for roof-mounting hose
station. Include the following:
1.
Housing: Sheet-steel construction with steel reinforcement and modified
to hold not less than length of fire hose indicated.
2.
Shutoff Valve: UL 262, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), bronze-body gate valve with
extended stem.
3.
Hose Connection: UL 668, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), brass or bronze valve.
4.
Fittings: Brass.
5.
Hose: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), lined and suitable for exterior service. Include
two 75-foot (23-m) lengths coupled together. Include wrench.
6.
Nozzle: UL 401, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), brass, adjustable from fog spray to
straight stream to shutoff.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/20
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.18
Drain Valve: NPS 1/2 (DN 15), unlisted, bronze gate valve with extended
stem.
Finish: Red enamel paint.
Roof Curb: Matching housing dimensions.
Mounting Materials: Structural steel and wood blocking as recommended
in writing by manufacturer.
MONITORS
1.
AFAC Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
of contract.
B. Description: Stationary, single-waterway-type monitor for 750-gpm (47.3-L/s)
water stream. Include the following features:
1.
Waterway: [NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)] minimum, brass or stainless-steel tube.
2.
Operation: Lever handle.
3.
Horizontal Rotation: 360 degrees with locking device.
4.
Vertical Rotation: 80-degree elevation and 60-degree depression with
locking device.
5.
Nozzle: UL 401, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65), brass, adjustable from fog spray to
straight stream to shutoff.
2.19
WALL-TYPE FIRE HYDRANTS
1.
AFAC Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
of contract.
B. Description: Cast-brass-body fire hydrant with brass wall escutcheon plates,
brass lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains, and brass lugged swivel
connections. Include outlets with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching
local fire department sizes and threads, inlet with pipe threads, extension pipe
nipple, and valve control.
1.
Type: Flush with two hose-connection outlets and square or rectangular
escutcheon plate.
2.
Type: Exposed, projecting, with two hose-connection outlets and round
escutcheon plate.
3.
4.
Hydrant Escutcheon-Plate Marking: "HYDRANT."
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/21
5.
6.
2.20
Hydrant Valve Control: Wall-mounting assembly with extension rod for

manual control of valve inside building.
Hydrant Valve-Control Escutcheon-Plate Marking: "HYDRANT VALVE
CONTROL."
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
1.
AFAC Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fire Protection Products, Inc.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
United Brass Works, Inc.
11.
of contract.
B. Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL 405, 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum
pressure rating; with corrosion-resistant-metal body with brass inlets, brass wall
escutcheon plate, brass lugged caps with gaskets and brass chains, and brass
lugged swivel connections. Include inlets with threads according to NFPA 1963
and matching local fire department sizes and threads, outlet with pipe threads,
extension pipe nipples, check devices or clappers for inlets, and escutcheon
plate with marking similar to "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."
1.
Type: Flush, with four inlets and square or rectangular escutcheon plate.
2.
Type: Exposed, projecting, with two inlets and round escutcheon plate.
3.
2.21
ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm: UL 753, mechanical-operation type with peltonwheel operator with shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction
and 10-inch- (250-mm-) diameter, cast-aluminum alarm gong with red-enamel
factory finish. Include NPS 3/4 (DN 20) inlet and NPS 1 (DN 25) drain
connections.
1.
a.
AFAC Inc.
b.
c.
Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc.
d.
Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.
e.
f.
g.
Star Sprinkler Inc.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/22
h.
i.
Viking Corp.
C. Electrically Operated Alarm: UL 464, with 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum diameter,

vibrating-type, metal alarm bell with red-enamel factory finish and suitable for
outdoor use.
1.
a.
Potter Electric Signal Company.
b.
System Sensor.
c.
D. Water-Flow Indicator: UL 346, electrical-supervision, paddle-operated-type,
water-flow detector with 250-psig (1725-kPa) pressure rating and designed for
horizontal or vertical installation. Include two single-pole, double-throw circuit
switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false
signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
1.
a.
ADT Security Services, Inc.
b.
c.
ITT McDonnell & Miller.
d.
e.
System Sensor.
f.
Viking Corp.
g.
h.
E. Pressure Switch: UL 753, electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with
retard feature. Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and
design that operates on rising pressure and signals water flow.
1.
a.
b.
c.
System Sensor.
d.
Viking Corp.
e.
F. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch
with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in
other than fully open position.
1.
a.
McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div.
b.
c.
System Sensor.
d.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/23
G. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw

switch with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled
indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.
1.
a.
b.
System Sensor.
c.
2.22
PRESSURE GAGES
1.
2.
AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
3.
Brecco Corporation.
4.
Dresser Equipment Group; Instrument Div.
5.
Marsh Bellofram.
6.
WIKA Instrument Corporation.
7.
of contract.
B. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch- (90- to 115-mm-) diameter, dial
pressure gage with range of 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum.
1.
Water System Piping: Include caption "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" on dial
face.
2.
Air System Piping: Include[ retard feature and] caption "AIR" or
"AIR/WATER" on dial face.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/24
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13, NFPA 14 and NFPA 291.
Use results for system design calculations required in Part 1 "Quality Assurance"
Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.02
EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and

backfilling.
3.03
EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations
of piping connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thicknesses, fire- and smoke-rated
construction, framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose
connections and stations are to be installed.
corrected.
3.04
PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated.

B. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
C. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with
finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may
be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Black,
Seamless, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; grooved-end fittings;
grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.
3.05
FIRE SYSTEMS PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Pipes
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SERVICE
LOCATION
TYPE
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1.
Hose reel system
All
Galvanised
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/25
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
piping upto 50 mm
nom. dia.
Sprinkler system piping
upto 80 mm nom. dia.
wrought steel,
schedule 40 seamless.
All
Galvanised
wrought steel
schedule 40, seamless.
All
Black, wrought
100 mm nom dia. and larger
steel sch. 40, seamless
All
Copper (Type K)
running in curved routes
hard.
Supply to water
All
Copper (Type K)
motor alarm
hard
External fire protection
All
Ductile iron
Piping
Cement lined.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Joints
1.
Black wrought steel: Electric arc (A/C) welded joints.
2.
Galvanised wrought steel, 2 inch diameter and less: Threaded, with Teflon
tape or joining compound (non-toxic) applied to pipe threads.
3.
Black Steel: Mechanical grooved piping system.
4.
Copper, Type K: B cup - 5 brazed joints.
5.
Ductile Iron: Slip-on neoprene gasketted joints.
Use flanged
spigots/sockets as required.
6.
All joints shall be rated for 1724 Kpa (250 psig) working water pressure at
121 deg.C (250 deg.F).
C. Standard-Pressure, Wet-Type Standpipe System, 175-psig (1200-kPa) Maximum
Working Pressure:
3.06
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not
indicated, the following requirements apply:
1.
Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for
applications where required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
a.
Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
2.
Unlisted General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and
FMG-approved valves are not required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
a.
Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
b.
Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves.
3.07
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for
basic piping joint construction.
B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not
thread pipe smaller than NPS 8 (DN 200) with wall thickness less than
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/26
Schedule 40 unless approved by authorities having jurisdiction and threads are

checked by a ring gage and comply with ASME B1.20.1.
C. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain-end piping into locking-lug fitting and rotate
retainer lug one-quarter turn.
D. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use UL-listed tool and procedure. Include use of
specific equipment, pressure-sealing tool, and accessories.
E. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use UL-listed tool and
procedure. Drill pilot hole in copper tube, form branch for collar, dimple tube to
form seating stop, and braze branch tube into formed-collar outlet.
F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and
bolts.
1.
Ductile-Iron Pipe: Radius-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end
fittings and grooved-end-pipe couplings.
2.
Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use groovedend fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.
Copper Tube: Roll-groove tubing. Use grooved-end fittings and groovedend-tube couplings.
4.
Dry-Pipe Systems: Use fittings and gaskets listed for dry-pipe service.
G. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible
with both piping materials.
1.
NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions, couplings, or nipples.
2.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges.
3.
NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange insulation kits.
3.08
SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Connect fire-suppression piping to water-service piping of size and in location

indicated for service entrance to building. Refer to Division 22 Section "Facility
Water Distribution Piping" for exterior piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other
accessories indicated at connection to water-service piping. Refer to Division 22
Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for backflow preventers.
C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water service.
3.09
WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION
A. Connect fire-suppression piping to building's interior water distribution piping.

Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for interior piping.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/27
B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other
accessories indicated at connection to water distribution piping. Refer to
Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers.
C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to
water supply.
3.10
PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for
basic piping installation.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as
practical.
1.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written
approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with
Architect before deviating from approved working plans.
C. Install underground ductile-iron service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24
and with restrained joints. Encase piping in corrosion-protective encasement.
D. Install underground copper service-entrance piping according to NFPA 24.
Encase piping in corrosion-protective encasement.
E. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains,
and reductions in pipe sizes.
F. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using
grooved joints.
G. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger connections.
H. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with
shutoff valve, sized and located according to NFPA 13.
I. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
J. Install sprinkler zone control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to
standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
K. Install drain valves on standpipes.
L. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and
check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
M. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
N. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/28
1.
2.
Install standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.

Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
O. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from

earthquake damage.
P. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection,
and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less
than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for
draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and
install where they will not be subject to freezing.
Q. Fill wet-standpipe system piping with water.
R. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water.
S. Install flexible connectors on fire-pump and pressure-maintenance-pump supply
and discharge connections and in fire-suppression piping where indicated.
3.11
VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves

and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 and
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control
sources of water supply except from fire department connections. Install
permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each
valve.
C. Valves for Wall-Type Fire Hydrants: Install nonrising-stem gate valve in watersupply pipe.
D. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers
instead of check valves in potable-water supply sources.
E. Specialty Valves:
1.
Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow,
including bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line
connection.
2.
Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm
connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber
attachment, and fill-line attachment.
a.
Air-Pressure Maintenance Devices for Dry-Pipe Systems: Install
shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler
system; bypass valve for quick system filling; pressure regulator or
switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with
14- to 60-psig (95- to 410-kPa) adjustable range; and [175-psig
(1200-kPa) maximum inlet pressure.
b.
Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/29
c.
3.
3.12
Install compressed-air supply piping from building's compressedair piping system.

Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, in
main supply to deluge system.
SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
A. Drawings indicate sprinkler types to be used. Where specific types are not
indicated, use the following sprinkler types:
1.
Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.
2.
Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and
concealed sprinklers, as indicated.
3.
Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
4.
Deluge-Sprinkler Systems: Upright, open sprinklers.
5.
Special Applications: Extended-coverage, flow-control, and quickresponse sprinklers where indicated.
6.
Sprinkler Finishes:
a.
Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in
finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished
spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids,
chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
b.
Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white
cover plate.
c.
Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
d.
Recessed Sprinklers:
Bright chrome, with bright chrome
escutcheon.
e.
Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome.
3.13
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of

acoustical ceiling panels and tiles.
B. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to
freezing. Use dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space.
3.14
HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage
restriction.
C. Install NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose-connection valves with flow-restricting device,
D. Install NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 65 by DN 40) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device, unless
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/30
E. Install wall-mounting-type hose connections in cabinets.

Include pipe
escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply
piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for connection of fire
hose. Refer to Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets" for cabinets.
3.15
HOSE-STATION INSTALLATION
A. Install freestanding hose stations for access and minimum passage restriction.
B. Install NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) hose-station valves with flow-restricting device, unless
C. Install NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by
NPS 1-1/2 (DN 65 by DN 40) reducer adapter and flow- restricting device, unless
D. Install freestanding hose stations with support or bracket attached to standpipe
or substrate.
E. Install wall-mounting, rack-type hose stations in cabinets. Include pipe
escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-supply
piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for connection of fire
hose. Cabinets are specified in Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."
F. Install hose-reel hose stations on wall with bracket attached to substrate.
3.16
ROOF HOSE CABINET INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets, and install shutoff valve inside building in heated space.
3.17
MONITOR INSTALLATION
A. Install monitor bases securely attached to building substrate.

3.18
FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION
A. Install fire hydrants mounted in vertical wall with shutoff valve inside building in
heated space.
3.19
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-type, fire department connections in vertical wall.

B. Install freestanding-type, fire department connections in level surface.
1.
Install protective pipe bollards on [two] [three] <Insert other arrangement>
sides of each fire department connection. Refer to Division 05 Section
"Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/31
C. Install ball drip valve at each check valve for fire department connection.
3.20
CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect water-supply piping to fire-suppression piping. Include backflow
preventer between potable-water piping and fire-suppression piping. Refer to
Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers.
D. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain
to floor drain or outside building.
E. Connect piping to specialty valves, hose valves, specialties, fire department
connections, and accessories.
F. Connect excess-pressure pumps to the following piping and wiring:
1.
Sprinkler system, hydraulically.
2.
Pressure gages and controls, hydraulically.
3.
Electrical power system.
4.
Alarm device accessories for pump.
5.
Fire alarm.
G. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping.
H. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:
1.
Pressure gages and controls.
2.
Electrical power system.
3.
Fire alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm.
I. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26.
J. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm.
K. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
L. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
M. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.21
LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to

requirements in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/32
3.22
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair
leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.
Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
4.
Start and run excess-pressure pumps.
5.
Start and run air compressors.
6.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13,
"Systems Acceptance" Chapter.
7.
Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14,
"System Acceptance" Chapter.
8.
Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required.
9.
Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
10.
Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department
equipment.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.23
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion.
3.24
DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves. Refer to Division 01
Section "Demonstration and Training."
3.25
TESTING OF PRESSURIZED PIPING
A. The pipes shall be jointed, plugged and shall have been in position for at least 24
hours, before the tests are carried out.
B. The piping shall be tested for line, gradient and water tightness. Furnish all
labour and necessary testing instruments such as gauges, pumps etc. as
directed by the Engineer. A minimum of 2 nos. identical pressure gauges shall be
installed at extremities of the piping circuit to be tested.
C. Fill the piping with clean fresh water, leaving all high points open to allow for
purging of air. Allow a soaking period of at least 24 hours for cement lined pipes.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/33
D. Pressure test the system using manual pumps in increments of 25 percent of the
test pressure. Allow a standing period of 10 minutes after each pressure
increment. Pressure testing using motor driven pump is not permitted.
E. Do not over pressurise the system under any circumstance. If the test pressure is
close to the maximum permissible working pressure of any of the system
components, install calibrated pressure relief valves in the tested circuit.
F. Prior to testing keep all valves and control devices in open position. After
completion of pressure test, close each valve one at a time starting from the
pressure release end, so as to ensure tightness of the valve.
G. The piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure of 689 Kpa (100 psig) or
1.5 times the system working pressure, whichever is greater, but limited to 1379
Kpa (200 psig). The pressure shall be maintained for at least 4 hours. Allow for
pressure fluctuations due to ambient temperature variations. Record the circuit
temperature along with the pressure readings.
H. Check for leaks by swabbing with a dry tissue. Drop in pressure to the order of
10 Kpa (1.5 psig) per hour, but without any visible leaks, shall be considered as
acceptable.
I. Do not subject sprinklers to the test pressure.
J. Test the piping in segments during the progress of the work. Maintain an official
log book for recording the tests carried out on sections of piping, including test
pressure, date of test and approval signature of Engineer's representative
witnessing the test.
3.26
SYSTEM FLUSHING AND CHARGING
A. Drain the complete piping after completion of all tests and flush with fresh water
intended for fire protection services. Do not leave any segment of the piping
partially filled with water at any time, to prevent the occurrence of internal
corrosion.
B. Leave all air release outlets open to purge the air in the system and fill the
system gradually using the jockey pump.
3.27
PROTECTION: Give the following protective coatings / wrappings to piping, on

completion of the works. All piping above louvered ceilings shall be painted black
as further described in architectural finish schedule.
A. Exposed, black steel piping:

1.
Two coats of red oxide primer.
2.
Two coats of fire red enamel paint (or colour matching with the
surrounding architectural finish, in areas exposed to view).
B. Concealed (in shafts/false ceiling) black steel piping:
1.
Two coats of red oxide primer.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/34
2.
Two coats of coal tar enamel.
C. Exposed galvanized iron piping:

1.
Two coats of zinc chromate primer.
2.
D. Concealed (in shafts/false ceiling) galvanised iron piping:
1.
Two coats of zinc chromate primer.
2.
Two coats of coal tar enamel.
E. Exposed uninsulated copper piping:
1.
Two coats of clear, synthetic lacquer.
2.
F. Black steel piping - buried:
1.
Two (2) coats of red oxide primer.
2.
One (1) layer of asphalt impregnated felt wrap with 25 mm (1 inch)
overlaps.
G. Concealed copper piping in shafts and chases:
1.
Two (2) coats with clear, synthetic lacquer or other suitable primer.
H. Buried Copper Piping:
1.
Two (2) coats of clear synthetic lacquer.
2.
One (1) layer of asphalt impregnated felt wrap with 25 mm (1 inch)
overlaps.
3.
Coloured, plastic foil warning grids (outside building lines only).
I. Ductile Iron Piping Buried:
1.
Two (2) coats of coal tar enamel.
2.
Polyethylene sleeving.
3.
Colored, plastic foil warning grids.
3.28
SYSTEM TEST
A. Maintain a log of the jockey pump operation after the system has been
commissioned.
B. Check and repair leakages, if any, indicated by too frequent and excessive
operation of the jockey pump.
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 1000/35
SECTION 21 2200
CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes clean-agent extinguishing systems and the following:

1.
Piping and piping specialties.
2.
Extinguishing-agent containers.
3.
Extinguishing agent.
4.
Detection and alarm devices.
5.
Control and alarm panels.
6.
Accessories.
7.
Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
8.
Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire alarm
system.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. EPO: Emergency Power Off.
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Clean-agent fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for total

flooding of the hazard area including the room cavity below the ceiling and below
the raised floor. Provide separate zones above and below the raised floor. If
smoke is detected below the raised floor, agent shall be discharged in the
underfloor zone only. If smoke is detected above the raised floor, agent shall be
discharged in zones above and below the floor.
1.04
A. Design clean-agent extinguishing system and obtain approval from authorities

having jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, B, or C fires as appropriate for
areas being protected and include safety factor. Use clean agent indicated and
in concentration suitable for normally occupied areas.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/1
Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System
B. Performance Requirements: Discharge HFC 227ea within 10 seconds and

maintain 7.1 percent concentration by volume at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for 10minute holding time in hazard areas.
1.
HFC 227ea concentration in hazard areas greater than 9.0 percent
immediately after discharge or less than 5.8 percent throughout holding
time will not be accepted without written authorization from Owner and
authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
System Capabilities: Minimum 620-psig (4278-kPa) calculated working
pressure and 360-psig (2484-kPa) initial charging pressure.
C. Performance Requirements: Discharge IG-541 within 60 seconds and maintain
38 percent concentration by volume at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for 10-minute holding
time in hazard areas.
1.
IG-541 concentration in hazard areas greater than 40 percent immediately
after discharge or less than 32 percent throughout holding time will not be
accepted without written authorization from Owner and authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.
System Capabilities: Minimum 2175-psig (15-MPa) calculated working
pressure upstream from orifice union, minimum 1000-psig (6895-kPa)
calculated working pressure downstream from orifice union, and 2175psig (15-MPa) initial charging pressure.
D. Cross-Zoned Detection: Devices located in two separate zones. Sound alarm
on activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on
actuating single-detection device in other zone.
E. Verified Detection: Devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on activating
single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating seconddetection device.
F. System Operating Sequence: As follows:
1.
Actuating First Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize
audible alarm and visual alarms (slow pulse), shut down air-conditioning
and ventilating systems serving protected area, close doors in protected
area, and send signal to fire alarm system.
2.
Actuating Second Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel,
energize audible and visual alarms (fast pulse), shut down power to
protected equipment, start time delay for extinguishing-agent discharge
for 30 seconds, and discharge extinguishing agent. On agent discharge,
release preaction valve to allow water to fill sprinkler system.
3.
Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe
lights inside and outside the protected area.
G. System Operating Sequence: System shall be cross-zoned, air-sampling
detectors and photoelectric detectors reporting to a fully programmable
microprocessor-based control panel programmed to operate as follows:
1.
If one photoelectric detector and air-sampling detector reaches the third
detection level (Fire 1), agent discharge will be initiated as described for
the third detection level (Fire 1) below.
2.
Air-Sampling System:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/2
a.
b.
c.
d.
First Detection Level (Alert): Mild audible and visual indication on

annunciator panel. Strobe lights flash slowly in the protected area.
Second Detection Level (Action): Strong audible and visual
indication on annunciator panel. Strobe lights flash rapidly in the
protected area.
Third Detection Level (Fire 1): Strong audible and visual indication
on annunciator panel. Energize horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s)
in the protected area and outside entry doors. Shut down airconditioning and ventilating systems serving the protected area,
and close doors in the protected area. Send signal to fire alarm
system, initiate 30-second time delay for extinguishing-agent
discharge, and discharge extinguishing agent. At agent discharge,
terminate power to equipment in the protected area, and release
preaction valve to allow water flow to sprinkler system.
Fourth Detection Level (Fire 2): Same as Fire 1.
H. Manual stations shall immediately discharge extinguishing agent when activated.

I. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being
activated, and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of
hand pressure on the switch will cause agent discharge if the time delay has
expired.
J. EPO: Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on actuation.
K. Low-Agent Pressure Switch: Initiate trouble alarm if sensing less than set
pressure.
L. Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.
1.05
SUBMITTALS

1.
Extinguishing-agent containers.
2.
Extinguishing agent.
3.
Discharge nozzles.
4.
Control panels.
5.
Detection devices.
6.
Manual stations.
7.
Switches.
8.
Alarm devices.
9.
Pipe hangers and supports, including seismic restraints.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include
design calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure, drawn to
scale:
1.
Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/3
3.
4.
5.
6.
Design Calculations:
For weight, volume, and concentration of
extinguishing agent required for each hazard area.
Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted
items, and the following:
a.
Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles,
detectors, and accessories.
b.
c.
Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers,
grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and access panels.
Occupied Work Area Plans: Show the following:
a.
Controls and alarms.
b.
Extinguishing-agent containers, piping and discharge nozzles if
mounted in space, detectors, and accessories.
c.
Equipment and furnishings.
Access Floor Space Plans: Show the following:
a.
Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles,
detectors, and accessories.
b.
Method of supporting piping.
C. Permit Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 2001,

that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Include design
calculations.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Maintenance Data: For components to include in maintenance manuals.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally

qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of clean-agent
extinguishing systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements
of clean-agent extinguishing systems and are based on the specific system
indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
1.07
EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/4
1.
2.
3.
4.
Detection Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type

installed.
Container Valves: Not less than 10 percent of amount of each size and
type installed.
Nozzles: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
Extinguishing Agent: Not less than 100 percent of amount installed in
largest hazard area. Include pressure-rated containers with valves.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles were titles below introduce lists, the following
1.
2.
2.02
PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 piping applications Article retained for applications of pipe, tube,
fitting, and joining materials.
B. Piping, Valves, and Discharge Nozzles: Comply with types and standards listed
in NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," for charging pressure of system.
2.03
PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B or ASTM A 106, Grade B;
Schedule 40, or Schedule 80, seamless steel pipe.
1.
Threaded Fittings:
a.
Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.
b.
Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 300, unless
Class 600 is indicated.
2.
Forged-Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11, Class 3000, socket
pattern.
3.
Grooved-End Fittings:
FMG approved and NRTL listed,
ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with
dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to
AWWA C606.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of
piping system contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm)
maximum thickness, unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
general-duty brazing.
E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/6
F. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213, AWWA C606, approved or listed for halon or
clean-agent service, and matching steel-pipe dimensions. Include ASTM A 536,
ductile-iron housing, rubber gasket, and steel bolts and nuts.
2.04
VALVES
A. General: Brass; suitable for intended operation.

B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid and manual-release lever,
capable of immediate and total agent discharge and suitable for intended flow
capacity.
C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent
entrapment of liquid, or install valve and separate pressure relief device.
D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing agent
when container is removed from manifold.
2.05
EXTINGUISHING-AGENT CONTAINERS
A. Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum workingpressure rating that matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure switch,
and pressure gage.
1.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard color, enamel or epoxy paint.
2.
Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, and connections for
multiple storage containers, as indicated.
3.
Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, selector switch, and
connections for main- and reserve-supply banks of multiple storage
containers.
4.
Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets
consisting of steel straps and channels; suitable for container support,
maintenance, and tank refilling or replacement.
2.06
FIRE-EXTINGUISHING CLEAN AGENT
A. Clean Agent: HFC 227ea, heptafluoropropane.

1.
a.
Cerberus Pyrotronics.
b.
Chemetron Fire Systems.
c.
Fike Corporation.
d.
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc.
e.
Modular Protection Corp.
f.
Chubb.
g.
Approved alternatives/substitutions under provisions of the General
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/7
2.07
DISCHARGE NOZZLES
A. Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy of type,

discharge pattern, and capacity required for application.
2.08
MANIFOLD AND ORIFICE UNIONS
A. Description: NRTL-listed device with minimum 2175-psig (15-MPa) pressure

rating, to control flow and reduce pressure of IG-541 gas in piping.
1.
NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Piping assembly with orifice, sized for
system design requirements.
2.
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Piping assembly with nipple, sized for
system design requirements.
2.09
CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, including equipment and features

required for testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing system.
B. Power Requirements: 120/240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to
system components and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as
needed to produce power at voltage required for accessories and alarm devices.
C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, enameled-steel cabinet.
1.
Mounting: Recessed flush with surface/Surface.
D. Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area.
1.
Detection circuits equal to the required number of zones, or addressable
devices assigned to the required number of zones.
2.
Manual pull-station circuit.
3.
Alarm circuit.
4.
Release circuit.
5.
Abort circuit.
6.
EPO circuit.
E. Provide the following control-panel features:
1.
Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and
operating system electrical devices.
2.
Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
3.
Storage container, low-pressure indicator.
4.
Service disconnect to interrupt system operation for maintenance with
visual status indication on the annunciator panel.
F. Annunciator Panel: Graphic type showing protected, hazard-area plans and
locations of detectors, abort, EPO, and manual stations. Include lamps to
indicate device-initiating alarm, electrical contacts for connection to control panel,
and stainless-steel or aluminum enclosure.
G. Standby Power: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries with capacity to operate
system for 72 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include automatic
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/8
battery charger, with varying charging rate between trickle and high depending
on battery voltage, that is capable of maintaining batteries fully charged. Include
manual voltage control, dc voltmeter, dc ammeter, electrical contacts for
connection to control panel, and suitable enclosure.
2.10
DETECTION DEVICES
A. Description: Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72, and include the following
types:
1.
Ionization Detectors: Comply with UL 268, dual-chamber type, having
sampling and referencing chambers, with smoke-sensing element.
2.
Photoelectric Detectors: Comply with UL 268, consisting of LED light
source and silicon photodiode receiving element.
3.
Remote Air-Sampling Detector System: Includes air-sampling pipe
network, a laser-based photoelectric detector, a sample transport fan, and
a control unit.
a.
Comply with UL 268 and NRTL listed, operating at 24-V dc,
nominal.
b.
Pipe Network: CPVC tubing connects control unit with calibrated
sampling holes.
c.
Smoke Detector: Particle-counting type with continuous laser
beam. Sensitivity adjustable to a minimum of four preset values.
d.
Sample Transport Fan: Centrifugal type, creating a minimum static
pressure of 0.05-inch wg (12.5 Pa) at all sampling ports.
e.
Control Unit: Multizone unit as indicated on Drawings. Provides
same system power supply, supervision, and alarm features as
specified for the control panel plus separate trouble indication for
airflow and detector problems.
f.
Signals to the Central Fire Alarm Control Panel: Any type of local
system trouble is reported to the central fire alarm control panel as
a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each system zone are
individually reported to the central fire alarm control panel as
separately identified zones.
2.11
MANUAL STATIONS
A. General Description: Surface/Semirecessed FMG approved or NRTL listed, with

clear plastic hinged cover, 120-V ac or low voltage compatible with controls.
Include contacts for connection to control panel.
B. Manual Release: "MANUAL RELEASE" caption, and red finish. Unit can
manually discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains
engaged until unlocked.
C. Abort Switch: "ABORT" caption, momentary contact, with green finish.
D. EPO Switch: "EPO" caption, with yellow finish.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/9
2.12
SWITCHES
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, where available, 120-V ac or low

voltage compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to control
panel.
1.
Low-Agent Pressure Switches: Pneumatic operation.
2.
Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release
circuit signal from main supply to reserve supply.
3.
Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device or electrical
interlock to cause the door operator to drive the door closed.
2.13
ALARM DEVICES
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, low voltage, and surface mounting,
B. Bells: Minimum 6-inch (150-mm) diameter.
C. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
D. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.
2.14
ELECTRICAL POWER AND WIRING
A. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 26.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with hazardarea leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
work performance.
1.
corrected.
3.02
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to specialties
and accessories and where required for maintenance.
B. Fittings Working Pressure: 620 psig (4278 kPa) minimum.
C. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.
D. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 40, steel pipe; malleable-iron threaded
fittings; and threaded joints.
E. NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80): Schedule 40, steel pipe; steel,
grooved-end fittings; steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
F. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Schedule 40, steel pipe; steel, grooved-end fittings;
steel, keyed couplings; and grooved joints.
3.03
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Piping between Storage Containers and Orifice Union:

1.
Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to
specialties and accessories and where required for maintenance.
2.
Fittings Working Pressure: 2175 psig (15 MPa) minimum.
3.
Flanged Joints: Class 600 minimum.
4.
All Sizes: Schedule 80, steel pipe; forged-steel welding fittings; and
welded joints.
B. Piping Downstream from Orifice Union:
1.
Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to
specialties and accessories and where required for maintenance.
2.
Fittings Working Pressure: 1000 psig (6900 kPa) minimum.
3.
Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.
4.
All Sizes: Schedule [40] [80], steel pipe; forged-steel welding fittings; and
welded joints.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/11
3.04
CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install clean-agent extinguishing piping and other components level and plumb
and according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for
basic pipe installation and joint construction.
C. Grooved Piping Joints:
Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606
dimensions. Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end fittings
with steel, keyed couplings and lubricant according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Install extinguishing-agent containers anchored to substrate.
E. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to requirements
listed in NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," and in ASME B31.1.
1.
Install valves designed to prevent entrapment of liquid or install pressure
relief devices in valved sections of piping systems.
2.
Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13 and
Division 22 Section "Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And
Equipment/Hangers And Supports For HVACs Piping And Equipment."
3.
Install seismic restraints for extinguishing-agent containers and piping
systems.
4.
Install control panels, detection system components, alarms, and
accessories, complying with requirements of NFPA 2001, Section
"Detection, Actuation, and Control Systems," as required for supervised
system application.
3.05
CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to extinguishing-agent containers to allow service and
maintenance.
C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire alarm system.
Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 28 Section "Fire
Detection and Alarm."
3.06
LABELING
A. Install labeling on piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment, and

panels according to NFPA 2001.
B. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they are
entering a room protected with a clean-agent fire extinguishing system.
C. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning of
the horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/12
3.07
A. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section

"Approval of Installations." Include the following tests and inspections to
demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1.
Check mechanical items.
2.
Inspect extinguishing-agent containers and extinguishing agent, and
check mountings for adequate anchoring to substrate.
3.
Check electrical systems.
4.
Check enclosure integrity. Comply with NFPA 2001, Section "Enclosure
Inspection," and Appendix C, "Enclosure Integrity Procedure."
5.
Perform functional pre-discharge test.
6.
Perform system functional operational test including, EPO, abort, and
manual release.
7.
Check remote monitoring operations.
8.
Check control-panel primary power source.
9.
Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.
B. Perform field-acceptance tests of each clean-agent extinguishing system when
installation is complete. Perform system testing only after hazard-area enclosure
construction has been completed and openings sealed. Comply with operating
instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section "Approval of Installations."
Include the following to demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1.
Perform functional predischarge test.
2.
Perform system functional operational test.
3.
Check remote monitoring operations.
4.
Check control-panel primary power source.
5.
Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.
C. Correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Replace equipment that cannot be corrected or does not perform as specified
and indicated, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until
satisfactory results are obtained.
1.
Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
After installing clean-agent extinguishing piping system and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated
in NETA ATS, Sections "Inspection and Test Procedures" and "System
Function Tests." Certify compliance with test parameters.
3.
4.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units
to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
5.
Replace damaged and
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/13
3.08
CLEANING
A. Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before
assembly by means of swabbing, using a suitable nonflammable cleaner. Pipe
network shall be free of particulate matter and oil residue before installing
nozzles or discharge devices.
3.09
SYSTEM FILLING
A. Preparation:
1.
Verify that piping system installation is completed and cleaned.
2.
Check for complete enclosure integrity.
3.
Check operation of ventilation and exhaust systems.
B. Filling Procedures:
1.
Fill extinguishing-agent containers with extinguishing agent and
pressurize to indicated charging pressure.
2.
Install filled extinguishing-agent containers.
3.
Energize circuits.
4.
Adjust operating controls.
3.10
DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cleanagent extinguishing systems. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 2200/14
SECTION 21 3000
FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes electric and diesel drive, [split-case] centrifugal fire pumps
and the following:
1.
Fire-pump controllers and automatic transfer switches.
2.
Fire-pump accessories and specialties.
3.
Pressure-maintenance pumps, controllers, accessories, and specialties.
4.
Alarm panels.
5.
Flowmeter systems.
1.02
A. Pump, Equipment, Accessory, Specialty, and Piping Pressure Rating: 175-psig

(1200-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
certified pump performance curves with each selection point indicated, operating
characteristics, and furnished accessories and specialties for each fire pump and
pressure-maintenance pump.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire pumps and drivers, fire-pump controllers, fire-pump
accessories and specialties, pressure-maintenance pumps, pressuremaintenance-pump controllers, and pressure-maintenance-pump accessories
and specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
1.
2.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of fire pump and fire-pump controller, signed
by product manufacturer.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/1
Fire Pumps
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire pumps and drivers, pressuremaintenance pumps, controllers, accessories and specialties, alarm panels, and
flowmeter systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and

controllers through one source from a single manufacturer for each type of
equipment.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements
of fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and controllers and are based on
specific systems indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having
D. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials,
hose threads, and installation.
E. Comply with NFPA 20, "Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection," for fire pumps,
drivers, controllers, accessories, and their installation.
F. Fire pumps to be UL/FM listed.
1.05
COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/2
Fire Pumps
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
1.
2.
2.02
CENTRIFUGAL ELECTRIC DRIVE FIRE PUMPS
A. Description, General: UL 448, factory-assembled and -tested, electric-drive,

centrifugal fire pumps capable of furnishing not less than 150 percent of rated
capacity at not less than 65 percent of total rated head and with shutoff head
limited to 140 percent of total rated head.
1.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled
and -tested unit before shipping.
2.
Nameplate: Complete with capacities, characteristics, and other pertinent
data.
B. Fabricate base and attachment to fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and
controllers with reinforcement to resist movement of pumps and controllers
during a seismic event when their bases are anchored to building structure.
C. Multistage, Horizontally Mounted, Split-Case Fire Pumps: Single/Two-stage,
single-suction type with pump and driver mounted on same base and connected
with coupling.
1.
a.
A-C Pump; ITT Industries.
b.
Armstrong Darling, Inc.
c.
Aurora Pump; Pentair Pump Group.
d.
Fairbanks Morse; Pentair Pump Group.
e.
Patterson Pump Company.
f.
Reddy-Buffaloes Pump Co.
g.
Sterling Peerless Pump; Sterling Fluid Systems Group.
h.
Approved alternative/substitutions under provisions of the General
2.
Pump: Axially split cast-iron casing with suction and discharge flanges
machined to ASME B16.1, Class 125 dimensions, unless otherwise
indicated.
a.
Impeller: Cast bronze of construction to match fire pump, statically
and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft.
b.
Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze.
c.
Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
1)
Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron
housing.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/3
Fire Pumps
2)
3.
4.
Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphiteimpregnated braided yarn and bronze packing gland.
Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment. Include metal coupling guard.
Driver: UL-listed, NEMA MG 1, open-dripproof, squirrel-cage, induction
motor complying with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70. Include wiring compatible
with controller used.
a.
1)
Emerson; U.S. Electrical Motors.
2)
Lincoln Electric Company (The).
3)
Marathon Electric, Inc.
4)
Approved alternative/substitutions under provisions of the
General Conditions of Contract.
D. Fire-Pump Characteristics and Specialty Data:

1.
Capacity of Fire-Pump.: Refer to schedules on drawing.
2.
Speed: Same as driver.
3.
Electric-Motor Driver: [1450 - 1750] or [2900 3000] rpm, 3 phase, 50
Hz.
2.03
ELETRIC DRIVEN FIRE-PUMP CONTROLLERS
A. Fire-Pump Controllers, General: UL 218 and NFPA 20; listed for electric/dieseldrive, fire-pump service and service entrance; combined automatic and manual
operation; factory assembled and wired; and factory tested for capacities and
electrical characteristics.
1.
a.
Cutler-Hammer.
b.
Firetrol, Inc.
c.
Hubbell Industrial Controls, Inc.
d.
Joslyn Clark.
e.
Master Control Systems, Inc.
f.
Metron, Inc.
g.
Approved alternative/substitutions under provisions of the General
2.
Rate controllers for scheduled fire-pump horsepower and short-circuit
withstand rating at least equal to short-circuit current available at
controller location. Take into account cable size and distance from
substation or supply transformers.
3.
Enclosure: UL 50, Type 2, dripproof, indoor, unless special-purpose
enclosure is indicated. Include manufacturer's standard red paint applied
to factory-assembled and -tested unit before shipping.
4.
Controls, devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as
required for drivers and controller types used, and specific items listed.
a.
Isolating means and circuit breaker.
b.
"Power on" pilot lamp.
c.
Fire-alarm system connections for indicating motor running
condition, loss-of-line power, and line-power phase reversal.
d.
Automatic and manual operation and minimum run-time relay to
prevent short cycling.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/4
Fire Pumps
e.
5.
6.
Water-pressure-actuated switch with independent high and low

calibrated adjustments responsive to water pressure in firesuppression piping.
f.
Automatic and manual shutdown.
g.
System pressure recorder, electric ac driven with spring backup.
Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals and
listings, and other pertinent data.
Controller Sensing Pipes: Fabricate pipe and fittings according to
NFPA 20 with nonferrous-metal sensing piping, NPS 1/2 (DN 15), with
globe valves for testing controller mechanism from system to pump
controller as indicated. Include bronze check valve with 3/32-inch (2.4mm) orifice in clapper or ground-face union with noncorrosive diaphragm
having 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) orifice.
B. Full-Service Fire-Pump Controllers:

1.
Type Starting: Autotransformer, closed transition.
2.
Mounting: Wall type for field electrical connections.
3.
Automatic Transfer Switches: UL 218 and UL 1008 and requirements for
and attached to fire-pump controllers. Include enclosure complying with
UL 50, Type 2, with automatic transfer switch with rating at least equal to
fire-pump driver-motor horsepower. Include ampere rating not less than
115 percent of motor full-load current and suitable for switching motorlocked rotor current.
2.04
CENTRIFUGAL DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE FIRE PUMPS
A. Description, General: UL 448, factory-assembled and -tested, diesel-drive,

centrifugal fire pumps capable of furnishing not less than 150 percent of rated
capacity at not less than 65 percent of total rated head and with shutoff head
limited to 140 percent of total rated head.
1.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factory-assembled
2.
Nameplate: Complete with capacities, characteristics, and other pertinent
data.
B. Fabricate base and attachment to fire pumps, pressure-maintenance pumps, and
controllers with reinforcement to resist movement of pumps and controllers
during a seismic event when their bases are anchored to building structure.
C. Multistage, Horizontally Mounted, Split-Case Fire Pumps: Two-stage, singlesuction type with pump and driver mounted on same base and connected with
coupling.
1.
a.
b.
Aurora Pump; Pentair Pump Group.
c.
Fairbanks Morse; Pentair Pump Group.
d.
Patterson Pump Company.
e.
f.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/5
Fire Pumps
g.
2.
3.
4.
Approved alternative/substitutions under the Provision of General

Pump: Axially split cast-iron casing with suction and discharge flanges
machined to ASME B16.1, Class 125 dimensions, unless otherwise
indicated.
a.
Impeller: Cast bronze of construction to match fire pump, statically
and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft.
b.
Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze.
c.
Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
1)
Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron
housing.
2)
Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphiteimpregnated braided yarn and bronze packing gland.
Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment. Include metal coupling guard.
Driver: UL 1247, horizontal-shaft, diesel engine.
a.
1)
Caterpillar; Engine Div.
2)
Cummins, Inc.
3)
Detroit Diesel Corporation.
4)
Approved alternative/substitutions under the Provision of
b.
Emergency Manual Operator: Factory wired for standby engine
starting and operation in case of main controller or wiring
malfunction.
c.
Engine Cooling System: Factory-installed radiator.
1)
Coolant: Type recommended by driver manufacturer.
d.
Engine Cooling System: Factory-installed water piping, valves,
strainer, pressure regulator, heat exchanger, coolant pump,
bypass piping, and fittings.
1)
Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), copper
water tube; ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint
pressure fittings; AWS A5.8, BCuP Series brazing filler
metal; and brazed joints.
e.
Engine-Jacket Water Heater: Factory-installed electric elements.
f.
Dual Batteries: Lead-acid-storage type, with 100 percent standby
reserve capacity.
g.
Fuel System: According to NFPA 20.
1)
h.
Fuel Storage Tank: Size indicated, but not less than required by NFPA 20.
Include floor legs, direct-reading level gage, and secondary containment
tank with capacity at least equal to fuel storage tank.
Exhaust System: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Schedule 40,

black steel pipe; ASME B16.9, weld-type pipe fittings;
ASME B16.5, steel flanges; and ASME B16.21, nonmetallic
gaskets. Fabricate double-wall, ventilated thimble from steel pipe.
1)
Exhaust Connector: Flexible type.
2)
Exhaust Silencer: Residential type.
D. Fire-Pump Characteristics and Specialty Data:

1.
Capacity of Fire-Pump.: Refer to schedule on drawings.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/6
Fire Pumps
2.05
FIRE-PUMP CONTROLLERS
A. Description: UL 218 and NFPA 20, listed for diesel-drive, fire-pump service;
combined automatic and manual operation; factory assembled and wired; and
factory tested for capacities and electrical characteristics.
1.
a.
Cutler-Hammer.
b.
Firetrol, Inc.
c.
d.
Joslyn Clark.
e.
f.
Metron, Inc.
g.
2.
Rate controllers for scheduled fire-pump horsepower.
3.
Enclosure: UL 50, Type 2, dripproof, indoor, unless special-purpose
enclosure is indicated. Include manufacturer's standard red paint applied
to factory-assembled and -tested unit before shipping.
a.
Mounting Wall type for field electrical connections.
4.
Controls, devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in NFPA 20 as
required for drivers and controller types used, and specific items listed.
5.
Battery Charge UL 1236, built-in, dual-battery type.
a.
1)
La Marche Manufacturing Company.
2)
3)
Metron, Inc.
4)
Approved alternative/substitutions under the Provision of
b.
Time clock for weekly automatic test.
c.
System pressure recorder, electric ac driven with spring backup.
d.
Timing relay for automatic stop.
e.
Power failure start, with time delay to prevent start at momentary
loss of power.
f.
Low-fuel-level alarm.
g.
Alarm contacts for remote alarm of "Engine Run," "Switch Off," and
"Engine Failure."
h.
Pump room alarms, including both audible and visible signals.
6.
Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals and
listings, and other pertinent data.
7.
Controller Sensing Pipes: Fabricate pipe and fittings according to
NFPA 20 with nonferrous-metal sensing piping, NPS 1/2 (DN 15), with
globe valves for testing controller mechanism from system to pump
controller as indicated. Include bronze check valve with 3/32-inch (2.4mm) orifice in clapper or ground-face union with noncorrosive diaphragm
having 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) orifice.
2.06
FIRE-PUMP ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Match fire-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for fire-pump capacity
rating. Include the following:
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/7
Fire Pumps
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
2.07
Automatic air-release valve.

Circulation relief valve.
Suction and discharge pressure gages.
Eccentric-tapered reducer at suction inlet.
Concentric-tapered reducer at discharge outlet.
Test-Header Manifold: Ductile-iron or brass body for hose valves.
Include nozzle outlets arranged in single line; horizontal, flush-wall
mounting attachment; and rectangular, polished chrome-plated brass
finish escutcheon plate with lettering equivalent to "PUMP TEST
CONNECTION."
Test-Header Manifold: Ferrous body for hose valves. Manufacturer's
standard finish. Include bronze or cast-iron, exposed-type valve header
with nozzle outlets; and round, brass escutcheon plate with lettering
equivalent to "PUMP TEST CONNECTION."
Hose Valves: UL 668, straightway pattern, and bronze with cap and
chain. Include NFPA 1963 hose thread that complies with local fire
department standards and finish same as for test-header-manifold
escutcheon plate.
Ball Drip Valve: UL 1726.
Main Relief Valve: UL 1478, pilot operated.
Discharge Cone: Open type.
Flow meter.
Flexible exhaust connector.
Residential exhaust silencer.
One set of dual batteries.
Built-in battery character.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied red paint unless brass or
other finish is specified.
PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
A. Pressure-Maintenance Pumps, General: Factory-assembled and -tested pumps

with electric-motor driver, controller, and accessories and specialties. Include
cast-iron or stainless-steel casing and bronze or stainless-steel impellers,
mechanical seals, and suction and discharge flanges machined to ASME B16.1,
Class 125 dimensions unless Class 250 flanges are indicated and except that
connections may be threaded in sizes where flanges are not available.
1.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled
2.
Nameplate: Complete with capacity, characteristics, and other pertinent
data.
B. Multistage, Pressure-Maintenance Pumps: Multiple-impeller type complying with
HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 requirements for multistage centrifugal pumps. Include
base.
1.
a.
b.
Grundfos Pumps Corp.
c.
Jacuzzi Brothers.
d.
Paco Pumps, Inc.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/8
Fire Pumps
e.
f.
g.
2.

Taco, Inc.
Driver: NEMA MG 1, open-dripproof, squirrel-cage, induction motor
complying with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70. Include wiring compatible with
controller used.
C. Controllers: UL 508; factory-assembled, -wired, and -tested, across-the-line type

for combined automatic and manual operation.
1.
a.
Cutler-Hammer.
b.
Firetrol, Inc.
c.
d.
Joslyn Clark.
e.
f.
Metron, Inc.
g.
2.
Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 2, wall-mounting type for field
electrical wiring.
a.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factoryassembled and -tested unit before shipping.
3.
Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the following:
a.
Fusible disconnect switch.
b.
Pressure switch.
c.
Hand-off-auto selector switch.
d.
Pilot light.
e.
Running period timer.
D. Accessories and Specialties: Match pressure-maintenance-pump suction and
discharge ratings as required for pump capacity rating. Include the following:
1.
Circulation relief valve.
2.
Suction and discharge pressure gages.
E. Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Characteristics and Specialty Data:
1.
Electric-Motor Driver Size: [2900] rpm, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
2.08
ALARM PANELS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -wired remote panel complying with UL 508

and requirements in NFPA 20. Include audible and visible alarms matching
controller type.
1.
a.
Cutler-Hammer.
b.
Firetrol, Inc.
c.
d.
Joslyn Clark.
e.
f.
Metron, Inc.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/9
Fire Pumps
g.
2.
3.
2.09

Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 2, remote wall-mounting type.
a.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard red paint applied to factoryassembled and -tested unit before shipping.
Features: Include manufacturer's standard features and the following:
a.
Motor-operating condition.
b.
Loss-of-line power.
c.
Phase reversal.
d.
Low-water alarm.
FLOWMETER SYSTEMS
A. Description: Fire-pump flowmeter system that indicates flow to not less than 175
percent of fire-pump rated capacity. Include sensor of size to match pipe, tubing,
flowmeter, and fittings.
1.
Approved FMG-Approved Manufacturers:
a.
Dieterich Standard Inc.
b.
Gerand Engineering Co.
c.
Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
d.
Meriam Instruments Div.; Scott Fetzer Co.
e.
Preso Meters Corporation.
f.
g.
2.
Approved UL-Listed Manufacturers:
a.
Fire Research Corp.
b.
c.
3.
Pressure Rating: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum.
4.
Sensor: Venturi, annubar probe, or orifice plate, unless otherwise
indicated.
5.
Flowmeter: Compatible with flow sensor with dial not less than 4-1/2
inches (115 mm) in diameter or manufacturer's equivalent size.
6.
Permanently Mounted Flowmeter: Suitable for wall mounting with copper
tubing to connect to flow sensor.
7.
Portable Flowmeter: With two 12-foot (3.7-m) hoses, in carrying case.
2.10
PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch- (90- to 115-mm-) diameter dial with

range of 0- to 300-psig (0- to 2070-kPa) minimum. Include caption "WATER" on
dial face.
1.
a.
b.
AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
c.
Brecco Corporation.
d.
Dresser Equipment Group; Instruments Div.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/10
Fire Pumps
e.
f.
g.
2.11
Marsh Bellofram.
WIKA Instrument Corporation.
GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement,

nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2.
Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
2.12
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect fire pumps with their controllers according to NFPA 20 for
certified shop tests.
B. Verification of Performance:
indicated.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
Rate fire pumps according to requirements
21 3000/11
Fire Pumps
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, concrete bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of fire
pumps.
B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression piping to verify actual locations of piping
connections before fire-pump installation.
corrected.
3.02
CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for fire pumps, pressuremaintenance pumps, and controllers. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common
Work Results for Fire Suppression."
1.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers
around full perimeter of base.
2.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend
through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
4.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in
Division 03.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. Install and align fire pump, pressure-maintenance pump, and controller according
to NFPA 20.
B. Install pumps and controllers to provide access for periodic maintenance
including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Set base-mounting-type pumps on concrete bases. Disconnect coupling halves
before setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been
completed.
1.
Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on
metal wedges having small taper, at points near anchor bolts, to provide
3/4- to 1-1/2-inch (19- to 38-mm) gap between pump base and concrete
base for grouting.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/12
Fire Pumps
2.
Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level.
Verify that coupling faces and pump suction and discharge flanges are
level and plumb.
D. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than diameter of firepump nozzles.
E. Install valves that are same size as piping connecting fire pumps, bypasses, test
headers, and other piping systems.
F. Install pressure gages on fire-pump suction and discharge at pressure-gage
tappings.
G. Support pumps and piping separately so weight of piping does not rest on
pumps.
H. Install fuel system according to NFPA 20.
I. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for
basic piping installation and joint construction.
J. Install water supply and drain piping for diesel-engine heat exchangers. Extend
drain piping from heat exchangers to point of disposal.
K. Install exhaust system piping for diesel engines. Extend to point of termination
outside structure. Install pipe and fittings with welded joints, and components
having flanged connections with gasketed joints.
L. Install condensate drain piping for diesel-engine exhaust system. Extend drain
piping from low points of exhaust system to condensate traps and to point of
disposal.
M. Install piping accessories, hangers and supports, anchors, valves, meters and
gages, and equipment supports.
N. Install flowmeters and sensors where indicated. Install flowmeter-system
components and make connections according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
O. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers
but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring
diagram submittals to electrical Installer.
3.04
ALIGNMENT
A. Align fire-pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been leveled on
concrete base, grout has set, and anchor bolts have been tightened.
B. After alignment is correct, tighten anchor bolts evenly. Fill baseplate completely
with grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten anchor bolts
after grout has hardened. Check alignment and make required corrections.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/13
Fire Pumps
C. Align piping connections.

D. Align pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel alignment according to
HI 1.4 and to tolerances specified by manufacturer.
E. Align vertically mounted, split-case pump and driver shafts after complete unit
has been made plumb on concrete base, grout has set, and anchor bolts have
been tightened.
3.05
CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 21 Section "WaterBased Fire-Suppression Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of
piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to pumps and equipment to allow service and
maintenance.
C. Connect water supply and discharge piping to fire pumps with flexible
connectors. Connect water supply and discharge piping to pressuremaintenance pumps with flexible connectors. Refer to Division 21 Section
"Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for flexible connectors.
D. Connect relief-valve discharge to point of disposal.
E. Connect cooling system water supply and drain piping to diesel engine heat
exchangers.
F. Connect exhaust system piping to engines.
G. Connect flowmeter-system sensors and meters according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
H. Connect controllers to pumps.
I. Connect fire-pump controllers to building fire-alarm system. Refer to Division 28
Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."
J. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
K. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
3.06

equipment installation, including connections , and to assist in field testing.
Report results in writing.
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/14
Fire Pumps
B. Perform field tests for each fire pump when installation is complete. Comply with
operating instructions and procedures in NFPA 20 to demonstrate compliance
with requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then
retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment that cannot be
satisfactorily corrected or that does not perform as indicated, then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Verify that each fire pump performs as indicated.
C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
Final Checks before Startup:
Perform the following preventivemaintenance operations and checks:
a.
Lubricate oil-lubrication-type bearings.
b.
Remove grease-lubrication-type bearing covers, flush bearings
with kerosene, and clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
c.
Disconnect coupling and check electric motor for proper rotation.
Rotation shall match direction of rotation marked on pump casing.
d.
Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or if it
drags even slightly, do not operate until cause of trouble is
determined and corrected.
3.
Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
a.
Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and
prepare pump for operation.
b.
Open sealing-liquid supply valves if pump is so fitted.
c.
Start motor.
d.
Open discharge valve slowly.
e.
Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing-liquid
valve for proper flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Do not
tighten gland immediately, but let packing run in before reducing
leakage through stuffing boxes.
f.
Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
4.
Replace damaged and
5.
Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm
drain or other acceptable location to dispose of fire-pump test water. Fire
hoses are for field-acceptance tests only and are not property of Owner.
3.07
DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire pumps, drivers, controllers, and
pressure-maintenance pumps. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and
Training."
END OF SECTION
KEO/9404
Doha, Qatar
21 3000/15
Fire Pumps

Volume 3 - Div 9 - 21 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume 3 - Div 9 - 21 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BAR

BP5 SPECIFICATION - SCHEDULE OF CHANGES

New Section Added (C0)

Section has been amended & is reissued as Revision (C1)

Electric Traction Elevators

Section has been amended & is reissued as Revision (C1)

Section has been amended & is reissued as Revision (C1)

FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

AXIAL HVAC FANS

AIR TERMINAL UNITS

HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

AIR HANDLING UNITS

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

FAN COIL UNITS

Section has been amended & is reissued as Revision (C1)

Centrifugal Water Chillers

Lighting Control System

Section has been amended & is reissued as Revision (C1)

High Voltage Switchgear (11KV)

Section has been amended & is reissued as Revision (C1)

Section has been amended & is reissued as Revision (C1)

BP5 Value Engg.

Lighting Cut Sheets

Section has been amended & is reissued as Revision (C1)

Barwa Financial District

TERRACOTTA WALL PANELS

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

POLYMER PANEL CLADDING

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

TRAFFIC SIGNS AND MARKINGS

PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS

FAADE CLEANING SYSTEMS

ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

HVAC SYSTEM GENERAL DESCRIPTION

PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING

BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

COMMON REQUIREMENT FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (SMS) SECURITY AND

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITES

*APPENDIX F SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEM NARRATIVE REPORT

A. Product Data for each type of product specified.

A. Installer: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with minimum

Gypsum Board Assemblies

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical lining system with other

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand

Gypsum Board Assemblies

A. British Gypsum Co.

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as

TILE BACKING PANELS

Gypsum Board Assemblies

Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.